Light emitting device comprising a film-based lightguide restrained by a component conducting heat from a light source

ABSTRACT

A light emitting device disclosed herein includes a light source and component thermally coupled to the component. The device further includes a lightguide formed from a film. The lightguide includes an array of strips extending from an area of the film. The array of strips is positioned adjacent the array of protruding teeth, the component thermally conducts heat from the light source, and the component at least partially restrains the film relative to the component.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.15/336,497 filed Oct. 27, 2017 entitled “Light emitting devicecomprising a film-based lightguide and reduced cladding layer at theinput surface,” which is a continuation U.S. application Ser. No.14/550,510 filed Nov. 21, 2014 entitled “Device comprising a film-basedlightguide and component with angled teeth,” which is a continuation ofU.S. application Ser. No. 13/089,308 filed Apr. 18, 2011 entitled “Lightemitting device comprising a lightguide film” which is acontinuation-in-part application of International Application No.PCT/US10/022066 filed Jan. 26, 2010, which claims the benefit of U.S.Provisional Application No. 61/147,215 entitled “Method and apparatusfor assembly of a film optical coupling mechanism” filed Jan. 26, 2009,and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/147,237 entitled “EdgeMinimization with Edge-Lit Film” filed Jan. 26, 2009; and thisapplication claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,266, entitled “Replaceable illuminated signage system for coolerdoors,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,252, entitled “Manufacturing device for ultra-low profile filmlightguide,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,269, entitled “Processing method for optical film lightguide andcoupling system,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,271, entitled “Method and apparatus for aligning lightguides in acoupling system,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,272, entitled “Center aligned lighting configuration forultra-thin LED backlight system for LCDs,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S.Provisional Application No. 61/325,275, entitled “Low profile batterypowered lightguide,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional ApplicationNo. 61/325,277, entitled “Method and apparatus for enhanced LCDbacklight,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,280, entitled “Film coupling system with light propagationmodifications,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,282, entitled “Heatsinking methods for compact film light guidesystems,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,262, entitled “Lamination method for a multi-layer opticallightguide film,” filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/325,270, entitled “Edge-enhancement for film coupling technology,”filed Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/325,265,entitled “Colored surface illumination by mixing dyes and scatteringfeatures into ink,” filed on Apr. 16, 2010; U.S. Provisional ApplicationNo. 61/347,567, entitled “Light emitting device comprising a film-basedlightguide,” filed May 24, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/363,342, entitled “Film lightguide with light redirecting elements,”filed Jul. 12, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/368,560,entitled “Light emitting device with optical redundancy,” filed Jul. 28,2010; U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/377,888, entitled “Lightemitting device comprising a lightguide film,” filed Aug. 27, 2010; U.S.Provisional Application No. 61/381,077, entitled “Light emitting devicewith externally or internally controlled output,” filed Sep. 9, 2010;U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/415,250, entitled “Light emittingdevice comprising a lightguide film and light turning optical element,”filed Nov. 18, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/425,328,entitled “Light emitting device comprising a removable and replaceablelightguide,” filed Dec. 21, 2010; U.S. Provisional Application No.61/441,871, entitled “Front illumination device comprising a film-basedlightguide,” filed Feb. 11, 2011; and U.S. Provisional Application No.61/450,711, entitled “Illumination device comprising a film-basedlightguide,” filed on Mar. 9, 2011, the entire contents of each of whichare incorporated herein by reference.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The subject matter disclosed herein generally relates to light emittingdevices such as luminous signs, light fixtures, backlights, lightemitting signs, passive displays, and active displays and theircomponents and method of manufacture.

BACKGROUND

Traditionally, in order to reduce the thickness of displays such asliquid crystal based displays, signs, and backlights, edge-litconfigurations using rigid lightguides have been used to receive lightfrom the edge and direct it out of a larger area face. These types oflight emitting devices are typically housed in relatively thick, rigidframes that do not allow for component or device flexibility and requirelong lead times for design changes. The volume of these devices remainslarge and often includes thick or large frames or bezels around thedevice. The thick lightguides (typically 2 mm and larger) limit thedesign configurations, production methods, and illumination modes.

The ability to further reduce the thickness and overall volume of thesearea light emitting devices has been limited by the ability to couplesufficient light flux into a thinner lightguide. Typical LED lightsources have a light emitting area dimension of at least 1 mm, and thereis often difficulty controlling the light entering, propagating through,and coupled out of a 2 mm lightguide to meet design requirements. Thedisplays incorporating the 2 mm lightguides are typically limited tosmall displays such as those with a 33 cm diagonal or less. Many systemsizes are thick due to designs that use large light sources and largeinput coupling optics or methods. Some systems using one lightguide perpixel (such as fiber optic based systems) require a large volume andhave low alignment tolerances. In production, thin lightguides have beenlimited to coatings on rigid wafers for integrated optical components.

SUMMARY

In one embodiment, a light emitting device includes a component having aframe and a light source thermally coupled to the component. In thisembodiment, the light emitting device further includes a lightguideformed from a film where the lightguide has an array of strips extendingfrom an area of the film, where the array of strips are positioned alongan edge of the component, and each strip of the array of strips isfolded in a fold region such that ends of the strips are stacked andpositioned to receive light from the light source. In this embodiment,the film is at least partially restrained relative to the component andthe component is a thermal transfer element that conducts heats from thelight source.

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a componentelongated with a dimension in a first direction at least twice as longas a dimension in either mutually orthogonal directions orthogonal tothe first direction and a lightguide formed from a film. The lightguidehas an array of strips extending from an area of the film. In thisembodiment, the array of strips is positioned along an edge of thecomponent, each strip of the array of strips is folded in a fold region,and a portion of the lightguide is attached to the component orrestrained by the component. Additionally, a light source is thermallycoupled to the component and positioned to emit light that propagatesinto ends of the array of strips, wherein the component is a thermaltransfer element that conducts heat from the light source.

In a further embodiment, a light emitting device includes a lightguidecomprising a linear array of strips extending from an area of a film anda component positioned adjacent the linear array of strips. In thisembodiment, a portion of the lightguide is attached to the component orrestrained by the component, and the linear array of strips are foldedin a fold region and aligned over each other to form a folded array ofstrips. Furthermore, a light emitting diode is coupled to the componentand positioned to emit light into ends of the folded array of strips,wherein the component is a thermal transfer element that conducts heatsfrom the light emitting diode.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising a light input coupler disposed on one side of a lightguide.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light input couplerwith coupling lightguides folded in the −y direction.

FIG. 3 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device withthree light input couplers on one side of a lightguide.

FIG. 4 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device withtwo light input couplers disposed on opposite sides of a lightguide.

FIG. 5 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device withtwo light input couplers disposed on the same side of a lightguidewherein the optical axes of the light sources are oriented substantiallytoward each other.

FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device with a substantially flat light input surface comprisedof flat edges of a coupling lightguide disposed to receive light from alight source.

FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device with a light input coupler with a light input surfacewith refractive and flat surface features on the light input surfacewherein light totally internal reflects on some outer surfaces similarto a hybrid refractive-TIR Fresnel lens.

FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device wherein the coupling lightguides and the light inputsurface are optically coupled to the light source.

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device wherein the coupling lightguides are held in place by asleeve and the edge surfaces are effectively planarized by an opticaladhesive or material such as a gel between the ends of the couplinglightguides and the sleeve with a flat outer surface adjacent the lightsource.

FIG. 10 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdisplay disposed adjacent a window.

FIG. 11 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice wherein the light source can be removed and replaced from thelight input coupler.

FIG. 12 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a cavity for inserting a light source and a lightcollimating optical element.

FIG. 13 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice wherein the lightguide and cartridge are removable andreplaceable.

FIG. 14A is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a lightguide region with a light receiving region anda light input coupler with a light transmitting region on a light outputoptical element.

FIG. 14B is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice in the form of a sign comprising an input coupler with alightguide.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a distributedillumination system comprising a light input coupler disposed to couplelight into a distribution lightguide.

FIG. 16A is a perspective view of one embodiment of a distributedillumination system comprising the illumination system of FIG. 15 andrepositionable cladding layers.

FIG. 16B is a perspective view of one embodiment of a distributed frontillumination system comprising a light input coupler, a distributionlightguide, repositionable cladding layers, and output couplinglightguides disposed to received light from the distribution lightguideand direct the light toward a reflective display.

FIG. 16C is a perspective view of one embodiment of a distributed backillumination system comprising a light input coupler, a distributionlightguide, repositionable cladding layers, and output couplinglightguides disposed to received light from the distribution lightguideand direct the light toward a transmissive display.

FIG. 17A is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingpoint of purchase (POP) display comprising printed indicia on a surfacelayer of the POP display and luminous indicia emitting light from thelightguide and that is visible through the surface layer of the POPdisplay.

FIG. 17B is a perspective view of one embodiment of a point of purchasedisplay comprising printed indicia on a surface layer and light emittingindicia emitting light from the first lightguide that is visible throughthe surface layer and a second input coupler comprising a light sourceand a second lightguide comprising a first light emitting region and asecond light emitting region disposed to emit light through apertures inthe POP display toward the interior region of the POP display.

FIG. 17C is a perspective view of the point of purchase display of FIG.17B further comprising products.

FIG. 17D is a perspective view of the point of purchase displaycomprising products of FIG. 17C illustrating the path of light throughthe POP display and products.

FIG. 17E is a perspective view of the product of FIG. 17C comprisingprinted indicia on the outer surface of the packaging and a stackedarray of coupling lightguides with the light input surface comprisinginput edges of the coupling lightguides disposed to receive light andtransmit it into the lightguide on the inner side of the packaging ofthe product where it is emitted due to the light extraction features inlight emitting indicia region of the lightguide through the packaging.

FIG. 17F is a perspective view of one embodiment of a product disposedto receive light from a light emitting device with a component in the −ydirection and transmit the light through a lightguide in the −xdirection.

FIG. 17G is a perspective view of one embodiment of a first product anda second product stacked upon each other disposed to receive light froma light emitting device.

FIG. 18 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising two light input couplers with light sources on the same edgein the middle region oriented in opposite directions.

FIG. 19 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising one light input coupler with coupling lightguides foldedtoward the −y direction and then folded in the +z direction toward asingle light source.

FIG. 20a is a top view of one embodiment of a backlight emitting red,green, and blue light with light input couplers disposed along threesides of the lightguide.

FIG. 20b is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device comprising a light input coupler and lightguide with areflective optical element disposed adjacent a surface.

FIG. 20c is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light output optical element optically coupled to afilm-based lightguide using an adhesive.

FIG. 20d is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light output optical element optically coupled to afilm-based lightguide using an adhesive with a reflective opticalelement disposed on the end of the light output optical element oppositethe light source.

FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device comprising a stacked array of couplinglightguides with core regions comprising vertical light turning opticaledges.

FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device comprising a stacked array of couplinglightguides with core regions comprising vertical light turning opticaledges and vertical light collimating optical edges.

FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device comprising a stacked array of couplinglightguides with a cavity and core regions comprising vertical lightturning optical edges and light collimating optical edges

FIG. 24 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice wherein the coupling lightguides are optically coupled to asurface of a lightguide.

FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device comprising a light input coupler disposed adjacent alight source with a collimating optical element.

FIG. 26 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising light coupling lightguides and a light source orientedat an angle to the x, y, and z axis.

FIG. 27 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguidecomprising an array of coupling lightguides wherein each couplinglightguide further comprises a sub-array of coupling lightguides.

FIG. 28 is a perspective top view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising the film-based lightguide of FIG. 27 wherein thecoupling lightguides are folded.

FIG. 29A is a perspective view of one embodiment of a method ofmanufacturing light input coupler comprising an array of couplinglightguides that are substantially within the same plane as thelightguide and the coupling lightguides are regions of a lighttransmitting film comprising two linear fold regions.

FIG. 29B is a perspective view of one embodiment for manufacturing aninput coupler and lightguide comprising translating one of the linearfold regions of FIG. 29A.

FIG. 29C is a perspective view of one embodiment for manufacturing aninput coupler and lightguide comprising translating one of the linearfold regions of FIG. 29B.

FIG. 29D is a perspective view of one embodiment for manufacturing aninput coupler and lightguide comprising translating one of the linearfold regions of FIG. 29C.

FIG. 29E is a perspective view of one embodiment for manufacturing aninput coupler and lightguide comprising translating one of the linearfold regions of FIG. 29D.

FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa reflective display comprising a backlight disposed between the lightmodulating pixels and the reflective element.

FIG. 31 is a top view of one embodiment of an input coupler andlightguide wherein the array of coupling lightguides has non-parallelregions.

FIG. 32 is a perspective top view of a portion of the input coupler andlightguide of FIG. 31 with the coupling lightguides folded.

FIG. 33 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light input couplerand lightguide comprising a relative position maintaining elementdisposed proximate a linear fold region.

FIG. 34 is a top view of one embodiment of a light input coupler andlightguide comprising bundles of coupling lightguides that are foldedtwice and recombined in a plane substantially parallel to the film-basedlightguide.

FIG. 35A is a top view of one embodiment of a light input coupler andlightguide comprising bundles of coupling lightguides that are foldedupwards (+z direction) and combined in a stack that is substantiallyperpendicular to the plane of the film-based lightguide.

FIG. 35B is a magnification of the region of FIG. 35A comprising theupward folds of the coupling lightguides.

FIG. 36 is a perspective view of a region of one embodiment of a lightemitting device comprising a stacked array of coupling lightguidesdisposed within an alignment cavity of a thermal transfer element.

FIG. 37 is a side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a stacked array of coupling lightguides disposedwithin an alignment guide with an extended alignment arm and analignment cavity.

FIG. 38 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice wherein the coupling lightguides are optically coupled to theedge of a lightguide.

FIG. 39 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device withan unfolded lightguide comprising fold regions.

FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the light emitting device of FIG. 39with the lightguide being folded.

FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the light emitting device of FIG. 39folded with the lightguide comprising overlapping folded regions.

FIG. 42 is an elevated view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguidecomprising a first light emitting region disposed to receive light froma first set of coupling lightguides and a second light emitting regiondisposed to receive light from a second set of coupling lightguides.

FIG. 43 is an elevated view of the film-based lightguide of FIG. 42 withthe coupling lightguides folded.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device comprising two lightguides stacked in the z direction.

FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device with a first light source and a second light sourcethermally coupled to a first thermal transfer element.

FIG. 46 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising coupling lightguides with a plurality of first reflectivesurface edges and a plurality of second reflective surface edges withineach coupling lightguide.

FIG. 47 is an enlarged perspective view of the input end of the couplinglightguides of FIG. 46.

FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional side view of the coupling lightguides andlight source of one embodiment of a light emitting device comprisingindex matching regions disposed between the core regions of the couplinglightguides.

FIG. 49 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguidecomprising an array of tapered coupling lightguides.

FIG. 50 is a perspective top view of a light emitting device of oneembodiment comprising the film-based lightguide of FIG. 49 and a lightsource.

FIG. 51 is a perspective top view of a light emitting device comprisingthe light emitting device of FIG. 50 wherein the tapered couplinglightguides and light source are folded behind the light emittingregion.

FIG. 52 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguidecomprising an array of angled, tapered coupling lightguides.

FIG. 53 is a perspective top view of a light emitting device of oneembodiment comprising the film-based lightguide of FIG. 52 with thecoupling lightguides folded and the light source not extending past thelateral sides of the film-based lightguide.

FIG. 54 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguidecomprising a first and second array of angled, tapered couplinglightguides.

FIG. 55 is a perspective top view of a light emitting device of oneembodiment comprising the film-based lightguide of FIG. 54.

FIG. 56 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising a lightguide, coupling lightguides and a curved mirror.

FIG. 57 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising a lightguide, coupling lightguides, and a curved mirror withtwo curved regions.

FIG. 58 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising a lightguide and two light input couplers comprising couplinglightguides that have been folded behind the light emitting region ofthe light emitting device.

FIG. 59 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising a lightguide with coupling lightguides on two orthogonalsides.

FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a light emittingdevice of one embodiment comprising a lightguide and a light inputcoupler wherein a low contact area cover is physically coupled to thelight input coupler.

FIG. 61 shows an enlarged portion of FIG. 60 of the region of thelightguide in contact with the low contact area cover.

FIG. 62 is a side view of a portion of a light emitting device of oneembodiment comprising a lightguide and a light input coupler protectedby a low contact area cover.

FIG. 63A is a perspective view of a portion of a film-based lightguideof one embodiment comprising coupling lightguides comprising two flangeson either side of the end region of the coupling lightguides.

FIG. 63b is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising film-based lightguide and a light reflecting opticalelement that is also a light collimating optical element and lightblocking element.

FIG. 64 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a film-basedlightguide comprising a light input coupler and lightguide comprising arelative position maintaining element disposed proximal to a linear foldregion.

FIG. 65 is a perspective view of one embodiment of relative positionmaintaining element comprising rounded angled edge surfaces.

FIG. 66 is a perspective view of one embodiment of relative positionmaintaining element comprising rounded angled edge surfaces and arounded tip.

FIG. 67 is a perspective view of a portion of a film-based lightguide ofone embodiment comprising coupling lightguides comprising two flanges oneither side of the end region of the coupling lightguides.

FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a portion of the light emitting deviceof the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 62.

FIG. 69 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device withtwo light input couplers, a first light source, and a second lightsource disposed on opposite sides of a lightguide.

FIG. 70 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a lightguide, a light input coupler, and a lightreflecting film disposed between the light input coupler and the lightemitting region.

FIG. 71 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a stack of coupling lightguides disposed to receivelight from a light collimating optical element and a light source.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional side view of the embodiment shown in FIG.71.

FIG. 73 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a stack of coupling lightguides physically coupled toa collimating optical element.

FIG. 74 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source adjacent a light turning opticalelement optically coupled to a stack of coupling lightguides.

FIG. 75A is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed adjacent a lateral edge of astack of coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges.

FIG. 75B is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed adjacent the light inputsurface edge of the extended region of a stack of coupling lightguideswith light turning optical edges.

FIG. 76 is a top of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed to couple light into two lightturning optical elements that are optically coupled to couplinglightguides using index matching adhesive.

FIG. 77 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed to couple light into abi-directional light turning optical element optically coupled to twostacks of coupling lightguides.

FIG. 78 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising two light sources disposed to couple light into abi-directional light turning optical element optically coupled to twostacks of coupling lightguides.

FIG. 79 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed to couple light into twostacks of coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges.

FIG. 80 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed to couple light into twooverlapping stacks of coupling lightguides with light turning opticaledges.

FIG. 81 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed to couple light into a stackof coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges wherein thecoupling lightguides have tabs with tab alignment holes.

FIG. 82 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed to couple light into a stackof coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges andregistration holes in a low light flux density region.

FIG. 83 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising a light source disposed to couple light into a stackof coupling lightguides with a light source overlay tab region for lightsource registration.

FIG. 84 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide comprisingcoupling lightguides with light turning optical edges.

FIG. 85 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising the lightguide of FIG. 84 with the coupling lightguidesfolded such that they extend past a lateral edge.

FIG. 86 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide comprising anon-folded coupling lightguide.

FIG. 87 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising the lightguide of FIG. 86 wherein the coupling lightguidesare folded.

FIG. 88 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide comprisingcoupling lightguides with light collimating optical edge regions andlight turning optical edge regions.

FIG. 89 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising the film-based lightguide of FIG. 88 wherein couplinglightguides are folded.

FIG. 90 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide comprisingcoupling lightguides with extended regions.

FIG. 91 is a top view of one embodiment of the lightguide of FIG. 90with the coupling lightguides folded.

FIG. 92 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide comprisingcoupling lightguides with light turning optical edges turning light intwo directions and a non-folded coupling lightguide.

FIG. 93 is a perspective top view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising the film-based lightguide of FIG. 92 with the couplinglightguides from each side grouped together.

FIG. 94A is a perspective top view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice comprising the film-based lightguide of FIG. 92 with the couplinglightguides from the sides interleaved in a stack.

FIG. 94B is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device comprising coupling lightguides with interiorlight directing edges.

FIG. 95 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguidecomprising coupling lightguides with light turning optical edgesextended in shapes inverted along a first direction.

FIG. 96 is a perspective view of a lightguide comprising an embodimentof the lightguide of FIG. 95 folded to form two stacks of couplinglightguides.

FIG. 97 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguidecomprising coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges, lightcollimating optical edges, and light source overlay tab regionscomprising alignment cavities.

FIG. 98 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting devicecomprising the film-based lightguide of FIG. 97 folded to a stack ofcoupling lightguides positioned over a light source and guided in the zdirection by an alignment guide.

FIG. 99 is a side view of the light emitting device embodiment of FIG.98 in the region near the light source.

FIG. 100 is a side view of a region of one embodiment of a lightemitting device with coupling lightguides with alignment cavities thatdo not extend to fit completely over the alignment guide.

FIG. 101 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingtransparent sign comprising a lightguide disposed adjacent a window ofan automobile.

FIG. 102 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingtransparent sign comprising a lightguide disposed adjacent a trunk doorof an automobile.

FIG. 103 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingsign comprising a light input coupler, a lightguide region, and lightemitting region comprising indicia.

FIG. 104 is an enlarged section of a light emitting region of the lightemitting sign of FIG. 103 comprising the light emitting indiciacomprising light extraction features.

FIG. 105 is a block diagram of a method of producing a device.

FIG. 106 is a perspective view of an exemplary first frame member, anexemplary second frame member, and an exemplary film sheet having filmstrips extending from a major sheet area, with these components beingassembled as shown in order to generate an exemplary illuminationdevice.

FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the first frame member, second framemember, and film sheet wherein the frame members are being urged towardeach other about the film strips to begin bending the film strips intoparallel relation.

FIG. 108 is a perspective view continuing from FIG. 107, wherein theframe members are further urged toward each other to further bend thefilm strips into parallel relation.

FIG. 109 is a perspective view continuing from FIG. 108, wherein a covermember is beginning advancement alongside the frame members and to bendthe parallel film strips into abutting stacked relationship.

FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing the illumination device of FIG.115 with the film sheet bent to situate the frame and strip stack behindthe major area the film sheet, and with the major area of the film sheetilluminating a display panel.

FIG. 111 is a perspective view of an exemplary first frame member, anexemplary second frame member, and an exemplary film sheet having amajor sheet area and an adjacent minor sheet area from which film stripsextend, with these components being assembled as shown in FIG. 112 togenerate an exemplary illumination device as in FIG. 113.

FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the first frame member, second framemember, and film sheet of FIG. 111, wherein the frame members are urgedtoward each other to bend the film strips into two arrays of parallelstrips.

FIG. 113 is a perspective view continuing from FIG. 112, showing anillumination device resulting after cover members have bent the filmstrips into abutting stacked relationship to generate a strip stack.

FIG. 114 is a top view of the frame members and as they are movedtogether into abutment, showing the relative locations of their firstmember teeth and second member teeth.

FIG. 115 is a perspective view continuing from FIG. 109, showing anillumination device resulting after the cover member has completedbending the film strips into abutting stacked relationship to generate astrip stack.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The features and other details of several embodiments will now be moreparticularly described. It will be understood that particularembodiments described herein are shown by way of illustration and not aslimitations. The principal features can be employed in variousembodiments without departing from the scope of any particularembodiment. All parts and percentages are by weight unless otherwisespecified.

Definitions

“Electroluminescent sign” is defined herein as a means for displayinginformation wherein the legend, message, image or indicia thereon isformed by or made more apparent by an electrically excitable source ofillumination. This includes illuminated cards, transparencies, pictures,printed graphics, fluorescent signs, neon signs, channel letter signs,light box signs, bus-stop signs, illuminated advertising signs, EL(electroluminescent) signs, LED signs, edge-lit signs, advertisingdisplays, liquid crystal displays, electrophoretic displays, point ofpurchase displays, directional signs, illuminated pictures, and otherinformation display signs. Electroluminescent signs can be self-luminous(emissive), back-illuminated (back-lit), front illuminated (front-lit),edge-illuminated (edge-lit), waveguide-illuminated or otherconfigurations wherein light from a light source is directed throughstatic or dynamic means for creating images or indicia.

“Optically coupled” as defined herein refers to coupling of two or moreregions or layers such that the luminance of light passing from oneregion to the other is not substantially reduced by Fresnel interfacialreflection losses due to differences in refractive indices between theregions. “Optical coupling” methods include methods of coupling whereinthe two regions coupled together have similar refractive indices orusing an optical adhesive with a refractive index substantially near orbetween the refractive index of the regions or layers. Examples of“optical coupling” include, without limitation, lamination using anindex-matched optical adhesive, coating a region or layer onto anotherregion or layer, or hot lamination using applied pressure to join two ormore layers or regions that have substantially close refractive indices.Thermal transferring is another method that can be used to opticallycouple two regions of material. Forming, altering, printing, or applyinga material on the surface of another material are other examples ofoptically coupling two materials. “Optically coupled” also includesforming, adding, or removing regions, features, or materials of a firstrefractive index within a volume of a material of a second refractiveindex such that light travels from the first material to the secondmaterial. For example, a white light scattering ink (such as titaniumdioxide in a methacrylate, vinyl, or polyurethane based binder) may beoptically coupled to a surface of a polycarbonate or silicone film byinkjet printing the ink onto the surface. Similarly, a light scatteringmaterial such as titanium dioxide in a solvent applied to a surface mayallow the light scattering material to penetrate or adhere in closephysical contact with the surface of a polycarbonate or silicone filmsuch that it is optically coupled to the film surface or volume.

“Light guide” or “waveguide” refers to a region bounded by the conditionthat light rays propagating at an angle that is larger than the criticalangle will reflect and remain within the region. In a light guide, thelight will reflect or TIR (totally internally reflect) if it the angle(a) satisfies the condition

${\alpha > {\sin^{- 1}\left( \frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}} \right)}},$

where n₁ is the refractive index of the medium inside the light guideand n₂ is the refractive index of the medium outside the light guide.Typically, n₂ is air with a refractive index of however, high and lowrefractive index materials can be used to achieve light guide regions.The light guide may comprise reflective components such as reflectivefilms, aluminized coatings, surface relief features, and othercomponents that can re-direct or reflect light. The light guide may alsocontain non-scattering regions such as substrates. Light can be incidenton a lightguide region from the sides or below and surface relieffeatures or light scattering domains, phases or elements within theregion can direct light into larger angles such that it totallyinternally reflects or into smaller angles such that the light escapesthe light guide. The light guide does not need to be optically coupledto all of its components to be considered as a light guide. Light mayenter from any face (or interfacial refractive index boundary) of thewaveguide region and may totally internally reflect from the same oranother refractive index interfacial boundary. A region can befunctional as a waveguide or lightguide for purposes illustrated hereinas long as the thickness is larger than the wavelength of light ofinterest. For example, a light guide may be a 5 micron region or layerof a film or it may be a 3 millimeter sheet comprising a lighttransmitting polymer.

“In contact” and “disposed on” are used generally to describe that twoitems are adjacent one another such that the whole item can function asdesired. This may mean that additional materials can be present betweenthe adjacent items, as long as the item can function as desired.

A “film” as used herein refers to a thin extended region, membrane, orlayer of material.

A “bend” as used herein refers to a deformation or transformation inshape by the movement of a first region of an element relative to asecond region, for example. Examples of bends include the bending of aclothes rod when heavy clothes are hung on the rod or rolling up a paperdocument to fit it into a cylindrical mailing tube. A “fold” as usedherein is a type of bend and refers to the bend or lay of one region ofan element onto a second region such that the first region covers atleast a portion of the second region. An example of a fold includesbending a letter and forming creases to place it in an envelope. A folddoes not require that all regions of the element overlap. A bend or foldmay be a change in the direction along a first direction along a surfaceof the object. A fold or bend may or may not have creases and the bendor fold may occur in one or more directions or planes such as 90 degreesor 45 degrees. A bend or fold may be lateral, vertical, torsional, or acombination thereof.

Light Emitting Device

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first lightsource, a light input coupler, a light mixing region, and a lightguidecomprising a light emitting region with a light extraction feature. Inone embodiment, the first light source has a first light source emittingsurface, the light input coupler comprises an input surface disposed toreceive light from the first light source and transmit the light throughthe light input coupler by total internal reflection through a pluralityof coupling lightguides. In this embodiment, light exiting the couplinglightguides is re-combined and mixed in a light mixing region anddirected through total internal reflection within a lightguide orlightguide region. Within the lightguide, a portion of incident light isdirected within the light extracting region by light extracting featuresinto a condition whereupon the angle of light is less than the criticalangle for the lightguide and the directed light exits the lightguidethrough the lightguide light emitting surface.

In a further embodiment, the lightguide is a film with light extractingfeatures below a light emitting device output surface within the filmand film is separated into coupling lightguide strips which are foldedsuch that they form a light input coupler with a first input surfaceformed by the collection of edges of the coupling lightguides.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device has an optical axis definedherein as the direction of peak luminous intensity for light emittingfrom the light emitting surface or region of the device for devices withoutput profiles with one peak. For optical output profiles with morethan one peak and the output is symmetrical about an axis, such as witha “batwing” type profile, the optical axis of the light emitting deviceis the axis of symmetry of the light output. In light emitting deviceswith angular luminous intensity optical output profiles with more thanone peak which are not symmetrical about an axis, the light emittingdevice optical axis is the angular weighted average of the luminousintensity output. For non-planar output surfaces, the light emittingdevice optical axis is evaluated in two orthogonal output planes and maybe a constant direction in a first output plane and at a varying anglein a second output plane orthogonal to the first output plane. Forexample, light emitting from a cylindrical light emitting surface mayhave a peak angular luminous intensity (thus light emitting deviceoptical axis) in a light output plane that does not comprise the curvedoutput surface profile and the angle of luminous intensity could besubstantially constant about a rotational axis around the cylindricalsurface in an output plane comprising the curved surface profile, andthus the peak angular intensity is a range of angles. When the lightemitting device has a light emitting device optical axis in a range ofangles, the optical axis of the light emitting device comprises therange of angles or an angle chosen within the range. The optical axis ofa lens or element is the direction of which there is some degree ofrotational symmetry in at least one plane and as used herein correspondsto the mechanical axis. The optical axis of the region, surface, area,or collection of lenses or elements may differ from the optical axis ofthe lens or element, and as used herein is dependent on the incidentlight angular and spatial profile, such as in the case of off-axisillumination of a lens or element.

Light Input Coupler

In one embodiment, a light input coupler comprises a plurality ofcoupling lightguides disposed to receive light emitting from lightsource and channel the light into a lightguide. In one embodiment, theplurality of coupling lightguides are strips cut from a lightguide filmsuch that they remain un-cut on at least one edge but can be rotated orpositioned (or translated) substantially independently from thelightguide to couple light through at least one edge or surface of thestrip. In another embodiment, the plurality of coupling lightguides arenot cut from the lightguide film and are separately optically coupled tothe light source and the lightguide. In one embodiment, the light inputcoupler comprises at least one light source optically coupled to thecoupling lightguides which join together in a light mixing region. Inanother embodiment, the light input coupler is a collection of stripsections cut from a region film which are arranged in a grouping suchthat light may enter through the edge of a grouping or arrangement ofstrips. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises alight input coupler comprising a core region of a core material and acladding region or cladding layer of a cladding material on at least oneface or edge of the core material with a refractive index less than thecore material. In other embodiment, the light input coupler comprises aplurality of coupling lightguides wherein a portion of light from alight source incident on the face of at least one strip is directed intothe lightguide such that it propagates in a waveguide condition. Thelight input coupler may also comprise at least one selected from thegroup: a strip folding device, a strip holding element, and an inputsurface optical element.

Light Source

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises at least one lightsource selected from a group: fluorescent lamp, cylindrical cold-cathodefluorescent lamp, flat fluorescent lamp, light emitting diode, organiclight emitting diode, field emissive lamp, gas discharge lamp, neonlamp, filament lamp, incandescent lamp, electroluminescent lamp,radiofluorescent lamp, halogen lamp, incandescent lamp, mercury vaporlamp, sodium vapor lamp, high pressure sodium lamp, metal halide lamp,tungsten lamp, carbon arc lamp, electroluminescent lamp, laser, photonicbandgap based light source, quantum dot based light source, highefficiency plasma light source, microplasma lamp. The light emittingdevice may comprise a plurality of light sources arranged in an array,on opposite sides of lightguide, on orthogonal sides of a lightguide, on3 or more sides of a lightguide, or on 4 sides of a substantially planerlightguide. The array of light sources may be a linear array withdiscrete LED packages comprises at least one LED die. In anotherembodiment, a light emitting device comprises a plurality of lightsources within one package disposed to emit light toward a light inputsurface. In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, or more than 10 light sources. In another embodiment,the light emitting device comprises an organic light emitting diodedisposed to emit light as a light emitting film or sheet. In anotherembodiment, the light emitting device comprises an organic lightemitting diode disposed to emit light into a lightguide.

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises at least onebroadband light source that emits light in a wavelength spectrum largerthan 100 nanometers. In another embodiment, a light emitting devicecomprises at least one narrowband light source that emits light in anarrow bandwidth less than 100 nanometers. In another embodiment, alight emitting device comprises at least one broadband light source thatemits light in a wavelength spectrum larger than 100 nanometers or atleast one narrowband light source that emits light in a narrow bandwidthless than 100 nanometers. In one embodiment a light emitting devicecomprises at least one narrowband light source with a peak wavelengthwithin a range selected from the group: 300 nm-350 nm, 350 nm-400 nm,400 nm-450 nm, 450 nm-500 nm, 500 nm-550 nm, 550 nm-600 nm, 600 nm-650nm, 650 nm-700 nm, 700 nm-750 nm, 750 nm-800 nm, and 800 nm-1200 nm. Thelight sources may be chosen to match the spectral qualities of red,green and blue such that collectively when used in a light emittingdevice used as a display, the color gamut area is at least one selectedfrom the group: 70% NTSC, 80% NTSC, 90% NTSC, 100% NTSC, and 60%, 70%,80%, 90%, and 95% of the visible CIE u′ v′ color gamut of a standardviewer. In one embodiment, at least one light source is a white LEDpackage comprising a red, green, and blue LED.

In another embodiment, at least two light sources with different colorsare disposed to couple light into the lightguide through at least onelight input coupler. In another embodiment, a light emitting devicecomprises at least three light input couplers, at least three lightsources with different colors (red, green and blue for example) and atleast three lightguides. In another embodiment, a light source furthercomprises at least one selected from the group: reflective optic,reflector, reflector cup, collimator, primary optic, secondary optic,collimating lens, compound parabolic collimator, lens, reflective regionand input coupling optic. The light source may also comprise an opticalpath folding optic such as a curved reflector that can enable the lightsource (and possibly heat-sink) to be oriented along a different edge ofthe light emitting device. The light source may also comprise a photonicbandgap structure, nano-structure or other three-dimensional arrangementthat provides light output with an angular FWHM less than one selectedfrom the group: 120 degrees, 100 degrees, 80 degrees, 60 degrees, 40degrees, and 20 degrees.

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light sourceemitting light in an angular full-width at half maximum intensity ofless than one selected from 150 degrees, 120 degrees, 100 degrees, 80degrees, 70 degrees, 60 degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20degrees, and 10 degrees. In another embodiment, the light source furthercomprises at least one selected from the group: a primary optic,secondary optic, and photonic bandgap region and the angular full-widthat half maximum intensity of the light source is less than one selectedfrom 150 degrees, 120 degrees, 100 degrees, 80 degrees, 70 degrees, 60degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, and 10 degrees.

LED Array

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a plurality ofLEDs or LED packages wherein the plurality of LEDs or LED packagescomprises an array of LEDs. The array components (LEDs or electricalcomponents) may be physically (and/or electrically) coupled to a singlecircuit board or they may be coupled to a plurality of circuit boardsthat may or may not be directly physically coupled (i.e. such as not onthe same circuit board). In one embodiment, the array of LEDs is anarray comprising at least two selected from the group: red, green, blue,and white LEDs. In this embodiment, the variation in the white point dueto manufacturing or component variations can be reduced. In anotherembodiment, the LED array comprises at least one cool white LED and onered LED. In this embodiment, the CRI, or Color Rendering Index, ishigher than the cool white LED illumination alone. In one embodiment,the CRI of at least one selected from the group: a light emittingregion, the light emitting surface, light fixture, light emittingdevice, display driven in a white mode comprising the light emittingdevice, and sign is greater than one selected from the group: 70, 75,80, 85, 90, 95, and 99. In another embodiment, the NIST Color QualityScale (CQS) of at least one selected from the group: a light emittingregion, the light emitting surface, light fixture, light emittingdevice, display driven in a white mode comprising the light emittingdevice, or sign is greater than one selected from the group: 70, 75, 80,85, 90, 95, and 99. In another embodiment, a display comprising thelight emitting device has a color gamut greater than 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%,95%, 100%, 105%, 110%, 120%, and 130% that of the NTSC standard. Inanother embodiment, the LED array comprises white, green, and red LEDs.In another embodiment, the LED array comprises at least one green andblue LED and two types of red LEDs with one type having a lower luminousefficacy or a lower wavelength than the other type of red LED. As usedherein, the white LED may be a phosphor converted blue LED or a phosphorconverted UV LED.

In another embodiment, the input array of LEDs can be arranged tocompensate for uneven absorption of light through longer verses shorterlightguides. In another embodiment, the absorption is compensated for bydirecting more light into the light input coupler corresponding to thelonger coupling lightguides or longer lightguides. In anotherembodiment, light within a first wavelength band is absorbed within thelightguide more than light within a second wavelength band and a firstratio of the radiant light flux coupled into the light input couplerwithin the first wavelength band divided by the radiant light fluxcoupled into the light input coupler within the second wavelength bandis greater than a second ratio of the radiant light flux emitted fromthe light emitting region within the first wavelength band divided bythe radiant light flux emitted from the light emitting region within thesecond wavelength band.

Laser

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises one or morelasers disposed to couple light into one or more light input couplers orthe surface of one or more coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, thedivergence of one or more light sources is less than one selected fromthe group: 20 milliradians, 10 milliradians, 5 milliradians, 3milliradians, and 2 milliradians. In another embodiment, the lightmixing region comprises a light scattering or light reflecting regionthat increases the angular FWHM of the light from one or more laserswithin the light mixing region before entering into the light emittingregion of the lightguide or light emitting surface region of the lightemitting device. In a further embodiment, the light scattering regionwithin the light mixing region is a volumetric or surface lightscattering region with an angular FWHM of transmitted light less thanone selected from the group: 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20degrees, 10 degrees, 5 degrees, and 2 degrees when measured normal tothe large area surface of the film in the region with a 532 nm laserdiode with a divergence less than 5 milliradians. In a furtherembodiment, the haze of the diffuser in the light mixing region is lessthan one selected from the group: 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, and 2%when measured normal to the large area surface of the film (such asparallel to the light emitting surface).

Color Tuning

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises two or more lightsources and the relative output of the two light sources is adjusted toachieve a desired color in a light emitting region of the lightguide oran area of light output on the light emitting device comprising aplurality of lightguides overlapping in the region. For example, in oneembodiment, the light emitting device comprises a red, green, and blueLED disposed to couple light into the light input surface of a stack ofcoupling lightguides. The light mixes within the lightguide and isoutput in a light emitting region of the lightguide. By turning on thered and blue LEDs, for example, one can achieve a purple colored lightemitting region. In another embodiment, the relative light output of thelight sources is adjusted to compensate for the non-uniform spectralabsorption in an optical element of the light emitting device. Forexample, in one embodiment, the output of the blue LED in milliwatts isincreased to a level more than the red output in milliwatts in order tocompensate for more blue light absorption in a lightguide (or blue lightscattering) such that the light emitting region has a substantiallywhite light output in a particular region.

LED Array Location

In one embodiment, a plurality of LED arrays are disposed to couplelight into a single light input coupler or more than one light inputcoupler. In a further embodiment, a plurality of LEDs disposed on acircuit board are disposed to couple light into a plurality of lightinput couplers that direct light toward a plurality of sides of a lightemitting device comprising a light emitting region. In a furtherembodiment, a light emitting device comprises an LED array and lightinput coupler folded behind the light emitting region of the lightemitting device such that the LED array and light input coupler are notvisible when viewing the center of the light emitting region at an angleperpendicular to the surface. In another embodiment, a light emittingdevice comprises a single LED array disposed to couple light into atleast one light input coupler disposed to direct light into the lightemitting region from the bottom region of a light emitting device. Inone embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first LED array anda second LED array disposed to couple light into a first light inputcoupler and a second light input coupler, respectively, wherein thefirst light input coupler and second light input coupler are disposed todirect light into the light emitting region from the top region andbottom region, respectively, of a light emitting device. In a furtherembodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first LED array, asecond LED array, and a third LED array, disposed to couple light into afirst light input coupler, a second light input coupler, and a thirdlight input coupler, respectively, disposed to direct light into thelight emitting region from the bottom region, left region, and rightregion, respectively, of a light emitting device. In another embodiment,a light emitting device comprises a first LED array, a second LED array,a third LED array, and a fourth LED array, disposed to couple light intoa first light input coupler, a second light input coupler, a third lightinput coupler, and a fourth light input coupler, respectively, disposedto direct light into the light emitting region from the bottom region,left region, right region, and top region, respectively, of a lightemitting device.

Wavelength Conversion Material

In another embodiment, the LED is a blue or ultraviolet LED combinedwith a phosphor. In another embodiment, a light emitting devicecomprises a light source with a first activating energy and a wavelengthconversion material which converts a first portion of the firstactivating energy into a second wavelength different than the first. Inanother embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least onewavelength conversion material selected from the group: a fluorophore,phosphor, a fluorescent dye, an inorganic phosphor, photonic bandgapmaterial, a quantum dot material, a fluorescent protein, a fusionprotein, a fluorophores attached to protein to specific functionalgroups (such as amino groups (active ester, carboxylate, isothiocyanate,hydrazine), carboxyl groups (carbodiimide), thiol (maleimide, acetylbromide), azide (via click chemistry or non-specifically(glutaraldehyde))), quantum dot fluorophores, small moleculefluorophores, aromatic fluorophores, conjugated fluorophores, afluorescent dye, and other wavelength conversion material.

In one embodiment, the light source comprises a semiconductor lightemitter such as an LED and a wavelength conversion material thatconverts a portion of the light from the emitter to a shorter or longerwavelength. In another embodiment, at least one selected from the group:light input coupler, cladding region, coupling lightguide, input surfaceoptic, coupling optic, light mixing region, lightguide, light extractionfeature or region, and light emitting surface comprises a wavelengthconversion material.

Dynamic Light Emitting Effects

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light sourceand a controller wherein the light is turned off and on in a flashingmanner. The delay between the on to off transition and the delay betweenthe off to on transition may be constant, variable, or equal to eachother. For example, in one embodiment, a light emitting sign comprises alightguide with light emitting indicia in the form of “OPEN” thatflashes off for 1 second and then back on for 10 seconds beforerepeating the cycle. In another embodiment, the light emitting devicecomprises a first and second light source wherein by sequentiallyturning on the first light source and then the second light source, adynamic sign effect is achieved. In another embodiment, the light outputof one or more light sources is slowly decreased or increased such thata gradual fade-off or fade-on effect is achieved. The light sources maybe disposed in the same or different light input couplers orlightguides. For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting devicecomprises a red LED light source disposed to couple light into a firstset of coupling lightguides and a blue LED light source disposed tocouple light into a second set of coupling lightguides. By switching thelights on and off in an alternating fashion, a dynamic sign effect canbe achieved (to attract attention for example). In another example, inone embodiment, a light emitting device comprises three lightguides andthree light input couplers disposed to receive light from three whitelight sources. The light extraction features on the three differentlightguides form three different images suggesting movement of theimages. In this embodiment, by cycling through the three white LEDs, theimages will sequentially illuminate and suggest motion. In anotherembodiment, the relative output of two or more light sources in a lightemitting device are adjusted such that the color, luminance, or both arechanged in one or more light emitting regions. For example, in oneembodiment, the light emitting device comprises a red, green, and blueLED disposed to couple light into a stack of coupling lightguides suchthat the light propagates through the coupling lightguides, mixes withinthe coupling lightguides, mixes within a light mixing region andlightguide region and is output in a light emitting region in the formof indicia. By changing the relative output of LEDs, the color of thelight emitting indicia will change and can be used to draw attention orprovide instructive or other dynamic effects. In another embodiment, alight emitting device comprises a first lightguide and second lightguidedisposed to receive light from a first and second light source,respectively, through two different optical paths wherein the first andsecond light source are different colors and the light emitting regionsof the first and second lightguides comprise an overlap region whereincombined light emitted from both regions exits the light emitting devicefrom the same light emitting overlap region in a color different thanthe color of the first or second light sources. For example, in oneembodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first lightguide with awhite light LED disposed to couple light through coupling lightguidesinto the first lightguide such that light is emitted from the lightguidedisplaying the indicia “SALE”. The light emitting device of the previousembodiment further comprises a blue LED disposed to couple light into adifferent set of coupling lightguides and into a second lightguidelaminated to the first lightguide with an overlapping and aligned lightemitting region also displaying the indicia “SALE”. In this embodiment,by increasing the blue LED light output, the color of the indicia “SALE”may transition from white to bluish white or pale blue color. Also, forexample, in this embodiment, the output of the blue light source may beincreased to compensate for blue light absorption and/or scattering fromthe core lightguide material. In another embodiment, for example, twodifferently shaped light emitting regions on two lightguides disposed toreceive light from two different colored light sources emit light indifferent colors such that the combination or separate regions havedifferent visible colors. In another embodiment, the light emittingdevice comprises two or more lightguides disposed to receive light fromtwo or more light sources and the lightguides are sequentiallyilluminated by the light sources such that a dynamic effect is achieved.For example, a first, second, and third lightguide comprise lightextraction regions spatially separated and the lightguides aresequentially illuminated with light from three white LEDs and thedisplay appears to show snow moving down the display. In anotherembodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first lightguide andsecond lightguide disposed to receive light from a first and secondlight source through two different optical paths, respectively, whereinthe first and second light source are different colors and the lightemitting regions of the first and second lightguides comprise an overlapregion wherein light emitted from both regions exits the light emittingdevice from the same light emitting overlap region, and when the firstand second light sources are emitting light, the light emitting deviceemits light in the overlap region of a color different than the color ofthe first or second light sources and emits light in a non-overlapregion of the first color. For example, in one embodiment, onelightguide may comprise a lightguide comprising a large red square lightemitting region illuminated by a red LED and a second lightguidecomprises a blue light emitting region in the form of the text “SALE”centered in region above the red light emitting square region such thatwhen the blue LED is turned on a purple “SALE” indicia is seen centeredwithin the red square.

Light Input Coupler Input Surface

In one embodiment, a film-based lightguide comprises an array ofcoupling lightguides and the film comprises bounding edges along itsperiphery. In one embodiment, the light input coupler comprises acollection of coupling lightguides with a plurality of bounding edgesforming a light coupler input surface. In one embodiment, the lightinput coupler comprises a collection of coupling lightguides with aplurality of edges forming a light coupler input surface. In anotherembodiment, an optical element is disposed between the light source andat least one coupling lightguide wherein the optical element receiveslight from the light source through a light coupler input surface. Insome embodiments, the input surface is substantially polished, flat, oroptically smooth such that light does not scatter forwards or backwardsfrom pits, protrusions or other rough surface features. In someembodiments, an optical element is disposed to between the light sourceand at least one coupling lightguide to provide light redirection as aninput surface (when optically coupled to at least one couplinglightguide) or as an optical element separate or optically coupled to atleast one coupling lightguide such that more light is redirected intothe lightguide at angles greater than the critical angle within thelightguide than would be the case without the optical element or with aflat input surface. In another embodiment, the input surface is curvedto refract light more light received from the light source into angleswithin the lightguide greater than the critical angle within thelightguide than would occur with a flat input surface. In anotherembodiment, the optical element comprises radial or linear Fresnel lensfeatures which refract incident light. In another embodiment, theoptical element comprises a refractive-TIR hybrid Fresnel lens (such asone having a low F/# of less than 1.5). In a further embodiment, theoptical element is a reflective and refractive optical element. In oneembodiment, the light input surface may be formed by machine, cutting,polishing, forming, molding, or otherwise removing or adding material tothe lightguide couplers to create a smooth, curved, rounded, concave,convex, rigged, grooved, micro-structured, nano-structured, orpredetermined surface shape. In another embodiment, the light inputcoupler comprises an optical element designed to collect light from thelight source and increase the uniformity. Such optical elements caninclude fly's eye lenses, microlens arrays, integral lenses, lenticularlenses holographic or other diffusing elements with micro-scale featuresor nano-scale features independent of how they were formed. In anotherembodiment, the light input coupler is optically coupled to at least onelightguide and at least one light source. In another embodiment, theoptical element is at least one selected from the group: diffractiveelement, holographic element, lenticular element, lens, planar window,refractive element, reflective element, waveguide coupling element,anti-reflection coated element, planar element, and formed portion orregion of at least one selected from the group: coupling lightguide,optical adhesive, UV cured adhesive, and pressure sensitive adhesive.The light coupler or an element therein may be comprised of at least onelight transmitting material. In another embodiment, an element of thelight input coupler or the light input window, lens or surface is asilicone material wherein the ASTM D1003 version 07e1 luminoustransmittance change due to exposure to 150 degrees centigrade for 200hours is less than one selected from the group: 0.5%, 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%,and 5%. In another embodiment, the input surface of the couplinglightguides, the coupling lightguides, or the window optically coupledto the input surface is optically coupled using a light transmittingoptical adhesive to an optical window, a light source, the outer surfaceof an LED, a light collimating optical element, a light redirectingoptical element, a light turning optical element, an intermediate lens,or a light transmitting optical element.

When light propagating in air is incident to a planar light inputsurface of a light transmitting material with a refractive index higherthan 1.3 at high angles from the normal to the interface, for example,much of the light is reflected from the air-input surface interface. Onemethod of reducing the loss of light due to reflection is to opticallycouple the input surface of the light input coupler to the light source.Another method to reduce this loss is to use a collimation optic oroptic that directs some of the light output from the light source intoangles closer to the optical axis of the light source. The collimatingoptic, or optical element, may be optically coupled to the light source,the coupling lightguides, an adhesive, or other optical element suchthat it directs more light into the coupling lightguides into a totalinternal reflection condition within the coupling lightguides. Inanother embodiment, the light input surface comprises a recessed cavityor concave region such that the percentage of light from a light sourcedisposed adjacent to the cavity or concave region that is reflected fromthe input surface is less than one selected from the group: 40%, 30%,20%, 10%, 5%, 3%, and 2%.

In another embodiment, the total input area ratio, defined as the totalarea of the input surface of all of the light input couplers of thelight emitting device receiving more than 5% of the total light fluxfrom any light source divided by the total light emitting surface areasof the light sources is greater than one selected from the group: 0.9,1, 1.5, 2, 4, and 5. In another embodiment, the individual input arearatio, defined as the area of the input surface of a light input couplerof the light emitting device receiving more than 5% of the total lightflux received from a light source divided by the light emitting surfacearea of the light source is greater than one selected from the group:0.9, 1, 1.5, 2, 4, and 5. The individual input area ratios of a lightemitting device may vary for different input couplers and the individualinput area ratio for a particular input coupler may be greater or lessthan the total input area ratio.

Input Surface Position Relative to Light Source

In one embodiment, the distance between the outer surface of the lightsource and the input surface of the light input coupler is less than oneselected from the group: 3 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter, 0.5millimeters, and 0.25 millimeters over a time period between just beforepowering on the light source and the time for a substantiallysteady-state junction temperature of the light source at a maintainedambient temperature for the light emitting device of 20 degrees Celsius.

In one embodiment, an elastic object used to store mechanical energy isdisposed to force the outer surface of the light source to be in contactor a predetermined distance from the input surface of the light inputcoupler. In one embodiment, the elastic object is one selected from thegroup: tension spring, extension spring, compression spring, torsionspring, wire spring, coiled spring, flat spring, cantilever spring, coilspring, helical spring, conical spring, compression spring, volutespring, hairspring, balance spring, leaf spring, V-spring, Bellevillewasher, Belleville spring, constant-force spring, gas spring,mainspring, rubber band, spring washer, a torsion bar twisted underload, torsion spring, negator spring, and wave spring. In oneembodiment, the elastic object is disposed between the light source orLED array and the housing or other element such as a thermal transferelement such that a force is exerted against the light source or LEDarray such that the relative distance between the outer light emittingsurface of the light source or LED array and the input surface of thelight input coupler remains within 0.5 millimeters of a fixed distanceover a time period between just before powering on the light source andthe time for a substantially steady-state junction temperature of thelight source at a maintained ambient temperature for the light emittingdevice of 20 degrees Celsius.

In a further embodiment, a spacer comprises a physical element thatsubstantially maintains the minimum separation distance of at least onelight source and at least one input surface of at least one light inputcoupler. In one embodiment, the spacer is one selected from the group: acomponent of the light source, a region of a film (such as a whitereflective film or low contact area cover film), a component of an LEDarray (such as a plastic protrusion), a component of the housing, acomponent of a thermal transfer element, a component of the holder, acomponent of the relative position maintaining element, a component ofthe light input surface, a component physically coupled to the lightinput coupler, light input surface, at least one coupling lightguide,window for the coupling lightguide, lightguide, housing or othercomponent of the light emitting device.

In a further embodiment, at least one selected from the group: film,lightguide, light mixing region, light input coupler, and couplinglightguide comprises a relative position maintaining mechanism thatmaintains the relative distance between the outer light emitting surfaceof the light source or LED array and the input surface of the lightinput coupler remains within 0.5 millimeters of a fixed distance over atime period between just before powering on the light source and thetime for a substantially steady-state junction temperature of the lightsource at a maintained ambient temperature for the light emitting deviceof 20 degrees Celsius. In one embodiment, the relative positionmaintaining mechanism is a hole in the lightguide and a pin in acomponent (such as a thermal transfer element) physically coupled to thelight source. For example, pins in a thin aluminum sheet thermaltransfer element physically coupled to the light source are registeredinto holes within the light input coupler (or a component of the lightinput coupler such as a coupling lightguide) to maintain the distancebetween the input surface of the light input coupler and the lightemitting surface of the light source. In another embodiment, therelative position maintaining mechanism is a guide device.

Stacked Strips or Segments of Film Forming a Light Input Coupler

In one embodiment, the light input coupler is region of a film thatcomprises the lightguide and the light input coupler which comprisesstrip sections of the film which form coupling lightguides that aregrouped together to form a light coupler input surface. The couplinglightguides may be grouped together such the edges opposite thelightguide region are brought together to form an input surfacecomprising of their thin edges. A planar input surface for a light inputcoupler can provide beneficial refraction to redirect a portion of theinput light from the surface into angles such that it propagates atangles greater than the critical angle for the lightguide. In anotherembodiment, a substantially planar light transmitting element isoptically coupled to the grouped edges of coupling lightguides. One ormore of the edges of the coupling lightguides may be polished, melted,adhered with an optical adhesive, solvent welded, or otherwise opticallycoupled along a region of the edge surface such that the surface issubstantially polished, smooth, flat, or substantially planarized. Thispolishing can aide to reduce light scattering, reflecting, or refractioninto angles less than the critical angle within the coupling lightguidesor backwards toward the light source. The light input surface maycomprise a surface of the optical element, the surface of an adhesive,the surface of more than one optical element, the surface of the edge ofone or more coupling lightguides, or a combination of one or more of theaforementioned surfaces. The light input coupler may also comprise anoptical element that has an opening or window wherein a portion of lightfrom a light source may directly pass into the coupling lightguideswithout passing through the optical element. The light input coupler oran element or region therein may also comprise a cladding material orregion.

In another embodiment, the cladding layer is formed in a materialwherein under at least one selected from the group: heat, pressure,solvent, and electromagnetic radiation, a portion of the cladding layermay be removed. In one embodiment, the cladding layer has a glasstransition temperature less than the core region and pressure applied tothe coupling lightguides near the light input edges reduces the totalthickness of the cladding to less than one selected from the group: 10%,20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 90% of the thickness of the cladding regionsbefore the pressure is applied. In another embodiment, the claddinglayer has a glass transition temperature less than the core region andheat and pressure applied to the coupling lightguides near the lightinput edges reduces the total thickness of the cladding regions to lessthan one selected from the group: 10%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 90% of thethickness of the cladding regions before the heat and pressure isapplied. In another embodiment, a pressure sensitive adhesives functionsas a cladding layer and the coupling lightguides are folded such thatthe pressure sensitive adhesive or component on one or both sides of thecoupling lightguides holds the coupling lightguides together and atleast 10% of the thickness of the pressure sensitive adhesive is removedfrom the light input surface by applying heat and pressure.

Guide Device for Coupling the Light Source to the Light Input Surface ofthe Light Input Coupler

The light input coupler may also comprise a guide that comprises amechanical, electrical, manual, guided, or other system or component tofacility the alignment of the light source in relation to the lightinput surface. The guide device may comprise an opening or window andmay physically or optically couple together one or more selected fromthe group: light source (or component physically attached to a lightsource), a light input coupler, coupling lightguide, housing, andelectrical, thermal, or mechanical element of the light emitting device.In one embodiment of this device an optical element comprises one ormore guides disposed to physically couple or align the light source(such as an LED strip) to the optical element or coupling lightguides.In another embodiment, the optical element comprises one or more guideregions disposed to physically couple or align the optical element tothe light input surface of the input coupler. The guide may comprise agroove and ridge, hole and pin, male and corresponding female component,or a fastener. In one embodiment, the guide comprises a fastenerselected from the group: a batten, button, clamp, clasp, clip, clutch(pin fastener), flange, grommet, anchor, nail, pin, peg, clevis pin,cotter pin, linchpin, R-clip, retaining ring, circlip retaining ring,e-ring retaining ring, rivet, screw anchor, snap, staple, stitch, strap,tack, threaded fastener, captive threaded fasteners (nut, screw, stud,threaded insert, threaded rod), tie, toggle, hook-and-loop strips, wedgeanchor, and zipper. In another embodiment, one or more guide regions aredisposed to physically couple or align one or more films, film segments(such as coupling lightguides), thermal transfer elements, housing orother components of the light emitting device together.

Light Redirecting Optical Element

In one embodiment, a light redirecting optical element is disposed toreceive light from at least one light source and redirect the light intoa plurality of coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the lightredirecting optical element is at least one selected from the group:secondary optic, mirrored element or surface, reflective film such asaluminized Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET) film, giant birefringentoptical films such as Vikuiti™ Enhanced Specular Reflector Film by 3MInc., curved mirror, totally internally reflecting element,beamsplitter, and dichroic reflecting mirror or film.

In another embodiment, a first portion of light from a light source witha first wavelength spectrum is directed by reflection by a wavelengthselective reflecting element (such as a dichroic filter) into aplurality of coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, a firstportion of light from a light source with a first wavelength spectrum isdirected by reflection by a wavelength selective reflecting element(such as a dichroic filter) into a plurality of coupling lightguides anda second portion of light from a second light source with a secondwavelength spectrum is transmitted through the wavelength selectivereflecting element into the plurality of coupling lightguides. Forexample, in one embodiment, a red light from an LED emitting red lightis reflected by a first dichroic filter oriented at 45 degrees andreflects light into a set of coupling lightguides. Green light from anLED emitting green light is reflected by a second dichroic filteroriented at 45 degrees and passes through the first dichroic filter intothe set of coupling lightguides. Blue light from a blue LED is directedtoward and passes through the first and second dichroic filters into thecoupling lightguides. Other combinations of light coupling or combiningthe output from multiple light sources into an input surface or apertureare known in the field of projection engine design and include methodsfor combining light output from color LEDs onto an aperture such as amicrodisplay. These techniques may be readily adapted to embodimentswherein the microdisplay or spatial light modulator is replaced by theinput surface of coupling lightguides.

Light Collimating Optical Element

In one embodiment, the light input coupler comprises a light collimatingoptical element. A light collimating optical element receives light fromthe light source with a first angular full-width at half maximumintensity within at least one input plane and redirects a portion of theincident light from the light source such that the angular full-width athalf maximum intensity of the light is reduced in the first input plane.In one embodiment, the light collimating optical element is one or moreof the following: a light source primary optic, a light source secondaryoptic, a light input surface, and an optical element disposed betweenthe light source and at least one coupling lightguide. In anotherembodiment, the light collimating element is one or more of thefollowing: an injection molded optical lens, a thermoformed opticallens, and a cross-linked lens made from a mold. In another embodiment,the light collimating element reduces the angular full-width at halfmaximum (FWHM) intensity within the input plane and a plane orthogonalto the input plane.

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light inputcoupler and a film-based lightguide. In one embodiment the light inputcoupler comprises a light source and a light collimating optical elementdisposed to receive light from one or more light sources and providelight output in a first output plane, second output plane orthogonal tothe first plane, or in both output planes with an angular full-width athalf maximum intensity in air less than one selected from the group: 60degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, and 10 degrees from theoptical axis of the light exiting the light collimating optical element.

In one embodiment, the collimation or reduction in angular FWHMintensity of the light from the light collimating element issubstantially symmetric about the optical axis. In one embodiment, thelight collimating optical element receives light from a light sourcewith a substantially symmetric angular FWHM intensity about the opticalaxis greater than one selected from the group: 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100,110, 120, and 130 degrees and provides output light with an angular FWHMintensity less than one selected from the group: 60, 50, 40, 30, and 20degrees from the optical axis. For example, in one embodiment, the lightcollimating optical element receives light from a white LED with anangular FWHM intensity of about 120 degrees symmetric about its opticalaxis and provides output light with an angular FWHM intensity of about30 degrees from the optical axis.

In another embodiment, the collimation or reduction in angular FWHMintensity of the light from light collimating element is substantiallyasymmetric about the optical axis. In one embodiment, the lightcollimating optical element receives light from a light source with asubstantially symmetric angular FWHM intensity about the optical axisgreater than one selected from the group: 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,120, and 130 degrees and provides output light with an angular FWHMintensity less than one selected from the group: 60, 50, 40, 30, and 20degrees in a first output plane and an angular FWHM intensity greaterthan one selected from the group: 100, 90, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, and 30,degrees in a second output plane substantially orthogonal to the firstoutput plane. For example, in one embodiment, the light collimatingoptical element receives light from a white LED with an angular FWHMintensity of about 120 degrees symmetric about its optical axis andprovides output light with an angular FWHM intensity of about 30 degreesin the first plane orthogonal to the extended film surfaces of the stackof coupling lightguides and an angular FWHM intensity of about 80degrees in the second plane parallel to the extended film surfaces ofthe stack of coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, the first outputplane is substantially parallel to the extended film surfaces of thecoupling lightguides in the stack of coupling lightguides disposed toreceive the light from the light collimating optical element

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light inputcoupler and a film-based lightguide wherein the light propagating withinthe lightguide has an angular full-width at half maximum intensity lessthan one selected from the group: 60 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20degrees, and 10 degrees from the optical axis of the light propagatingin the lightguide. In another embodiment, the angular full-width at halfmaximum intensity of the light propagating in one or more regions of thecoupling lightguides, light mixing regions, lightguide regions, or lightemitting regions is reduced by an angular bandwidth reduction method. Inone embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a film-basedlightguide that utilizes one or more angular FWHM intensity reductionmethods, including without limitation, collimating incident light usinga light collimating optical element, collimating light within thecoupling lightguide using tapered or arcuate lateral edges of one ormore coupling lightguides or regions of coupling lightguides, reducingthe radius of curvature of a bend in one or more coupling lightguides inone or more bend regions, reducing the refractive index differencebetween the core region and the cladding region, decreasing thethickness of the cladding region, and increasing the refractive index ofthe cladding region.

The angular full-width at half maximum intensity of the lightpropagating within the lightguide can be determined by measuring the farfield angular intensity output of the lightguide from an optical qualityend cut normal to the film surface and calculating and adjusting forrefraction at the air-lightguide interface. In another embodiment, theaverage angular full-width at half maximum intensity of the extractedlight from one or more light extraction features or light extractionregions comprising light extraction features of the film-basedlightguide is less than one selected from the group: 50 degrees, 40degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees, and 5 degrees. In anotherembodiment, the peak angular intensity of the light extracted from thelight extraction feature is within 50 degrees of the surface normal ofthe lightguide within the region. In another embodiment, the far-fieldtotal angular full-width at half maximum intensity of the extractedlight from the light emitting region of the film-based lightguide isless than one selected from the group: 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees, and 5 degrees and the peak angularintensity is within 50 degrees of the surface normal of the lightguidein the light emitting region.

Light Turning Optical Element

In one embodiment, a light input coupler comprises a light turningoptical element disposed to receive light from a light source with afirst optical axis angle and redirect the light to having a secondoptical axis angle different than the first optical axis angle. In oneembodiment, the light turning optical element redirects light by about90 degrees. In another embodiment, the light turning optical elementredirects the optical axis of the incident light by an angle selectedfrom within the range of 75 degrees and 90 degrees within at least oneplane. In another embodiment, the light turning optical elementredirects the optical axis of the incident light by an angle selectedfrom within the range of 40 degrees and 140 degrees. In one embodiment,the light turning optical element is optically coupled to the lightsource or the light input surface of the coupling lightguides. Inanother embodiment, the light turning optical element is separated inthe optical path of light from the light source or the light inputsurface of the coupling lightguides by an air gap. In anotherembodiment, the light turning optical element redirects light from twoor more light sources with first optical axis angles to light havingsecond optical axis angles different than the first optical axis angles.In a further embodiment, the light turning optical element redirects afirst portion of light from a light source with a first optical axisangle to light having a second optical axis angle different than thefirst optical axis angle. In another embodiment, the light turningoptical element redirects light from a first light source with a firstoptical axis angle to light having a second optical axis angle differentfrom the first optical axis angle and light from a second light sourcewith a third optical axis angle to light having a fourth optical axisangle different from the third optical axis angle.

Bi-Directional Light Turning Optical Element

In another embodiment, the light turning optical element redirects theoptical axis of light from one or more light sources into two differentdirections. For example, in one embodiment, the middle couplinglightguide of a light input coupler is a non-folded coupling lightguideand the light input ends of two arrays of stacked, folded couplinglightguides are directed toward the middle coupling lightguide. Abi-directional light turning optical element is disposed above themiddle coupling lightguide such that a first portion of light from alight source enters the middle coupling lightguide, a second portion oflight from the light source is directed in a first direction paralleland toward the input surface of the first stacked array of foldedcoupling lightguides by the bi-directional light turning opticalelement, and a third portion of light from the light source is directedin a second direction parallel and toward the input surface of thesecond stacked array of folded coupling lightguides by thebi-directional light turning optical element. In this embodiment, thelight source may be disposed between the lateral edges of the lightemitting region or light emitting device and the non-folded couplinglightguide eliminates an otherwise dark region (where there isinsufficient room for a folded coupling lightguide) or eliminates therequirement for multiple bends in the coupling lightguides that canintroduce further light loss and increase volume requirements.

In one embodiment, the bi-directional light turning optical elementsplits and turns the optical axis of one light source into two differentdirections. In another embodiment, the bi-directional light turningoptical element rotates the optical axis of a first light source into afirst direction and rotates the optical axis of a second light sourceinto a second direction different that the first direction. In anotherembodiment, an optical element, such as an injection molded lens,comprises more than one light turning optical element and lightcollimating element that are configured to receive light from more thanone light source. For example, an injection molded lens comprising alinear array of optical light turning surfaces and light collimatingsurfaces may be disposed to receive light from a strip comprising alinear array of LEDs such that the light is directed into a plurality oflight input couplers or stacks of coupling lightguides. By forming asingle optical element to perform light turning and light collimatingfor a plurality of light sources, fewer optical elements are needed andcosts can be reduced. In another embodiment, the bi-directional lightturning element may be optically coupled to the light source, thecoupling lightguides, or a combination thereof.

Light Turning and Light Collimating Optical Element

In another embodiment, the light turning optical element turns theoptical axis of the light from the light source in a first plane withinthe light turning element and collimates the light in the first plane,in a second plane orthogonal to the first plane, or a combinationthereof. In another embodiment, the light turning optical elementcomprises a light turning region and a collimating region. In oneembodiment, by collimating input light in at least one plane, the lightwill propagate more efficiently within the lightguide and have reducedlosses in the bend regions and reduced input coupling losses into thecoupling lightguides. In one embodiment, the light turning opticalelement is an injection molded lens designed to redirect light from afirst optical axis angle to a second optical axis angle different fromthe first optical axis angle. The injection molded lens may be formed ofa light transmitting material such as poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA),polycarbonate, silicone, or any suitable light transmitting material. Ina further embodiment, the light turning element may be a substantiallyplanar element that redirects light from a first optical axis angle to asecond optical axis angle in a first plane while substantiallymaintaining the optical axis angle in a second plane orthogonal to thefirst plane. For example, in one embodiment, the light turning opticalelement is a 1 millimeter (mm) thick lens with a curved profile in oneplane cut from a 1 mm sheet of PMMA using a carbon dioxide (CO₂) lasercutter.

In one embodiment, the light input coupler comprises a light turningoptical element or coupling lightguides with light turning edges thatpermit a light source to be disposed between the extended boundingregions of the sides of the light emitting surface adjacent to the inputside of the light from the light source into the lightguide region. Inthis embodiment, the turning optical element or light turning edgespermit the light source to be disposed on the light input side region ofthe lightguide region without substantially extending beyond eitherside. Additionally, in this embodiment, the light source may be foldedbehind the light emitting region of the lightguide such that the lightsource does not substantially extend beyond an edge of the lightemitting region or outer surface of the light emitting device comprisingthe light emitting region. In another embodiment, the light source issubstantially directed with its optical axis oriented toward the lightemitting region and the turning optical element or turning edges of thecoupling lightguides permit the light to be turned such that it canenter the stacked array of coupling lightguides that are stackedsubstantially parallel to the input side of the lightguide region andsubstantially orthogonal to the light source optical axis.

Light Coupling Optical Element

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light couplingoptical element disposed to receive light from the light source andtransmit a larger flux of light into the coupling lightguides than wouldoccur without the light coupling element. In one embodiment, the lightcoupling element refracts a first portion of incident light from a lightsource such that it is incident upon the input surface of one or morecoupling lightguides or sets of coupling lightguides at a lowerincidence angle from the normal such that more light flux is coupledinto the coupling lightguides or sets of coupling lightguides (lesslight is lost due to reflection). In another embodiment, the lightcoupling optical element is optically coupled to at least one selectedfrom the group: a light source, a plurality of coupling lightguides, aplurality of sets of coupling lightguides, a plurality of light sources.

Light Blocking Element

In one embodiment, the light input coupler comprises a light blockingelement to block external light from reaching the lightguide orlightguide region or to block light emitted from a region of the lightemitting device from escaping the device being seen by a viewer. In oneembodiment, the light blocking element prevents a significant portion ofincident light from escaping or entering the light input coupler throughabsorption, reflection, or a combination thereof. For example, in oneembodiment, an aluminum reflective tape is adhered around the couplinglightguides of a light input coupler. In another embodiment, a lowrefractive index cladding or air region is disposed between a lightabsorbing or reflecting light blocking element such that light totallyinternally reflecting within the core layer of a coupling lightguide orlightguide is not frustrated from the total internal reflection andabsorbed or scattered out of the coupling lightguide or lightguide. Inanother embodiment, the light blocking element is a substantiallyspecularly reflecting element and is optically coupled to one or morecoupling lightguides or lightguides. In another embodiment, for example,the housing of the light input coupler is black and substantiallyabsorbs light escaping from the edges of the coupling lightguides andprevents this light from distracting from the visual appearance of thelight emitting device. In another embodiment, the light blocking elementis a region disposed on or physically or optically coupled to a lowcontact area cover. In another embodiment, the light blocking elementmaintains the relative position of the coupling lightguides to eachother or maintains the relative position between the coupling lightguideand a lightguide region, light mixing region, or light source. Forexample, in one embodiment, a partially specularly reflecting aluminumfilm comprises an adhesive (an aluminum tape), wraps around the couplinglightguides, and is also adhered to the lightguide in a light mixingregion. In one embodiment the light blocking element has an ASTM D790version 10 flexural modulus greater than one selected from the group:1.5, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 15 gigapascals (GPa).

Thermal Stability of Optical Element

In another embodiment, the light coupling optical element or lightredirecting optical element contains materials with a volumetric averageglass transition temperature higher than the volumetric average glasstransition temperature of the materials contained within the couplinglightguides. In another embodiment, the glass transition temperature ofthe coupling lightguides is less than 100 degrees Centigrade and theglass transition temperature of the light coupling optical element orthe light redirecting optical element is greater than 100 degreesCentigrade. In a further embodiment, the glass transition temperature ofthe coupling lightguides is less than 120 degrees Centigrade and theglass transition temperature of the light coupling optical element orthe light redirecting optical element is greater than 120 degreesCentigrade. In a further embodiment, the glass transition temperature ofthe coupling lightguides is less than 140 degrees Centigrade and theglass transition temperature of the light coupling optical element orthe light redirecting optical element is greater than 140 degreesCentigrade. In a further embodiment, the glass transition temperature ofthe coupling lightguides is less than 150 degrees Centigrade and theglass transition temperature of the light coupling optical element orthe light redirecting optical element is greater than 150 degreesCentigrade. In another embodiment, the light redirecting optical elementor the light coupling optical element comprises polycarbonate and thecoupling lightguides comprise poly(methyl methacrylate). In anotherembodiment, at least one of the light redirecting optical element andthe light coupling optical element is thermally coupled to a thermaltransfer element or the housing of the light emitting device.

Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguide is a region wherein lightwithin the region can propagate in a waveguide condition and a portionof the light input into a surface or region of the coupling lightguidespasses through the coupling lightguide toward a lightguide or lightmixing region. In one embodiment, coupling lightguides are defined by“leg” regions extending from a “body” (lightguide region) of a film. Inone embodiment, the light propagating in a waveguide condition withinthe coupling lightguide reflects from the outer surfaces of the couplinglightguide, thus totally internally reflecting within the volume of thecoupling lightguide. In another embodiment, the coupling lightguidecomprises a cladding region or other region optically coupled to a coreregion of the coupling lightguide. In this embodiment, a portion of thelight within the coupling lightguide may propagate through the coreregion, a portion of the light within the coupling lightguide maypropagate through the cladding region or other region, or light maypropagate through both regions in a waveguide condition (or in anon-waveguide condition near the input surface, near a light extractinglayer on the cladding or other area, or near the bend region). Thecoupling lightguide, in some embodiments, may serve to geometricallytransform a portion of the flux from a light source from a first shapedarea to a second shaped area different from the first. In an example ofthis embodiment, the light input surface of the light input couplerformed from the edges of folded strips (coupling lightguides) of aplanar film has the dimensions of a rectangle that is 3 millimeters by2.7 millimeters and the light input coupler couples light into a planarsection of a film in the light mixing region with cross-sectionaldimensions of 40.5 millimeters by 0.2 millimeters. In one embodiment,the input area of the light input coupler is substantially the same asthe cross-sectional area of the light mixing region or lightguidedisposed to receive light from one or more coupling lightguides. Inanother embodiment, the total transformation ratio, defined as the totallight input surface area of the light input couplers receiving more than5% of the light flux from a light source divided by the totalcross-sectional area of the light mixing region or lightguide regiondisposed to receive light from the coupling lightguides is one selectedfrom the group: 1 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1, 0.8 to 0.9, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.6 to 0.7,0.5 to 0.6, 0.5 to 0.999, 0.6 to 0.999, 0.7 to 0.999, less than 1,greater than 1, equal to 1. In another embodiment, the input surfacearea of each light input coupler corresponding to the edges of couplinglightguides disposed to receive light from a light source issubstantially the same as the cross-sectional area of the light mixingregion or lightguide region disposed to receive light from eachcorresponding coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, theindividual transformation ratio, defined as the total light input areaof a single light input surface of a light input coupler (correspondingto the edges of coupling lightguides) divided by the totalcross-sectional area of the light mixing region or lightguide disposedto receive light from the corresponding coupling lightguides is oneselected from the group: 1 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1, 0.8 to 0.9, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.6to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.5 to 0.999, 0.6 to 0.999, 0.7 to 0.999, less than1, greater than 1, equal to 1.

In another embodiment, a coupling lightguide is disposed to receivelight from at least one input surface with a first input surface longestdimension and transmit the light to a lightguide with a light emittingsurface with a light emitting surface longest dimension larger than thefirst input surface largest dimension. In another embodiment, thecoupling lightguide is a plurality of lightguides disposed to collectlight from at least one light source through edges or surfaces of thecoupling lightguides and direct the light into the surface, edge, orregion of a lightguide comprising a light emitting surface. In oneembodiment, the coupling lightguides provide light channels wherebylight flux entering the coupling lightguides in a first cross sectionalarea can be redistributed into a second cross sectional area differentfrom the first cross sectional area at the light output region of thelight input coupler. The light exiting the light input coupler or lightmixing region may then propagate to a lightguide or lightguide regionwhich may be a separate region of the same element (such as a separateregion of the same film). In one embodiment, a light emitting devicecomprises a light source and a film processed to form a lightguideregion with light extraction features, a light mixing region whereinlight from a plurality of sources, light input couplers, or couplinglightguides mixes before entering into the lightguide region. Thecoupling lightguides, light mixing region, and light extraction featuresmay all be formed from, on, or within the same film and they may remaininterconnected to each other through one or more regions.

In one embodiment, at least one coupling lightguide is disposed toreceive light from a plurality of light sources of at least twodifferent colors, wherein the light received by the coupling lightguideis pre-mixed angularly, spatially, or both by reflecting through thecoupling lightguide and the 9-spot sampled spatial color non-uniformity,Δu′v′, of the light emitting surface of the light emitting devicemeasured on the 1976 u′, v′ Uniform Chromaticity Scale as described inVESA Flat Panel Display Measurements Standard version 2.0, Jun. 1, 2001(Appendix 201, page 249) is less than one selected from the group: 0.2,0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 when measured using a spectrometer based spotcolor meter.

Coupling Lightguide Folds and Bends

In one embodiment, light emitting device comprises a light mixing regiondisposed between a lightguide and strips or segments cut to formcoupling lightguides, whereby a collection of edges of the strips orsegments are brought together to form a light input surface of the lightinput coupler disposed to receive light from a light source. In oneembodiment, the light input coupler comprises a coupling lightguidewherein the coupling lightguide comprises at least one fold or bend inone plane such that at least one edge overlaps another edge. In anotherembodiment, the coupling lightguide comprises a plurality of folds orbends wherein edges of the coupling lightguide can be abutted togetherin region such that the region forms a light input surface of the lightinput coupler of the light emitting device.

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light inputcoupler comprising at least one coupling lightguide that is bent orfolded such that light propagating in a first direction within thelightguide before the bend or fold is propagating in a second directiondifferent that the first within the lightguide after the bend or fold.

In one embodiment, at least one coupling lightguide comprises a strip orsegment that is bent or folded to radius of curvature of less than 75times the thickness of the strip or segment. In another embodiment, atleast one coupling lightguide comprises a strip or segment that isbended or folded to radius of curvature greater than 10 times the timesthe thickness of the strip or segment. In another embodiment, at leastone coupling lightguide is bent or folded such that longest dimension ina cross-section through the light emitting device or coupling lightguidein at least one plane is less than without the fold or bend. Segments orstrips may be bent or folded in more than one direction or region andthe directions of folding or bending may be different between strips orsegments.

Optical Efficiency of the Light Input Coupler

In an embodiment, the optical efficiency of the light input coupler,defined as the percentage of the original light flux from the lightsource that passes through the light input coupler light input surfaceand out of the light input coupler into a mixing region, lightguide, orlight emitting surface, is greater than one selected from the group:50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%. The degree of collimation can affectthe optical efficiency of the light input coupler.

Collimation of Light Entering the Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: light source,light collimating optical element, light source primary optic, lightsource secondary optic, light input surface, optical element disposedbetween the light source and at least one selected from the group:coupling lightguide, shape of the coupling lightguide, shape of themixing region, shape of the light input coupler, and shape of an elementor region of the light input coupler provides light that within thecoupling lightguide with an angular full-width of half maximum intensitychosen from the group of less than 80 degrees, less than 70 degrees,less than 60 degrees, less than 50 degrees, less than 40 degrees, lessthan 30 degrees, less than 20 degrees, less than 10 degrees, between 10degrees and 30 degrees, between 30 degrees and 50 degrees, between 10degrees and 60 degrees and between 30 degrees and 80 degrees. In someembodiments, light which is highly collimated (FWHM of about 10 degreesor less) does not mix spatially within a lightguide region with lightextracting features such that there may be dark bands or regions ofnon-uniformity. In this embodiment, the light, however, will beefficiently coupled around curves and bends in the lightguide relativeto less collimated light and in some embodiments, the high degree ofcollimation enables small radii of curvature and thus a smaller volumefor the fold or bend in a light input coupler and resulting lightemitting device. In another embodiment, a significant portion of lightfrom a light source with a low degree of collimation (FWHM of about 120degrees) within the coupling lightguides will be reflected into anglessuch that it exits the coupling lightguides in regions near bends orfolds with small radii of curvature. In this embodiment, the spatiallight mixing (providing uniform color or luminance) of the light fromthe coupling lightguides in the lightguide in areas of the lightextracting regions is high and the light extracted from lightguide willappear to have a more uniform angular or spatial color or luminanceuniformity.

In one embodiment, light from a light source is collimated in a firstplane by a light collimating optical element and the light is collimatedin a second plane orthogonal to the first plane by light collimatingedges of the coupling lightguide. In another embodiment, a first portionof light from a light source is collimated by a light collimatingelement in a first plane and the first portion of light is furthercollimated in a second plane orthogonal to the first plane, the firstplane, or a combination thereof by collimating edges of one or morecoupling lightguides. In a further embodiment, a first portion of lightfrom a light source is collimated by a light collimating element in afirst plane and a second portion of light from the light source or firstportion of light is collimated in a second plane orthogonal to the firstplane, the first plane, or a combination thereof by collimating edges ofone or more coupling lightguides.

In another embodiment, one or more coupling lightguides is bent orfolded and the optical axis of the light source is oriented at a firstredirection angle to the light emitting device optical axis, oriented ata second redirection angle to a second direction orthogonal to the lightemitting device optical axis, and oriented at a third redirection angleto a third direction orthogonal to the light emitting device opticalaxis and the second direction. In another embodiment, the firstredirection angle, second redirection angle, or third redirection angleis about one selected from the group: 0 degrees, 45 degrees, 90 degrees,135 degrees, 180 degrees, 0-90 degrees, 90-180 degrees, and 0-180degrees.

Each light source may be oriented at a different angle. For example, twolight sources along one edge of a film with a strip-type light inputcoupler can be oriented directly toward each other (the optical axes are180 degrees apart). In another example, the light sources can bedisposed in the center of an edge of a film and oriented away from eachother (the optical axes are also 180 degrees apart).

The segments or strips may be once folded, for example, with the stripsoriented and abutting each other along one side of a film such that thelight source optical axis is in a direction substantially parallel withthe film plane or lightguide plane. The strips or segments may also befolded twice, for example, such that the light source optical axis issubstantially normal to the film plane or normal to the waveguide.

In one embodiment, the fold or bend in the coupling lightguide, regionor segment of the coupling lightguide or the light input coupler has acrease or radial center of the bend in a direction that is at a bendangle relative to the light source optical axis. In another embodiment,the bend angle is one selected from the group: 0 degrees, 45 degrees, 90degrees, 135 degrees, 180 degrees, 0-90 degrees, 90-180 degrees, and0-180 degrees.

The bend or fold may also be of the single directional bend (such asvertical type, horizontal type, 45-degree type or other single angle) orthe bend or fold or be multi-directional such as the twisted typewherein the strip or segment is torsional. In one embodiment, the strip,segment or region of the coupling lightguide is simultaneously bent intwo directions such that the strip or segment is twisted.

In another embodiment, the light input coupler comprises at least onelight source disposed to input light into the edges of strips (orcoupling lightguides) cut into a film wherein the strips are twisted andaligned with their edges forming an input surface and the light sourceoutput surface area is substantially parallel with the edge of thecoupling lightguide, lightguide, lightguide region, or light inputsurface or the optical axis of the light source is substantiallyperpendicular to the edge of the coupling lightguide, lightguide,lightguide region, or light input surface. In another embodiment,multiple light sources are disposed to couple light into a light inputcoupler comprising strips cut into a film such that at least one lightsource has an optical axis substantially parallel to the lightguideedge, coupling lightguide lateral edge or the nearest edge of thelightguide region. In another embodiment, two groupings of couplinglightguides are folded separately toward each other such that theseparation between the ends of the strips is substantially the thicknessof the central strip between the two groupings and two or more lightsources are disposed to direct light in substantially oppositedirections into the strips. In one embodiment, two groupings of couplinglightguides are folded separately toward each other such and then bothfolded in a direction away from the film such that the edges of thecoupling lightguides are brought together to form a single light inputsurface disposed to receive light from at least one light source. Inthis embodiment, the optical axis of the light source may besubstantially normal to the substantially planar film-based lightguide.

In one embodiment, two opposing stacks of coupling lightguides from thesame film are folded and recombined at some point away from the end ofthe coupling apparatus. This can be accomplished by splitting the filminto one or more sets of two bundles, which are folded towards eachother. In this embodiment, the bundles can be folded at an additionaltight radius and recombined into a single stack. The stack input canfurther be polished to be a flat single input surface or opticallycoupled to a flat window and disposed to receive light from a lightsource.

In one embodiment, the combination of the two film stacks is configuredto reduce the overall volume. In one embodiment, the film is bent orfolded to a radius of curvature greater than 10× the film thicknessorder to retain sufficient total internal reflection for a first portionof the light propagating within the film.

In another embodiment, the light input coupler comprises at least onecoupling lightguide wherein the coupling lightguide comprises an arcuatereflective edge and is folded multiple times in a fold directionsubstantially parallel to the lightguide edge or nearest edge of thelightguide region wherein multiple folds are used to bring sections ofan edge together to form a light input surface with a smaller dimension.In another embodiment, the light coupling lightguide, the strips, orsegments have collimating sections cut from the coupling lightguidewhich directs light substantially more parallel to the optical axis ofthe light source. In one embodiment, the collimating sections of thecoupling lightguide, strips or segments direct light substantially moreparallel to the optical axis of the light source in at least one planesubstantially parallel to the lightguide or lightguide region.

In a further embodiment, a light input coupler comprises at least onecoupling lightguide with an arc, segmented arc, or other light redirectedge cut into a film and the light input coupler comprises a region ofthe film rolled up to form a spiral or concentric-circle-like lightinput edge disposed to receive light from a light source.

Coupling Lightguide Lateral Edges

In one embodiment, the lateral edges, defined herein as the edges of thecoupling lightguide which do not substantially receive light directlyfrom the light source and are not part of the edges of the lightguide.The lateral edges of the coupling lightguide receive light substantiallyonly from light propagating within the coupling light guide. In oneembodiment, the lateral edges are at least one selected from the group:uncoated, coated with a reflecting material, disposed adjacent to areflecting material, and cut with a specific cross-sectional profile.The lateral edges may be coated, bonded to or disposed adjacent to aspecularly reflecting material, partially diffusely reflecting material,or diffuse reflecting material. In one embodiment, the edges are coatedwith a specularly reflecting ink comprising nano-sized or micron-sizedparticles or flakes which substantially reflect the light in a specularmanner when the coupling lightguides are brought together from foldingor bending. In another embodiment, a light reflecting element (such as amulti-layer mirror polymer film with high reflectivity) is disposed nearthe lateral edge of at least one region of a coupling lightguidedisposed, the multi-layer mirror polymer film with high reflectivity isdisposed to receive light from the edge and reflect it and direct itback into the lightguide. In another embodiment, the lateral edges arerounded and the percentage of incident light diffracted out of thelightguide from the edge is reduced. One method of achieving roundededges is by using a laser to cut the strips, segments or couplinglightguide region from a film and edge rounding through control of theprocessing parameters (speed of cut, frequency of cut, laser power,etc.). Other methods for creating rounded edges include mechanicalsanding/polishing or from chemical/vapor polishing. In anotherembodiment, the lateral edges of a region of a coupling lightguide aretapered, angled serrated, or otherwise cut or formed such that lightfrom a light source propagating within the coupling lightguide reflectsfrom the edge such that it is directed into an angle closer to theoptical axis of the light source, toward a folded or bent region, ortoward a lightguide or lightguide region.

Width of Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, the dimensions of the coupling lightguides aresubstantially equal in width and thickness to each other such that theinput surface areas for each edge surface are substantially the same. Inanother embodiment, the average width of the coupling lightguides, w, isdetermined by the equation:

w=MF*W _(LES) /NC,

where W_(LES) is the total width of the light emitting surface in thedirection parallel to the light entrance edge of the lightguide regionor lightguide receiving light from the coupling lightguide, NC is thetotal number of coupling lightguides in the direction parallel to thelight entrance edge of the lightguide region or lightguide receivinglight from the coupling lightguide, and MF is the magnification factor.In one embodiment, the magnification factor is one selected from thegroup: 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 0.7-1.3, 0.8-1.2, and0.9-1.1. In another embodiment, at least one selected from the group:coupling lightguide width, the largest width of a coupling waveguide,the average width of the coupling lightguides, and the width of eachcoupling lightguides is selected from a group: 0.5 mm-1 mm, 1 mm-2 mm, 2mm-3 mm, 3 mm-4 mm, 5 mm-6 mm, 0.5 mm-2 mm, 0.5 mm-25 mm, 0.5 mm-10 mm,10-37 mm, and 0.5 mm-5 mm. In one embodiment, at least one selected fromthe group: the coupling lightguide width, the largest width of acoupling waveguide, the average width of the coupling lightguides, andthe width of each coupling lightguides is less than 20 millimeters.

In one embodiment, the ratio of the average width of the couplinglightguides disposed to receive light from a first light source to theaverage thickness of the coupling lightguides is greater than oneselected from the group: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 100, 150, and200.

In one embodiment, the width of an outer coupling lightguide in an arrayof coupling lightguides or both outer coupling lightguides in an arrayof coupling lightguides is wider than the average width of the inner orother coupling lightguides in the array. In another embodiment, thewidth of an outer coupling lightguide in an array of couplinglightguides or both outer coupling lightguides in an array of couplinglightguides is wider than all of the inner or other coupling lightguidesin the array. In a further embodiment, the width of an outer couplinglightguide in an array of coupling lightguides or both outer couplinglightguides in an array of coupling lightguides is wider than theaverage width of the inner or other coupling lightguides in the array byan amount substantially greater than the thickness of the inner or othercoupling lightguides in the array when they are stacked in a manner toreceive light from a light source at the input surface. In a furtherembodiment, the ratio of the width of an outer coupling lightguide in anarray of coupling lightguides or both outer coupling lightguides in anarray of coupling lightguides to the average width of the inner or othercoupling lightguides is one selected from the group: greater than 0.5,greater than 0.8, greater than 1, greater than 1.5, greater than 2,greater than 3, between 0.5 and 3, between 0.8 and three, between 1 and3, between 1 and 5, between 1 and 10. In another embodiment, the wideouter coupling lightguide on one side of an array allows the region ofthe coupling lightguide extending past the other coupling lightguides inthe width direction to be folded toward the lateral edges of the othercoupling lightguides to provide a protective barrier, such as a lowcontact area cover, from dust, TIR frustration light out-coupling,scratches, etc. In another embodiment, the extended coupling lightguideregion may be extended around one or more selected from the group: thelateral edges of one or more coupling lightguides on one side, thelateral edges and one surface of the bottom coupling lightguide in thearray, the lateral edges on opposite sides of one or more couplinglightguides, the lateral edges on opposite sides of the inner or othercoupling lightguides in the array, the lateral edges on opposite sidesof the inner or other coupling lightguides in the array, and the outersurface of the other end coupling lightguide in the array. For example,in one embodiment, an array of 10 coupling lightguides comprising 9coupling lightguides with a width of 10 millimeters are arranged stackedand aligned at one lateral edge above an outer 10^(th) couplinglightguide with a width of 27 millimeters, wherein each couplinglightguide is 0.2 millimeters thick. In this embodiment, the 17 mmregion of the outer coupling lightguide extending beyond the edges ofthe stacked 9 coupling lightguides is wrapped around the stack of 9coupling lightguides and is affixed in place in an overlapping mannerwith itself (by adhesive or a clamping mechanism, for example) toprotect the inner coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, a stackedarray of coupling lightguides comprises 2 outer coupling lightguideswith widths of 15 millimeters between in 8 coupling lightguides withwidths of 10 millimeters wherein each coupling lightguide is 0.4millimeters thick. In this embodiment, the top outer coupling lightguideis folded alongside the lateral edges on one side of the stacked arrayof coupling lightguides and the bottom outer coupling lightguide isfolded alongside the opposite lateral edges on the opposite side of thestacked array of coupling lightguides. In this embodiment, each foldedsection contributes to the protection of the lateral edges of thecoupling lightguides. In another embodiment, a low contact area film isplaced between the lateral edges of the coupling lightguide and thefolded section. In another embodiment, the folded section comprises lowcontact area surface features such that it provides protection withoutsignificantly coupling light from the lateral and/or surface areas ofthe coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, a coupling lightguidecomprises an adhesive disposed between two regions of the couplinglightguide such that it is adhered to itself and wrapping around a stackof coupling lightguides.

Gap Between the Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, two or more coupling lightguides comprise a gapbetween the lightguides in the region where they connect to thelightguide region, lightguide region, or light mixing region. In anotherembodiment, the lightguides are formed from a manufacturing methodwherein gaps between the lightguides are generated. For example, in oneembodiment, the lightguides are formed by die cutting a film and thecoupling lightguides have a gap between each other. In one embodiment,the gap between the coupling lightguides is greater than one selectedfrom the group: 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5 and 10 millimeters. If the gapbetween the coupling lightguides is very large relative to the couplinglightguide width, then the uniformity of the light emitting region maybe reduced (with respect to luminance or color uniformity) if the lightmixing region is not sufficiently long in a direction parallel to theoptical axis of the light propagating in the lightguide because a sideof the lightguide has regions (the gap regions) where light is notentering the lightguide region. In one embodiment, a lightguidecomprises two lightguides wherein the average of the width of the twocoupling lightguides divided by the width of the gap between thecoupling lightguides at the region where the coupling lightguides jointhe light mixing region or lightguide region is greater than oneselected from the group: 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 6, 10, 20, 40, and 50. In anotherembodiment, the lightguide comprises large gaps between the couplinglightguides and a sufficiently long light mixing region to provide thedesired level of uniformity. In another embodiment, a lightguidecomprises two lightguides wherein the width of the gap between thecoupling lightguides divided by the average of the width of the twocoupling lightguides at the region where the coupling lightguides jointhe light mixing region or lightguide region is greater than oneselected from the group: 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 6, 10, 20, 40, and 50.

Shaped or Tapered Coupling Lightguides

The width of the coupling lightguides may vary in a predeterminedpattern. In one embodiment, the width of the coupling lightguides variesfrom a large width in a central coupling lightguide to smaller width inlightguides further from the central coupling lightguide as viewed whenthe light input edges of the coupling lightguides are disposed togetherto form a light input surface on the light input coupler. In thisembodiment, a light source with a substantially circular light outputaperture can couple into the coupling lightguides such that the light athigher angles from the optical axis are coupled into a smaller widthstrip such that the uniformity of the light emitting surface along theedge of the lightguide or lightguide region and parallel to the inputedge of the lightguide region disposed to receive the light from thecoupling lightguides is greater than one selected from the group: 60%,70%, 80%, 90% and 95%.

Other shapes of stacked coupling lightguides can be envisioned, such astriangular, square, rectangular, oval, etc. that provide matched inputareas to the light emitting surface of the light source. The widths ofthe coupling lightguides may also be tapered such that they redirect aportion of light received from the light source. The lightguides may betapered near the light source, in the area along the coupling lightguidebetween the light source and the lightguide region, near the lightguideregion, or some combination thereof.

In some embodiments, one light source will not provide sufficient lightflux to enable the desired luminance or light output profile desired fora particular light emitting device. In this example, one may use morethan one light input coupler and light source along the edge or side ofa lightguide region or lightguide mixing region. In one embodiment, theaverage width of the coupling lightguides for at least one light inputcoupler are in a first width range of one selected from the group: 1-3,1.01-3, 1.01-4, 0.7-1.5, 0.8-1.5, 0.9-1.5, 1-2, 1.1-2, 1.2-2, 1.3-2,1.4-2, 0.7-2, 0.5-2, and 0.5-3 times the largest width of the lightoutput surface of the light source in the direction of the lightguidecoupler width at the light input surface.

In one embodiment, one or more coupling lightguides are tapered to awider width in the region of the coupling lightguides adjacent thelightguide region or light mixing region. By tapering outward, the lightfrom the coupling lightguides can expand into a wider spatial regionbefore entering into the lightguide region (or other region) of thefilm. This can improve the spatial uniformity near the side of lightinput. Also, in this embodiment, by tapering the coupling lightguidesoutward, fewer coupling lightguides are needed to illuminate the side ofthe lightguide region. In one embodiment, the tapered couplinglightguides enable using fewer coupling lightguides that permit athicker lightguide, a smaller output area light source, or use more thanone stack of coupling lightguides with a particular light source. In oneembodiment, the ratio of the average width of the coupling lightguidesover their length to the width at the region where they couple lightinto the light mixing region or lightguide region is less than oneselected from the group: 1, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, and 0.1.In another embodiment, the ratio of the width of the couplinglightguides at the light input surface to the width at the region wherethey couple light into the light mixing region or lightguide region isless than one selected from the group: 1, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3,0.2, and 0.1.

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguide dimensional ratio, the ratioof the width of the coupling lightguide (the width is measured as theaverage dimension orthogonal to the general direction of propagationwithin the coupling lightguide toward the light mixing region,lightguide, or lightguide region) to the thickness of the couplinglightguide (the thickness is the average dimension measured in thedirection perpendicular to the propagating plane of the light within thecoupling lightguide) is greater than one selected from the group: 5:1,10:1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30:1, 40:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1, and 100:1. In oneembodiment, the thickness of the coupling lightguide is less than 600microns and the width is greater than 10 millimeters. In one embodiment,the thickness of the coupling lightguide is less than 400 microns andthe width is greater than 3 millimeters. In a further embodiment, thethickness of the coupling lightguide is less than 400 microns and thewidth is greater than 10 millimeters. In another embodiment, thethickness of the coupling lightguide is less than 300 microns and thewidth is less than 10 millimeters. In another embodiment, the thicknessof the coupling lightguide or light transmitting film is less than 200microns and the width is less than 20 millimeters. Imperfections at thelateral edges of the coupling lightguides (deviations from perfectplanar, flat surfaces due to the cutting of strips, for example) canincrease the loss of light through the edges or surfaces of the couplinglightguides. By increasing the width of the coupling lightguides, onecan reduce the effects of edge imperfections since the light within thecoupling lightguide bounces (reflects) less off of the later edgesurfaces (interacts less with the surface) in a wider couplinglightguide than a narrow coupling lightguide for a give range of anglesof light propagation. The width of the coupling lightguides is a factoraffecting the spatial color or luminance uniformity of the lightentering the lightguide region, light mixing region, or lightguide, andwhen the width of the coupling lightguide is large compared to the width(in that same direction) of the light emitting region, then spatiallynon-uniform regions can occur.

In another embodiment, the ratio of width of the light emitting surfacearea disposed to receive at least 10% of the light emitted from agrouping of coupling lightguides forming a light input coupler in adirection parallel to the width of the coupling lightguides to theaverage width of the coupling lightguides is greater than one selectedfrom the group: 5:1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30:1, 40:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1,100:1, 150:1, 200:1, 300:1, 500:1, and 1000:1. In another embodiment,the ratio of the total width of the total light emitting surfacedisposed to receive the light emitted from all of the couplinglightguides directing light toward the light emitting region or surfacealong the width to the average coupling lightguide width is greater thanone selected from the group: 5:1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30:1, 40:1, 50:1,60:1, 70:1, 100:1, 150:1, 200:1, 300:1, 500:1, and 1000:1.

In one embodiment, the width of the coupling lightguide is greater thanone of the following: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 1.8, 2, 3, 4, and 5 times thewidth of the light output surface of the light source disposed to couplelight into the coupling lightguide. In another embodiment, the largercoupling lightguide width relative to the width of the light outputsurface of the light source allows for a higher degree of collimation(lower angular full-width at half maximum intensity) by the lightcollimating edges of the coupling lightguides.

Light Turning Edges of the Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, one or more coupling lightguides have an edge shapethat optically turns by total internal reflection a portion of lightwithin the coupling lightguide such that the optical axis of the lightwithin the coupling lightguide is changed from a first optical axisangle to a second optical axis angle different than the first opticalaxis angle. More than one edge of one or more coupling lightguides mayhave a shape or profile to turn the light within the coupling lightguideand the edges may also provide collimation for portions of the lightpropagating within the coupling lightguides. For example, in oneembodiment, one edge of a stack of coupling lightguides is curved suchthat the optical axis of the light propagating within the lightguide isrotated by 90 degrees. In one embodiment, the angle of rotation of theoptical axis by one edge of a coupling lightguide is greater than one ofthe following: 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 40 degrees, 45 degrees, 60degrees, 80 degrees, 90 degrees, and 120 degrees. In another embodiment,the angle of rotation of the optical axis by more than one edge regionof a coupling lightguide is greater than one of the following: 10degrees, 20 degrees, 40 degrees, 45 degrees, 60 degrees, 80 degrees, 90degrees, 120 degrees, 135 degrees, and 160 degrees. By employing morethan one specifically curved edge, the light may be rotated to a widerange of angles. In one embodiment, the light within the couplinglightguide is redirected in a first direction (+ theta direction) by afirst edge profile and rotated in a section direction (+ theta 2) by asecond edge profile. In another embodiment, the light within thecoupling lightguide is redirected from a first direction to a seconddirection by a first edge profile and rotated back toward the firstdirection by a second edge profile region further along the couplinglightguide. In one embodiment, the light turning edges of the couplinglightguide are disposed in one or more regions including, withoutlimitation, near the light source, near the light input surface of thecoupling lightguides, near the light mixing region, near the lightguideregion, between the light input surface of the coupling lightguides,near the light mixing region, near the region between the couplinglightguides and the lightguide region, and near the lightguide region.

In one embodiment, one lateral edge near the light input surface of thecoupling lightguide has a light turning profile and the opposite lateraledge has a light collimating profile. In another embodiment, one lateraledge near the light input surface of the coupling lightguide has a lightcollimating profile followed by a light turning profile (in thedirection of light propagation away from the light input surface withinthe coupling lightguide).

In one embodiment, two arrays of stacked coupling lightguides aredisposed to receive light from a light source and rotate the opticalaxis of the light into two different directions. In another embodiment,a plurality of coupling lightguides with light turning edges may befolded and stacked along an edge of the lightguide region such thatlight from a light source oriented toward the lightguide region entersthe stack of folded coupling lightguides, the light turning edgesredirect the optical axis of the light to a first directionsubstantially parallel to the edge and the folds in the stacked couplinglightguides redirect the light to a direction substantially toward thelightguide region. In this embodiment, a second array of stacked, foldedcoupling lightguides can be stacked above or below (or interleaved with)the first array of stacked, folded coupling lightguides along the sameedge of the lightguide region such that light from the same light sourceoriented toward the lightguide region enters the second array ofstacked, folded coupling lightguides, the light turning edges of thesecond array of stack folded coupling lightguides redirect the opticalaxis of the light to a second direction substantially parallel to theedge (and opposite the first direction) and the folds in the stackedcoupling lightguides redirect the light to a direction substantiallytoward the lightguide region. In another embodiment, the couplinglightguides from two different arrays along an edge of a lightguideregion may be alternately stacked upon each other. The stackingarrangement may be predetermined, random, or a variation thereof. Inanother embodiment, a first stack of folded coupling lightguides fromone side of a non-folded coupling lightguide are disposed adjacent onesurface of the non-folded coupling lightguide and a second stack offolded coupling lightguides from the other side of the non-foldedcoupling lightguide are disposed adjacent the opposite surface of thenon-folded coupling lightguide. In this embodiment, the non-foldedcoupling lightguide may be aligned to receive the central (higher flux)region of the light from the light source when there are equal numbersof coupling lightguides on the top surface and the bottom surface of thenon-folded coupling lightguide. In this embodiment, the non-foldedcoupling lightguide may have a higher transmission (less light loss)since there are no folds or bends, thus more light reaches thelightguide region.

In another embodiment, the light turning edges of one or more couplinglightguides redirects light from two or more light sources with firstoptical axis angles to light having a second optical axis anglesdifferent than the first optical axis angles. In a further embodiment,the light turning edges of one or more coupling lightguides redirects afirst portion of light from a light source with a first optical axisangle to a portion of light having second optical axis angle differentthan the first optical axis angle. In another embodiment, the lightturning edges of one or more coupling lightguides redirects light from afirst light source with a first optical axis angle to light having asecond optical axis angle different from the first optical axis angleand light from a second light source with a third optical axis angle tolight having a fourth optical axis angle different from the thirdoptical axis angle.

In one embodiment, the light turning profile of one or more edges of acoupling lightguide has a curved shape when viewed substantiallyperpendicular to the film. In another embodiment, the curved shape hasone or more conic, circular arc, parabolic, hyperbolic, geometric,parametric, or other algebraic curve regions. In another embodiment, theshape of the curve is designed to provide improved transmission throughthe coupling lightguide by minimizing bend loss (increased reflection)for a particular light input profile to the coupling lightguide, lightinput surface, light profile modifications before the curve (such ascollimating edges for example), refractive indexes for the wavelengthsof interest for the coupling lightguide material, surface finish of theedge, and coating or cladding type at the curve edge (low refractiveindex material, air, or metallized for example). In one embodiment, thelight lost from the light turning profile of one or more edge regions ofthe coupling lightguide is less than one of the following: 50%, 40%,30%, 20%, 10%, and 5%.

Vertical Light Turning Edges

In one embodiment, the vertical edges of the coupling lightguides (theedges tangential to the larger film surface) or the core regions of thecoupling lightguides have a non-perpendicular cross-sectional profilethat rotates the optical axis of a portion of incident light. In oneembodiment, the vertical edges of one or more coupling lightguides orcore regions of the coupling lightguides comprise a curved edge. Inanother embodiment, the vertical edges of one or more couplinglightguides or core regions comprise an angled edge wherein the angle tothe surface normal of the coupling lightguide is greater than one of thefollowing: 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 30 degrees, 40 degrees, 50 degreesand 60 degrees. In one embodiment, the use of vertical light turningedges of the core regions or coupling lightguides allows light to enterinto the coupling lightguides from the coupling lightguide film surfacewhere it is typically easier to obtain an optical finish as it can bethe optically smooth surface of a film. In another embodiment, thecoupling lightguides (or core regions of the coupling lightguides) arebrought in contact and the vertical edges are cut at an angle to thesurface normal. In one embodiment, the angled cut creates a smooth,continuous, angled vertical light turning edge on the edges of thecoupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the angled, curved, orcombination thereof vertical light turning edges are obtained by one ormore of the following: laser cutting, polishing, grinding, die cutting,blade cutting or slicing, and hot blade cutting or slicing. In oneembodiment, the vertical light turning edges are formed when thecoupling lightguides are cut into the lightguide film and the couplinglightguides are aligned to form a vertical light turning edge.

In another embodiment, the light input surface of the couplinglightguides is the surface of one or more coupling lightguides and thesurface comprises one or more surface relief profiles (such as anembossed Fresnel lens, microlens array, or prismatic structures) thatturns, collimates or redirects a portion of the light from the lightsource. In a further embodiment, a light collimating element, lightturning optical element, or light coupling optical element is disposedbetween the light source and the light input film surface of thecoupling lightguide (non-edge surface). In one embodiment, the lightinput film surface is the surface of the cladding region or the coreregion of the coupling lightguide. In a further embodiment, the lightcollimating optical element, light turning optical element, or lightcoupling optical element is optically coupled to the core region,cladding region, or intermediate light transmitting region between theoptical element and the coupling lightguide.

Vertical Light Collimating Edges

In one embodiment, the vertical edges of the coupling lightguide (theedges tangential to the larger film surface) or the core regions of thecoupling lightguides have a non-perpendicular cross-sectional profilethat collimate a portion of incident light. In one embodiment, thevertical edges of one or more coupling lightguides or core regions ofthe coupling lightguides comprise a curved edge that collimates aportion of incident light. In another embodiment, the vertical edges ofone or more coupling lightguides or core regions comprise an angled edgewherein the angle to the surface normal of the coupling lightguide isgreater than one of the following: 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 30 degrees,40 degrees, 50 degrees and 60 degrees.

Non-Folded Coupling Lightguide

In a further embodiment, the film-based lightguide comprises anon-folded coupling lightguide disposed to receive light from the lightinput surface and direct light toward the lightguide region withoutturning the light. In one embodiment, the non-folded lightguide is usedin conjunction with one or more light turning optical elements, lightcoupling optical elements, coupling lightguides with light turningedges, or coupling lightguides with collimating edges. For example, alight turning optical element may be disposed above or below anon-folded coupling lightguide such that a first portion of light from alight source substantially maintains the direction of its optical axiswhile passing through the non-folded coupling lightguide and the lightfrom the source received by the light turning optical element is turnedto enter into a stacked array of coupling lightguides. In anotherembodiment, the stacked array of coupling lightguides comprises foldedcoupling lightguides and a non-folded coupling lightguide.

In another embodiment, the non-folded coupling lightguide is disposednear an edge of the lightguide. In one embodiment, the non-foldedcoupling lightguide is disposed in the middle region of the edge of thelightguide region. In a further embodiment, the non-folded couplinglightguide is disposed along a side of the lightguide region at a regionbetween the lateral sides of the lightguide region. In one embodiment,the non-folded coupling lightguide is disposed at various regions alongone edge of a lightguide region wherein a plurality of light inputcouplers are used to direct light into the side of a lightguide region.

In another embodiment, the folded coupling lightguides have lightcollimating edges, substantially linear edges, or light turning edges.In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: array of foldedcoupling lightguides, light turning optical element, light collimatingoptical element, and light source are physically coupled to thenon-folded coupling lightguide. In another embodiment, folded couplinglightguides are physically coupled to each other and to the non-foldedcoupling lightguide by a pressure sensitive adhesive cladding layer andthe thickness of the unconstrained lightguide film comprising the lightemitting region and the array of coupling lightguides is less than oneof the following: 1.2 times, 1.5 times, 2 times, and 3 times thethickness of the array of coupling lightguides. By bonding the foldedcoupling lightguides only to themselves, the coupling lightguides (whenun-constrained) typically bend upward and increase the thickness of thearray due to the folded coupling lightguides not being physicallycoupled to a fixed or relatively constrained region. By physicallycoupling the folded coupling lightguides to a non-folded couplinglightguide, the array of coupling lightguides is physically coupled to aseparate region of the film which increases the stability and thusreduces the ability of the elastic energy stored from the bend to bereleased.

In one embodiment, the non-folded coupling lightguide comprises one ormore of the following: light collimating edges, light turning edges,angled linear edges, and curved light redirecting edges. The non-foldedcoupling lightguide or the folded coupling lightguides may comprisecurved regions near bend regions, turning regions, or collimatingregions such that stress (such as resulting from torsional or lateralbending) does not focus at a sharp corner and increase the likelihood offracture. In another embodiment, curved regions are disposed where thecoupling lightguides join with the lightguide region or light mixingregion of the film-based lightguide.

In another embodiment, at least one selected from the group: non-foldedcoupling lightguide, folding coupling lightguide, light collimatingelement, light turning optical element, light redirecting opticalelement, light coupling optical element, light mixing region, lightguideregion, and cladding region of one or more elements is physicallycoupled to the relative position maintaining element. By physicallycoupling the coupling lightguides directly or indirectly to the relativeposition maintaining element, the elastic energy stored from the bend inthe coupling lightguides held within the coupling lightguides and thecombined thickness of the unconstrained coupling lightguides(unconstrained by an external housing for example) is reduced.

Interior Light Directing Edge

In one embodiment, the interior region of one or more couplinglightguides comprises an interior light directing edge. The interiorlight redirecting edge may be formed by cutting or otherwise removing aninterior region of the coupling lightguide. In one embodiment, theinterior light directed edge redirects a first portion of light withinthe coupling lightguide. In one embodiment, the interior lightredirecting edges provide an additional level of control for directingthe light within the coupling lightguides and can provide light fluxredistribution within the coupling lightguide and within the lightguideregion to achieve a predetermined light output pattern (such as higheruniformity or higher flux output in a specific region).

Cavity Region Withing the Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, one or more coupling lightguides or core regions ofcoupling lightguides comprises at least one cavity. In anotherembodiment, the cavity is disposed to receive the light source and thevertical edges of the core regions of the coupling lightguides arevertical light collimating optical edges. In one embodiment, a higherflux of light is coupled within the coupling lightguides with a cavityin at least one coupling lightguide than is coupled into the couplinglightguides without the cavity. This may be evaluated, for example, bymeasuring the light flux out of the coupling lightguides (when cut) orout of the light emitting device with an integrating sphere before andafter filling the cavity with a high transmittance (>90% transmittance)light transmitting material (with the light source disposed adjacent thecorresponding surface of the material) that is index-matched with thecore region. In another embodiment, the cavity region providesregistration or alignment of the coupling lightguides with the lightsource and increased light flux coupling into the coupling lightguides.In one embodiment, an array of coupling lightguides with vertical lightcollimating edges and a cavity alleviates the need for a lightcollimating optical element.

Coupling Lightguides Comprising Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, at least one coupling lightguide comprises aplurality of coupling lightguides. For example, a coupling lightguidemay be further cut to comprise a plurality of coupling lightguides thatconnect to the edge of the coupling lightguide. In one embodiment, afilm of thickness T comprises a first array of N number of couplinglightguides, each comprising a sub-array of M number of couplinglightguides. In this embodiment, the first array of coupling lightguidesis folded in a first direction such that the coupling lightguides arealigned and stacked, and the sub-array of coupling lightguides is foldedin a second direction such that the coupling lightguides are aligned andstacked. In this embodiment, the light input edge surface comprising thesub-array of coupling lightguides has a width the same as each of themore narrow coupling lightguides and the light input surface has aheight, H, defined by H=T×N×M. This can, for example, allow for the useof a thinner lightguide film to be used with a light source with a muchlarger dimension of the light output surface. In one embodiment, thinfilm-based lightguides are utilized, for example, when the film-basedlightguide is the illuminating element of a frontlight disposed above atouchscreen in a reflective display. A thin lightguide in thisembodiment provides a more accurate, and responsive touchscreen (such aswith capacitive touchscreens for example) when the user touches thelightguide film. Alternatively, a light source with a larger dimensionof the light output surface may be used for a specific lightguide filmthickness.

Another advantage of using coupling lightguides comprising a pluralityof coupling lightguides is that the light source can be disposed withinthe region between the side edges of the lightguide region and thus notextend beyond an edge of the display or light emitting region when thelight source and light input coupler are folded behind the lightemitting surface, for example.

Number of Coupling Lightguides in a Light Input Coupler

In one embodiment, the total number of coupling lightguides, NC, in adirection parallel to the light entrance edge of the lightguide regionor lightguide receiving light from the coupling lightguide is

NC=MF*W _(LES) /w,

where W_(LES) is the total width of the light emitting surface in thedirection parallel to the light entrance edge of the lightguide regionor lightguide receiving light from the coupling lightguide, w is theaverage width of the coupling lightguides, and MF is the magnificationfactor. In one embodiment, the magnification factor is one selected fromthe group: 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 0.7-1.3, 0.8-1.2, and0.9-1.1. In another embodiment, the number of coupling lightguides in alight input coupler or the total number of coupling lightguides in thelight emitting device is selected from a group of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10,11, 20, 30, 50, 70, 80, 90, 100, 2-50, 3-50, 4-50, 2-500, 4-500, greaterthan 10, greater than 20, greater than 30, greater than 40, greater than50, greater than 60, greater than 70, greater than 80, greater than 90,greater than 100, greater than 120, greater than 140, greater than 200,greater than 300, greater than 400, greater than 500.Coupling Lightguides Directed into More than One Light Input Surface

In a further embodiment, the coupling lightguides collectively do notcouple light into the light mixing region, lightguide, or light mixingregion in a contiguous manner. For example, every other couplinglightguide may be cut out from the film-based lightguide while stillproviding strips or coupling lightguides along one or more edges, butnot continuously coupling light into the lightguide regions. By usingfewer lightguides, the collection of light input edges may be reduced insize. This reduction in size, for example, can be used to combinemultiple sets of coupling lightguides optically coupled to differentregions of the same lightguide or a different lightguide, better matchthe light input surface size to the light source size, use a smallerlight source, or use a thicker lightguide film with a particular lightsource where the dimension of the set of contiguous coupling lightguidesin the thickness direction would be one selected from the group: 10%,20%, 40%, 50%, and 100% greater than light emitting surface of the lightsource in the thickness direction when disposed to couple light into thelight input surface.

In a further embodiment, coupling lightguides from a first region of alightguide have light input edges collected into two or more light inputsurfaces. For example, the odd number coupling lightguides may bedirected to a first white light source and the even number couplinglightguides may be coupled to a red, green, and blue light source. Inanother embodiment, the coupling lightguides from a first region of alightguide are coupled to a plurality of white light sources to reducevisibility of color variations from the light source. For example, theeven number coupling lightguides may couple light from a white lightsource with a first color temperature and the odd number couplinglightguides may couple light from a white light source with a secondcolor temperature higher than the first such that the colornon-uniformity, Δu′v′, along a direction parallel to an edge of thelightguide region along the light emitting surface is less than oneselected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004.

Similarly, three or more light input surfaces may also be used to couplelight from 1, 2, 3 or more light sources. For example, every alternatingfirst, second, and third coupling lightguide from a first region of alightguide are directed to a first, second, and third light source ofthe same or different colors.

In a further embodiment, coupling lightguides from a first region of alightguide have light input edges collected into two or more light inputsurfaces disposed to couple light into the lightguide for differentmodes of operation. For example, the first light input surface may becoupled to at least one light source suitable for daylight compatibleoutput and the second light input surface may be coupled to at least onelight source for NVIS compatible light output.

The order of the coupling lightguides directed to more than one lightinput surface do not need to be alternating and may be of anypredetermined or random configuration. For example, the couplinglightguides from the top and bottom region of the lightguide may bedirected to a different light input surface than the middle region. In afurther embodiment, the coupling lightguides from a region of thelightguide are disposed together into a plurality of light inputsurfaces, each comprising more than one light input edge, arranged in anarray, disposed to couple light from a collection of light sources,disposed within the same housing, disposed such that the light inputsurfaces are disposed adjacent each other, disposed in an ordertransposed to receive light from a collection of light sources, disposedin a non-contiguous arrangement wherein neighboring light input surfacesdo not couple light into neighboring regions of the lightguide,lightguide region, or light mixing region.

In a further embodiment, a plurality of sets of coupling lightguides arearranged to provide a plurality of sets of light input surface along thesame side, edge, the back, the front or within the same housing regionof the light emitting device wherein the plurality of light inputsurfaces are disposed to receive light from one or a plurality of LEDs.

Order of Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are disposed together at alight input edge forming a light input surface such that the order ofthe strips in a first direction is the order of the coupling lightguidesas they direct light into the lightguide or lightguide region. Inanother embodiment, the coupling lightguides are interleaved such thatthe order of the strips in a first direction is not the same as theorder of the coupling lightguides as they direct light into thelightguide or lightguide region. In one embodiment, the couplinglightguides are interleaved such that at least one coupling lightguidereceiving light from a first light source of a first color is disposedbetween two coupling lightguides at a region near the lightguide regionor light mixing region that receive light from a second light sourcewith a second color different from the color of the first light source.In one embodiment, the color non-uniformity, Δu′v′, along a directionparallel to the edge of the lightguide region along the light emittingsurface is less than one selected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01,and 0.004. In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides areinterleaved such that at least one pair of coupling lightguides adjacentto each other at the output region of the light input coupler near thelight mixing region, lightguide, or lightguide region, are not adjacentto each other near the input surface of the light input coupler. In oneembodiment, the interleaved coupling lightguides are arranged such thatthe non-uniform angular output profile is made more uniform at theoutput of the light input coupler by distributing the couplinglightguides such that output from the light input coupler does notspatially replicate the angular non-uniformity of the light source. Forexample, the strips of a light input coupler could alternate among fourdifferent regions of the lightguide region as they are combined at thelight input surface so that the middle region would not have very highluminance light emitting surface region that corresponds to thetypically high intensity from a light source at 0 degrees or along itsoptical axis.

In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides are interleaved suchthat at least one pair of coupling lightguides adjacent to each othernear the light mixing region, lightguide, or lightguide region, do notreceive light from at least one of the same light source, the same lightinput coupler, and the same mixing region. In another embodiment, thecoupling lightguides are interleaved such that at least one pair ofcoupling lightguides adjacent to each other near a light input surfacedo not couple light to at least one of the same light input coupler, thesame light mixing region, the same lightguide, the same lightguideregion, the same film, the same light output surface. In anotherembodiment, the coupling lightguides are interleaved at the light inputsurface in a two-dimensional arrangement such that at least twoneighboring coupling lightguides in a vertical, horizontal or otherdirection at the input surface do not couple light to a neighboringregion of at least one selected from the group: the same light inputcoupler, the same light mixing region, the same lightguide, the samelightguide region, the same film, and the same light output surface.

In a further embodiment, coupling lightguides optically coupled to thelightguide region, light mixing region, or light emitting region near afirst input region are arranged together in a holder disposedsubstantially along or near a second edge region which is disposed alongan edge direction greater than one selected from the group: 30 degrees,40 degrees, 50 degrees, 60 degrees, 70 degrees, 80 degrees and 85degrees to first edge region. For example, light input couplers maycouple light from a first light source and coupling lightguide holderdisposed along the bottom edge of a liquid crystal display and directthe light into the region of the lightguide disposed along a side of thedisplay oriented about 90 degrees to the bottom edge of the display. Thecoupling lightguides may direct light from a light source disposed alongthe top, bottom, or both into one or more sides of a display such thatthe light is substantially propagating parallel to the bottom and topedges within the lightguide region.

Coupling Lightguides Bonded to the Surface of a Lightguide Region

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are not segmented (or cut)regions of the same film which comprises the lightguide or lightguideregion. In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are formed andphysically or optically attached to the lightguide, light mixing region,or lightguide region using at least one selected from the group: opticaladhesive, bonding method (solvent welding, thermally bonding, ultrasonicwelding, laser welding, hot gas welding, freehand welding, speed tipwelding, extrusion welding, contact welding, hot plate welding, highfrequency welding, injection welding, friction welding, spin welding,welding rod), and adhesive or joining techniques suitable for polymers.In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are formed and opticallycoupled to the lightguide, mixing region, or lightguide region such thata significant portion of the light from the coupling lightguides istransferred into a waveguide condition within the mixing region,lightguide region, or lightguide. The coupling lightguide may beattached to the edge or a surface of the light mixing region, lightguideregion, or lightguide. In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides aredisposed within a first film wherein a second film comprising alightguide region is extruded onto a region of the first film such thatthe coupling lightguides are optically coupled to the lightguide region.In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides are tapered in a regionoptically coupled to the lightguide. By separating out the production ofthe coupling lightguides with the production of the lightguide region,materials with different properties may be used for each region such asmaterials with different optical transmission properties, flexuralmodulus of elasticity, impact strength (Notched Izod), flexuralrigidity, impact resistance, mechanical properties, physical properties,and other optical properties. In one embodiment, the couplinglightguides comprise a material with a flexural modulus less than 2gigapascals and the lightguide or lightguide region comprises a materialwith a flexural modulus greater than 2 gigapascals. In one embodiment,the lightguide is a relatively stiff polycarbonate material and thecoupling lightguides comprise a flexible elastomer or polyethylene. Inanother embodiment, the lightguide is an acrylic material and thecoupling lightguides comprise a flexible fluoropolymer, elastomer orpolyethylene. In one embodiment, the average thickness of the lightguideregion or lightguide is more than 0.1 mm thicker than the averagethickness of at least one coupling lightguide.

In one embodiment, at least one coupling lightguide is optically coupledto at least one selected from the group: a surface, edge, or interiorregion, of an input light coupler, light mixing region, lightguideregion, and lightguide. In another embodiment, a film comprisingparallel linear cuts along a direction of a film is bonded to a surfaceof a film in the extrusion process such that the strips are opticallycoupled to the lightguide film and the cut regions can be cut in thetransverse direction to “free” the strips so that they can be broughttogether to form a light input surface of a light input coupler.

Coupling Lightguides Bonded to Each Other

In one embodiment, one or more coupling lightguides substantially bondto themselves in on or more regions. In another embodiment, the array ofcoupling lightguides are optically coupled to each other in at least oneselected from the group: 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, and 80%of a region where the coupling lightguides are adjacent each other. Inone embodiment, the coupling lightguides are optically coupled to eachother by a natural surface adhesion between adjacent couplinglightguides in one or more regions near the light input surface, withinthe array of coupling lightguides, along the length of and edge of thelightguide or lightguide region, or behind the lightguide region. Inanother embodiment, two or more coupling lightguides are opticallycoupled, operatively coupled, or adhered to each other in one or moreregions.

Coupling Lightguides Ending within the Lightguide Region

In one embodiment, a film comprising parallel linear cuts along themachine direction of a film is guided between two extrusion layers orcoatings such that the ends of the strips are effectively inside theother two layers or regions. In another embodiment, one or more edges ofthe coupling lightguide are optically couple to a layer or coating (suchas an adhesive) within a lightguide to reduce scattering and increaselight coupling into the lightguide. This could be done in a single stepor in sequential steps. By having strips or coupling lightguidesterminate within a lightguide, lightguide region, or light mixingregion, there are fewer back reflections from the air-end edge interfaceas there would be on a simple surface bonding because the edge wouldeffectively be optically coupled into the volume of the lighttransmitting material forming the light mixing region, lightguide regionor lightguide (assuming the material near the edge could flow or deformaround the edge or another material is used (such as an adhesive) topromote the optical coupling of the edge and potentially surfaces.

Strip or Coupling Lightguide Registration or Securing Feature

In one embodiment, at least one strip near the central region of a lightinput coupler is used to align or guide the coupling strips or toconnect the coupling lightguides to a lightguide or housing. In afold-design wherein the coupling lightguides are folded toward thecenter of the light input coupler, a central strip or lightguide may notbe folded to receive light from the light source due to geometricallimitations on the inability to fold the central strip or couplinglightguide. This central strip or coupling lightguide may be used forone selected from the group: aligning the light input coupler or housingto the strips (or lightguide), tightening the fold of the strips orcoupling lightguide stack to reduce the volume, registering, securing orlocking down the position of the light input coupler housing, provide alever or arm to pull together components of a folding mechanism whichbend or fold the coupling lightguides, coupling lightguides, lightguideor other element relative to one of the aforementioned elements.

Tab Region

In one embodiment, one or more of the strips or coupling lightguidescomprises a tab or tab region that is used to register, align, or securethe location of the strip or coupling lightguide relative to thehousing, folder, holder, lightguide, light source, light input coupler,or other element of the light emitting device. In another embodiment, atleast one strip or coupling lightguide comprises a pin, hole, cut-out,tab, or other feature useful for registering, aligning, or securing thelocation of the strip or coupling lightguide. In one embodiment, the tabregion is disposed at a side of one or more light sources when the lightsource is disposed to couple light into a coupling lightguide. In afurther embodiment, the tab region may be removed, by tearing forexample, after the stacking of the coupling lightguides. For example,the coupling lightguides may have an opening or aperture cut within thecoupling lightguides that align to form a cavity within which the lightemitting region of the light source may be disposed such that the lightfrom the light source is directed into the light input surfaces of thecoupling lightguides. After physically constraining the couplinglightguides (by adhering them to each other or to another element or bymechanical clamping, alignment guide or other means for example), all ora portion of the tab region may be removed by tearing without reducingthe optical quality of the light input surface disposed to receive lightfrom the light source. In another embodiment, the tab region comprisesone or more perforations or cut regions that promote the tearing orremoval of the tab region along a predetermined path.

In another embodiment, the tab region or region of the couplinglightguides comprising registration or alignment openings or aperturesare stacked such that the openings or apertures align onto aregistration pin or post disposed on or physically coupled to the lightturning optical element, light collimating optical element, lightcoupling element, light source, light source circuit board, relativeposition maintaining element, light input coupler housing, or otherelement of the light input coupler such that the light input surfaces ofthe coupling lightguides are aligned and disposed to receive light fromthe element or light source.

The tab region may comprise registration openings or apertures on eitherside of the openings or apertures forming the cavity in couplinglightguide such that registration pins assist in the aligning andrelative positioning of the coupling lightguides. In another embodiment,one or more coupling lightguides (folded non-folded) comprise low lightloss registration openings or apertures in a low light flux region. Lowlight loss registration openings or apertures in low light flux regionsof the coupling lightguides are those wherein less than one of thefollowing: 2%, 5%, 10% and 20% of the light flux from a light sourcereaches the opening or aperture directly or indirectly within a couplinglightguide. This can be measured by filling the openings or apertureswith a black light absorbing material such as a black latex paint andmeasuring the loss in light output from the light emitting region usingan integrating sphere.

In another embodiment, the tab regions of the coupling lightguides allowfor the light input surface of the stacked array of coupling lightguidesto be formed after stacking the coupling lightguides such that animproved optical finish of the light input surface can be obtained. Forexample, in one embodiment, the array of coupling lightguides is stackedwith a tab region extended from the input region of the couplinglightguides. The stacked array is then cut in the tab region (andoptionally mechanically, thermally, chemically or otherwise polished) toprovide a continuous smooth input surface.

Holding the Coupling Lightguide Position Relative to the Light Source orOptical Element

In another embodiment, the tab region may be cut to provide a physicallyconstraining mechanism for an optical element or the light source. Forexample, in one embodiment, the tab region of the coupling lightguidescomprises one or more arms or ridges such that when the couplinglightguides are stacked in an array, the arms or ridges form aconstraining groove or cavity to substantially maintain the opticalelement or light source in at least one direction. In anotherembodiment, the stacked array of coupling lightguides form a cavity thatallows an extended ridge of a light collimating optic to be positionedwithin the cavity such that the light collimating optic substantiallymaintains its position relative to the coupling lightguides. Variousforms of grooves, ridges, interlocking shapes, pins, openings, aperturesand other constraining shapes may be used with the optical element (suchas the light turning optical element or light collimating opticalelement) or the light source (or housing of the light source) and theshape cut into the coupling lightguides to constrain the element orlight source when placed into the interlocking shape.

Extended Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are extended such that thecoupling lightguides may be folded in an organized fashion by using arelative position maintaining element. By extending the couplinglightguides, the relative position and order of the coupling lightguidesmay be maintained during the aligning and stacking process such that thecoupling lightguides may be stacked and aligned in an organized fashion.For example, in one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are extendedwith an inverted shape such that they are mirrored along a firstdirection. In one embodiment, the folding operation creates two stackedarrays of coupling lightguides which may be used to form two differentlight emitting devices or two illuminated regions illuminated by thesame light source. In another embodiment, a first relative positionmaintaining element substantially maintains the relative position of thecoupling lightguides near a first lightguide region and a secondrelative position maintaining element substantially maintains therelative position of the extended regions of the coupling lightguides(which may form the coupling lightguides of a second light emittingdevice or region).

Varying Coupling Lightguide Thickness

In one embodiment, at least one coupling lightguide or strip varies inthe thickness direction along the path of the light propagating throughthe lightguide. In one embodiment, at least one coupling lightguide orstrip varies in the thickness direction substantially perpendicular tothe path of the light propagating through the lightguide. In anotherembodiment, the dimension of at least one coupling lightguide or stripvaries in a direction parallel to the optical axis of the light emittingdevice along the path of the light propagating through the lightguide.In one embodiment, the thickness of the coupling lightguide increases asthe light propagates from a light source to the light mixing region,lightguide, or lightguide region. In one embodiment, the thickness ofthe coupling lightguide decreases as the light propagates from a lightsource to the light mixing region, lightguide, or lightguide region. Inone embodiment, the thickness of a coupling lightguide in a first regiondivided by the thickness of the coupling lightguide in a second regionis greater than one selected from the group: 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 20, 40, 60and 100.

Light Turning Optical Elements or Edges for Light Source Placement

In one embodiment, the light turning optical elements or light turningcoupling lightguide edges may be used to position the light source onthe same side of the lightguide region as the coupling lightguides. Inanother embodiment, the light turning optical elements or light turningcoupling lightguide edges may be used to position the light sourcewithin the extended boundaries of the coupling lightguides such that thelight source does not extend past an edge of the lightguide, lightemitting region, edges of the display area, lightguide region or bevel.For example, a film-based lightguide with coupling lightguides foldedalong one edge may have angled edges or a region of the lightguideregion not to be directly illuminated from a coupling lightguide inorder to position the light source within the region bounded by theedges of the lightguide region. Alternatively, the stack of couplinglightguides along one edge may have light turning edges near the lightsource ends such that the light source can be disposed with lightdirected toward the lightguide region. This can allow the light to beturned and directed into the coupling lightguides and when the lightsource is folded behind the display, the light source does not extendpast the outer display edges.

Light Mixing Region

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light mixingregion disposed in an optical path between the light input coupler andthe lightguide region. The light mixing region can provide a region forthe light output from individual coupling lightguides to mix togetherand improve at least one of the spatial luminance uniformity, spatialcolor uniformity, angular color uniformity, angular luminanceuniformity, angular luminous intensity uniformity or any combinationthereof within a region of the lightguide or of the surface or output ofthe light emitting region or light emitting device. In one embodiment,the width of the light mixing region is selected from a range from 0.1mm (for small displays) to more than 3.048 meters (for largebillboards). In one embodiment, the light mixing region is the regiondisposed along an optical path near the end region of the couplinglightguides whereupon light from two or more coupling lightguides mayinter-mix and subsequently propagate to a light emitting region of thelightguide. In one embodiment, the light mixing region is formed fromthe same component or material as at least one of the lightguide,lightguide region, light input coupler, and coupling lightguides. Inanother embodiment, the light mixing region comprises a material that isdifferent than at least one selected from the group: lightguide,lightguide region, light input coupler, and coupling lightguides. Thelight mixing region may be a rectangular, square or other shaped regionor it may be a peripheral region surrounding all or a portion of thelight emitting region or lightguide region. In one embodiment, thesurface area of the light mixing region of a light emitting device isone selected from the group: less than 1%, less than 5%, less than 10%,less than 20%, less than 30%, less than 40%, less than 50%, less than60%, less than 70%, greater than 20%, greater than 30%, greater than 40%greater than 50%, greater than 60%, greater than 70%, greater than 80%,greater than 90%, 1-10%, 10-20%, 20-50%, 50-70%, 70-90%, 80-95% of thetotal outer surface area of the light emitting surface or the area ofthe light emitting surface from which light is emitted.

In one embodiment, a film-based lightguide comprises a light mixingregion with a lateral dimension longer than a coupling lightguide widthand the coupling lightguides do not extend from the entire edge regioncorresponding to the light emitting region of the lightguide. In oneembodiment, the width of the gap along the edge without a couplinglightguide is greater than one of the following: 1 times, 2 times, 3times, or 4 times the average width of the neighboring couplinglightguides. In a further embodiment, the width of the gap along theedge without a coupling lightguide is greater than one of the following:1 times, 2 times, 3 times, or 4 times the lateral width of the lightmixing region. For example, in one embodiment, a film-based lightguidecomprises coupling lightguides with a width of 2 centimeters disposedalong a light mixing region that is 4 centimeters long in the lateraldirection (such as can readily be the case if the light mixing regionfolds behind a reflective display for a film-based frontlight), exceptin a central region where there is a 2 centimeter gap without a couplinglightguide extension. In this embodiment, the light within theneighboring coupling lightguides may spread into the gap region of thelight mixing region not illuminated by a coupling lightguide directlyand mix together such that the light in the light emitting area issufficiently uniform. In a further embodiment, a light mixing regioncomprises two or more gaps without coupling lightguides extendingtherefrom. In a further embodiment, a light mixing region comprisesalternating gaps between the coupling lightguide extensions along anedge of a film-based lightguide.

Light Output Optical Element

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light outputoptical element disposed to receive light from a light source and couplethe light into a film-based lightguide. In one embodiment, the lightoutput optical element is light transmitting optical element thatreceives light from a light source and transmits light from the lightsource through a light transmitting region such that when opticallycoupled to a film-based lightguide, a portion of the light willpropagate into the lightguide through a light receiving region andpropagate under total internal reflection. In another embodiment, thelight output optical element has an average or maximum thickness greaterthan 250 microns and is formed by injection molding, compressionmolding, thermoforming, casting, extrusion or other non-film-basedpolymer component forming method. In another embodiment, the lightoutput optical element is not contiguous with the film-based lightguidecomprising the light emitting region of the light emitting device whenthe element or the lightguide is formed. For example, the light outputoptical element may be a sheet of acrylic extruded to a thickness of 500microns or 1 millimeter, an injection molded tapered optical lightguide,or a cross-linked cast lightguide cured with a region of the lightguidefilm embedded within the lightguide optical element. In anotherembodiment, for example, the light output optical element is aninjection molded acrylic lightguide that substantially generates a lineof light output and an edge or surface is optically coupled to afilm-based lightguide. In a further embodiment, the light output opticalelement is an acrylic injection molded optical element and is opticallycoupled to a film-based lightguide comprising an acrylic or siliconecore region. In the previous embodiment, the acrylic materials may bethe same or comprise similar types of components, however, they areformed separately and one is not a contiguous extension of the other. Inanother embodiment, the region of the light output optical elementthrough which light is transmitted from the light source into thefilm-based lightguide comprises at least one material that is not in thecore lightguide layer of the light transmitting film-based lightguide.In another embodiment, the light output optical element is tapered inthe direction toward the light transmitting region or light extractionregion of a film-based lightguide. In one embodiment, the light outputoptical element also serves another function within the light emittingdevice selected from the group: a housing, a housing component, a lightturning optical element, a light collimating optical element, a lightcoupling optical element, an optical window, a relative positionmaintaining element, a low contact region, a light input coupler, alight redirecting optical element, one or more coupling lightguides,holding mechanism, and holder.

Thickness of the Light Output Optical Element

In one embodiment, the average or maximum thickness of the light outputoptical element in the region comprising the light transmitting regionin a direction substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of thelight propagating within the optical element is less than one selectedfrom the group: 100%, 90%, 70%, 50%, 25%, 10%, and 5% of the dimensionof the light transmitting region of the light output optical element inthe direction parallel to the optical axis of the light within the lightoutput optical element. In another embodiment, the average or maximumthickness of the light output optical element in the region comprisingthe light transmitting region is less than one selected from the group:100%, 90%, 70%, 50%, 25%, 10%, and 5% of the thickness of the core layerof the film-based lightguide in a direction substantially perpendicularto the optical axis of the light propagating within the optical element.In one embodiment, the light output optical element is thinner than thecore layer of the film-based lightguide such that a wider range of inputangles of light propagating into the core layer has an opportunity topropagate laterally within the core layer (in the direction of theoptical axis) so that it reaches the cladding layer (or air interface)and totally internally reflects instead of propagating back into thelight output optical element.

Cladding Layer

In one embodiment, at least one of the light input coupler, couplinglightguide, light mixing region, lightguide region, and lightguidecomprises a cladding layer optically coupled to at least one surface. Acladding region, as used herein, is a layer optically coupled to asurface wherein the cladding layer comprises a material with arefractive index, n_(clad), less than the refractive index of thematerial, n_(m), of the surface to which it is optically coupled. In oneembodiment, n_(m)-n_(dad) is one selected from the group: 0.001-0.005,0.001-0.01, 0.001-0.1, 0.001-0.2, 0.001-0.3, 0.001-0.4, 0.01-0.1,0.1-0.5, 0.1-0.3, 0.2-0.5, greater than 0.01, greater than 0.1, greaterthan 0.2, and greater than 0.3. In one embodiment, the cladding is oneselected from the group: methyl based silicone pressure sensitiveadhesive, fluoropolymer material (applied with using coating comprisinga fluoropolymer substantially dissolved in a solvent), and afluoropolymer film. The cladding layer may be incorporated to provide aseparation layer between the core or core part of a lightguide regionand the outer surface to reduce undesirable out-coupling (for example,frustrated totally internally reflected light by touching the film withan oily finger) from the core or core region of a lightguide. Componentsor objects such as additional films, layers, objects, fingers, dust etc.that come in contact or optical contact directly with a core or coreregion of a lightguide may couple light out of the lightguide, absorblight or transfer the totally internally reflected light into a newlayer. By adding a cladding layer with a lower refractive index than thecore, a portion of the light will totally internally reflect at thecore-cladding layer interface. Cladding layers may also be used toprovide the benefit of at least one of increased rigidity, increasedflexural modulus, increased impact resistance, anti-glare properties,provide an intermediate layer for combining with other layers such as inthe case of a cladding functioning as a tie layer or a base or substratefor an anti-reflection coating, a substrate for an optical componentsuch as a polarizer, liquid crystal material, increased scratchresistance, provide additional functionality (such as a low-tackadhesive to bond the lightguide region to another element, a window“cling type” film such as a highly plasticized PVC). The cladding layermay be an adhesive, such as a low refractive index silicone adhesivewhich is optically coupled to another element of the device, thelightguide, the lightguide region, the light mixing region, the lightinput coupler, or a combination of one or more of the aforementionedelements or regions. In one embodiment, a cladding layer is opticallycoupled to a rear polarizer in a backlit liquid crystal display. Inanother embodiment, the cladding layer is optically coupled to apolarizer or outer surface of a front-lit display such as anelectrophoretic display, e-book display, e-reader display, MEMs typedisplay, electronic paper displays such as E-Ink® display by E InkCorporation, reflective or partially reflective LCD display, cholestericdisplay, or other display capable of being illuminated from the front.In another embodiment, the cladding layer is an adhesive that bonds thelightguide or lightguide region to a component such as a substrate(glass or polymer), optical element (such as a polarizer, retarder film,diffuser film, brightness enhancement film, protective film (such as aprotective polycarbonate film), the light input coupler, couplinglightguides, or other element of the light emitting device. In oneembodiment, the cladding layer is separated from the lightguide orlightguide region core layer by at least one additional layer oradhesive.

In one embodiment, a region of cladding material is removed or is absentin the region wherein the lightguide layer or lightguide is opticallycoupled to another region of the lightguide wherein the cladding isremoved or absent such that light can couple between the two regions. Inone embodiment, the cladding is removed or absent in a region near anedge of a lightguide, lightguide region, strip or region cut from alightguide region, or coupling lightguide such that light nearing theedge of the lightguide can be redirected by folding or bending theregion back onto a region of the lightguide wherein the cladding hasbeen removed where the regions are optically coupled together. Inanother embodiment, the cladding is removed or absent in the regiondisposed between the lightguide regions of two coupling lightguidesdisposed to receive light from a light source or near a light inputsurface. By removing or not applying or disposing a cladding in theregion between the input ends of two or more coupling lightguidesdisposed to receive light from a light source, light is not directlycoupled into the cladding region edge.

In one embodiment, the cladding region is optically coupled to one ormore surfaces of the light mixing region to prevent out-coupling oflight from the lightguide when it is in contact with another component.In this embodiment, the cladding also enables the cladding and lightmixing region to be physically coupled to another component.

Cladding Location

In one embodiment, the cladding region is optically coupled to at leastone selected from the group: lightguide, lightguide region, light mixingregion, one surface of the lightguide, two surfaces of the lightguide,light input coupler, coupling lightguides, and an outer surface of thefilm. In another embodiment, the cladding is disposed in optical contactwith the lightguide, lightguide region, or layer or layers opticallycoupled to the lightguide and the cladding material is not disposed onone or more coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, the couplinglightguides do not comprise a cladding layer between the core regions inthe region near the light input surface or light source. In anotherembodiment, the core regions may be pressed or held together and theedges may be cut and/or polished after stacking or assembly to form alight input surface or a light turning edge that is flat, curved, or acombination thereof. In another embodiment, the cladding layer is apressure sensitive adhesive and the release liner for the pressuresensitive adhesive is selectively removed in the region of one or morecoupling lightguides that are stacked or aligned together into an arraysuch that the cladding helps maintain the relative position of thecoupling lightguides relative to each other. In another embodiment, theprotective liner is removed from the inner cladding regions of thecoupling lightguides and is left on one or both outer surfaces of theouter coupling lightguides.

In one embodiment, a cladding layer is disposed on one or both oppositesurfaces of the light emitting region and is not disposed between two ormore coupling lightguides at the light input surface. For example, inone embodiment, a mask layer is applied to a film based lightguidecorresponding to the end regions of the coupling lightguides that willform the light input surface after cutting (and possibly the couplinglightguides) and the film is coated on one or both sides with a lowrefractive index coating. In this embodiment, when the mask is removedand the coupling lightguides are folded (using, for example a relativeposition maintaining element) and stacked, the light input surface cancomprises core layers without cladding layers and the light emittingregion can comprise a cladding layer (and the light mixing region mayalso comprise a cladding and/or light absorbing region), which isbeneficial for optical efficiency (light is directed into the claddingat the input surface) and in applications such as film-based frontlightsfor reflective or transflective displays where a cladding may be desiredin the light emitting region.

In another embodiment, the protective liner of at least one outersurface of the outer coupling lightguides is removed such that the stackof coupling lightguides may be bonded to one of the following: a circuitboard, a non-folded coupling lightguide, a light collimating opticalelement, a light turning optical element, a light coupling opticalelement, a flexible connector or substrate for a display or touchscreen,a second array of stacked coupling lightguides, a light input couplerhousing, a light emitting device housing, a thermal transfer element, aheat sink, a light source, an alignment guide, a registration guide orcomponent comprising a window for the light input surface, and anysuitable element disposed on and/or physically coupled to an element ofthe light input surface or light emitting device. In one embodiment, thecoupling lightguides do not comprise a cladding region on either planarside and optical loss at the bends or folds in the coupling lightguidesis reduced. In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides do notcomprise a cladding region on either planar side and the light inputsurface input coupling efficiency is increased due to the light inputsurface area having a higher concentration of lightguide receivedsurface relative to a lightguide with at least one cladding. In afurther embodiment, the light emitting region has at least one claddingregion or layer and the percentage of the area of the light inputsurface of the coupling lightguides disposed to transmit light into thelightguide portion of the coupling lightguides is greater than one ofthe following: 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98% and 99%. The cladding may beon one side only of the lightguide or the light emitting device could bedesigned to be optically coupled to a material with a refractive indexlower than the lightguide, such as in the case with a plasticized PVCfilm (n=1.53) (or other low-tack material) temporarily adhered to aglass window (n=1.51).

In one embodiment, the cladding on at least one surface of thelightguide is applied (such as coated or co-extruded) and the claddingon the coupling lightguides is subsequently removed. In a furtherembodiment, the cladding applied on the surface of the lightguide (orthe lightguide is applied onto the surface of the cladding) such thatthe regions corresponding to the coupling lightguides do not have acladding. For example, the cladding material could be extruded or coatedonto a lightguide film in a central region wherein the outer sides ofthe film will comprise coupling lightguides. Similarly, the cladding maybe absent on the coupling lightguides in the region disposed in closeproximity to one or more light sources or the light input surface.

In one embodiment, two or more core regions of the coupling lightguidesdo not comprise a cladding region between the core regions in a regionof the coupling lightguide disposed within a distance selected from thegroup: 1 millimeter, 2 millimeters, 4 millimeters, and 8 millimetersfrom the light input surface edge of the coupling lightguides. In afurther embodiment, two or more core regions of the coupling lightguidesdo not comprise a cladding region between the core regions in a regionof the coupling lightguide disposed within a distance selected from thegroup: 10%, 20%, 50%, 100%, 200%, and 300% of the combined thicknessesof the cores of the coupling lightguides disposed to receive light fromthe light source from the light input surface edge of the couplinglightguides. In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides in the regionproximate the light input surface do not comprise cladding between thecore regions (but may contain cladding on the outer surfaces of thecollection of coupling lightguides) and the coupling lightguides areoptically coupled together with an index-matching adhesive or materialor the coupling lightguides are optically bonded, fused, orthermo-mechanically welded together by applying heat and pressure. In afurther embodiment, a light source is disposed at a distance to thelight input surface of the coupling lightguides less than one selectedfrom the group: 0.5 millimeter, 1 millimeter, 2 millimeters, 4millimeters, and 6 millimeters and the dimension of the light inputsurface in the first direction parallel to the thickness direction ofthe coupling lightguides is greater than one selected from the group:100%, 110%, 120%, 130%, 150%, 180%, and 200% the dimension of the lightemitting surface of the light source in the first direction. In anotherembodiment, disposing an index-matching material between the coreregions of the coupling lightguides or optically coupling or boding thecoupling lightguides together in the region proximate the light sourceoptically couples at least one selected from the group: 10%, 20%, 30%,40%, and 50% more light into the coupling lightguides than would becoupled into the coupling lightguides with the cladding regionsextending substantially to the light input edge of the couplinglightguide. In one embodiment, the index-matching adhesive or materialhas a refractive index difference from the core region less than oneselected from the group: 0.1, 0.08, 0.05, and 0.02. In anotherembodiment, the index-matching adhesive or material has a refractiveindex greater by less than one selected from the group: 0.1, 0.08, 0.05,and 0.02 the refractive index of the core region. In a furtherembodiment, a cladding region is disposed between a first set of coreregions of coupling lightguides and for a second set of couplinglightguides an index-matching region is disposed between the coreregions of the coupling lightguides or they are fused together. In afurther embodiment, the coupling lightguides disposed to receive lightfrom the geometric center of the light emitting area of the light sourcewithin a first angle of the optical axis of the light source havecladding regions disposed between the core regions, and the core regionsat angles larger than the first angle have index-matching regionsdisposed between the core regions of the coupling lightguides or theyare fused together. In one embodiment, the first angle is selected fromthe group: 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 30 degrees, 40 degrees, 50 degrees,and 60 degrees. In the aforementioned embodiments, the cladding regionmay be a low refractive index material or air. In a further embodiment,the total thickness of the coupling lightguides in the region disposedto receive light from a light source to be coupled into the couplinglightguides is less than n times the thickness of the lightguide regionwhere n is the number of coupling lightguides. In a further embodiment,the total thickness of the coupling lightguides in the region disposedto receive light from a light source to be coupled into the couplinglightguides is substantially equal to n times the thickness of thelightguide layer within the lightguide region.

Cladding Thickness

In a one embodiment, the average thickness of one or both claddinglayers of the lightguide is less than one selected from the group: 100microns, 60 microns, 30 microns, 20 microns, 10 microns, 6 microns, 4microns, 2 microns, 1 micron, 0.8 microns, 0.5 microns, 0.3 microns, and0.1 microns.

In a total internal reflection condition, the penetration depth, λ_(e)of the evanescent wave light from the denser region into the rarermedium from the interface at which the amplitude of the light in therarer medium is 1/e that at the boundary is given by the equation:

$\lambda_{e =}\frac{\lambda_{0}}{2{\pi \left\lbrack {\left( {n_{s}^{2}\left( {\sin \mspace{11mu} \vartheta_{i}} \right)}^{2} \right) - n_{e}^{2}} \right\rbrack}^{\frac{1}{2}}}$

where λ₀ is the wavelength of the light in a vacuum, n_(s) is therefractive index of the denser medium (core region) and n_(e) is therefractive index of the rarer medium (cladding layer) and θ_(i) is theangle of incidence to the interface within the denser medium. Theequation for the penetration depth illustrates that for many of theangular ranges above the critical angle, the light propagating withinthe lightguide does not need a very thick cladding thickness to maintainthe lightguide condition. For example, light within the visiblewavelength range of 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers propagating withina silicone film-based core region of refractive index 1.47 with afluoropolymer cladding material with a refractive index of 1.33 has acritical angle at about 65 degrees and the light propagating between 70degrees and 90 degrees has a 1/e penetration depth, λ_(e), less thanabout 0.3 microns. In this example, the cladding region thickness can beabout 0.3 microns and the lightguide will significantly maintain visiblelight transmission in a lightguide condition from about 70 degrees and90 degrees from the normal to the interface. In another embodiment, theratio of the thickness of the core layer to one or more cladding layersis greater than one selected from the group: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, 30, 40,and 60 to one. In one embodiment, a high core to cladding layerthickness ratio where the cladding extends over the light emittingregion and the coupling lightguides enables more light to be coupledinto the core layer at the light input surface because the claddingregions represent a lower percentage of the surface area at the lightinput surface.

In one embodiment, the cladding layer comprises an adhesive such as asilicone-based adhesive, acrylate-based adhesive, epoxy, radiationcurable adhesive, UV curable adhesive, or other light transmittingadhesive. The cladding layer material may comprise light scatteringdomains and may scatter light anisotropically or isotropically. In oneembodiment, the cladding layer is an adhesive such as those described inU.S. Pat. No. 6,727,313. In another embodiment, the cladding materialcomprises domains less than 200 nm in size with a low refractive indexsuch as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,773,801. Other low refractiveindex materials, fluoropolymer materials, polymers and adhesives may beused such as those disclosed U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,887,334 and 6,827,886 andU.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/795,534.

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a lightguidewith a cladding on at least one side of a lightguide with a thicknesswithin one selected from the group: 0.1-10, 0.5-5, 0.8-2, 0.9-1.5, 1-10,0.1-1, and 1-5 times a 1/e penetration depth, λ_(e), at for an angle, θ,selected from the group: 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, and 10 degrees fromthe core-cladding interface normal within the lightguide; and a lightoutput coupler or light extraction region (or film) is disposed tocouple a first portion of incident light out of the lightguide when inoptical contact with the cladding layer. For example, in one embodiment,a removable and replaceable light extraction film comprising highrefractive index light scattering features (such as TiO₂ or highrefractive index glass particles, beads, or flakes) is disposed upon thecladding layer of a lightguide in a light fixture comprising apolycarbonate lightguide with an amorphous fluoropolymer cladding ofthickness X. In this embodiment, in the regions of the removable andreplaceable light extraction film with the scattering features, thelight can be frustrated from the lightguide and escape the lightguide.In this embodiment, a light extracting region or film may be used with alightguide with a cladding region to couple light out of the lightguide.In this embodiment, a cladding region can help protect the lightguide(from scratches, unintentional total internal reflection frustration orabsorption when in contact with a surface, for example) while stillallowing a removable and replaceable light extraction film to allow foruser configurable light output properties. In another embodiment, atleast one film or component selected from the group: a light outputcoupling film, a distribution lightguide, and a light extraction featureis optically coupled to, disposed upon, or formed in a cladding regionand couples a first portion of light out of the lightguide and claddingregion. In one embodiment the first portion is greater than one selectedfrom the group: 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 30%, 50%, and 70% of the flux withinthe lightguide or within the region comprising the thin cladding layerand film or component.

In one embodiment, the light input surface disposed to receive lightfrom the light source does not have a cladding layer. In one embodiment,the ratio of the cladding area to the core layer area at the light inputsurface is greater than 0 and less than one selected from the group:0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.02, and 0.01. In another embodiment,the ratio of the cladding area to the core layer area in the regions ofthe light input surface receiving light from the light source with atleast 5% of the peak luminous intensity at the light input surface isgreater than 0 and less than one selected from the group: 0.5, 0.4, 0.3,0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.02, and 0.01.

Cladding Layer Materials

Fluoropolymer materials may be used a low refractive index claddingmaterial and may be broadly categorized into one of two basic classes. Afirst class includes those amorphous fluoropolymers comprisinginterpolymerized units derived from vinylidene fluoride (VDF) andhexafluoropropylene (HFP) and optionally tetrafluoroethylene (TFE)monomers. Examples of such are commercially available from 3M Company asDyneon™ Fluoroelastomer FC 2145 and FT 2430. Additional amorphousfluoropolymers that can be used in embodiments are, for example,VDF-chlorotrifluoroethylene copolymers. One suchVDF-chlorotrifluoroethylene copolymer is commercially known as Kel-F™3700, available from 3M Company. As used herein, amorphousfluoropolymers are materials that contain essentially no crystallinityor possess no significant melting point as determined for example bydifferential scanning caloriometry (DSC). For the purpose of thisdiscussion, a copolymer is defined as a polymeric material resultingfrom the simultaneous polymerization of two or more dissimilar monomersand a homopolymer is a polymeric material resulting from thepolymerization of a single monomer.

The second significant class of fluoropolymers useful in an embodimentare those homo and copolymers based on fluorinated monomers such as TFEor VDF which do contain a crystalline melting point such aspolyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF, available commercially from 3M company asDyneon™ PVDF, or more preferable thermoplastic copolymers of TFE such asthose based on the crystalline microstructure of TFE-HFP-VDF. Examplesof such polymers are those available from 3M under the trade nameDyneon™ Fluoroplastics THV™ 200.

A general description and preparation of these classes of fluoropolymerscan be found in Encyclopedia Chemical Technology, FluorocarbonElastomers, Kirk-Othmer (1993), or in Modern Fluoropolymers, J. ScheirsEd, (1997), J Wiley Science, Chapters 2, 13, and 32. (ISBN0-471-97055-7).

In one embodiment, the fluoropolymers are copolymers formed from theconstituent monomers known as tetrafluoroethylene (“TFE”),hexafluoropropylene (“HFP”), and vinylidene fluoride (“VdF,” “VF2,”).The monomer structures for these constituents are shown below as (1),(2) and (3):

TFE: CF2=CF2  (1)

VDF: CH2=CF2  (2)

HFP: CF2=CF−CF3  (3)

In one embodiment, the preferred fluoropolymer consists of at least twoof the constituent monomers (HFP and VDF), and more preferably all threeof the constituents monomers in varying molar amounts. Additionalmonomers not depicted above but may also be useful in an embodimentinclude perfluorovinyl ether monomers of the general structure: CF2=CF-OR f, wherein R f can be a branched or linear perfluoroalkylradical of 1-8 carbons and can itself contain additional heteroatomssuch as oxygen. Specific examples are perfluoromethyl vinyl ether,perfluoropropyl vinyl ether, and perfluoro(3-methoxy-propyl) vinylether. Additional monomer examples are found in WO00/12754 to Worm,assigned to 3M, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,214,100 to Carlson. Otherfluoropolymer materials may be used such as those disclosed in U.S.patent application Ser. No. 11/026,614.

In one embodiment, the cladding material is birefringent and therefractive index in at least a first direction is less than refractiveindex of the lightguide region, lightguide core, or material to which itis optically coupled.

Collimated light propagating through a material may be reduced inintensity after passing through the material due to scattering(scattering loss coefficient), absorption (absorption coefficient), or acombination of scattering and absorption (attenuation coefficient). Inone embodiment, the cladding comprises a material with an averageabsorption coefficient for collimated light less than one selected fromthe group: 0.03 cm⁻¹, 0.02 cm⁻¹, 0.01 cm⁻¹, and 0.005 cm⁻¹ over thevisible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers. Inanother embodiment, the cladding comprises a material with an averagescattering loss coefficient for collimated light less than one selectedfrom the group: 0.03 cm⁻¹, 0.02 cm⁻¹, 0.01 cm⁻¹, and 0.005 cm⁻¹ over thevisible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers. Inanother embodiment, the cladding comprises a material with an averageattenuation coefficient for collimated light less than one selected fromthe group: 0.03 cm⁻¹, 0.02 cm⁻¹, 0.01 cm⁻¹, and 0.005 cm⁻¹ over thevisible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers.

In a further embodiment, a lightguide comprises a hard cladding layerthat substantially protects a soft core layer (such as a soft siliconeor silicone elastomer).

In one embodiment, a lightguide comprises a core material with aDurometer Shore A hardness (JIS) less than 50 and at least one claddinglayer with a Durometer Shore A hardness (JIS) greater than 50. In oneembodiment, a lightguide comprises a core material with an ASTM D638—10Young's Modulus less than 2 MPa and at least one cladding layer with anASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus greater than 2 MPa at 25 degrees Celsius.In another embodiment, a lightguide comprises a core material with anASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus less than 1.5 MPa and at least one claddinglayer with an ASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus greater than 2 MPa at 25degrees Celsius. In a further embodiment, a lightguide comprises a corematerial with an ASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus less than 1 MPa and atleast one cladding layer with an ASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus greaterthan 2 MPa at 25 degrees Celsius.

In one embodiment, a lightguide comprises a core material with an ASTMD638—10 Young's Modulus less than 2 MPa and the lightguide film has anASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus greater than 2 MPa at 25 degrees Celsius.In another embodiment, a lightguide comprises a core material with anASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus less than 1.5 MPa and the lightguide filmhas an ASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus greater than 2 MPa at 25 degreesCelsius. In one embodiment, a lightguide comprises a core material withan ASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus less than 1 MPa and the lightguide filmhas an ASTM D638—10 Young's Modulus greater than 2 MPa at 25 degreesCelsius.

In another embodiment, the cladding comprises a material with aneffective refractive index less than the core layer due tomicrostructures or nanostructures. In another embodiment, the claddinglayer comprises a porous region comprising air or other gas or materialwith a refractive index less than 1.2 such that the effective refractiveindex of the cladding layer is than that of the material around theporous regions. For example, in one embodiment, the cladding layer is anaerogel or arrangement of nano-structured materials disposed on the corelayer that creates a cladding layer with an effective refractive indexless than the core layer. In one embodiment, the nano-structuredmaterial comprises fibers, particles, or domains with an averagediameter or dimension in the plane parallel to the core layer surface orperpendicular to the core layer surface less than one selected from thegroup: 1000, 500, 300, 200, 100, 50, 20, 10, 5, and 2 nanometers. Forexample, in one embodiment, the cladding layer is a coating comprisingnanostructured fibers, comprising polymeric materials such as, withoutlimitation, cellulose, polyester, PVC, PTFE, polystyrene, PMMA, PDMS, orother light transmitting or partially light transmitting materials. Inanother embodiment, materials that normally scattering too much light inbulk form (such as HDPE or polypropylene) to be used as a core orcladding material for lightguide lengths greater than 1 meter (such asscattering greater than 10% of the light out of the lightguide over the1 meter length) are used in a nanostructured form. For example, in oneembodiment, the nanostructured cladding material on the film basedlightguide, when formed into a bulk solid form (such as a 200 micronthick homogeneous film formed without mechanically formed physicalstructures volumetrically or on the surface under film processingconditions designed to minimize haze substantially) has an ASTM hazegreater than 0.5%.

In a further embodiment, the microstructured or nanostructured claddingmaterial comprises a structure that will “wet-out” or optically couplelight into a light extraction feature disposed in physical contact withthe microstructured or nanostructured cladding material. For example, inone embodiment, the light extraction feature comprises nanostructuredsurface features that when in close proximity or contact with thenanostructured cladding region couple light from the cladding region. Inone embodiment, the microstructured or nanostructured cladding materialhas complementary structures to the light extraction feature structures,such as a male-female part or other simple or complex complementarystructures such that the effective refractive index in the regioncomprising the two structures is larger than that of the cladding regionwithout the light extraction features.

Reflective Elements

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: light source,light input surface, light input coupler, coupling lightguide,lightguide region, and lightguide comprises a reflective element orsurface optically coupled to it, disposed adjacent to it, or disposed toreceive light from it wherein the reflective region is one selected fromthe group: specularly reflecting region, diffusely reflecting region,metallic coating on a region (such as an ITO coating, Aluminized PET,Silver coating, etc.), multi-layer reflector dichroic reflector,multi-layer polymeric reflector, giant birefringent optical films,enhanced specular reflector films, reflective ink or particles within acoating or layer, and a white reflective film comprising at least oneselected from the group: titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, and voids. Inanother embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a lightguidewherein at least one light reflecting material selected from the group:a light recycling element, a specularly reflective tape with a diffusereflectance (specular component included) greater than 70%, aretroreflective film (such as a corner cube film or glass bead basedretroreflective film), white reflecting film, and aluminum housing isdisposed near or optically coupled at least one edge region of thelightguide disposed to receive light from the lightguide and redirect afirst portion of light back into the lightguide. In another embodiment,a light emitting device comprises a lightguide wherein at least onelight absorbing material selected from the group: a light absorbing tapewith a diffuse reflectance (specular component included) less than 50%,a region comprising a light absorbing dye or pigment, a regioncomprising carbon black particles, a region comprising light absorbingink, paint, films or surfaces, and a black material is disposed near oroptically coupled at least one edge region of the lightguide disposed toreceive light from the lightguide and redirect a first portion of lightback into the lightguide. In a further embodiment, a light reflectingmaterial and a light absorbing material of the aforementioned types isdisposed near or optically coupled at least one edge region of thelightguide disposed to receive light from the lightguide and redirect afirst portion of light back into the lightguide and absorb a secondportion of incident light. In one embodiment, the light reflecting orlight absorbing material is in the form of a line of ink or tape adheredonto the surface of the lightguide film. In one embodiment, the lightreflecting material is a specularly reflecting tape adhered to the topsurface, edge, and bottom surface of the lightguide near the edge of thelightguide. In another embodiment, the light absorbing material is alight absorbing tape adhered to the top surface, edge, and bottomsurface of the lightguide near the edge of the lightguide. In anotherembodiment, the light absorbing material is a light absorbing ink orpaint (such as a black acrylic based paint) adhered to at least oneselected from the group: the edge, the top surface near the edge, andthe bottom surface near the edge of the lightguide film.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a backlight illuminatinga display or other object to be illuminated and the light emittingregion, lightguide, or lightguide region is disposed between areflective surface or element and the object to be illuminated. Inanother embodiment, the reflective element is a voided white PET filmsuch as TETORON® film UX Series from TEIJIN (Japan). In one embodiment,the reflective element or surface has a diffuse reflectance d/8 with thespecular component included (DR-SCI) measured with a Minolta CM508Dspectrometer greater than one selected from the group: 60%, 70%, 80%,90%, and 95%. In another embodiment, the reflective element or surfacehas a diffuse reflectance d/8 with the specular component excluded(DR-SCE) measured with a Minolta CM508D spectrometer greater than oneselected from the group: 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%. In anotherembodiment, the reflective element or surface has a specular reflectancegreater than one selected from the group: 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%.The specular reflectance, as defined herein, is the percentage of lightreflected from a surface illuminated by a 532 nanometer laser that iswithin a 10 degree (full angle) cone centered about the optical axis ofthe reflected light. This can be measured by using an integrating spherewherein the aperture opening for the integrating sphere is positioned ata distance from the point of reflection such that the angular extent ofthe captured light is 10 degrees full angle. The percent reflection ismeasured against a reflectance standard with a known specularreflectance, a reflectance standard, film, or object that have extremelylow levels of scattering.

Light Reflecting Optical Element is Also a Second Element

In addition to reflecting incident light, in one embodiment, the lightreflecting element is also at least one second element selected from thegroup: light blocking element, low contact area covering element,housing element, light collimating optical element, light turningoptical element and thermal transfer element. In another embodiment, thelight reflecting optical element is a second element within a region ofthe light reflecting optical element. In a further embodiment, the lightreflecting optical element comprises a bend region, tab region, holeregion, layer region, or extended region that is, or forms a componentthereof, a second element. For example, a diffuse light reflectingelement comprising a voided PET diffuse reflecting film may be disposedadjacent the lightguide region to provide diffuse reflection and thefilm may further comprise a specular reflecting metallized coating on anextended region of the film that is bent and functions to collimateincident light from the light source. In another embodiment, the secondelement or second region of the light reflecting optical element iscontiguous with one or more regions of the light reflecting opticalelement. In a further embodiment, the light reflecting optical elementis a region, coating, element or layer physically coupled to a secondelement. In another embodiment, the second element is a region, coating,element or layer physically coupled to a light reflecting opticalelement. For example, in one embodiment, the light reflecting opticalelement is a metalized PET film adhered to the back of a transparent,low contact area film comprising polyurethane and a surface reliefprofile wherein the film combination extends from beneath the lightguideregion to wrap around one or more coupling lightguides. In a furtherembodiment, the light reflecting optical element is physically and/oroptically coupled to the film-based lightguide and is cut during thesame cutting process that generates the coupling lightguides and thelight reflecting optical element is cut into regions that are angled,curved or subsequently angled or curved to form a light collimatingoptical element or a light turning optical element. The size, shape,quantity, orientation, material and location of the tab regions, lightreflecting regions or other regions of the light reflecting opticalelement may vary as needed to provide optical (efficiency, lightcollimation, light redirection, etc.), mechanical (rigidity, connectionwith other elements, alignment, ease of manufacture etc.), or system(reduced volume, increased efficiency, additional functionality such ascolor mixing) benefits such as is known in the art of optical elements,displays, light fixtures, etc. For example, the tab regions of a lightreflecting optical element that specularly reflects incident light maycomprise a parabolic, polynomial or other geometrical cross-sectionalshape such that the angular FWHM intensity, light flux, orientation,uniformity, or light profile is controlled. For example, the curvedcross-sectional shape of one or more tab regions may be that of acompound parabolic concentrator. In another embodiment, the lightreflecting optical element comprises hole regions, tab regions, adhesiveregions or other alignment, physical coupling, optical coupling, orpositioning regions that correspond in shape, size, or location to otherelements of the light emitting device to facilitate at least oneselected from the group: alignment, position, adhesion, physicallycoupling, and optically coupling with a second element or component ofthe light emitting device. For example, the light reflecting opticalelement may be a specularly reflecting or mirror-like metallized PETthat is disposed beneath a substantially planar light emitting regionand extends into the region near the light source and comprises extendedtabs or folding regions that fold and are optically coupled to at leastone outer surface of a light collimating element. In this embodiment,the light reflecting optical element is also a component of a lightcollimating optical element. In another embodiment, the light reflectingoptical element is a specularly reflecting metallized PET film that isoptically coupled to a non-folded coupling lightguide using a pressuresensitive adhesive and is extended toward the light source such that theextended region is optically coupled to an angled surface of a lightcollimating optical element that collimates a portion of the light fromthe light source in the plane perpendicular to the plane comprising thesurface of the non-folded coupling lightguide optically coupled to thelight reflecting optical element.

In one embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a light blockingelement wherein the light reflecting element blocks a first portion oflight escaping the light input coupler, coupling lightguide, lightsource, light redirecting optical element, light collimating opticalelement, light mixing region, lightguide region. In another embodiment,the light reflecting element prevents the visibility of stray light,undesirable light, or a predetermined area of light emitting orredirecting surface from reaching the viewer of a display, sign, or alight emitting device. For example, a metallized specularly reflectingPET film may be disposed to reflect light from one side of thelightguide region back toward the lightguide region and also extend towrap around the stack of coupling lightguide using the PSA opticallycoupled to the coupling lightguides (which may be a cladding layer forthe lightguides) to adhere the metallized PET film to the stack andblock stray light escaping from the coupling lightguides and becomingvisible.

In one embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a low contactarea covering. For example, in one embodiment, the light reflectingelement is a metallized PET film comprising a methacrylate based coatingthat comprises surface relief features. In this embodiment, the lightreflecting element may wrap around the stack without significantlyextracting light from the coupling lightguides when air is used as acladding region. In another embodiment, the reflective element hasnon-planar regions such that the reflective surface is not flat and thecontact area between the light reflecting film and one or more couplinglightguides or lightguide regions is a low percentage of the exposedsurface area.

In another embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a housingelement. For example, in one embodiment, the light reflecting element isa reflective coating on the inner wall of the housing for the couplinglightguides. The housing may have reflective surfaces or reflect lightfrom within (such as an internal reflecting layer or material). Thelight reflecting element may be the housing for the lightguide region orother lightguide or component of the light emitting device.

In a further embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a lightcollimating optical element disposed to reduce the angular full-width athalf maximum intensity of light from a light source before the lightenters one or more coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, the lightreflecting optical element is a specularly reflecting multilayerpolymeric film (such as a giant birefringent optical film) disposed onone side of the light emitting region of lightguide film and extended ina direction toward the light source with folds or curved regions thatare bent or folded to form angled or curved shapes that receive lightfrom the light source and reflect and collimate light toward the inputsurface of one or more coupling lightguides. More than one fold orcurved region may be used to provide different shapes or orientations oflight reflecting surfaces for different regions disposed to receivelight from the light source. For example, an enhanced specularlyreflecting multilayer polymer film (such as a giant birefringent opticalfilm) disposed and optically coupled to the lightguide region of afilm-based lightguide using a low refractive index PSA cladding layermay extend toward the light source and comprise a first extended regionthat wraps around the cladding region to protect and block stray lightand further comprise an extended region that comprises two tabs that arefolded and a cavity wherein the light source may be disposed such thatlight from the light source within a first plane is collimated by theextended region tabs. In one embodiment, the use of the light reflectingelement that is physically coupled to another component in the lightemitting device (such as the film-based lightguide or couplinglightguides) provides an anchor or registration assistance for aligningthe light collimating optical element tabs or reflective regions of thelight reflecting element.

In a further embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a lightturning optical element disposed to redirect the optical axis of lightin a first plane. In one embodiment, the light reflecting opticalelement is a specularly reflecting multilayer polymer film (such as agiant birefringent optical film) disposed on one side of the lightemitting region of lightguide film and extended in a direction towardthe light source with folds or curved regions that are bent or folded toform angled or curved shapes that receive light from the light sourceand reflect and redirect the optical axis of the incident light towardthe input surface of one or more coupling lightguides. More than onefold or curved region may be used to provide different shapes ororientations of light reflecting surfaces for different regions disposedto receive light from the light source. For example, a specularlyreflecting multilayer polymer film disposed and optically coupled to thelightguide region of a film-based lightguide using a low refractiveindex PSA cladding layer may extend toward the light source and comprisean first extended region that wraps around the cladding region toprotect and block stray light and further comprise an extended regionthat comprises two tabs that are folded and a cavity wherein the lightsource may be disposed such that optical axis of the light from thelight source within a first plane in a first direction is redirected bythe extended region tabs into a second direction different than thefirst direction. In one embodiment, the use of the light reflectingelement that is physically coupled to another component in the lightemitting device (such as the film-based lightguide or couplinglightguides) provides an anchor or registration assistance for aligningthe light turning optical element tabs or reflective regions of thelight reflecting element.

In a further embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a thermaltransfer element that transfers heat away from the light source. Forexample, in one embodiment, the light reflecting element is a reflectivealuminum housing disposed on one side of the lightguide region andextending to and thermally coupled to a circuit board that is thermallycoupled to the light source such that heat from the light source isthermally transferred to the aluminum. In another example, the lightreflecting optical element is a high reflectance polished region of analuminum sheet that further comprises (or is thermally coupled to) anextrusion region with fins or heat sink extensions. In anotherembodiment, the thermal transfer element is an aluminum extrusioncomprising the coupling lightguide in an interior region wherein theinner surface of the extrusion is a light reflecting optical elementdisposed to reflect light received from the coupling lightguides backtoward the coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the thermaltransfer element is an aluminum extrusion comprising couplinglightguides in an interior region wherein the extrusion furthercomprises a light collimating reflective surface disposed to collimatelight from the light source.

Protective Layers

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: light inputsurface, light input coupler, coupling lightguide, lightguide region,and lightguide comprises a protective element or layer optically coupledto it, physically coupled to it, disposed adjacent to it, or disposedbetween it and a light emitting surface of the light emitting device. Aprotective film element can have a higher scratch resistance, higherimpact resistance, hardcoating layer, impact absorbing layer or otherlayer or element suitable to protect at least one selected from thegroup: light input surface, light input coupler, coupling lightguide,lightguide region, and lightguide from scratches, impacts, dropping thedevice, and interaction with sharp objects, etc. In another embodiment,at least one outer surface region of the lightguide (or layer thereof)comprises a removable protective film or masking film. For example, inone embodiment, a film based lightguide comprises removable protectivepolyethylene films physically coupled to the cladding regions on eitherside of a core region. In another embodiment, one of the claddingregions is an adhesive and the protective polyethylene film preventscontamination of the adhesive before the film is adhered to a window,for example, and the other cladding region comprises a “hardcoat”coating with a pencil hardness greater than 2H where the protectivepolyethylene film prevents scratches before installation of the lightemitting device.

Coupling Light into the Surface of the Coupling Lightguide

In one embodiment, the light input surface of the light input coupler isat least one surface of at least one coupling lightguide. In oneembodiment, light is coupled into a coupling lightguide such that itremains in the lightguide for multiple total internal reflections by atleast one optical element or feature on at least one surface oroptically coupled to at least one surface comprising an optical regionselected from the group: lens, prismatic lens, prismatic film,diffraction grating, holographic optical element, diffractive opticalelement, diffuser, anisotropic diffuser, refractive surface relieffeatures, diffractive surface relief features, volumetric lightre-directing features, micro-scale volumetric or surface relieffeatures, nano-scale volumetric or surface relief features, andtotal-internal-reflection volumetric or surface features. The opticalelement or feature may be incorporated on one or several couplinglightguides in a stacked or predetermined physically arrangeddistribution of coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, the opticalelement or feature is arranged spatially in a pattern within or on onecoupling lightguide or across multiple coupling lightguides. In oneembodiment, the coupling efficiency of an optical element or feature isgreater than one selected from the group: 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90%for a wavelength range selected from one selected from the group: 350nm-400 nm, 400 nm-700 nm, 450 nm-490 nm, 490 nm-560 nm, and 635 nm-700nm. The coupling efficiency as defined herein is the percent of incidentlight from a light source disposed to direct light onto at least onecoupling lightguide which is coupled into the at least one couplinglightguide disposed to receive light from the light source which remainswithin the coupling lightguide at an angle greater than the criticalangle further along in the region of the lightguide just past the lightinput surface region. In one embodiment, two or more couplinglightguides are stacked or bundled together wherein they each have anoptical element or feature disposed to couple light into the couplinglightguide and the optical element or feature has a coupling efficiencyless than one selected from the group: 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90% for awavelength range selected from one selected from the group: 350 nm-400nm, 400 nm-700 nm, 450 nm-490 nm, 490 nm-560 nm, and 635 nm-700 nm. Bystacking a group of coupling lightguides, for example, one can use lowercoupling efficiencies to enable a portion of the incident light to passthrough a first coupling lightguide onto a second coupling lightguide toallow light to be coupled into the second coupling lightguide. In oneembodiment, the coupling efficiency is graded or varies in a firstdirection through an arrangement of coupling lightguides and a lightreflecting element or region is disposed on the opposite side of thearrangement of coupling lightguides disposed to reflect a portion ofincident light back through the coupling lightguides.

Coupling Light into Two or More Surfaces

In one embodiment, light is coupled through light input couplers,coupling lightguides, optical elements, or a combination thereof to atleast two surfaces or surface regions of a at least one lightguide in alight emitting device. In another embodiment, the light coupled throughthe surface of a lightguide or lightguide region is directed by thelight extraction features into an angular range different than that ofthe light directed by the same or different light extraction featuresfrom light coupled through a second surface or second surface region ofa lightguide or lightguide region of a light emitting device. In anotherembodiment, a first light extracting region comprising a first set oflight re-directing features or light extraction features that directslight incident through a first surface or edge into a first range ofangles upon exiting the light emitting surface of the lightguide and asecond light extracting region comprises a second set of lightre-directing or light extraction features that direct light incidentthrough a second surface or edge into a second range of angles uponexiting the light emitting surface of the lightguide. Variations in thelight re-directing features include, but are not limited to, featureheight, shape, orientation, density, width, length, material, angle of asurface, location in the x, y, and z direction and include dispersedphase domains, grooves, pits, micro-lenses, prismatic elements, aircavities, hollow microspheres, dispersed microspheres, and other knownlight extraction features or elements. In another embodiment, a lightemitting device comprises at least one lightguide and a first lightsource disposed to couple light through a surface of at least onelightguide and a second light source disposed to couple light throughthe edge of at least one lightguide wherein the coupling mechanism is atleast one selected from the group: light input couplers, opticalelement, coupling lightguide, optical components or coupling lightguidesoptically coupled to a surface or edge, diffractive optics, holographicoptical element, diffraction grating, Fresnel lens element, prismaticfilm, light redirecting optic and other optical element.

Light Input Couplers Disposed Near More than One Edge of a Lightguide

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a plurality oflight input couplers disposed to couple light into a lightguide from atleast two input regions disposed near two different edges of alightguide. In another embodiment, two light input couplers are disposedon opposite sides of a lightguide. In another embodiment, light inputcouplers are disposed on three or four sides of a film-type lightguide.In a further embodiment, more than one light input coupler, housing, orlight input surface is disposed to receive light from a single lightsource, light source package, array of light sources or light sourcestrip (such as a substantially linear array of LEDs). For example, twohousing for two light input couplers disposed to couple light to twodifferent regions of a lightguide are disposed to receive light from asubstantially linear array of LEDs. In another embodiment a first inputsurface comprising a first collection of coupling lightguides opticallycoupled to a first region of a lightguide and a second input surfacecomprising a second collection of coupling lightguides optically coupledto a second region of a lightguide different than the first region aredisposed to receive light from one selected from the group: the samelight source, a plurality of light sources, light sources in a package,an array or collection of light sources, a linear array of lightsources, one or more LEDs, an LED package, a linear array of LEDs, andLEDs of multiple colors.

Strip Folding Device

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises frame memberswhich assist in at least one of the folding or holding of the couplinglightguides or strips. Methods for folding and holding couplinglightguides such as film-based lightguides using frame members aredisclosed in International (PCT) Publication No. WO 2009/048863 and PCTapplication titled “ILLUMINATION VIA FLEXIBLE THIN FILMS” filed on Jan.26, 2010 by Anthony Nichols and Shawn Pucylowski, U.S. Provisionalpatent application Ser. Nos. 61/147,215 and 61/147,237, the contents ofeach are incorporated by reference herein. In one embodiment, thecoupling lightguide folding (or bending) and/or holding (or housing)element is formed from at least one selected from the group: rigidplastic material, black colored material, opaque material,semi-transparent material, metal foil, metal sheet, aluminum sheet, andaluminum foil. In one embodiment, the folding or holding material has aflexural rigidity or (flexural modulus) at least twice the flexuralrigidity (or modulus) of the film or coupling lightguides which it foldsor holds.

Housing or Holding Device for Light Input Coupler

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a housing orholding device that holds or contains at least part of a light inputcoupler and light source. The housing or holding device may house orcontain within at least one selected from the group: light inputcoupler, light source, coupling lightguides, lightguide, opticalcomponents, electrical components, heat sink or other thermalcomponents, attachment mechanisms, registration mechanisms, foldingmechanisms devices, and frames. The housing or holding device maycomprise a plurality of components or any combination of theaforementioned components. The housing or holding device may serve oneor more of functions selected from the group: protect from dust anddebris contamination, provide air-tight seal, provide a water-tightseal, house or contain components, provide a safety housing forelectrical or optical components, assist with the folding or bending ofthe coupling lightguides, assist in the alignment or holding of thelightguide, coupling lightguide, light source or light input couplerrelative to another component, maintain the arrangement of the couplinglightguides, recycle light (such as with reflecting inner walls),provide attachment mechanisms for attaching the light emitting device toan external object or surface, provide an opaque container such thatstray light does not escape through specific regions, provide atranslucent surface for displaying indicia or providing illumination toan object external to the light emitting device, comprise a connectorfor release and interchangeability of components, and provide a latch orconnector to connect with other holding devices or housings.

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are terminated within thehousing or holding element. In another embodiment, the inner surface ofthe housing or holding element has a specular or diffuse reflectancegreater than 50% and the inner surface appears white or mirror-like. Inanother embodiment, the outer surface of the housing or holding devicehas a specular or diffuse reflectance greater than 50% and the outersurface appears white or mirror-like. In another embodiment, at leastone wall of the housing or holding device has a specular or diffusereflectance less than 50% and the inner surface appears gray, black orlike a very dark mirror. In another embodiment, at least one wall orsurface of the housing or holding device is opaque and has a luminoustransmittance measured according to ASTM D1003 version 07e1 of less than50%. In another embodiment, at least one wall or surface of the housingor holding device has a luminous transmittance measured according toASTM D1003 version 07e1 greater than 30% and the light exiting the wallor surface from the light source within the housing or holding deviceprovides illumination for a component of the light emitting device,illumination for an object external to the light emitting device, orillumination of a surface to display a sign, indicia, passive display, asecond display or indicia, or an active display such as providingbacklight illumination for an LCD.

In one embodiment, the housing or holding device comprises at least oneselected from the group: connector, pin, clip, latch, adhesive region,clamp, joining mechanism, and other connecting element or mechanicalmeans to connect or hold the housing or holding device to anotherhousing or holding device, lightguide, coupling lightguide, film, strip,cartridge, removable component or components, an exterior surface suchas a window or automobile, light source, electronics or electricalcomponent, circuit board for the electronics or light source such as anLED, heat sink or other thermal control element, frame of the lightemitting device, and other component of the light emitting device.

In another embodiment, the input ends and output ends of the couplinglightguides are held in physical contact with the relative positionmaintaining elements by at least one selected from the group: magneticgrips, mechanical grips, clamps, screws, mechanical adhesion, chemicaladhesion, dispersive adhesion, diffusive adhesion, electrostaticadhesion, vacuum holding, or an adhesive.

Curved or Flexible Housing

In another embodiment, the housing comprises at least one curvedsurface. A curved surface can permit non-linear shapes or devices orfacilitate incorporating non-planer or bent lightguides or couplinglightguides. In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises ahousing with at least one curved surface wherein the housing comprisescurved or bent coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the housingis flexible such that it may be bent temporarily, permanently orsemi-permanently. By using a flexible housing, for example, the lightemitting device may be able to be bent such that the light emittingsurface is curved along with the housing, the light emitting area maycurve around a bend in a wall or corner, for example. In one embodiment,the housing or lightguide may be bent temporarily such that the initialshape is substantially restored (bending a long housing to get itthrough a door for example). In another embodiment, the housing orlightguide may be bent permanently or semi-permanently such that thebent shape is substantially sustained after release (such as when it isdesired to have a curved light emitting device to provide a curved signor display, for example).

Housing Including a Thermal Transfer Element

In one embodiment, the housing comprises a thermal transfer elementdisposed to transfer heat from a component within the housing to anouter surface of the housing. In another embodiment, the thermaltransfer element is one selected from the group: heat sink, metallic orceramic element, fan, heat pipe, synthetic jet, air jet producingactuator, active cooling element, passive cooling element, rear portionof a metal core or other conductive circuit board, thermally conductiveadhesive, or other component known to thermally conduct heat. In oneembodiment, the thermal transfer element has a thermal conductivitygreater than one selected from the group: 0.2, 0.5, 0.7, 1, 3, 5, 50,100, 120, 180, 237, 300, and 400 watts per meter-kelvin. In anotherembodiment, a frame supporting the film-based lightguide (for examplewithout limitation, a frame that holds tension in the film to maintainflatness) is a thermal transfer element. In one embodiment, the lightsource is an LED and the LED is thermally coupled to the ballast orframe that is a thermal transfer element. In a further embodiment, aframe or ballast used to thermally transfer heat away from the lightsource and is also a housing for the light emitting device.

Size of the Housing or Coupling Lightguide Holding Device

In one embodiment, the sizes of the two smaller dimensions of thehousing or coupling lightguide holding device are less than one selectedfrom the group: 500, 400, 300, 200, 100, 50, 25, 10, and 5 times thethickness of the lightguide or coupling lightguides. In anotherembodiment, at least one dimension of the housing or lightguide holdingdevice is smaller due to the use of more than one light input couplerdisposed along an edge of the lightguide. In this embodiment, thethickness of the housing or holding device can be reduced because for afixed number of strips or coupling lightguides, they can be arrangedinto multiple smaller stacks instead of a single larger stack. This alsoenables more light to be coupled into the lightguide by using multiplelight input couplers and light sources.

Removable and Replaceable Component of Light Emitting Device

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a removable andreplaceable section, region, component, or collection of components. Byremoving less than all of the components of the light emitting device, aportion of the light emitting device may remain installed or usable. Forexample, in one embodiment, the light source may be removed and a newone may be installed as an upgrade or replacement. Similarly, in anotherexample, the lightguide and coupling lightguides may be removed todisplay a new logo or indicia without requiring replacement of the lightinput coupler. Other examples include, but are not limited to, replacingthe light input coupler, electrical components, power cord, LED driver,light input optical element, security component, memory chip, lightemitting region, etc. As discussed herein, one or more first elementsare discussed as being removable and replaceable with a different set offirst elements relative to the remaining second elements, however, it isunderstood that the second elements may also be removed and replaced bya different set of second elements depending on which elements aredesired to be replaced. For example, in one embodiment, a light emittingdevice comprising a light input coupler and a removable and replaceablefilm-based lightguide with coupling lightguide extensions that isremoved from the light input coupler (to display a different logo forexample) or the light input coupler may be removed and replaced from theremovable and replaceable film-based lightguide if a light source fails.The first or second set of elements may also comprise other elements orcomponents of the light emitting device. In another embodiment, theremovable or replaceable component comprises at least one selected fromthe group: an alignment logo, insignia, alignment guide, hole, slot,printed directional arrow, printed instruction for orientation or otheralignment instruction guide disposed on the component, and a removableprotection film for the component.

Removable and Replaceable Light Extraction Region

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light extractionregion that may be removed and replaced on a film-based lightguide orrepositioned on a film-based lightguide. In another embodiment, thelight extraction region is a film or component comprising lightextraction features that is physically and optically coupled to thelightguide such that light propagates within the lightguide in awaveguide condition and is extracted by the light extraction features inthe light extraction region. In another embodiment, the light extractionregion comprises light extraction surface features such that when thefeatures are in contact with the film-based lightguide, a portion of thelight incident on the light extraction surface features is redirectedinto an angle such that it escapes the film-based lightguide. In anotherembodiment, the light extraction region on the film or component has aprotective region or film that can be removed prior to adhering it tothe film-based lightguide. In another embodiment, the light extractionregion is adhered to the film-based lightguide using a low peel strengthadhesive, static bond or other low strength bond. In one embodiment, thelight extraction layer or region has an ASTM D 903 version 2010(modified for 72 hour dwell time) peel strength to standard window glassless than one selected from the group 70 oz/in, 50 oz/in, 40 oz/in, 30oz/in, 20 oz/in and 10 oz/in. In another embodiment, the adhesive, whenadhered to glass, will support the weight of the light emitting device.For example, the film-based lightguide may be a polycarbonate film andthe light extraction region may be a PVC or silicone-based film that canbe disposed onto the film-based lightguide such that the lightextraction region extracts light from the lightguide. In anotherembodiment, a first light extraction region forms indicia from white inklight extraction features on a silicone-based film. In this embodiment,the silicone-based film is removed by peeling the silicone-based filmaway from a silicone film-based lightguide. In this embodiment, thefirst light extraction region is replaced with a new light extractionregion comprising embossed features on the surface of a new siliconefilm with the features oriented toward the silicone film-basedlightguide where the light extraction region comprises a low refractiveindex protective cladding region, layer or film on the opposite side. Inthis embodiment, the surface light extraction features on the lightextraction region essentially become volumetric light extractionfeatures for the lightguide which is formed from the combination of thesilicone-based light extraction region and the silicone film-basedlightguide. In a further embodiment, the adhesive may be removed fromthe two components to which it is designed to combine. For example, inone embodiment, the adhesive film or component may be removed fromwindow glass and a region of the lightguide. In another example, theadhesive film or component may be removed from the light extractionregion and the lightguide. In one embodiment, the light extractionregion maintains sufficient adhesion during normal operation and can beremoved permitting reuse of a component or region. For example, in oneembodiment, the adhesive may be removed (by peeling for example) fromthe lightguide film such that a new adhesive film may be used with thelight extraction region to apply it to another surface without dirt,contamination, or blemishes from the previous adhesion. In the previousexample, this could be advantageous when one wishes to change a lightemitting device window display using a film-based lightguide fromdisplaying a Thanksgiving holiday image in the light extraction film toa Christmas holiday image in a different light extraction film. Inanother embodiment, the adhesive layer, region, or material may becleaned, such as washing in soap and water, for example) and reused toreapply the light extraction region to the lightguide.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a cladding regionon the lightguide that may be removed or peeled back from the coreregion of the lightguide such that the light extraction region may beadded. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises alightguide optically coupled to a first light extraction region, and thefirst light extraction region is peeled off and a second lightextraction region is optically coupled to the lightguide.

In another embodiment, the light extraction region is an ink or othertransferable material that can be transferred onto the film-basedlightguide. For example, a film comprising an ink pattern with anadhesive component could be transferred onto the film-based lightguideby lamination or pressing the film against the film-based lightguide.The carrier or transfer media supporting the transfer material orfeature may be film, plastic, metal or other flexible or rigid material.For example, the transfer material may be an embossed metal plate thatis pressed against the film-based lightguide to transfer a surfacepattern from the metal to the film-based lightguide to create surfacerelief light extraction features. In another embodiment, the transfermaterial is a thin layer of a coating that can be released from orphysically bonded to the light extraction region or features. In anotherembodiment, the light extraction region has a carrier film, layer orregion that can be removed subsequent to optically coupling the lightextraction features to the film-based lightguide or it may remainphysically coupled to the light extraction features.

In another embodiment, a sign or display kit comprises a light inputcoupler, a film-based lightguide and one or more light extraction filmssuch that the user may chose the particular light extraction region filmto dispose on the film-based lightguide. In another embodiment, thelight extraction film comprises an alignment feature that indicates thecorrect side of the light extraction film to be optically coupled to thefilm-based lightguide. For example, a silicone light extraction filmcomprises a printed ink pattern underneath a removable protective filmon one side, a low refractive index cladding region on the oppositeside, and a notch cut from one corner. The user is instructed (throughinstructions or diagrams for example) to peel away the protective filmsfrom the silicone film-based lightguide and the silicone lightextraction film and position the notch on the silicone light extractionfilm in the bottom left corner on the side of the silicone film-basedlightguide that is opposite the side of the light input coupler. Otheralignment features or guides including printed inks patterns,registration marks, grooves, holes, etc. may be used.

Removable and Replaceable Lightguide with Light Extraction Region

In one embodiment, a film-based lightguide comprising a light extractionregion is removable, or detachable, from a light emitting device. Inanother embodiment, a film-based lightguide is optically coupled to andcan be removed from one or more layers, films or components selectedfrom the group: second film-based lightguide, light output opticalelement, light input coupler, light mixing region, coupling lightguides,optical element, injection molded lightguide, touchscreen, second filmlayer, cladding layer, reflective layer, relative position maintainingelement, housing and other light transmitting component of the lightemitting device. In another embodiment, the removable lightguide withlight extraction region comprises a light receiving region disposed tobe optically coupled to the light transmitting region on a second film,layer, or component. For example, in one embodiment, a light emittingsign comprises a silicone film-based lightguide with white ink lightextraction features disposed on a surface creating a light emittingindicia pattern when illuminated by the light from a light inputcoupler. In the previous embodiment, the silicone film-based lightguidecomprises a first lightguide film with a light extraction regionoptically coupled to a second silicone film-based lightguide film withcoupling lightguide extensions disposed to receive light from a lightsource within a light input coupler. The first lightguide film may bepulled and separated from the second lightguide film such that the firstlightguide film may be replaced with a new lightguide film comprising anew light extraction region with white ink light extraction features. Inanother embodiment, the new lightguide film may be optically coupled tothe second lightguide film by overlapping the light receiving region ofthe new lightguide film onto the light transmitting region of the secondlightguide film by pressing the films together using one's finger andrunning it along the regions. In a further embodiment, the removablelightguide film (or new lightguide film) and the second lightguide filmdo not comprise cladding regions or layers in the light receiving regionor light transmitting region, respectively such that a portion of theincident light can be efficiently transmitted between the core regionsof the films. In one embodiment, the cladding regions from at least oneof the removable lightguide film (or new lightguide film) and the secondlightguide film can be pulled back or removed in the light receivingregion or light transmitting region, respectively such that light can beefficiently transmitted between the core regions of the films.

In another embodiment, replacing the lightguide comprising the lightextraction region enables a different sign or display to be shown, acleaner version of the same sign or display (one without blemishes,scratches, fingerprints, dents, etc.), or a light emitting device withdifferent optical output characteristics (such as different light outputprofiles, angular light output, spatial areas of light output, opticalefficiency, color, etc.) or functionality (addition of touchscreen,security features, non-optical features, etc.). In another embodiment,the lightguide with light extraction region is removable and capable ofbeing optically coupled to a light output optical element. For example,a silicone film-based lightguide with a light extraction region may beadhered to a light transmitting region of an injection molded, cast orextruded acrylic light output optical element that receives light fromLEDs disposed at the edge of the element. In this embodiment, a portionof the light from the light output optical element exits the lightoutput optical element through the light transmitting region and iscoupled into the film-based lightguide through the light receivingregion.

In another embodiment, the removable lightguide with a light extractionregion substantially comprises the light mixing region of thelightguide. In another embodiment, the removable lightguide does notsubstantially comprise the light mixing region of the lightguide. In oneembodiment, the removable and replaceable lightguide does not comprisecoupling lightguides extending therefrom.

Removable and Replaceable Lightguide Comprising Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a removablefilm-based lightguide comprising coupling lightguides. For example, inone embodiment, a film-based lightguide comprises extended couplinglightguides from the same lightguide that are folded and disposed toreceive light from a light source can be removed from the light emittingdevice and replaced with a different lightguide with couplinglightguides. In this embodiment, one may replace or change the logo,graphic, sign, display or light emitting profile by replacing thelightguide comprising coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, anoptically efficient film-based lightguide with coupling lightguideextensions comprising a core region contiguous between the lightguideregion and the coupling lightguides may be replaced by a newer orsimilar optically efficient film-based lightguide with couplinglightguide extensions such that the light source, light source driver,thermal transfer element, and other light emitting device elements orcomponents do not need to be replaced. In another embodiment, thelightguide comprises coupling lightguides that are substantially foldedsuch that the light input edges of the coupling lightguides collectivelyform a light input surface or region that can be disposed in the lightemitting device to receive light from the light source (or an opticalcomponent between the light input surface and the light source lightemitting surface). In another embodiment, the removable and replaceablelightguide comprising coupling lightguides may further comprise one ormore selected from the group: housing component, low contact area cover,physical coupling mechanism, alignment guide, registration holes orcavity, other optical elements films or layers, and other light emittingdevice component. For example, in one embodiment, the film-basedlightguide comprises coupling lightguides within a region of a cartridgethat can be physically decoupled or attached to the housing componentcomprising the light input coupler or light source.

Removable and Replaceable Cartridge

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a detachablesection or cartridge to enable removal of at least one selected from thegroup: lightguide, light emitting region, coupling lightguides, opticalelement, light source, electrical components, and thermal components. Inanother embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a housing orholding device that comprises a detachable section or cartridge whichallows the removal, re-registration, and re-attachment of a lightguideand light input coupler comprising the coupling lightguides whileleaving the light source and electronics connected to the housing orholding device. In one embodiment, the cartridge, light emitting device,or components thereof, comprises a male or female component or shapethat allows it to configure into the remaining (male or female)component(s) of the light emitting device or mechanism supporting thelight emitting device such that it may be readily attached, removedand/or replaced. The removable and replaceable cartridge may or may notcomprise an optical element such as a light redirecting optical element,light turning optical element, light collimating optical element, orlight coupling optical element. In this embodiment, the detachabledevice or cartridge can allow for the lightguide comprising the lightextracting features representing indicia (such as for a sign or logo)and the light input coupler to be easily replaced to change the indiciadisplayed (such in the case of a light emitting sign) without needing toreplace the light source, electronics, and possibly without having toun-mount or uninstall the housing or holding device. In anotherembodiment, the detachable cartridge comprises at least one selectedfrom the group: light source, light input coupler, lightguide, thermaltransfer element disposed to be thermally coupled to the light source(or a thermal transfer component attached to the light source), andelectrical driving source such as the LED driver. In this embodiment,when improved, higher efficiency light sources or different colors ordifferent elements or configurations are desired, they may be includedwith the replacement cartridge. In another embodiment, the cartridgecomprises at least one selected from the group: an alignment guide, pin,clip, latch, adhesive region, clamp, a joining mechanism, and otherconnecting element or mechanical means to connect or hold the cartridgeto other components of the light emitting device. In one embodiment, forexample, the removable and replaceable cartridge comprises the lightsource. For example, in one embodiment, the light source is replaced byremoving the cartridge and installing a more efficient light emittingdiode (or array of light emitting diodes). In another embodiment, theremovable cartridge comprises the light source and some or all of theelectrical components (such as drivers, transformers, control circuitry,etc.).

In another embodiment, the cartridge comprises a light source and anaperture, window, or cavity into which a film-based lightguide or lightoutput optical element may be inserted. For example, in one embodiment,a light emitting device comprises a cartridge with a cavity disposed toreceive a lightguide or light output coupler such that when thelightguide or light output coupler is inserted into the cavity, aportion of the light propagates within the light output coupler or inthe lightguide film in a total internal reflection condition. In theprevious embodiment, the cartridge may be replaced and an end of thelightguide film or light output coupler inserted into the cavity of thenew cartridge. Alternatively, the lightguide film or light outputcoupler may be replaced and inserted into the cavity within thecartridge.

Removable Total Internal Reflection Enabling Component ComprisingCladding Region or Low Contact Area Cover

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises at least one totalinternal reflection enabling component selected from the group: cover,holder, hold down mechanism, mechanical arm, mechanical lever, plug,mechanical guide, strip, rigid protective material, and housingcomponent that is removed from contact with a coupling lightguide orfilm-based lightguide in order to replace a component wherein the totalinternal reflection enabling component comprises a low contact areacover or a cladding layer. In one embodiment, the total internalreflection enabling component comprises a low refractive index materialthat will permit a portion of light within the film-based lightguide orcoupling lightguide to remain within the lightguide in a total internalreflection condition and prevent reflection frustration or absorptionfrom an arm, housing component, lever, guide, strip, etc. that protects,houses or holds the position of the film or coupling lightguide. Forexample, in one embodiment, a component of the housing of a light inputcoupler is black and comprises a transparent low refractive index filmadhered on the inner surface. The housing component may be removed toreplace the coupling lightguide and film, for example, and when thecover is replaced, it helps hold the coupling lightguides in theirproper position and the low refractive index film prevents light withina particular angular range designated to propagate within the core layerfrom decoupling into the black housing and being absorbed.

In another embodiment, the total internal reflection enabling componentcomprises a low contact area cover film that will permit a portion oflight within the film-based lightguide or coupling lightguide to remainwithin the lightguide in a total internal reflection condition andprevent reflection frustration or absorption from an arm, holder, holddown mechanism, housing component, lever, guide, or strip that protects,houses or holds the position of the lightguide film or couplinglightguide. For example, in one embodiment, the housing of light inputcoupler is black and comprises a film with a surface relief profile witha low contact surface area cover adhered on the inner surface of thehousing (with the surface relief profile on the side facing the innerpart of the light input coupler). The housing cover may be removed toreplace the coupling lightguide and film, for example, and when thecover is replaced, it helps hold the coupling lightguides in theirproper position and the low contact area cover prevents a portion of thelight propagating within the core layer from decoupling into the blackhousing and being absorbed.

Low Contact Area Cover

In one embodiment, a low contact area cover is disposed between at leastone coupling lightguide and the exterior to the light emitting device.The low contact area cover or wrap provides a low surface area ofcontact with a region of the lightguide or a coupling lightguide and mayfurther provide at least one selected from the group: protection fromfingerprints, protection from dust or air contaminants, protection frommoisture, protection from internal or external objects that woulddecouple or absorb more light than the low contact area cover when incontact in one or more regions with one or more coupling lightguides,provide a means for holding or containing at least one couplinglightguide, hold the relative position of one or more couplinglightguides, and prevent the coupling lightguides from unfolding into alarger volume or contact with a surface that could de-couple or absorblight. In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is disposedsubstantially around one or more coupling lightguide stacks or arraysand provides one or more of the functions selected from the group:reducing the dust buildup on the coupling lightguides, protecting one ormore coupling lightguides from frustrated total internal reflection orabsorption by contact with another light transmitting or absorbingmaterial, and preventing or limiting scratches, cuts, dents, ordeformities from physical contact with other components or assemblersand/or users of the device.

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover is disposed betweenthe outer surface of the light emitting device and the regions of thecoupling lightguides disposed between the fold or bend region and thelightguide or light mixing region. In a further embodiment, the lowcontact area cover is disposed between the outer surface of the lightemitting device and the regions of the coupling lightguides disposedbetween the light input surface of the coupling lightguides and thelightguide or light mixing region. In another embodiment, the lowcontact area cover is disposed between the outer surface of the lightemitting device and a portion of the regions of the coupling lightguidesnot enclosed by a housing, protective cover, or other component disposedbetween the coupling lightguides and the outer surface of the lightemitting device. In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is thehousing, relative position maintaining element, or a portion of thehousing or relative positioning maintaining element. In one embodiment,the low contact area surface feature is a protrusion from a film,material, or layer. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover orwrap is disposed substantially around the light emitting device.

Film-Based Low Contact Area Cover

In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is a film with at leastone of a lower refractive index than the refractive index of the outermaterial of the coupling lightguide disposed near the low contact areacover, and a surface relief pattern or structure on the surface of thefilm-based low contact area cover disposed near at least one couplinglightguide. In one embodiment, the low contact area comprises convex orprotruding surface relief features disposed near at least one outersurface of at least one coupling lightguide and the average percentageof the area disposed adjacent to an outer surface of a couplinglightguide or the lightguide that is in physical contact with thesurface relief features is less than one of the following: 70%, 50%,30%, 10%, 5%, and 1%. In another embodiment, the low contact area covercomprises surface relief features adjacent a region of the film-basedlightguide and the percentage of the area of the surface relief featuresthat contact a region of the film-based lightguide (or light mixingregion, or coupling lightguides) when a uniform planar pressure of 7kilopascals is applied to the low contact area cover is less than one ofthe following: 70%, 50%, 30%, 10%, 5%, and 1%. In another embodiment,the low contact area cover comprises surface relief features adjacentand in physical contact with a region of the film-based lightguide andthe average percentage of the region of the film-based lightguide (orlight mixing region, or coupling lightguides) in contact with the lowcontact area cover is less than one of the following: 70%, 50%, 30%,10%, 5%, and 1%.

In one embodiment, a convex surface relief profile designed to have alow contact area with a surface of the coupling lightguide will at leastone selected from the group: extract, absorb, scatter, and otherwisealter the intensity or direction of a lower percentage of lightpropagating within the coupling lightguide than a flat surface of thesame material. In one embodiment, the surface relief profile is at leastone selected from the group: random, semi-random, ordered, regular inone or 2 directions, holographic, tailored, comprise cones, truncatedpolyhedrons, truncated hemispheres, truncated cones, truncated pyramids,pyramids, prisms, pointed shapes, round tipped shapes, rods, cylinders,hemispheres, and other geometrical shapes. In one embodiment, the lowcontact area cover material or film is at least one selected from thegroup: transparent, translucent, opaque, light absorbing, lightreflecting, substantially black, substantially white, has a diffusereflectance specular component included greater than 70%, has a diffusereflectance specular component included less than 70%, has an ASTM D1003version 07e1 luminous transmittance less than 30%, has an ASTM D1003version 07e1 luminous transmittance greater than 30%, absorbs at least50% of the incident light, absorbs less than 50% of the incident light,has an electrical sheet resistance less than 10 ohms per square, and hasan electrical sheet resistance greater than 10 ohms per square. In oneembodiment, low contact area cover has a diffuse reflectance measured inthe di/0 geometry according to ASTM E 1164-07 and ASTM E 179 version 96greater than one selected from the group: 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, and95%.

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover is a film with athickness less than one selected from the group: 600 microns, 500microns, 400 microns, 300 microns, 200 microns, 100 microns, and 50microns.

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover comprises a materialwith an effective refractive index less than the core layer due tomicrostructures and/or nanostructures. For example, in one embodiment,the low contact area comprises an aerogel or arrangement ofnano-structured materials disposed on a film that have an effectiverefractive index less than the core layer in the region near the corelayer. In one embodiment, the nano-structured material comprises fibers,particles, or domains with an average diameter or dimension in the planeparallel to the core layer surface or perpendicular to the core layersurface less than one selected from the group: 1000, 500, 300, 200, 100,50, 20, 10, 5, and 2 nanometers. For example, in one embodiment, the lowcontact area cover is a coating or material comprising nanostructuredfibers, comprising polymeric materials such as, without limitation,cellulose, polyester, PVC, PTFE, polystyrene, PMMA, PDMS, or other lighttransmitting or partially light transmitting materials. In oneembodiment, the low contact area is a paper or similar sheet or film(such as a filter paper) comprising fibrous, micro-structured, ornano-structured materials or surfaces. In one embodiment, the lowcontact area material is a woven material. In another embodiment, thelow contact area material is non-woven material. In another embodiment,the low contact area cover is a substantially transparent or translucentlight transmitting film that comprises “macro” surface features withaverage dimensions greater than 5 microns that have micro-structured,nanostructured, or fibrous materials or surface features disposed on orwithin the outer regions of the “macro” surface features. In oneembodiment, the “macro” surface features have an average dimension in afirst direction parallel to the core surface or perpendicular to thecore surface greater than one selected from the group: 5, 10, 15, 20,30, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 500 microns and the micro-structured,nanostructured, or fibrous materials or surface features have an averagedimension in the first direction less than one selected from the group:20, 10, 5, 2, 1, 0.5, 0.3, 0.1, 0.05, and 0.01 microns.

In this embodiment, the “macro” surface features can be patterned into asurface (such as by extrusion embossing or UV cured embossing) and theouter regions (outermost surfaces of the protruded regions that would bein contact with the core layer) can remain, be formed, coated,roughened, or otherwise modified to comprise micro-structured,nanostructured, or fibrous materials or surface features such that whenin contact with the core layer couple less light out of the core layerdue to the smaller surface area in contact with the core layer. In oneembodiment, by only coating the tips of the “macro” protrusions, forexample, less nanostructured material is needed than coating the entirelow contact area film or a planar film and the “valleys” or areas aroundthe “macro” protrusions may be light transmitting, transparent, ortranslucent. In another embodiment, the micro-structured,nanostructured, or fibrous materials or surface features disposed on orwithin the “macro” surface features create an effective lower refractiveindex region that functions as a cladding layer. In one embodiment, thelow contact area cover couples less than one selected from the group30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, 2%, and 1% in at least one region of contact with thecore layer or region adjacent the core layer.

In one embodiment, the low contact area comprises standoffs, posts, orother protrusions that provide a separation distance between the lowcontact area cover and the core layer. In one embodiment, the standoffs,posts, or other protrusions are disposed in one or more regions of thelow contact area cover selected from the group: the region adjacent thelight emitting region, the region adjacent the surface opposite thelight emitting surface, the region adjacent the light mixing region, theregion adjacent the light input coupler, the region adjacent thecoupling lightguides, in a pattern on one surface of the low contactarea cover, and in a pattern on both surfaces of the low contact areacover. In one embodiment, the standoffs, posts, or other protrusions ofthe low contact area cover have an average dimension in a directionparallel to the surface of the core layer or perpendicular to the corelayer greater than one selected from the group: 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200,500, and 1000 microns. In another embodiment, the aspect ratio (theheight divided by the average width in the plane parallel to the coresurface) is greater than one selected from the group: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15,20, 50, and 100.

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover is physically coupledto the lightguide or core layer in one or more regions selected from thegroup: an area around the light emitting region of the lightguide, aperiphery region of the lightguide that emits less than 5% of the totallight flux emitted from the lightguide, a region of the housing of theinput coupler, a cladded layer or region, a standoff region, a postregion, a protrusions region, a “macro” surface feature region, anano-structured feature region, a micro-structured feature region, and aplateau region disposed between valley regions by one or more selectedfrom the group: chemical bonds, physical bonds, adhesive layer, magneticattraction, electrostatic force, van der Waals force, covalent bonds,and ionic bonds. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover islaminated to the core layer.

In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is a sheet, film, orcomponent comprising one or more selected from the group: paper, fibrousfilm or sheet, cellulosic material, pulp, low-acidity paper, syntheticpaper, flashspun fibers, flashspun high-density polyethylene fibers, anda micro-porous film. In another embodiment, the film material of the lowcontact area cover or the area of the low contact area cover in contactwith the core layer of the lightguide in the light emitting regioncomprises a material with a bulk refractive index or an effectiverefractive index in a direction parallel or perpendicular to the coresurface less than one selected from the group: 1.6, 1.55, 1.5, 1.45,1.41, 1.38, 1.35, 1.34, 1.33, 1.30, 1.25, and 1.20.

Wrap Around Low Contact Area Cover

In a further embodiment, the low contact area cover is the inner surfaceor physically coupled to a surface of a housing, holding device, orrelative position maintaining element. In a further embodiment, the lowcontact area cover is a film which wraps around at least one couplinglightguide such that at least one lateral edge and at least one lateralsurface is substantially covered such that the low contact area cover isdisposed between the coupling lightguide and the outer surface of thedevice.

In another embodiment, a film-based lightguide comprises a low contactarea cover wrapped around a first group of coupling lightguides whereinthe low contact area cover is physically coupled to at least oneselected from the group: lightguide, lightguide film, light inputcoupler, lightguide, housing, and thermal transfer element by a lowcontact area cover physical coupling mechanism. In another embodiment,the light emitting device comprises a first cylindrical tension roddisposed to apply tension to the low contact area cover film and holdthe coupling lightguides close together and close to the lightguide suchthat the light input coupler has a lower profile. In another embodiment,the low contact area cover can be pulled taught after physicallycoupling to at least one selected from the group: lightguide, lightguidefilm, light input coupler, lightguide, housing, thermal transferelement, and other element or housing by moving the first cylindricaltension rod away from a second tension bar or away from a physicalcoupling point of the mechanism holding the tension bar such as a brace.Other shapes and forms for the tension forming element may be used suchas a rod with a rectangular cross-section, a hemisphericalcross-section, or other element longer in a first direction capable ofproviding tension when translated or supporting tension when heldstationary relative to other components. In another embodiment, a firstcylindrical tension rod may be translated in a first direction toprovide tension while remaining in a brace region and the position ofthe cylindrical tension rod may be locked or forced to remain in placeby tightening a screw for example. In another embodiment, the tensionforming element and the brace or physical coupling mechanism forcoupling it to another component of the light input coupler does notextend more than one selected from the group: 1 millimeter, 2millimeters, 3 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 7 millimeters and 10millimeters past at least one edge of the lightguide in the directionparallel to the longer dimension of the tension forming element.

In one embodiment, the low contact area cover substantially wraps aroundthe film-based lightguide in one or more planes. In another embodiment,the low contact area cover substantially wraps around the film-basedlightguide and one or more light input couplers. For example, in oneembodiment the low contact area cover wraps around two input couplersdisposed along opposite sides of a film based lightguide and the lightemitting region of the lightguide disposed between the light inputcouplers. The other edges of the low contact cover may be sealed,bonded, clamped together or another material or enclosing method mayseal or provide a barrier at the opposite edges to prevent dust or dirtcontamination, for example. In this embodiment, for example, a backlightmay comprise a substantially air-tight sealed film-based lightguide (andsealed coupling lightguides within the light input coupler) that doesnot have one or more cladding regions and is substantially protectedfrom scratches or dust during assembly or use that could causenon-uniformities or reduce luminance or optical efficiency.

Low Hardness Low Contact Area Cover

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover has an ASTM D3363version 05 pencil hardness under force from a 300 gram weight less thanthe outer surface region of the coupling lightguide disposed near thelow contact area cover. In one embodiment, the low contact area covercomprises a silicone, polyurethane, rubber, or thermoplasticpolyurethane with a surface relief pattern or structure. In a furtherembodiment, the ASTM D3363 version 05 pencil hardness under force from a300 gram weight of the low contact area cover is at least 2 grades lessthan the outer surface region of the coupling lightguide disposed nearthe low contact area cover. In another embodiment, the low contact areacover has an ASTM D 3363 pencil hardness less than one selected from thegroup: 5H, 4H, 3H, 2H, H, and F.

Physical Coupling Mechanism for Low Contact Area Cover

In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is physically coupled in afirst contact region to the light emitting device, light input coupler,lightguide, housing, second region of the low contact area cover, orthermal transfer element by one or more methods selected from the group:sewing (or threading or feeding a fiber, wire, or thread) the lowcontact area cover to the lightguide, light mixing region, or othercomponent, welding (sonic, laser, thermo-mechanically, etc.) the lowcontact area cover to one or more components, adhering (epoxy, glue,pressure sensitive adhesive, etc.) the low contact area cover to one ormore components, fastening the low contact area cover to one or morecomponents. In a further embodiment, the fastening mechanism is selectedfrom the group: a batten, button, clamp, clasp, clip, clutch (pinfastener), flange, grommet, anchor, nail, pin, peg, clevis pin, cotterpin, linchpin, R-clip, retaining ring, circlip retaining ring, e-ringretaining ring, rivet, screw anchor, snap, staple, stitch, strap, tack,threaded fastener, captive threaded fasteners (nut, screw, stud,threaded insert, threaded rod), tie, toggle, hook-and-loop strips, wedgeanchor, and zipper.

In another embodiment, the physical coupling mechanism maintains theflexibility of at least one selected from the group: the light emittingdevice, the lightguide, and the coupling lightguides. In a furtherembodiment, the total surface area of the physical coupling mechanism incontact with at least one selected from the group: low contact areacover, coupling lightguides, lightguide region, light mixing region, andlight emitting device is less than one selected from the group: 70%,50%, 30%, 10%, 5%, and 1%. In another embodiment, the total percentageof the cross sectional area of the layers comprising light propagatingunder total internal reflection comprising the largest component of thelow contact area cover physical coupling mechanism in a first directionperpendicular to the optical axis of the light within the couplinglightguides, light mixing region or lightguide region relative to thecross-sectional area in the first direction is less than one selectedfrom the group: 10%, 5%, 1%, 0.5%, 0.1%, and 0.05%. For example, in oneembodiment, the low contact area cover is a flexible transparentpolyurethane film with a surface comprising a regular two-dimensionalarray of embossed hemispheres disposed adjacent and wrapping around thestack of coupling lightguides and is physically coupled to the lightmixing region of the lightguide comprising a 25 micron thick core layerby threading the film to the light mixing region using a transparentnylon fiber with a diameter less than 25 microns into 25 micron holes at1 centimeter intervals. In this example, the largest component of thephysical coupling mechanism is the holes in the core region which canscatter light out of the lightguide. Therefore, the aforementionedcross-sectional area of the physical coupling mechanism (the holes inthe core layer) is 0.25% of the cross-sectional area of the core layer.In another embodiment, the fiber or material threaded through the holesin one or more components comprises at least one selected from thegroup: polymer fiber, polyester fiber, rubber fiber, cable, wire (suchas a thin steel wire), aluminum wire, and nylon fiber such as used infishing line. In a further embodiment, the diameter of the fiber ormaterial threaded through the holes is less than one selected from thegroup: 500 microns, 300 microns, 200 microns, 100 microns, 50 microns,25 microns, and 10 microns. In another embodiment, the fiber or threadedmaterial is substantially transparent or translucent.

In another embodiment, the physical coupling mechanism for the lowcontact area cover comprises holes within lightguide through which anadhesive, epoxy or other adhering material is deposited which bonds tothe low contact area cover. In another embodiment, the adhesive, epoxy,or other adhering material bonds to the low contact area cover and atleast one selected from the group: core region, cladding region, andlightguide. In another embodiment, the adhesive material has arefractive index greater than 1.48 and reduces the scatter out of thelightguide from the hole region over using an air gap or an air gap witha fiber, thread, or wire through the hole. In a further embodiment, anadhesive is applied as a coating on the fiber (which may be UVactivated, cured, etc. after threading, for example) or an adhesive isapplied to the fiber in the region of the hole such that the adhesivewicks into the hole to provide reduced scattering by at least oneselected from the group: optically coupling the inner surfaces of thehole, and optically coupling the fiber to the inner surfaces of thehole.

The physical coupling mechanism in one embodiment may be used tophysically couple together one or more elements selected from the group:film-based lightguide, low contact area cover film, housing, relativeposition maintaining element, light redirecting element or film,diffuser film, collimation film, light extracting film, protective film,touchscreen film, thermal transfer element, and other film or componentwithin the light emitting device.

Lightguide Configuration and Properties

The use of plastic film with thickness less than 0.5 mm for edge litlightguides can hold many advantages over using plastic plate or sheets.A flexible film may be able to be shaped to surfaces, be folded up forstorage, change shape as needed, or wave in the air. Another advantagemay be lower cost. The reduction in thickness helps reduce the cost formaterial, fabrication, storage and shipping for a lightguide of a givenwidth and length. Another reason may be that the decreased thicknessmakes it able to be added to surfaces without appreciable change in thesurface's shape, thickness and or appearance. For example, it can beadded to the surface of a window easily without changing the look of thewindow. Another advantage may be that the film or lightguide can berolled up. This helps in transportability, can hold some functionality,and may be particularly useful for hand-held devices where a roll-outscreen is used. A fifth reason is that the film can weigh less, whichagain makes it easier to handle and transport, A sixth reason may bethat film is commonly extruded in large rolls so larger edge-lit signagecan be produced. Finally, a seventh reason may be that there are manycompanies set up to coat, cut, laminate and manipulate film since filmis useful for many other industries. Plastic films are made by blown orcast-extrusion in widths up to 6.096 meters or longer and in rollsthousands of meters long. Co-extrusion of different materials from twoto 100 layers can be achieved with special extrusion dies.

Thickness of the Film or Lightguide

In one embodiment, the thickness of the film, lightguide or lightguideregion is within a range of 0.005 mm to 0.5 mm. In another embodiment,the thickness of the film or lightguide is within a range of 0.025millimeters to 0.5 millimeters. In a further embodiment, the thicknessof the film, lightguide or lightguide region is within a range of 0.050millimeters to 0.175 millimeters. In one embodiment, the thickness ofthe film, lightguide or lightguide region is less than 0.2 millimetersor less than 0.5 millimeters. In one embodiment, the average thicknessof the lightguide or core region is less than one selected from thegroup: 150 microns, 100 microns, 60 microns, 30 microns, 20 microns, 10microns, 6 microns, and 4 microns. In one embodiment, at least oneselected from the group: thickness, largest thickness, averagethickness, greater than 90% of the entire thickness of the film,lightguide, and a lightguide region is less than 0.2 millimeters. Inanother embodiment, the size to thickness ratio, defined as the largestdimension of the light emitting region in the plane of the lightemitting region divided by the average thickness of the core regionwithin the light emitting region is greater than one selected from thegroup: 100; 500; 1,000; 3,000; 5,000; 10,000; 15,000; 20,000; 30,000;and 50,000.

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light source, alight input coupler, and a film-based lightguide wherein the averagelight flux density in the coupling lightguides, light mixing region,lightguide region, or light emitting region within the film-basedlightguide is greater than one selected from the group: 5, 10, 20, 50,100, 200, 300, 500, and 1000 lumens per cubic millimeter. In anotherembodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light source, a lightinput coupler, and a film-based lightguide wherein the maximum lightflux density in the coupling lightguides, light mixing region,lightguide region, or light emitting region within the film-basedlightguide is greater than one selected from the group: 5, 10, 20, 50,100, 200, 300, 500, and 1000 lumens per cubic millimeter. The fluxdensity in a region is measured by cutting an optical quality edgeperpendicular to the surface at the region and masking off the areaaround the region (using light absorbing materials such that light isnot substantially reflected back into the film) and measuring the farfield luminous intensity using a goniophotometer.

Optical Properties of the Lightguide or Light Transmitting Material

With regards to the optical properties of lightguides or lighttransmitting materials for embodiments, the optical properties specifiedherein may be general properties of the lightguide, the core, thecladding, or a combination thereof or they may correspond to a specificregion (such as a light emitting region, light mixing region, or lightextracting region), surface (light input surface, diffuse surface, flatsurface), and direction (such as measured normal to the surface ormeasured in the direction of light propagation through the lightguide).In one embodiment, the average luminous transmittance of the lightguidemeasured within at least one selected from the group: the light emittingregion, indicia region, the light mixing region, and the lightguideaccording to ASTM D1003 version 07e1 with a BYK Gardner haze meter isgreater than one selected from the group: 70%, 80%, 85%, 88%, 92%, 94%,96%, 98%, and 99%. In another embodiment, the average luminoustransmittance of the lightguide measured within the major light emittingarea (the area comprising greater than 80% of the total light emittedfrom the lightguide) according to ASTM D1003 version 07e1 with a BYKGardner haze meter is greater than one selected from the group: 70%,80%, 88%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 98%, and 99%.

In another embodiment, the average haze of the lightguide measuredwithin at least one selected from the group: the light emitting region,indicia region, the light mixing region, and the lightguide measuredwith a BYK Gardner haze meter is less than one selected from the group:70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 6%, 5%, 4%, and 3%. In anotherembodiment, the average haze of the lightguide measured within at leastone selected from the group: the light emitting region, indicia region,the light mixing region, and the lightguide measured with a BYK Gardnerhaze meter is greater than one selected from the group: 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%,2% and 1%.

In another embodiment, the average clarity of the lightguide measuredwithin at least one selected from the group: the light emitting region,the light mixing region, and the lightguide according to the measurementprocedure associated with ASTM D1003 version 07e1 with a BYK Gardnerhaze meter is greater than one selected from the group: 70%, 80%, 88%,92%, 94%, 96%, 98%, and 99%.

In a further embodiment, the diffuse reflectance of the lightguidemeasured within at least one selected from the group: the light emittingregion, the light mixing region, and the lightguide using a MinoltaCM-508d spectrophotometer is less than one selected from the group: 30%,20%, 10%, 7%, 5%, and 2% with the spectral component included or withthe spectral component excluded when placed above a light absorbing6″×6″×6″ box comprising Light Absorbing Black-Out Material from EdmundOptics Inc. on the inner walls. In another embodiment, the diffusereflectance of the lightguide measured within the major light emittingarea (the area comprising greater than 80% of the total light emittedfrom the lightguide) using a Minolta CM-508d spectrophotometer is lessthan one selected from the group: 30%, 20%, 10%, 7%, 5%, and 2% with thespectral component included or with the spectral component excluded whenplaced above a light absorbing 6″×6″×6″ box comprising Light AbsorbingBlack-Out Material from Edmund Optics Inc. on the inner walls.

In another embodiment, the average clarity of the lightguide measuredwithin at least one selected from the group: the light emitting region,the light mixing region, and the lightguide measured with a BYK Gardnerhaze meter is greater than one selected from the group: 70%, 80%, 88%,92%, 94%, 96%, 98%, and 99%.

Factors which can determine the transmission of light through the film(in the thickness direction) include inherent material absorption,refractive index (light loss due to Fresnel reflections), scattering(refraction, reflection, or diffraction) from particles or featureswithin the volume or on a surface or interface (size, shape, spacing,total number of particles or density in two orthogonal directionsparallel to the film plane and the plane orthogonal to the film),absorption/scattering/reflection/refraction due to other materials(additional layers, claddings, adhesives, etc.), anti-reflectioncoatings, surface relief features.

In one embodiment, the use of a thin film for the lightguide permits thereduction in size of light extraction features because more waveguidemodes will reach the light extraction feature when the thickness of thefilm is reduced. In a thin lightguide, the overlap of modes is increasedwhen the thickness of the waveguide is reduced.

In one embodiment, the film-based lightguide has a graded refractiveindex profile in the thickness direction. In another embodiment, thethickness of the lightguide region or lightguide is less than 10microns. In a further embodiment, the thickness of the lightguide regionis less than 10 microns and the lightguide is a single mode lightguide.

In one embodiment, the light transmitting material used in at least oneselected from the group: coupling lightguide, lightguide, lightguideregion, optical element, optical film, core layer, cladding layer, andoptical adhesive has an optical absorption (dB/km) less than oneselected from the group: 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, and 500 dB/km for awavelength range of interest. The optical absorption value may be forall of the wavelengths throughout the range of interest or an averagevalue throughout the wavelengths of interest. The wavelength range ofinterest for high transmission through the light transmitting materialmay cover the light source output spectrum, the light emitting deviceoutput spectrum, optical functionality requirements (IR transmission forcameras, motion detectors, etc., for example), or some combinationthereof. The wavelength range of interest may be a wavelength rangeselected from the group: 400 nm-700 nm, 300 nm-800 nm, 300 nm-1200 nm,300 nm-350 nm, 300-450 nm, 350 nm-400 nm, 400 nm-450 nm, 450 nm-490 nm,490 nm-560 nm, 500 nm-550 nm, 550 nm-600 nm, 600 nm-650 nm, 635 nm-700nm, 650 nm-700 nm, 700 nm-750 nm, 750 nm-800 nm, and 800 nm-1200 nm.

Collimated light propagating through light transmitting material may bereduced in intensity after passing through the material due toscattering (scattering loss coefficient), absorption (absorptioncoefficient), or a combination of scattering and absorption (attenuationcoefficient). In one embodiment, the core material of the lightguide hasan average absorption coefficient for collimated light less than oneselected from the group: 0.03 cm⁻¹, 0.02 cm⁻¹, 0.01 cm⁻¹, and 0.005 cm⁻¹over the visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700nanometers. In another embodiment, the core material of the lightguidehas an average scattering loss coefficient for collimated light lessthan one selected from the group: 0.03 cm⁻¹, 0.02 cm⁻¹, 0.01 cm⁻¹, and0.005 cm⁻¹ over the visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to700 nanometers. In one embodiment, the core material of the lightguidehas an average attenuation coefficient for collimated light less thanone selected from the group: 0.03 cm⁻¹′, 0.02 cm⁻¹′, 0.01 cm⁻¹, and0.005 cm⁻¹ over the visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to700 nanometers. In another embodiment, the lightguide is disposed toreceive infrared light and the average of at least one selected from thegroup: absorption coefficient, scattering loss coefficient, andattenuation coefficient of the core layer or cladding layer forcollimated light is less than one selected from the group: 0.03 cm′,0.02 cm′, 0.01 cm′, and 0.005 cm⁻¹ over the wavelength spectrum from 700nanometers to 900 nanometers.

In one embodiment, the lightguide has a low absorption in the UV andblue region and the lightguide further comprises a phosphor film orwavelength conversion element. By using a blue or UV light source and awavelength conversion element near the output surface of the lightguidefor generation of white light, the light transmitting material can beoptimized for very high blue or UV light transmission. This can increasethe range of materials suitable for lightguides to include those thathave high absorption coefficients in the green and red wavelengthregions for example.

In another embodiment, the lightguide is the substrate for a displaytechnology. Various high performance films are known in the displayindustry as having sufficient mechanical and optical properties. Theseinclude, but are not limited to polycarbonate, PET, PMMA, PEN, COC, PSU,PFA, FEP, and films made from blends and multilayer components. In oneembodiment, the light extraction feature is formed in a lightguideregion of a film before or after the film is utilized as a substrate forthe production or use as a substrate for a display such as an OLEDdisplay, MEMs based display, polymer film-based display, bi-stabledisplay, electrophoretic display, electrochromic display,electro-optical display, passive matrix display, or other display thatcan be produced using polymer substrates.

Refractive Index of the Light Transmitting Material

In one embodiment, the core material of the lightguide has a highrefractive index and the cladding material has a low refractive index.In one embodiment, the core is formed from a material with a refractiveindex (n_(D)) greater than one selected from the group: 1.3, 1.4, 1.5,1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9,and 3.0. In another embodiment, the refractive index (n_(D)) of thecladding material is less than one selected from the group: 1.1, 1.2,1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5.

In one embodiment, the core region of the film-based lightguidecomprises a material with a refractive index difference in two or moreorthogonal directions less than one selected from the group: 0.1, 0.05,0.02, 0.01, 0.005, and 0.001. In one embodiment, the light transmittingmaterial is semicrystalline with a low refractive index birefringence.In another embodiment, the light transmitting material is substantiallyamorphous and has a low stress-induced birefringence.

The core or the cladding or other light transmitting material usedwithin an embodiment may be a thermoplastic, thermoset, rubber, polymer,silicone or other light transmitting material. Optical products can beprepared from high index of refraction materials, including monomerssuch as high index of refraction (meth)acrylate monomers, halogenatedmonomers, and other such high index of refraction monomers as are knownin the art. High refractive index materials such as these and others aredisclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,568,445; 4,721,377;4,812,032; 5,424,339; 5,183,917; 6,541,591; 7,491,441; 7,297,810,6,355,754, 7,682,710; 7,642,335; 7,632,904; 7,407,992; 7,375,178;6,117,530; 5,777,433; 6,533,959; 6,541,591; 7,038,745 and U.S. patentapplication Ser. Nos. 11/866,521; 12/165,765; 12/307,555; and Ser. No.11/556,432. High refractive index pressure sensitive adhesives such asthose disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/608,019 may alsobe used as a core layer or layer component.

Low refractive index materials include sol gels, fluoropolymers,fluorinated sol-gels, PMP, and other materials such fluoropolyetherurethanes such as those disclosed in 7,575,847, and other low refractiveindex material such as those disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser.Nos. 11/972,034; 12/559,690; 12/294,694; 10/098,813; 11/026,614; andU.S. Pat. Nos. 7,374,812; 7,709,551; 7,625,984; 7,164,536; 5,594,830 and7,419,707.

Materials such nanoparticles (titanium dioxide, and other oxides forexample), blends, alloys, doping, sol gel, and other techniques may beused to increase or decrease the refractive index of a material.

In another embodiment, the refractive index or location of a region oflightguide or lightguide region changes in response to environmentalchanges or controlled changes. These changes can include electricalcurrent, electromagnetic field, magnetic field, temperature, pressure,chemical reaction, movement of particles or materials (such aselectrophoresis or electrowetting), optical irradiation, orientation ofthe object with respect to gravitational field, MEMS devices, MOEMSdevices, and other techniques for changing mechanical, electrical,optical or physical properties such as those known in the of smartmaterials. In one embodiment, the light extraction feature couples moreor less light out of the lightguide in response to an applied voltage orelectromagnetic field. In one embodiment, the light emitting devicecomprises a lightguide wherein properties of the lightguide (such as theposition of the lightguide) which change to couple more less light outof a lightguide such as those incorporated in MEMs type displays anddevices as disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 12/511,693;12/606,675; 12/221,606; 12/258,206; 12/483,062; 12/221,193; 11/975,41111/975,398; 10/312,003; 10/699,397 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,586,560;7,535,611; 6,680,792; 7,556,917; 7,532,377; and 7,297,471.

Edges of the Lightguide

In one embodiment, the edges of the lightguide or lightguide region arecoated, bonded to or disposed adjacent to a specularly reflectingmaterial, partially diffusely reflecting material, or diffuse reflectingmaterial. In one embodiment, the lightguide edges are coated with aspecularly reflecting ink comprising nano-sized or micron-sizedparticles or flakes which reflect the light substantially specularly. Inanother embodiment, a light reflecting element (such as a specularlyreflecting multi-layer polymer film with high reflectivity) is disposednear the lightguide edge and is disposed to receive light from the edgeand reflect it and direct it back into the lightguide. In anotherembodiment, the lightguide edges are rounded and the percentage of lightdiffracted from the edge is reduced. One method of achieving roundededges is by using a laser to cut the lightguide from a film and achieveedge rounding through control of the processing parameters (speed ofcut, frequency of cut, laser power, etc.). In another embodiment, theedges of the lightguide are tapered, angled serrated, or otherwise cutor formed such that light from a light source propagating within thecoupling lightguide reflects from the edge such that it is directed intoan angle closer to the optical axis of the light source, toward a foldedregion, toward a bent region, toward a lightguide, toward a lightguideregion, or toward the optical axis of the light emitting device. In afurther embodiment, two or more light sources are disposed to eachcouple light into two or more coupling lightguides comprising lightre-directing regions for each of the two or more light sources thatcomprise first and second reflective surfaces which direct a portion oflight from the light source into an angle closer to the optical axis ofthe light source, toward a folded or bent region, toward a lightguideregion, toward a lightguide region, or toward the optical axis of thelight emitting device. In one embodiment, one or more edges of thecoupling lightguides, the lightguide, the light mixing region, or thelightguide region comprise a curve or arcuate profile in the region ofintersection between two or more surfaces of the film in a region. Inone embodiment, the edges in a region have a curved profile instead of asharp corner to reduce diffractive effects and extraction of light nearthe region. In one embodiment, the edges of one or more regions areround cut edges, such as a semi-circular arc to remove the corners thatcan act as diffracting elements on the propagating light. Very thinlightguides (e.g. less than 150 microns thick) have a higher probabilitythat light is diffracted when encountering a sharp corner. Roundedcorners can be achieved, for example without limitation, bylaser-cutting an acrylic film to leave a melted edge that re-solidifiesinto a rounded edge.

Surfaces of the Lightguide

In one embodiment, at least one surface of the lightguide or lightguideregion is coated, bonded to or disposed adjacent to a specularlyreflecting material, partially diffusely reflecting material, or diffusereflecting material. In one embodiment, at least on lightguide surfaceis coated with a specularly reflecting ink comprising nano-sized ormicron-sized particles or flakes which reflect the light substantiallyspecularly. In another embodiment, a light reflecting element (such as aspecularly reflecting multi-layer polymer film with high reflectivity)is disposed near the lightguide surface opposite the light emittingsurface and is disposed to receive light from the surface and reflect itand direct it back into the lightguide. In another embodiment, the outersurface of at least one lightguide or component coupled to thelightguide comprises a microstructure to reduce the appearance offingerprints. Such microstructures are known in the art of hardcoatingsfor displays and examples are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser.No. 12/537,930.

Shape of the Lightguide

In one embodiment, at least a portion of the lightguide shape orlightguide surface is at least one selected from the group:substantially planar, curved, cylindrical, a formed shape from asubstantially planar film, spherical, partially spherical, angled,twisted, rounded, have a quadric surface, spheroid, cuboid,parallelepiped, triangular prism, rectangular prism, ellipsoid, ovoid,cone pyramid, tapered triangular prism, wave-like shape, and other knowngeometrical solids or shapes. In one embodiment, the lightguide is afilm which has been formed into a shape by thermoforming or otherforming technique. In another embodiment, the film or region of the filmis tapered in at least one direction. In a further embodiment, a lightemitting device comprises a plurality of lightguides and a plurality oflight sources physically couple or arranged together (such as tiled in a1×2 array for example). In another embodiment, the lightguide region ofthe film comprises or is substantially in the shape of one selected fromthe group: rectangular, square, circle, doughnut shaped (elliptical witha hole in the inner region), elliptical, linear strip, and tube (with acircular, rectangular, polygonal, or other shaped cross-section). In oneembodiment, the film-based lightguide is stamped, bent, folded orotherwise reshaped in one or more places (such as in the couplinglightguides, the lightguide region, or light mixing region, for example)to assist in maintaining its location relative to another component orattach it to or guide it relative to another component (such as thehousing, frame, light input coupler, device housing, for example withoutlimitation).

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a lightguide formedfrom a film into a hollow cylindrical tube comprises coupling lightguidestrips branching from the film on a short edge toward the inner portionof the cylinder. In another embodiment, a light emitting devicecomprises a film lightguide with coupling lightguides cut into the filmso that they remain coupled to the lightguide region and the centralstrip is not optically coupled to the lightguide and provides a spinewith increased stiffness in at least one direction near the centralstrip region or lightguide region near the strip. In a furtherembodiment, a light emitting device comprises lightguides with lightinput couplers arranged such that the light source is disposed in thecentral region of the edge of the lightguide and that the light inputcoupler (or a component thereof) does not extend past the edge andenables the lightguides to be tiled in at least one of a 1×2, 2×2, 2×3,3×3 or larger array. In another embodiment, a light emitting devicecomprises light emitting lightguides wherein the separation between thelightguides in at least one direction along the light emitting surfaceis less than one selected from the group: 10 mm, 5 mm, 3 mm, 2 mm, 1 mmand 0.5 mm.

In another embodiment, the lightguide comprises single fold or bend nearan edge of the lightguide such that the lightguide folds under or overitself. In this embodiment, light which would ordinarily be lost at theedge of a lightguide may be further extracted from the lightguide afterthe fold or bend to increase the optical efficiency of the lightguide ordevice. In another embodiment, the light extraction features on thelightguide disposed in the optical path of the light within thelightguide after the fold or bend provide light extraction features thatincrease at least one selected from the group: luminance, luminanceuniformity, color uniformity, optical efficiency, and image or logoclarity or resolution.

Edges Fold Around Back onto the Lightguide

In one embodiment, at least one edge region selected from the group: thelightguide, the lightguide region, and the coupling lightguides folds orbends back upon itself and is optically coupled to the lightguide,lightguide region or coupling lightguide such that a portion enteringthe edge region is coupled back into the lightguide, lightguide region,or coupling lightguide in a direction away from the edge region. Theedge regions may be adhered using an adhesive such as PSA or otheradhesive, thermally bonded, or otherwise optically coupled back onto thelightguide, lightguide region, or coupling lightguide. In oneembodiment, folding the edge regions of the lightguide redirects lightthat would normally exit the edge of the film back into the lightguide,and the optical efficiency of the system is increased.

In another embodiment, the thickness of the lightguide, lightguideregion, or coupling lightguide is thinner in the region near an edgethan the average thickness of the lightguide in the light emittingregion or lightguide region. In another embodiment, the thickness of thelightguide, lightguide region, or coupling lightguide is less than oneselected from the group: 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%,and 5% of the average thickness of the lightguide in the light emittingregion or lightguide region.

In one embodiment, the thickness of the lightguide, lightguide region,or coupling lightguide is tapered in the region near an edge. In oneembodiment, tapering the thickness in the region near edge permits morelight to couple back into the lightguide when it is optically coupled tothe surface of the lightguide or lightguide region.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device has an optical efficiency,defined as the luminous flux of the light exiting the light emittingdevice in the light emitting region divided by the luminous flux of thelight exiting the light source disposed to direct light into the inputcoupler, greater than one selected from the group: 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%,and 90%.

In another embodiment, the edge region of a lightguide not disposed toreceive light directly from a light source or light input coupler isformed or coupled into a light output coupler comprising couplinglightguides which are folded or bent to create a light output surface.In another embodiment, the light output surface is optically coupled toor disposed proximal to a light input surface of a light input couplerfor the same lightguide or film or a second lightguide or film. In thisembodiment, the light reaching the edge of a lightguide may be coupledinto coupling strips which are folded and bent to direct light back intothe lightguide and recycle the light.

Reflecting Features Cut into the Edge of the Lightguide

In one embodiment, one or more regions of the film-based lightguidecomprise reflective features disposed to reflect light within a firstangular range back into the lightguide by total-internal reflection. Inone embodiment, the reflective features are one or more shaped featurescut along the edge selected from the group: angled features, triangularfeatures, triangular features with an apex angle of substantially 90degrees, arcs, semicircular arcs, shapes with arcuate and linearfeatures, multi-faceted shapes, and polygonal shapes. For example, inone embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light input couplerdisposed along one side and a plurality of “zig-zagged” angled cuts inthe film on the opposite side with 90 degree apex angles. In thisembodiment, the light within the film that reaches the angled cutsdirectly at about 0 degrees from the opposite side will substantiallyretro-reflect back into the lightguide. The shape, angle, refractiveindex and location of the angled cuts will affect the angular range andpercentage of light reflected back into the lightguide. The cuts may be“micro-cuts” such that they do not substantially extend the lateraldistance of the film-based lightguide. In one embodiment, the opticalaxis of the light propagating in the film-based lightguide is in the xdirection and the apex angle of the reflecting features is 90 degreessuch that the reflectance of the light that is not extracted by thelight extracting surface features is maximized and directed back towardthe light emitting region to be recycled. Other faceted shapes or curvedshapes may also be cut from the edge to achieve a desired reflection orlight transmitting properties.

Lightguide Material

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a lightguide orlightguide region formed from at least one light transmitting material.In one embodiment, the lightguide is a film comprising at least one coreregion and at least one cladding region, each comprising at least onelight transmitting material. In one embodiment, the core material issubstantially flexible (such as a rubber or adhesive) and the claddingmaterial supports and provides at least one selected from the group:increased flexural modulus, increased impact strength, increased tearresistance, and increased scratch resistance for the combined element.In another embodiment, the cladding material is substantially flexible(such as a rubber or adhesive) and the core material supports andprovides at least one selected from the group: increased flexuralmodulus, increased impact strength, increased tear resistance, andincreased scratch resistance for the combined element.

The light transmitting material used within an embodiment may be athermoplastic, thermoset, rubber, polymer, high transmission silicone,glass, composite, alloy, blend, silicone, other light transmittingmaterial, or a combination thereof.

In one embodiment, a component or region of the light emitting devicecomprises a light transmitting material selected from the group:cellulose derivatives (e.g., cellulose ethers such as ethylcellulose andcyanoethylcellulose, cellulose esters such as cellulose acetate),acrylic resins, styrenic resins (e.g., polystyrene), polyvinyl-seriesresins [e.g., poly(vinyl ester) such as poly(vinyl acetate), poly(vinylhalide) such as poly(vinyl chloride), polyvinyl alkyl ethers orpolyether-series resins such as poly(vinyl methyl ether), poly(vinylisobutyl ether) and poly(vinyl t-butyl ether)], polycarbonate-seriesresins (e.g., aromatic polycarbonates such as bisphenol A-typepolycarbonate), polyester-series resins (e.g., homopolyesters, forexample, polyalkylene terephthalates such as polyethylene terephthalateand polybutylene terephthalate, polyalkylene naphthalates correspondingto the polyalkylene terephthalates; copolyesters containing an alkyleneterephthalate and/or alkylene naphthalate as a main component;homopolymers of lactones such as polycaprolactone), polyamide-seriesresin (e.g., nylon 6, nylon 66, nylon 610), urethane-series resins(e.g., thermoplastic polyurethane resins), copolymers of monomersforming the above resins [e.g., styrenic copolymers such as methylmethacrylate-styrene copolymer (MS resin), acrylonitrile-styrenecopolymer (AS resin), styrene-(meth)acrylic acid copolymer,styrene-maleic anhydride copolymer and styrene-butadiene copolymer,vinyl acetate-vinyl chloride copolymer, vinyl alkyl ether-maleicanhydride copolymer]. Incidentally, the copolymer may be whichever of arandom copolymer, a block copolymer, or a graft copolymer.

Lightguide Material Comprises Glass

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides comprise a core materialcomprising a glass material. In one embodiment, the glass material isone selected from the group: fused silica, ultraviolet grade fusedsilica (such as JGS1 by Dayoptics Inc., Suprasil® 1 and 2 by HeraeusQuartz America, LLC., Spectrosil® A and B by Saint-Gobain Quartz PLC,and Corning 7940 by Corning Incorporated, Dynasil® Synthetic FusedSilica 1100 and 4100 by Dynasil Corporation), optical grade fusedquartz, full spectrum fused silica, borosilicate glass, crown glass, andaluminoborosilicate glass.

In another embodiment, the core material comprises a glass which iscoated, or has an organic material applied to at least one selected fromthe group: the edge, the top surface, and the bottom surface. In oneembodiment, the coating on the glass functions to at least one selectedfrom the group: provide a cladding region, increase impact resistance,and provide increased flexibility. In another embodiment, the couplinglightguides comprising glass, a polymeric material, or a rubber materialare heated to a temperature above their glass transition temperature orVICAT softening point before folding in a first direction.

Multilayer Lightguide

In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises at least two layers orcoatings. In another embodiment, the layers or coatings function as atleast one selected from the group: a core layer, a cladding layer, a tielayer (to promote adhesion between two other layers), a layer toincrease flexural strength, a layer to increase the impact strength(such as Izod, Charpy, Gardner, for example), and a carrier layer. In afurther embodiment, at least one layer or coating comprises amicrostructure, surface relief pattern, light extraction features,lenses, or other non-flat surface features which redirect a portion ofincident light from within the lightguide to an angle whereupon itescapes the lightguide in the region near the feature. For example, thecarrier film may be a silicone film with embossed light extractionfeatures disposed to receive a thermoset polycarbonate resin. In anotherembodiment, the carrier film is removed from contact with the corematerial in at least one region. For example, the carrier film may be anembossed FEP film and a thermoset methacrylate based resin is coatedupon the film and cured by heat, light, other radiation, or acombination thereof. In another embodiment, the core material comprisesa methacrylate material and the cladding comprises a silicone material.In another embodiment, a cladding material is coated onto a carrier filmand subsequently, a core layer material, such as a silicone, a PC, or aPMMA based material, is coated or extruded onto the cladding material.In one embodiment, the cladding layer is too thin to support itself in acoating line and therefore a carrier film is used. The coating may havesurface relief properties one the side opposite the carrier film, forexample.

In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a core material disposedbetween two cladding regions wherein the core region comprises apolymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene, or other amorphous polymer and thelightguide is bent at a first radius of curvature and the core regionand cladding region are not fractured in the bend region, wherein thesame core region comprising the same polymethyl methacrylate without thecladding regions or layers fractures more than 50% of the time when bentat the first radius of curvature. In another embodiment, a lightguidecomprises substantially ductile polymer materials disposed on both sidesof a substantially brittle material of a first thickness such as PMMA orpolystyrene without impact modifiers and the polymer fracture toughnessor the ASTM D4812 version 06 un-notched Izod impact strength of thelightguide is greater than a single layer of the brittle material of afirst thickness.

Core Region Comprising a Thermoset Material

In one embodiment, a thermoset material is coated onto a thermoplasticfilm wherein the thermoset material is the core material and thecladding material is the thermoplastic film or material. In anotherembodiment, a first thermoset material is coated onto a film comprisinga second thermoset material wherein the first thermoset material is thecore material and the cladding material is the second thermoset plastic.

In one embodiment, an epoxy resin that has generally been used as amolding material may be used as the epoxy resin (A). Examples includeepoxidation products of novolac resins derived from phenols andaldehydes, such as phenol novolac epoxy resins and ortho-cresol novolacepoxy resins; diglycidyl ethers of bisphenol A, bisphenol F, bisphenolS, alkyl-substituted bisphenol, or the like; glycidylamine epoxy resinsobtained by the reaction of a polyamine such as diaminodiphenylmethaneand isocyanuric acid with epichlorohydrin; linear aliphatic epoxy resinsobtained by oxidation of olefin bonds with a peracid such as peraceticacid; and alicyclic epoxy resins. Any two or more of these resins may beused in combination. Examples of thermoset resins further includebisphenol A epoxy resins, bisphenol F epoxy resins, bisphenol S epoxyresins, diglycidyl isocyanurate, and triglycidyl isocyanurate, P(MMA-d8)material, fluorinated resin, deuterated polymer, poly(fluoroalkyl-MA),poly(deuterated fluoroalkyl-MA), trideutero hexafluorobutyl-pentadeuteromethacrylate, and triazine derived epoxy resin.

In another embodiment, the thermosetting resin is a thermosettingsilicone resin. In a further embodiment, the thermosetting siliconeresin composition comprises a condensation reactable substituentgroup-containing silicon compound and an addition reactable substituentgroup-containing silicon compound. In another embodiment, thethermosetting silicone resin composition comprises a dual-end silanoltype silicone oil as the condensation reactable substituentgroup-containing silicon compound; an alkenyl group-containing siliconcompound; an organohydrogensiloxane as the addition reactablesubstituent group-containing silicon compound; a condensation catalyst;and a hydrosilylation catalyst. In one embodiment, the thermosettingresin is a methylphenyl dimethyl copolymer or comprises a silicone basedmaterial such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,551,830. In anotherembodiment, the thermosetting resin comprises a polydiorganosiloxanehaving an average, per molecule, of at least two aliphaticallyunsaturated organic groups and at least one aromatic group; (B) abranched polyorganosiloxane having an average, per molecule, of at leastone aliphatically unsaturated organic group and at least one aromaticgroup; (C) a polyorganohydrogensiloxane having an average per moleculeof at least two silicon-bonded hydrogen atoms and at least one aromaticgroup, (D) a hydrosilylation catalyst, and (E) a silylated acetylenicinhibitor. In another embodiment, the thermosetting comprises asilicone, polysiloxane, or silsesquioxane material such as disclosed inU.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 12/085,422 and 11/884,612.

In a further embodiment, the thermosetting material comprises: a liquidcrystalline thermoset oligomer containing at least aromatic or alicyclicstructural unit with a kink structure in the backbone and having one ortwo thermally crosslinkable reactive groups introduced at one or bothends of the backbone; either a crosslinking agent having thermallycrosslinkable reactive groups at both ends thereof or an epoxy compoundor both; and an organic solvent. In a further embodiment, thethermosetting composition comprises at least on selected from the group:an aluminosiloxane, a silicone oil containing silanol groups at bothends, an epoxy silicone, and a silicone elastomer. In this thermosettingcomposition, it is considered that each of hydroxyl groups of thealuminosiloxane and/or the silicone oil containing silanol groups atboth ends, and a highly reactive epoxy group of the epoxy silicone arereacted and cross-linked, at the same time the silicone elastomer iscross-linked by a hydrosilylation reaction therewith. In anotherembodiment, the thermoset is a photopolymerizable composition. Inanother embodiment, the photopolymerizable composition comprises: asilicon-containing resin comprising silicon-bonded hydrogen andaliphatic unsaturation, a first metal-containing catalyst that may beactivated by actinic radiation, and a second metal-containing catalystthat may be activated by heat but not the actinic radiation.

In another embodiment, the thermosetting resin comprises asilsesquioxane derivative or a Q-containing silicone. In anotherembodiment, the thermosetting resin is a resin with substantially hightransmission such as those disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser.Nos. 12/679,749, 12/597,531, 12/489,881, 12/637,359, 12/637,359,12/549,956, 12/759,293, 12/553,227, 11/137,358, 11/391,021, and11/551,323.

In one embodiment, the lightguide material for the core region comprisesa material with a glass transition temperature less than one selectedfrom the group: −100, −110, −120, −130, −140, −150 degrees Celsius. Inanother embodiment, the material for the core region of the lightguidecomprises a material with a Young's modulus less than one selected fromthe group: 2.8, 2, 1.8, 1.6, 1.5, 1.2, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.4, 0.2, 0.1, 0.08,0.06, and 0.04 kilopascals. In one embodiment, a material with a lowYoung's modulus and/or low glass transition temperature is used toreduce tears or cuts when the coupling lightguides are folded, such as,for example without limitation, when using a relative positionmaintaining element.

In a further embodiment, the lightguide comprises a thermoset resin thatis coated onto an element of the light emitting device (such as acarrier film with a coating, an optical film, the rear polarizer in anLCD, a brightness enhancing film, a thermal transfer element such as athin sheet comprising aluminum, or a white reflector film) andsubsequently cured or thermoset.

Lightguide Material with Adhesive Properties

In another embodiment, the lightguide comprises a material with at leastone selected from the group: chemical adhesion, dispersive adhesion,electrostatic adhesion, diffusive adhesion, and mechanical adhesion toat least one element of the light emitting device (such as a carrierfilm with a coating, an optical film, the rear polarizer in an LCD, abrightness enhancing film, another region of the lightguide, a couplinglightguide, a thermal transfer element such as a thin sheet comprisingaluminum, or a white reflector film). In a further embodiment, at leastone of the core material or cladding material of the lightguide is anadhesive material. In a further embodiment, at least one selected fromthe group: core material, cladding material, and a material disposed ona cladding material of the lightguide is at least one selected from thegroup: a pressure sensitive adhesive, a contact adhesive, a hotadhesive, a drying adhesive, a multi-part reactive adhesive, a one-partreactive adhesive, a natural adhesive, and a synthetic adhesive. In afurther embodiment, the first core material of a first couplinglightguide is adhered to the second core material of a second couplinglightguide due to the adhesion properties of the first core material,second core material, or a combination thereof. In another embodiment,the cladding material of a first coupling lightguide is adhered to thecore material of a second coupling lightguide due to the adhesionproperties of the cladding material. In another embodiment, the firstcladding material of a first coupling lightguide is adhered to thesecond cladding material of a second coupling lightguide due to theadhesion properties of the first cladding material, second claddingmaterial, or a combination thereof. In one embodiment, the core layer isan adhesive and is coated onto at least one selected from the group:cladding layer, removable support layer, protective film, secondadhesive layer, polymer film, metal film, second core layer, low contactarea cover, and planarization layer. In another embodiment, the claddingmaterial or core material has adhesive properties and has an ASTM D3330version 04 Peel strength greater than one selected from the group:8.929, 17.858, 35.716, 53.574, 71.432, 89.29, 107.148, 125.006, 142.864,160.722, 178.580 kilograms per meter of bond width when adhered to anelement of the light emitting device, such as for example withoutlimitation, a cladding layer, a core layer, a low contact area cover, acircuit board, or a housing.

In another embodiment, a tie layer, primer, or coating is used topromote adhesion between at least one selected from the group: corematerial and cladding material, lightguide and housing, core materialand element of the light emitting device, cladding material and elementof the light emitting device. In one embodiment, the tie layer orcoating comprises a dimethyl silicone or variant thereof and a solvent.In another embodiment, the tie layer comprises a phenyl based primersuch as those used to bridge phenylsiloxane-based silicones withsubstrate materials. In another embodiment, the tie layer comprises aplatinum-catalyzed, addition-cure silicone primer such as those used tobond plastic film substrates and silicone pressure sensitive adhesives.

In a further embodiment, at least one region of the core material orcladding material has adhesive properties and is optical coupled to asecond region of the core or cladding material such that the ASTM D1003version 07e1 luminous transmittance through the interface is at leastone selected from the group: 1%, 2%, 3%, and 4% greater than thetransmission through the same two material at the same region with anair gap disposed between them.

Outermost Surface of the Film or Lightguide

In one embodiment, the outermost surface of the film, lightguide orlightguide region comprises at least one selected from the group: acladding, a surface texture to simulate a soft feel or match the surfacetexture of cloth or upholstery, a refractive element to collimate lightfrom the light extraction features (such as microlens array), anadhesive layer, a removable backing material, an anti-reflectioncoating, an anti-glare surface, and a rubber surface.

Surface Relief on the Outermost Surface of the Film-Based Lightguide orLight Emitting Film

In one embodiment, the outermost surface of the film, lightguide, lightemitting film, light redirecting element, or light emitting devicecomprises surface relief features and the ASTM D523-89 version 2008 60degree gloss of the surface is less than one selected from the group:100, 50, 25, and 15. In one embodiment, the gloss on the outer surfacereduces ambient glare light intensity that would highlight the surface.For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises alightguide with an outermost surface with a uniform low gloss of 2 glossunits. When this lightguide is disposed on a wall with a matte ordiffusing surface with a gloss of about 2 gloss units, the substantiallytransparent or translucent lightguide with high visible lighttransmittance is nearly invisible, even at glare angles from lightsources due to the matching of the gloss of the outermost surface. Inthis embodiment, the light emitting device is significantly less visiblein the off-state in an application such as a wall mounted light fixture.In one embodiment, the outermost surface with the low gloss is a surfaceof an anti-glare film, embossed film, cladding layer, light redirectingelement, light turning optical element, light collimating opticalelement, lightguide, core region (where there is no cladding surface onthat side of the core region), light re-directing element, lightemitting device cover, lens, or a housing element.

In one embodiment, the outermost surface of the film, lightguide, lightemitting film, light redirecting element, or light emitting device hasan ASTM D523-89 version 2008 60 degree gloss greater than one selectedfrom the group: 50, 70, 90, 100, and 110. In this embodiment, the highgloss can match a glossy surface such as a window, glass partition,metal surface, etc. such that is less visible in the off state at glareangles. In another embodiment, a kit comprises a light emitting deviceand one or more films with gloss levels different from a region of theoutermost surface of the light emitting device such that may be attachedto an outermost surface region of the light emitting device to allow achoice of gloss level for the new outermost surface. For example, a filmwith the correct gloss level may be chosen to match the gloss level ofthe wall adjacent the light emitting device.

Light Extraction Method

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: the lightguide,the lightguide region, and the light emitting region comprises at leastone light extraction feature or region. In one embodiment, the lightextraction method includes operatively coupling a light extractionfeature to the core region, lightguide region, or to a materialoperatively coupled to the core region or lightguide region. Operativelycoupling the light extraction feature to a region includes, withoutlimitation: adding, removing, or altering material on the surface of theregion or within the volume of the region; disposing a material on thesurface of the region or within the volume of the region; applying amaterial on the surface of the region or within the volume of theregion; printing or painting a material on the surface of the region orwithin the volume of the region; removing material from the surface ofthe region or from the volume of the region; modifying a surface of theregion or region within the volume of the region; stamping or embossinga surface of the region or region within the volume of the region;scratching, sanding, ablating, or scribing a surface of the region orregion within the volume of the region; forming a light extractionfeature on the surface of the region or within the volume of the region;bonding a material on the surface of the region or within the volume ofthe region; adhering a material to the surface of the cladding region orwithin the volume of the cladding region; optically coupling the lightextraction feature to the surface of the region or volume of the region;optically coupling or physically coupling the light extraction featureto the region by an intermediate surface, layer or material disposedbetween the light extraction feature and the region. In anotherembodiment, a light extraction feature is operatively coupled to aregion such that a portion of light propagating within the regionincident on the light extraction feature will exit the region or bere-directed to an angle smaller than the critical angle such that itdoes not remain within the region, core region, coupling lightguide,lightguide, or other region through which it is propagating by totalinternal reflection.

In one embodiment, the light extraction region or feature is defined bya raised or recessed surface pattern or a volumetric region. Raised andrecessed surface patterns include, without limitation, scatteringmaterial, raised lenses, scattering surfaces, pits, grooves, surfacemodulations, microlenses, lenses, diffractive surface features,holographic surface features, photonic bandgap features, wavelengthconversion materials, holes, edges of layers (such as regions where thecladding is removed from covering the core layer), pyramid shapes, prismshapes, and other geometrical shapes with flat surfaces, curvedsurfaces, random surfaces, quasi-random surfaces and combinationsthereof. The volumetric scattering regions within the light extractionregion may comprise dispersed phase domains, voids, absence of othermaterials or regions (gaps, holes), air gaps, boundaries between layersand regions, and other refractive index discontinuities within thevolume of the material different that co-planar layers with parallelinterfacial surfaces. In one embodiment, the light extracting regioncomprises angled or curved surface or volumetric light extractingfeatures that redirect a first redirection percentage of light into anangular range within 5 degrees of the normal to the light emittingsurface of the light emitting device. In another embodiment, the firstredirection percentage is greater than one selected from the group: 5,10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, and 90. In one embodiment, the lightextraction features are light redirecting features, light extractingregions or light output coupling features. In a further embodiment, thelight extraction feature has an angular FWHM intensity of transmittedlight greater than one selected from the group: 10 degrees, 20 degrees,30 degrees, 40 degrees, 50 degrees, 60 degrees, 70 degrees, 80 degrees,90 degrees, and 100 degrees when measured with light incident normal tothe large area surface of the film at the feature with a 532 nm laserdiode with a divergence less than 5 milliradians where the size of thecross-sectional area of the light from the laser is smaller than thelight extraction feature.

In one embodiment, the lightguide or lightguide region comprises lightextraction features in a plurality of regions. In one embodiment, thelightguide or lightguide region comprises light extraction features onor within at least one selected from the group: one outer surface, twoouter surfaces, two outer and opposite surfaces, an outer surface and atleast one region disposed between the two outer surfaces, within twodifferent volumetric regions substantially within two differentvolumetric planes parallel to at least one outer surface or lightemitting surface or plane, and within a plurality of volumetric planes.In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a lightemitting region on the lightguide region of a lightguide comprising morethan one region of light extraction features. In another embodiment, oneor more light extraction features are disposed on top of another lightextraction feature. For example, grooved light extraction features couldcomprise light scattering hollow microspheres which may increase theamount of light extracted from the lightguide or which could furtherscatter or redirect the light that is extracted by the grooves. Morethan one type of light extraction feature may be used on the surface,within the volume of a lightguide or lightguide region, or a combinationthereof.

In one embodiment, the lateral dimension of one or more light extractionfeatures in the light emitting region in a direction parallel to theoptical axis of the light within the lightguide at the light extractionfeature is less than one selected from the group: 1 mm, 500 microns, 250microns, 200 microns, 150 microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50 microns,25 microns, 20 microns, 10 microns, 5 microns, 2 microns, 1 microns, 0.5microns, and 0.3 microns. In another embodiment, the average lateraldimension of the light extraction features in the light emitting regionin a direction parallel to the optical axis of the light within thelightguide at the light extraction feature is less than one selectedfrom the group: 1 mm, 500 microns, 250 microns, 200 microns, 150microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns, 20 microns, 10microns, 5 microns, 2 microns, 1 microns, 0.5 microns, and 0.3 microns.

In another embodiment, the dimension of one or more light extractionfeatures in the light emitting region in a direction perpendicular tothe optical axis of the light within the lightguide at the lightextraction feature or the direction perpendicular to the surface of thelightguide between the light extracting features is less than oneselected from the group: 1 mm, 500 microns, 250 microns, 200 microns,150 microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns, 20microns, 10 microns, 5 microns, 2 microns, 1 microns, 0.5 microns, and0.3 microns. In another embodiment, the average dimension of the lightextraction features in the light emitting region in a directionperpendicular to the optical axis of the light within the lightguide atthe light extraction feature or the direction perpendicular to thesurface of the lightguide between the light extracting features is lessthan one selected from the group: 1 mm, 500 microns, 250 microns, 200microns, 150 microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns,20 microns, 10 microns, 5 microns, 2 microns, 1 microns, 0.5 microns,and 0.3 microns.

In one embodiment, the separation distance between a first lightextraction feature and the closest neighboring light extraction featureis less than one selected from the group: 200 microns, 150 microns, 100microns, 75 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns, and 20 microns. In anotherembodiment, the average separation distance between two neighboringlight extraction features in one or more light emitting regions of thefilm-based lightguide in a direction substantially parallel to theoptical axis of the light propagating within the lightguide in theregion of the light extracting features is less than one selected fromthe group: 200 microns, 150 microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50microns, 25 microns, and 20 microns. In one embodiment, a light emittingdevice comprises a film-based lightguide comprising a first lightextraction feature disposed to illuminate a first region or pixel of adisplay and a second light extraction feature (that is the closestneighboring light extraction feature to the first light extractionfeature) disposed to illuminate a second region or pixel of a displayadjacent the first region or pixel of a display such that the percentageof light flux from the first light extraction feature received by thesecond region or pixel and the percentage of light flux from the secondlight extraction feature received by the first region or pixel is lessthan one selected from the group: 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5%. Inone embodiment, a very thin film-based lightguide (such as 25 micronsfor example) is disposed in close proximity to spatial light modulatorand the film-based lightguide comprises substantially one lightextraction feature disposed in proximity of each light modulation pixelof the spatial light modulator. In this embodiment, for example, largelight extraction features (relative to the thickness of the lightguide)such as 200 microns in a lateral dimension parallel to the direction ofthe optical axis of the light within the lightguide in the region of thelight extraction features would redirect and extract a very significantportion of the light propagating in the lightguide over a broad range ofangles that could make uniform illumination over a large illuminationarea difficult. In one embodiment, the ratio of the average thickness ofthe film-based lightguide in a light emitting region to the averagelateral dimension of the light extraction features in the light emittingregion in a direction parallel to the optical axis of the lightpropagating within the lightguide at the light extraction features isgreater than one selected from the group: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 40,60, 80, and 1000. In one embodiment, the ratio of the average thicknessof the film-based lightguide in a light emitting region to the averagelateral dimension of the light extraction features in the light emittingregion in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the lightpropagating within the lightguide at the light extraction features orthe dimension in a direction perpendicular to the surface of thelightguide between the light extracting features is greater than oneselected from the group: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 80, and 1000.In another embodiment, the ratio of the average thickness of thefilm-based lightguide in the light emitting region to the averageseparation distance between two neighboring light extraction features inthe direction parallel to the optical axis of the light propagating inthe lightguide at the light extraction features is greater than oneselected from the group: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 80, and 1000.In another embodiment, the ratio of the average separation distancebetween neighboring light extraction features in the direction parallelto the optical axis of the light propagating in the lightguide at thelight extraction features to the average lateral dimension of the lightextraction features in a light emitting region in a direction parallelto the optical axis of the light propagating within the lightguide atthe light extraction features is greater than one selected from thegroup: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 80, and 1000.

In one embodiment, the ratio of the average separation distance betweenlight extraction features in the light emitting region in a firstdirection to the pitch of the pixels or pitch of the sub-pixels in thefirst direction is within a range selected from the group: 0.1 to 0.5,0.5 to 1, 1 to 2, 2 to 4, 4 to 10, 10 to 20, 20 to 100, 0.1 to 100, 0.1to 1, 1 to 100, 1 to 10, and 1 to 20. In another embodiment, the ratioof the average lateral dimension of the light extraction features of thelight emitting region in a first direction to the pitch of the pixels orpitch of the sub-pixels in the first direction is within a rangeselected from the group: 0.1 to 0.5, 0.5 to 1, 1 to 2, 2 to 4, 4 to 10,10 to 20, 20 to 100, 0.1 to 100, 0.1 to 1, 1 to 100, 1 to 10, and 1 to20.

In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is substantiallydirectional and comprises one or more selected from the group: angledsurface feature, curved surface feature, rough surface feature, randomsurface feature, asymmetric surface feature, scribed surface feature,cut surface feature, non-planar surface feature, stamped surfacefeature, molded surface feature, compression molded surface feature,thermoformed surface feature, milled surface feature, extruded mixture,blended materials, alloy of materials, composite of symmetric orasymmetrically shaped materials, laser ablated surface feature, embossedsurface feature, coated surface feature, injection molded surfacefeature, extruded surface feature, and one of the aforementionedfeatures disposed in the volume of the lightguide. For example, in oneembodiment, the directional light extraction feature is a 100 micronlong 45 degree angled facet groove formed by UV cured embossing acoating on the lightguide film that substantially directs a portion ofthe incident light within the lightguide toward 0 degrees from thesurface normal of the lightguide.

The light extraction region, light extraction feature, or light emittingregion may be disposed on the upper and/or lower surface of thelightguide. For example, when reflective white scattering dots areprinted on one surface of a lightguide, typically most of the lightscattering from the dots that escapes the lightguide will escape throughthe opposite surface. With surface relief light extraction features, theside of the lightguide that most of the light exits due to redirectionfrom the surface relief light extraction features depends upon the shapeof the features.

In a further embodiment, the light extraction features are grooves,indentations, curved, or angled features that redirect a portion oflight incident in a first direction to a second direction within thesame plane through total internal reflection. In another embodiment, thelight extraction features redirect a first portion of light incident ata first angle into a second angle greater than the critical angle in afirst output plane and increase the angular full width at half maximumintensity in a second output plane orthogonal to the first. In a furtherembodiment, the light extraction feature is a region comprising agroove, indentation, curved or angled feature and further comprises asubstantially symmetric or isotropic light scattering region of materialsuch as dispersed voids, beads, microspheres, substantially sphericaldomains, or a collection of randomly shaped domains wherein the averagescattering profile is substantially symmetric or isotropic. In a furtherembodiment, the light extraction feature is a region comprising agroove, indentation, curved or angled feature and further comprises asubstantially anisotropic or asymmetric light scattering region ofmaterial such as dispersed elongated voids, stretched beads,asymmetrically shaped ellipsoidal particles, fibers, or a collection ofshaped domains wherein the average scattering is profile issubstantially asymmetric or anisotropic. In one embodiment, theBidirectional Scattering Distribution Function (BSDF) of the lightextraction feature is controlled to create a predetermined light outputprofile of the light emitting device or light input profile to a lightredirecting element.

In one embodiment, at least one light extraction feature is an array,pattern or arrangement of a wavelength conversion material selected fromthe group: a fluorophore, phosphor, a fluorescent dye, an inorganicphosphor, photonic bandgap material, a quantum dot material, afluorescent protein, a fusion protein, a fluorophores attached toprotein to specific functional groups, quantum dot fluorophores, smallmolecule fluorophores, aromatic fluorophores, conjugated fluorophores,and a fluorescent dye scintillators, phosphors such as Cadmium sulfide,rare-earth doped phosphor, and other known wavelength conversionmaterials.

In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is a specularly,diffusive, or a combination thereof reflective material. For example,the light extraction feature may be a substantially specularlyreflecting ink disposed at an angle (such as coated onto a groove) or itmay be a substantially diffusely reflective ink such as an inkcomprising titanium dioxide particles within a methacrylate-based binder(white paint). For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting deviceis a reflective display comprising a film-based lightguide comprisingprinted or ink-jet applied light scattering dots or shapes on one ormore surfaces of the film-based lightguide that extract light from thelightguide toward the reflective display. Alternatively, the lightextraction feature may be a partially diffusively reflecting ink such asan ink with small silver particles (micron or sub-micron, spherical ornon-spherical, plate-like shaped or non-plate-like shaped, or silver (oraluminum) coated onto flakes) further comprising titanium dioxideparticles. In another embodiment, the degree of diffusive reflection iscontrolled to optimize at least one selected from the group: the angularoutput of the device, the degree of collimation of the light output, andthe percentage of light extracted from the region.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a lightguidewith a light extraction feature optically coupled to the core region ofthe lightguide. For example, in one embodiment, the light extractionfeature is a white reflective film coupled spatially and optically by apattern of light transmitting adhesive regions disposed on the coreregion of the lightguide. In this embodiment, the air gaps between theadhesive regions totally internally reflect the light incident at thecore region-air interface and the adhesive transmits incident light to awhite reflection film that redirects light to angles outside the totalinternal reflection condition. In another embodiment, the lightguidecomprises a spatial array of light transmitting regions that transmitlight from the lightguide to light extraction features or a secondarylightguide comprising light extraction features. For example, in oneembodiment, the light transmitting regions comprise an adhesivespatially printed on lightguide. In another example, the lighttransmitting regions comprise a light transmitting film with holes cutfrom the film to provide air gaps for total internal reflection at thelightguide surface and light transmitting regions to transmit light tolight extraction features or another lightguide with light extractionfeatures.

In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is a protrusion from thefilm-based lightguide material or layer. In another embodiment, thelight extraction feature is a recessed region within the film-basedlightguide layer. In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is arecessed region that permits light to exit the lightguide at the region.In another embodiment, the light extraction region is a recessed regionthat reflects a portion of incident light toward the opposite surface ofthe film-based lightguide such that it escapes the lightguide throughthe opposite surface. In one embodiment, the film-based lightguidecomprises protrusions on a first side and an air-gap region or acladding region (such as a low refractive index coating or pressuresensitive adhesive) disposed in contact with one or more regions of theprotrusions or lightguide.

In another embodiment, the film-based lightguide comprises a firstlightguide region comprising first protruding regions and the firstlightguide region is optically coupled in one or more coupling regionsto a second lightguide region. In a further embodiment, the secondlightguide region comprises first recessed regions that are partiallyconforming but not completely conforming to the shape of the firstprotruding regions such that an air-gap region remains between the firstlightguide region and the second lightguide region. For example, in oneembodiment, the first lightguide comprises first protruding regions witha truncated triangular cross-section and the second lightguide regioncomprises first recessed regions with a recessed triangularcross-section such that when the films are disposed adjacent andaligned, the truncated region forms an air-gap region that can extractlight out of the lightguide formed by the first and second opticallycoupled lightguide regions by total internal reflection (such asreflecting light toward a reflective spatial light modulator in afrontlight application). In one embodiment, the coupling regions of thefirst and second lightguide regions are disposed between two or morelight extraction features such that light propagating between the lightextraction features can propagate between the first and secondlightguide regions. For example, in one embodiment, the first lightguideregion is a silicone layer with protruding features and the secondlightguide region is a silicone layer with recessed regions and thesubstantially planar regions between the recessed and protruding regionsoptically couple and bond together due to the natural adhesion betweenthe silicone layers and an adhesive or index-matched adhesive is notrequired. In another embodiment, the first lightguide region and thesecond lightguide region are formed in materials that may be opticallycoupled by applying heat and/or pressure.

In a further embodiment, the recessed regions of a film-based lightguidecomprise an adhesive or low-refractive index material within therecessed regions such that the refractive index difference between thefilm-based lightguide and the adhesive or low refractive index materialcauses a portion of incident light to reflect or totally internallyreflect at the interface within the lightguide such that it functions asa light extraction feature for the lightguide. In this embodiment, theadhesive or low refractive index coating may be disposed in or on one ormore of the regions selected from the group: a portion of the volume ofthe recessed region in the lightguide, one or more surfaces of therecessed features in the lightguide, one or more surfaces of theprotruding features in the lightguide, substantially all of the volumeof the recessed region of the lightguide, and one or more planar regionsof the lightguide.

The pattern or arrangement of light extraction features may vary insize, shape, pitch, location, height, width, depth, shape, orientation,in the x, y, or z directions. Patterns and formulas or equations toassist in the determination of the arrangement to achieve spatialluminance or color uniformity are known in the art of edge-illuminatedbacklights. In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises afilm-based lightguide comprising light extraction features disposedbeneath lenticules wherein the light extraction features aresubstantially arranged in the form of dashed lines beneath thelenticules such that the light extracted from the line features has alower angular FHWM intensity after redirection from the lenticular lensarray light redirecting element and the length of the dashes varies toassist with the uniformity of light extraction. In another embodiment,the dashed line pattern of the light extraction features varies in the xand y directions (where the z direction is the optical axis of the lightemitting device). Similarly, a two-dimensional microlens array film(close-packed or regular array) or an arrangement of microlenses may beused as a light redirecting element and the light extraction featuresmay comprise a regular, irregular, or other arrangement of circles,ellipsoidal shapes, or other pattern or shape that may vary in size,shape, or position in the x direction, y direction, or a combinationthereof.

Visibility of Light Extraction Features

In one embodiment, at least one light extraction region comprises lightextraction features which have a low visibility to the viewer when theregion is not illuminated by light from within the lightguide (such aswhen the device is in the off-state or the particular lightguide in amulti-lightguide device is not illuminated). In one embodiment, theluminance at a first measurement angle of at least one selected from thegroup: lightguide region, square centimeter measurement area of thelight emitting surface corresponding to light redirected by at least onelight extraction feature, light emitting region, light extractionfeature, and light extracting surface feature or collection of lightextraction features is less than one selected from the group: 0.5 cd/m²,1 cd/m², 5 cd/m², 10 cd/m², 50 cd/m², and 100 cd/m² when exposed todiffuse illuminance from an integrating sphere of one selected from thegroup: 10 lux, 50 lux, 75 lux, 100 lux, 200 lux, 300 lux, 400 lux, 500lux, 750 lux, and 1000 lux incident on the surface when place over ablack, light absorbing surface. Examples of a light absorbing surfaceinclude, without limitation, a black velour cloth material, a blackanodized aluminum, a material with a diffuse reflectance (specularcomponent included) less than 5%, Light Absorbing Black-Out Materialfrom Edmund Optics Inc., and a window to a light trap box (a box withlight absorbing black velour or other material lining the walls). In oneembodiment, the first measurement angle for the luminance is oneselected from the group: 0 degrees, 5 degrees, 8 degrees, 10 degrees, 20degrees, 40 degrees, 0-10 degrees, 0-20 degrees, 0-30 degrees, and 0-40degrees. In one embodiment, the luminance of the light emitted from a 1cm² measurement area of the light emitting surface corresponding tolight redirected by at least one light extracting feature is less than100 cd/m2 when exposed to a diffuse illuminance of 200 lux from anintegrating sphere when placed over Light Absorbing Black-Out Materialfrom Edmund Optics. In another embodiment, the luminance of the lightemitted from a 1 cm² measurement area of the light emitting surfacecorresponding to light redirected by at least one light extractingfeature is less than 50 cd/m² when exposed to a diffuse illuminance of200 lux from an integrating sphere when placed over Light AbsorbingBlack-Out Material from Edmund Optics Inc. In another embodiment, theluminance of the light emitted from a 1 cm² measurement area of thelight emitting surface corresponding to light redirected by at least oneor an average of all light extracting features is less than 25 cd/m²when exposed to a diffuse illuminance of 200 lux from an integratingsphere when placed over Light Absorbing Black-Out Material from EdmundOptics Inc. In one embodiment, the thin lightguide film permits smallerfeatures to be used for light extraction features or light extractingsurface features to be spaced further apart due to the thinness of thelightguide. In one embodiment, the average largest dimensional size ofthe light extracting surface features in the plane parallel to the lightemitting surface corresponding to a light emitting region of the lightemitting device is less than one selected from the group: 3 mm, 2 mm, 1mm, 0.5 mm, 0.25 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.080, 0.050 mm, 0.040 mm, 0.025 mm, and0.010 mm. In one embodiment, the average minimum dimensional size of thelight extracting surface features in the plane parallel to the lightemitting surface corresponding to a light emitting region of the lightemitting device is less than one selected from the group: 3 mm, 2 mm, 1mm, 0.5 mm, 0.25 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.080, 0.050 mm, 0.040 mm, 0.025 mm, and0.010 mm.

In one embodiment, the individual light extracting surface features,regions, or pixels, are not discernable as an individual pixel when thedevice is emitting light in an on state and is not readily discernablewhen the light emitting device is in the off state when viewed at adistance greater than one selected from the group: 10 centimeters, 20centimeters, 30 centimeters, 40 centimeters, 50 centimeters, 100centimeters, and 200 centimeters. In this embodiment, the area mayappear to be emitting light, but the individual pixels or sub-pixelscannot be readily discerned from one another. In another embodiment, theintensity or color of a light emitting region of the light emittingdevice is controlled by spatial or temporal dithering or halftoneprinting. In one embodiment, the average size of the light extractingregions in a square centimeter of a light emitting region on the outersurface of the light emitting device is less than 500 microns and thecolor and/or luminance is varied by increasing or decreasing the numberof light extracting regions within a predetermined area. In oneembodiment, the luminance of the light extraction region or lightextraction features is less than one selected from the group: 1, 5, 10,20, and 50 Cd/m² when viewed normal to the surface from the side withthe light extraction features or the side without the light extractionfeatures with the light source not emitting light and under 50 luxambient illumination.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a sign with a lightemitting surface comprising at least one selected from the group: alight emitting region, a light extracting region, and a light extractionfeature which is not readily discernable by a person with a visualacuity between 0.5 and 1.5 arcminutes at a distance of 20 cm whenilluminated with 200 lux of diffuse light in front of Light AbsorbingBlack-Out Material from Edmund Optics Inc. In another embodiment, thelight emitting device is a sign with a light emitting surface comprisingat least one selected from the group: a light emitting region, a lightextracting region, and a single light extraction feature which is notreadily discernable by a person with a visual acuity of 1 arcminute at adistance of 50 cm when illuminated with 200 lux of diffuse light infront of Light Absorbing Black-Out Material from Edmund Optics Inc.

In another embodiment, the fill factor of the light extracting features,defined as the percentage of the surface area comprising lightextracting features in a light emitting region, surface or layer of thelightguide or film, is one selected from the group: less than 80%, lessthan 70%, less than 60%, less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%,less than 20%, and less than 10%. The fill factor can be measured withina full light emitting square centimeter surface region or area of thelightguide or film (bounded by regions in all directions within theplane of the lightguide which emit light) or it may be the average ofthe light emitting areas of the lightguides. The fill factor may bemeasured when the light emitting device is in the on state or in the offstate (not emitting light). In one embodiment, in the on state, thelight extracting features are visible as discontinuities seen by aperson with a visual acuity of one arcminute at a distance of 8 cm whenthe light emitting region of the film is placed in front of a blacklight absorbing surface and the film has a luminance of 100 cd/m2 fromlight directed through the film by a light input coupler.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a sign with a lightemitting surface comprising light emitting regions wherein when thedevice is not emitting light, the angle subtended by two neighboringlight extracting features that are visible when the device is on, at adistance of 20 cm is less than one selected from the group: 0.001degrees, 0.002 degrees, 0.004 degrees, 0.008 degrees, 0.010 degrees,0.015 degrees, 0.0167 degrees, 0.02 degrees, 0.05 degrees, 0.08 degrees,0.1 degrees, 0.16 degrees, 0.2 degrees, 0.3 degrees, 0.4 degrees, 0.5degrees, 0.6 degrees, 0.7 degrees, 0.8 degrees, 1 degree, 2 degrees, and5 degrees. In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a signwith a light emitting surface comprising light emitting regions whereinwhen the device is not emitting light, the angle subtended by twoneighboring light extracting features (that are which are not easilyvisible when the device is off when illuminated with 200 lux of diffuselight) at a distance of 20 cm is less than one selected from the group:0.3 degrees, 0.4 degrees, 0.5 degrees, 0.6 degrees, 0.7 degrees, 0.8degrees, 1 degree, 2 degrees, and 5 degrees.

In a further embodiment, the light extraction features of the lightemitting device comprise light scattering domains of a material with adifferent refractive index than the surrounding material. In oneembodiment, the light scattering domain has a concentration within thecontinuous region having light scattering domains (such as an inkjetdeposited white ink pixel) less than one selected from the group: 50%,40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, 3%, 1%, 0.5%, and 0.1% by volume or weight. Theconcentration or thickness of the light scattering domains may vary inthe x, y, or z directions and the pixel or region may be overprinted toincrease the thickness. In another embodiment, the light extractingfeatures have a light absorbing region disposed between the lightextracting feature and at least one output surface of the light emittingdevice. For example, the light extracting features could be titaniumdioxide based white inkjet deposited pixels deposited on a lightguideand the light absorbing ink (such as a black dye or ink comprisingcarbon black particles) is deposited on top of the white ink such that50% of the light scattered from the white pixel is transmitted throughthe light absorbing ink. In this example, the ambient light that wouldhave reflected from the white ink if there were no light absorbing inkis reduced by 75% (twice passing through the 50% absorbing ink) and thevisibility of the dots is reduced while sufficient light from thelightguide is emitted from the light emitting device in the region nearthe white pixel. In another embodiment, a low light transmission, lightabsorbing material absorbing at least one selected from the group: 5%,10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, and 70% of the light emitted from a firstlight extracting feature is disposed between the light extractingfeature and at least one outer surface of the light emitting device.

In one embodiment, the thickness of the lightguide or core layer at thelight extraction feature in a first direction selected from the group:perpendicular to the light emitting surface of the lightguide,perpendicular to the optical axis of the light within the lightguide atthe light extraction feature, and perpendicular to the direction oflight propagating in the lightguide at the light extraction featuredivided by the length of one or more light extraction features in afirst direction parallel to the direction of light propagating in thelightguide or parallel to the optical axis of the light within thelightguide is greater than one selected from the group: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15,20, and 50.

In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a coating or layer disposedin optical contact with the lightguide comprising the light extractionfeatures. In one embodiment, for example, a UV curablemethacrylate-based coating is coated onto a plasma surface treatedsilicone-based lightguide and is cured in when in contact with anembossing drum such that the light extraction features are formed on thecoating on the silicone-based lightguide. Various UV curable coatingsare suitable for use in this embodiment, and the refractive index, lighttransmission properties, adhesion properties, and scattering propertiesare known in the optical film industry.

In one embodiment, the light extraction feature comprises a lightscattering material (such as titanium dioxide, for example) and a lightabsorbing tint, dye or material on one or more surfaces, in the volumeof the feature, or optically coupled to or adjacent to the scatteringmaterial. In this embodiment, when light within the film-basedlightguide encounters the light extraction feature, the light scattersinto a wide angle (out of the lightguide) and substantially maintainsthe color of the dye due to the absorption properties. In thisembodiment, the light scattering material or feature serves as the lightscattering (and extracting mechanism) while the dye serves as thecoloring mechanism, and allows for full color images to be printed on alight guide and viewed from a variety of angles when illuminated, bywhite light for example. The light scattering region, or light absorbingmaterial may comprise one or more dyes, tints or light absorbingmaterials and the regions comprising these materials may be spaced closeenough to give an effective color based on the perceived color at apredetermined distance, such as 20, 30, 50, 100 or 200 centimeters, forexample for a person with visual acuity of 1 arcminute. In oneembodiment, the distance between the centers or the width of thesub-pixels is less than one selected from the group: 4, 2, 1, 0.5, 0.25,0.2, 0.15, 0.1, 0.05, and 0.025 millimeters. In one embodiment, forexample, the sub-regions of color (or sub-pixels) may be red, green,blue, white (substantially without light absorbing material), black,cyan, yellow, magenta, or other colors or primary systems. In oneembodiment, after printing or otherwise adding the light extraction,light scattering or absorbing regions or materials, a cladding region orlayer may be added by lamination, coating or other method of opticalcoupling.

In a further embodiment, the light extraction region is designed to besubstantially visible from only one side. In one embodiment, the lightextraction features are disposed on the non-viewing side of the lightemitting device between a low light transmission region and thelightguide. For example, in one embodiment, the light extraction regionsare printed white ink regions with light absorbing black ink overprintedon the white ink regions. In this embodiment, the white ink scatterslight out of the lightguide on the opposite side and a significantportion of the light transmitted through the white ink is absorbed bythe black ink. In another embodiment, the light extraction regionscomprise surface relief patterns on one side of a lightguide and a lowlight transmission film, such as a black PET film, is substantially cutin the shape of the extraction regions and disposed adjacent the lightextraction regions. In another embodiment, the low light transmissionregion does not conform to the shape of the light extraction regions.For example, in one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises alight source, lightguide, light input coupler, and a square black PETfilm is laminated to cladding layer which is laminated to a circularshaped logo pattern of white ink regions and the lightguide. In thisembodiment, the white ink pattern is visible from the side opposite theside of the lightguide comprising the black PET film and is notsubstantially visible from the side comprising the black PET film whenthe light source is turned on. In a further embodiment, the luminance ofthe light emitting display is less than one selected from the group: 1,5, 10, 20, and 50 Cd/m² when viewed normal to the surface from the sideof the lightguide comprising the low light transmission film. In afurther embodiment, the luminance of the light emitting display isgreater than one selected from the group: 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100,200, and 300 Cd/m² when viewed normal to the surface from the side ofthe lightguide comprising the low light transmission film. In anotherembodiment, the luminance of the low light transmission region is lessthan one selected from the group: 1, 5, 10, 20, and 50 Cd/m² when viewednormal to the surface from the side of the lightguide comprising the lowlight transmission film with the light source not emitting light andunder 50 lux ambient illumination.

In another embodiment, the light extraction region comprising the lightextraction features is designed to be visible or legible from twoopposite directions. For example, in one embodiment, an image or graphicbased light extraction region is substantially symmetric such that it isvisually perceptible and correct when viewed from either side of awindow to which it is optically coupled or adjacent. In anotherembodiment, the light emitting device comprises two lightguides with alow light transmission region disposed in a region between thelightguides. In the previous embodiment, for example, a black polyesterfilm layer may be disposed between the lightguides (and between thecladding layers of the two lightguides) in the regions behind the lightextraction region in the form of readable text such there is a black oropaque background and the light emitting text is visible and easilylegible from either side. In one embodiment, the low light transmissionregion has an average transmittance across the wavelengths of lightemitted by the light emitting device less than one selected from thegroup: 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10% and 5% measured by collimatinglight from the light sources used in the light emitting device andmeasuring the total transmittance in the equipment setup prescribed inthe ASTM D1003 version 07e1 standard.

In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is a protruding featureon a film or component that is applied to the core or cladding region ofa lightguide. In one embodiment, the light extraction features areprotrusions from a film that are pressed into a thin cladding such thatthe separation between the core and the cladding is reduced such thatthe evanescent penetration depth of light in the cladding permitsfrustration of a first portion of the light into the material of thelight extraction feature (or scattering therefrom in the case of ascattering light extraction feature such as a TiO₂ particle). In oneembodiment, a lightguide comprises a high refractive index core layerand a compressible, thin low refractive index material such that when aforce greater than one selected from the group: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 40, and50 pounds per square inch, a first portion of light is frustrated fromthe lightguide. For example, in one embodiment, a light extraction filmcomprising a pattern of light scattering ink comprising TiO₂ particlesis physically coupled to a compressible fluoropolymer cladding with afirst thickness on a film-based lightguide comprising a polycarbonatecore layer. A glass plate compresses the light extraction film onto thecladding layer such that the thickness of the cladding layer reduces toa second thickness and a first portion of the light from the lightguideis scattered from the lightguide due to the evanescent coupling of thelight through the cladding to the light scattering ink.

In one embodiment, a light extraction feature film comprises protrudinglight extraction features that adhere to the core region and function asstandoffs and adhesion locations to hold the light extraction featurefilm in place and to protect the light emitting region. In thisembodiment, an air cladding is disposed between the light extractionfeatures along the surface of the core layer. For example, in oneembodiment, a backlight comprises a light extraction feature filmcomprising 100 micron protrusions comprising light scattering ink and apressure sensitive adhesive disposed in a pattern on the surface of apolyethylene terephthalate (PET) film. The light extraction feature filmis laminated to the core layer and bonded in the light extractionfeature adhesive protrusions. In this embodiment, the light extractionfeature film protects the core layer from scratches or dust/dirtaccumulation that can occur during assembly, shipping or end-use.

Visible Light Extraction Features Also Providing Illumination

In one embodiment, the light from the light extraction features providesillumination of an object or surface and the light extraction featuresprovide a visible pattern, logo, indicia or graphic. In one embodiment afirst percentage of light exiting the lightguide due to the lightextraction features illuminates a surface, object or region, and thesecond percentage of light exits the lightguide in a pattern, logo,indicia, or graphic and is visible directly. In another embodiment, afirst percentage of light exiting a light emitting device from the firstsurface of the lightguide illuminates a surface, object, or region and asecond percentage of light exits the light emitting device from thesecond surface of the lightguide opposite the first surface and thelight extraction features form a visible pattern, logo, indicia, orgraphic. For example, in one embodiment, a printed white ink lightextraction region on one side of a lightguide with a diffuse reflectanceof about 60% (measured from the air side and not through thelightguide), reflects a first percentage (approximately 30%) of incidentlight out of the lightguide toward a viewing side, transmitsapproximately 40% through the light extraction features out of thelightguide to illuminated a product in a POP display, and approximately30% of the reflected light remains within the lightguide.

Multiple Lightguides

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises more than onelightguide to provide at least one selected from the group: colorsequential display, localized dimming backlight, red, green, and bluelightguides, animation effects, multiple messages of different colors,NVIS and daylight mode backlight (one lightguide for NVIS, onelightguide for daylight for example), tiled lightguides or backlights,and large area light emitting devices comprised of smaller lightemitting devices. In another embodiment, a light emitting devicecomprises a plurality of lightguides optically coupled to each other. Inanother embodiment, at least one lightguide or a component thereofcomprises a region with anti-blocking features such that the lightguidesdo not substantially couple light directly into each other due totouching. In some embodiments, the need for a cladding can be reduced oralleviated by using anti-blocking materials to maintain separation (andair gap) over regions of the lightguide surfaces. In another embodiment,the light emitting device comprises a first and second light emittingregion disposed to receive light from a first and second group ofcoupling lightguides, respectively, wherein the bends or folds in thefirst group of coupling lightguides are at angle selected from thegroup: 10 to 30 degrees, 25 degrees to 65 degrees, 70 to 110 degrees,115 degrees to 155 degrees, 160 degrees to 180 degrees, and 5 to 180degrees from the bends or folds in the second group of couplinglightguides.

In another embodiment, a film-based lightguide has two separate lightemitting regions with a first and second group of coupling lightguidesdisposed to couple light into the first light emitting region and secondlight emitting region, respectively, wherein the first and second groupsof coupling lightguides fold or bend to create a single light inputcoupler disposed to couple light from a single source or source packageinto both light emitting regions. In a further embodiment, the twoseparate light emitting regions are separated by a separation distance(SD) greater than one selected from the group: 0.1 millimeter, 0.5millimeters, 1 millimeter, 5 millimeters, 10 millimeters, 1 centimeter,5 centimeters, 10 centimeters, 50 centimeters, 1 meter, 5 meters, 10meters, the width of a coupling lightguide, the width of a fold region,a dimension of the first light emitting region surface area, and adimension of the second light emitting region surface area.

In another embodiment, two film-based lightguides are disposed above oneanother in at least one selected from the group: the lightguide region,the light emitting region, the light input coupler, the light inputsurface, and the light input edge such that light from a light source, apackage of light sources, an array of light sources, or an arrangementof light sources is directed into more than one film-based lightguide.

In a further embodiment, a plurality of lightguides are disposedsubstantially parallel to each other proximate a first light emittingregion and the lightguides emit light of a first and second color. Thecolors may be the same or different and provide additive color, additiveluminance, white light emitting lightguides, red, green, and blue lightemitting lightguides or other colors or combinations of lightguidesemitting light near the same, adjacent or other corresponding lightemitting regions or light extraction features. In another embodiment, alight emitting device comprises a first lightguide and a secondlightguide wherein a region of the second lightguide is disposed beneathfirst lightguide in a direction parallel to the optical axis of thelight emitting device or parallel to the normal to the light emittingsurface of the device and at least one coupling lightguide from thefirst light lightguide is interleaved between at least two couplinglightguides from the second lightguide. In a further embodiment, thecoupling lightguides from the first lightguide film are interleaved withthe coupling lightguides of the second lightguide region. For example,two film-based lightguides with coupling lightguide strips orientedparallel to each other along one edge may be folded together to form asingle light input surface wherein the light input edges forming thelight input surface alternate between the lightguides. Similarly, threeor more lightguides with light input edges 1, 2, and 3 may be collectedthrough folding into a light input surface with alternating input edgesin a 1-2-3-1-2-3-123 . . . pattern along a light input surface.

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a firstlightguide and a second lightguide wherein a region of the secondlightguide is disposed beneath first lightguide in a direction parallelto the optical axis of the light emitting device or parallel to thenormal to the light emitting surface of the device and a first set ofthe coupling lightguides disposed to couple light into the firstlightguide form a first light input surface and are disposed adjacent asecond set of coupling lightguides disposed to couple light into thesecond lightguide. The first and second set of lightguides may be in thesame light input coupler or different light input coupler disposedadjacent each other and they may be disposed to receive light from thesame light source, a collection of light sources, different lightsources, or different collections of light sources.

Tiled Lightguides

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a linear array oflightguides in a first direction. In another embodiment, a lightemitting device comprises a linear array of lightguides in a firstdirection and a linear array of lightguides in a second directionorthogonal to the first direction. In a further embodiment, a lightemitting device comprises a rectangular matrix of lightguides. In lightemitting devices comprising tiled lightguides, the light input couplers,coupling lightguides, or light sources may be disposed along theperiphery of the tiled lightguides, between the lateral edges of thelightguides along the side of the lightguide, folded back toward thecentral region between the lateral edges, or folded underneath or abovethe lightguide to permit a low separation distance between thelightguides.

Multiple Lightguides to Reduce Bend Loss

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a firstlightguide and a second lightguide wherein a first overlapping region ofthe second lightguide is disposed beneath first lightguide in adirection parallel to the optical axis of the light emitting device orparallel to the normal to the light emitting surface of the device andthe first and second set of coupling lightguides disposed to couplelight into the first and second lightguides, respectively, have a totalbend loss less than that of a set of coupling lightguides opticallycoupled to a lightguide covering the same input dimension of each firstand second coupling lightguide with the same radius of curvature as theaverage of the first and second set of coupling lightguides and a corethickness equal to the total core thicknesses of the first and secondlightguides in the first overlapping region.

In a further embodiment, multiple lightguides are stacked such thatlight output from one lightguide passes through at least one region ofanother lightguide and the radii of curvature for a fixed bend loss (percoupling lightguide or total loss) is less than that of a singlelightguide with the same light emitting area, same radius of curvature,and the thickness of the combined lightguides. For example, for a bendloss of 70%, a first lightguide of a first thickness may be limited to afirst radius of curvature. By using a second and third lightguide witheach at half the thickness of the first lightguide, the radius ofcurvature of each of the second and third lightguides can be less tomaintain only 70% bend loss due to the reduced thickness of eachlightguide. In one embodiment, multiple, thin lightguides, each with aradius of curvature less than a thicker lightguide with the same bendloss, reduce the volume and form factor of the light emitting device.The light input surfaces of the coupling lightguides from the differentlightguides may be disposed adjacent each other in a first direction, ondifferent sides of the light emitting device, within the same lightinput coupler, within different light input couplers, underneath eachother, alongside each other, or disposed to receive light from the sameor different light sources.

Multiple Lightguides Connected by Coupling Lightguides

In one embodiment, two or more lightguides are optically coupledtogether by a plurality of coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, afilm comprises a first continuous lightguide region and strip-likesections cut in a region disposed between the first continuouslightguide region and a second continuous lightguide region. In oneembodiment, the strips are cut and the first and second continuouslightguide regions are translated relative to each other such that thestrips (coupling lightguides in this embodiment) are folding andoverlapping. The resulting first and second lightguide regions may beseparate regions such as a keypad illuminator and an LCD backlight for acellphone which are connected by the coupling lightguides. The first andsecond lightguide regions may also both intersect a light normal to thefilm surface in one or more regions such that the first and secondlightguide regions at least partially overlap. The first and secondlightguide regions may have at least one light input coupler. Bycoupling the first and second lightguide regions together through theuse of coupling lightguides, the light from an input coupler coupledinto the first lightguide region is not lost, coupled out of, orabsorbed when it reaches the end of the first lightguide region and mayfurther propagate on to the second lightguide region. This can allowmore light extraction regions for a specific region since thelightguides overlap in a region. In one embodiment, at least one regiondisposed to receive light between the first and second lightguideregions may comprise a light absorbing filter such that the lightreaching the second lightguide region comprises a different wavelengthspectral profile and a second color can be extracted from the secondlightguide region different to the first color extracted from the firstlightguide extracting region. More than two lightguide regionsilluminated by a first input coupler with one, two, or more than twolight emitting colors may be used and separate lightguides (orlightguide regions) with separate light input couplers may be disposedbehind, between, or above one or more of the lightguide regionsilluminated by the first input coupler. For example, a first light inputcoupler directs white light from an LED into the first lightguide regionwherein the light extracting regions extract light creating a firstwhite image, and the light which is not extracted passes into couplinglightguides on the opposite end which have a striped region opticallycoupled to the lightguide (such as a red colored ink stripe) whichsubstantially absorbs the non-red portions of the spectrum. This lightfurther propagates into the second lightguide region where a portion ofthe light is extracted out of the lightguide as red light in a redimage. Similarly, other colors including subtractive colors may be usedto create multiple colors of light emitting from multiple lightguideregions and the light extracting region may overlap to create additivecolor mixing. Two or more lightguides or lightguide regions may overlapwherein the optical axes of the light propagating within the lightguideare at approximately 90 degrees to each other.

Multiple Lightguides to Provide Pixelated Color

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first lightguideand second lightguide disposed to receive light from a first and secondlight source, respectively, through two different optical paths whereinthe first and second light source emit light of different colors and thelight emitting regions of the first and second lightguides comprisepixelated regions spatially separated in the plane comprising the lightoutput plane of the light emitting device at the pixelated regions (forexample, separated in the thickness direction of the film-basedlightguides). In one embodiment, the colors of the first and secondpixelated light emitting regions are perceived by a viewer with a visualacuity of 1 arcminute without magnification at a distance of two timesthe diagonal (or diameter) of the light emitting region to be theadditive color of the combination of sub-pixels. For example, in oneembodiment, the color in different spatial regions of the display isspatially controlled to achieve different colors in different regions,similar to liquid crystal displays using red, green, and blue pixels andLED signs using red green and blue LEDs grouped together. For example,in one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a red lightemitting lightguide optically coupled to a green light emittinglightguide that is optically coupled to a blue lightguide. Variousregions of the lightguides and the light output of this embodiment aredescribed hereafter. In a first light emitting region of the lightemitting device, the blue and green lightguides have no light extractionfeatures and the red lightguide has light extraction features such thatthe first light emitting region emits red in one or more directions (forexample, emitting red light toward a spatial light modulator or out ofthe light emitting device). In a second light emitting region of thelight emitting device, the red and green lightguides have no lightextraction features and the blue lightguide has light extractionfeatures such that the second light emitting region emits blue light inone or more directions. In a third light emitting region of the lightemitting device, the blue and red lightguides have light extractionfeatures and the green lightguide does not have any light extractionfeatures such that the third light emitting region emits purple light inone or more directions. In a fourth light emitting region of the lightemitting device, the blue, green, and red lightguides have lightextraction features such that the fourth light emitting region emitswhite light in one or more directions. Thus, by using multiplelightguides to create light emitting regions emitting light in differentcolors, the light emitting device, display, or sign, for example, can bemulti-colored with different regions emitting different colorssimultaneously or sequentially. In another embodiment, the lightemitting regions comprise light extraction features of appropriate sizeand density on a plurality of lightguides such that a full-colorgraphic, image, indicia, logo or photograph, for example, is reproduced.

The percentage of extracted light from a first lightguide lightextraction feature reaching a neighboring second light extractionfeature on a second lightguide is affected by, for example, the distancewithin the first lightguide between the light extraction feature and thecladding surface in the direction of the optical path between the firstand second light extraction features, the total separation between thelight extraction features in the optical path of the light between thefirst and second light extraction features, the distance in the claddingof the optical path between the first and second light extractionfeatures, the refractive index of the first lightguide, the refractiveindex of the cladding, the distance in the optical path from thecladding surface to the second light extraction feature, the refractiveindex of the second lightguide, and the directional reflectance (ortransmission) properties of the first lightguide light extractionfeature. In one embodiment, the percentage of light exiting a firstlightguide from a first light pixel region that intersects a secondpixel region in a second lightguide is less than one selected from thegroup: 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, and 1%. The amount of light from a firstlightguide reaching a neighboring pixel on a second lightguide isaffected by the thickness of the lightguide, the total separation in thethickness direction, the refractive index of the first lightguide, therefractive index of the cladding, and the directional reflectance (ortransmission) properties of the first lightguide light extractionfeature. Light near the critical angle within the lightguide willpropagate longer distances in the thickness direction in the claddingregion than angles larger than the critical angle. In one embodiment,the cladding region thickness is less than one selected from the group:50, 25, 10, 5, 3, 2, and 1 micron(s). In another embodiment, thethickness of the core region is less than one selected from the group:50, 25, 10, 5, 3, 2, and 1 micron(s). The lateral separation, x₁, of thelight from the edge of a first light extraction feature on the surfaceof a first lightguide of refractive index n₁ and thickness tipropagating within the lightguide at the critical angle between thefirst lightguide and a cladding region with a refractive index, n₂, tothe point where it reaches the interface between the first lightguideand the cladding is:

$x_{1} = {\frac{t_{1}\left( \frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}} \right)}{\sqrt{1 - \left( \frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}} \right)^{2}}}.}$

In one embodiment, the lateral separation between the first pixel in afirst lightguide and a second pixel in a second lightguide is greaterthan one selected from the group: 50%, 60%, 70% and 80% of x₁ and lessthan one selected from the group: 150%, 200%, 250%, 300%, 400%, and 500%of x₁. For example, in one embodiment, the light extraction feature on afirst lightguide is a first printed white ink pattern on the back sideof a film-based lightguide with a refractive index of 1.49 that is 50microns thick. A second printed white ink pattern on a second lightguideseparated by and optically coupled to the first lightguide by a 25micron cladding region with a refractive index of 1.33 is laterallypositioned (in the direction parallel to the film surface) from thefirst printed white region by a distance of 100 microns. In thisexample, x₁ is 99 microns and the separation distance is 101% of x₁.

In another embodiment, the light extraction feature is a directionallight extraction feature that asymmetrically redirects incident lightand the lateral separation between the first pixel in a first lightguideand a second pixel in a second lightguide is greater than one selectedfrom the group: 20%, 30%, 40% and 50% of x₁ and less than one selectedfrom the group: 100%, 150%, 200%, and 300% of x₁.

In another embodiment, the dimension of the light extraction feature inthe direction of the optical axis within the lightguide for one pixel isless than one selected from the group: 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, and 50% ofthe average thickness of the lightguide in that region.

In a further embodiment, a first pixel on a first lightguide isseparated laterally from a second pixel on a second lightguide by afirst separation distance such that the angular color variation withinthe angles defined by a luminance of at least 70% of the luminance at 0degrees, Δu′v′, of the pixel measured on the 1976 u′, v′ UniformChromaticity Scale as described in VESA Flat Panel Display MeasurementsStandard version 2.0, Jun. 1, 2001 (Appendix 201, page 249) is less thanone selected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 whenmeasured using a spectrometer based spot color meter.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a reflective displaycomprising a light emitting frontlight comprising a first lightguidecomprising a first set of light extraction features and a secondlightguide comprising a second set of light extraction features whereinthe percentage of the area of overlap between the areas of the first setof light extraction features in the plane parallel to the firstlightguide and the areas of the second set of light extraction featuresin the plane parallel to the second lightguide in the directionsubstantially normal to the light emitting surface of the reflectivedisplay is less than one selected from the group: 80%, 60%, 40%, 20%,10%, 5%, and 2%. Similarly, in another embodiment, the area of overlapbetween three sets of light extraction features in three differentlightguides is less than one selected from the group: 80%, 60%, 40%,20%, 10%, 5%, and 2% for each combination of lightguides. For example,in one embodiment, a reflective display comprises a first, second, andthird lightguide emitting red, green, and blue light, respectively, fromLEDs with the first lightguide on the viewing side of the secondlightguide and separated by a cladding layer from the second lightguidewhich is separated by a cladding layer from the third lightguide that isdisposed proximate the reflective spatial light modulator. In thisembodiment, the area of overlap between the light extraction features inthe lightguide emitting red light and the lightguide emitting greenlight when viewed normal to the display is less than 10%. Also, in thisembodiment, the area of overlap between the light extraction features inthe lightguide emitting red light and the lightguide emitting blue lightwhen viewed normal to the display is less than 10%. In this embodiment,the red light directed toward the reflective spatial light modulatorfrom the lightguide emitting red light is less likely to reflect fromlight extraction features in the green or blue lightguides than alightguide configuration with a larger percentage of light extractionfeature area overlap.

Lightguide Folding Around Components

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: lightguide,lightguide region, light mixing region, plurality of lightguides,coupling lightguides, and light input coupler bends or folds such thatthe component other components of the light emitting device are hiddenfrom view, located behind another component or the light emittingregion, or are partially or fully enclosed. These components aroundwhich they may bend or fold include components of the light emittingdevice such as light source, electronics, driver, circuit board, thermaltransfer element, spatial light modulator, display, housing, holder, orother components disposed behind the folded or bent lightguide or otherregion or component. In one embodiment, a backlight for a reflectivedisplay or backlight for a transmissive display comprises a lightguide,coupling lightguides and a light source wherein one or more regions ofthe lightguide are folded and the light source is disposed substantiallybehind the display. In one embodiment, more than one input coupler orcomponent is folded behind or around the lightguide, light mixing regionor light emitting region. In this embodiment, for example, two lightinput couplers from opposite sides of the light emitting region of thesame film may be disposed adjacent each other or utilize a common lightsource and be folded behind the spatial light modulator of a display. Inanother embodiment, tiled light emitting devices comprise light inputcouplers folded behind and adjacent or physically coupled to each otherusing the same or different light sources. In one embodiment, the lightsource or light emitting area of the light source is disposed within thevolume bounded by the edge of the light emitting region and the normalto the light emitting region on the side of the lightguide opposite theviewing side. In another embodiment, at least one of the light source,light input coupler, coupling lightguides, or region of the light mixingregion is disposed behind the light emitting region (on the side of thelightguide opposite the viewing side) or within the volume bounded bythe edge of the light emitting region and the normal to the lightemitting region on the side of the lightguide opposite the viewing side.

Curled Edge of Lightguide to Recycle Light

In one embodiment, a lightguide edge region is curled back upon itselfand optically coupled to a region of the lightguide such that lightpropagating toward the edge will follow the curl and propagate back intothe lightguide. In one embodiment, the cladding area is removed from thelightguide from both surfaces which are to be optically coupled orbonded together. More than one edge may be curled or bent back uponitself to recycle light back into the lightguide.

Registration Holes and Cavities

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: lightguide,lightguide region, light mixing region, light input coupler, housing,holding device and plurality of coupling lightguides comprises at leastone opening or aperture suitable for registration with another componentof the device that contains at least one pin or object which may passthrough the at least one opening or aperture. In another embodiment, oneor more of the light turning optical element, coupling lightguides,light redirecting optical element, light coupling optical element,relative position maintaining element, circuit board, flexibleconnector, film-based touchscreen, film-based lightguide, and displayfilm substrate comprises a registration opening, aperture, hole, orcavity.

Alignment Guide

In another embodiment, the light turning optical element has analignment guide physically coupled to the light turning optical elementsuch that the guide directs the coupling lightguide input surfaces toalign in at least one of the following directions: a directionperpendicular to the film surface of the coupling lightguides, adirection parallel to the coupling lightguide film surfaces, a directionparallel to the optical axis of the light source, and a directionorthogonal to the optical axis of the light source. In one embodiment,the alignment guide is physically coupled to one or more the following:the light turning optical element, coupling lightguides, lightredirecting optical element, light coupling optical element, relativeposition maintaining element, circuit board, light source, light sourcehousing, optical element holder or housing, input coupler housing,alignment mechanism, heat sink for the light source, flexible connector,film-based touchscreen, film-based lightguide, and display filmsubstrate. In one embodiment, the alignment guide comprises an alignmentarm such as a metal or plastic bar or rod with a flexural modulus of oneof the following: 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 5 times that of thestacked array of coupling lightguides that it is disposed to guide astack of coupling lightguides (or an optical element) in a predetermineddirection. The alignment guide may have one or more curved regions toassist in the guiding function without scratching or damaging thecoupling lightguide through sharp edges. In another embodiment, thealignment guide is a cantilever spring that can apply a force againstone or more coupling lightguides to maintain the position of thecoupling lightguide temporarily or permanently. In another embodiment,the alignment guide maintains the relative position of the couplinglightguide near the light input surface while an additional, permanentrelative position method is employed (such as mechanically clamping,adhering using adhesives, epoxy or optical adhesive, forming a housingaround the coupling lightguides, or inserting the coupling into ahousing) which substantially maintains the relative position of thecoupling lightguides to the light source or light input coupler. Inanother embodiment, a cladding layer (such as a low refractive indexadhesive) is disposed on one or more of the following: the top surface,bottom surface, lateral edges, and light input surface of an array ofcoupling lightguides such that when the alignment guide is thermallycoupled to the array of coupling lightguides, less light is absorbed bythe alignment guide.

Alignment Cavity within the Alignment Guide

In one embodiment, the alignment guide comprises a cavity within amechanical coupler in which a stacked array of coupling lightguides maybe disposed to align their light input edges to receive light from alight source. In one embodiment, the alignment guide comprises a thermaltransfer element with an extended arm or rod to align the couplinglightguides in one dimension, apply force vertical force to the couplinglightguides to assist holding them at the correct lateral position and acavity into which the input surface of the coupling lightguides may beplaced such that they are aligned to receive light from the lightsource. In another embodiment, the alignment guide comprises a thermaltransfer element with an extended arm (functioning as a cantileverspring to apply force) and a cavity with a cross sectional vertical andwidth dimension at least as large as the vertical and width dimensions,respectively, of the cross-section of the stacked array of couplinglightguides near their light input surfaces.

Thermally Conductive Alignment Guide

In another embodiment, the alignment guide is thermally and physicallycoupled to the heat sink for the light source. For example, thealignment guide may comprise an aluminum heat sink disposed around andthermally coupled to the light source with an alignment cavity openingdisposed to receive the coupling lightguide such that they are heldwithin the cavity. In this embodiment, the aluminum heat sink serves analignment function and also reduces the heat load from the light source.In another embodiment, the alignment guide comprises an alignment cavityin a thermally conducting material (such as a metal, aluminum, copper,thermally conductive polymer, or a compound comprising thermallyconductive materials) thermally coupled to the coupling lightguides suchthat the alignment guide removes heat from the coupling lightguidesreceived from the light source. When using high power LEDs, for example,the heat from the light source could potentially damage or causeproblems with the coupling lightguides (softening, thermal or opticaldegradation, etc.). By removing the heat from the coupling lightguides,this effect is reduced or eliminated. In one embodiment, the alignmentguide is thermally coupled to one or more coupling lightguides byphysical contact or through the use of an intermediate thermallyconductive material such as a thermally conductive adhesive or grease.

Other Components

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least oneselected from the group: power supply, batteries (which may be alignedfor a low profile or low volume device), thermal transfer element (suchas a heat sink, heat pipe, or stamped sheet metal heat sink), frame,housing, heat sink extruded and aligned such that it extends parallel toat least one side of the lightguide, multiple folding or holding modulesalong a thermal transfer element or heat sink, thermal transfer elementexposed to thermally couple heat to a surface external to the lightemitting device, and solar cell capable of providing power,communication electronics (such as needed to control light sources,color output, input information, remote communication, Wi-Fi control,Bluetooth control, wireless internet control, etc.), a magnet fortemporarily affixing the light emitting device to a ferrous or suitablemetallic surface, motion sensor, proximity sensor, forward and backwardsoriented motion sensors, optical feedback sensor (including photodiodesor LEDs employed in reverse as detectors), controlling mechanisms suchas switches, dials, keypads (for functions such as on/off, brightness,color, color temp, presets (for color, brightness, color temp, etc.),wireless control), externally triggered switches (door closing switchfor example), synchronized switches, and light blocking elements toblock external light from reaching the lightguide or lightguide regionor to block light emitted from a region of the light emitting devicefrom being seen by a viewer.

. In one embodiment, the light emitting device is designed to be poweredby an automobile's electrical system or a 12 volt DC power battery orpower supply. For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting deviceis a luminous sign disposed on the side of a bus that displays a graphicimage and text in light emitting regions. In on embodiment, the lightemitting device comprises a cigarette lighter adapter disposed to beplaced in an automobile or an airline power outlet. In one embodiment, alight emitting device comprises batteries with a dimension longer in onedirection than another (such as AA or AAA batteries) and the longerdimension is disposed substantially parallel to an edge of thelightguide, the light input coupler, or a housing or enclosure of thecoupling lightguides. In this embodiment, the form factor and volumerequired can be reduced by aligning the batteries with the appropriateedge, housing, or other enclosure or element. In this embodiment, forexample, the enclosure comprising the batteries may enclose thebatteries and coupling lightguides or strips (and optionally the lightsource). In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a lightsource disposed to emit light into a first range of angles and a secondrange of angles such that light from the first range of angles providesillumination and the light from the second range of angles is opticallycoupled into the light input surface, into coupling lightguides,propagates through a lightguide, and is emitted in a light emittingregion to provide illumination or display a sign, graphic, image orother indicia. For example, in one embodiment, a light fixture comprisesa light source such as a linear array of LEDs directing light upwardsand a light input surface disposed to receive light propagating with acomponent upwards and direct the light through coupling lightguides to alight emitting region disposed on the underside of the light fixture. Inthis embodiment, for example, a linear pendant luminaire can directlight upwards and provide illumination directly downwards using thelightguide film and coupling lightguides. Similarly, a wall washinglight fixture that directs light upwards may emit light horizontally ordownwards using the coupling lightguides and lightguide to redirect anangular range of the light output of the light source into thelightguide and out of the lightguide in a different angular range.

Motion Sensor

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a motionsensor. Types of motion sensors include passive infrared sensors, activeinfrared sensors, ultrasonic motion sensors, and microwave motionsensors. In one embodiment, the motion sensor is disposed to receiveradiation passing through the film-based lightguide or from within thefilm-based lightguide (such as when exterior light is redirected intothe lightguide by the light extraction features and propagates throughthe lightguide to reach the motion sensor). In another embodiment,movement detected by the motion sensor triggers the light emittingdevice to change the light output characteristics. In one embodiment,the light emitting device changes its light emitting characteristics byone or more selected from the group: emitting light in one or more lightemitting regions, stopping emitting light in one or more light emittingregions, changing the overall light flux output (increase or decrease byan amount) in one or more light emitting regions, changing the angularlight output profile in one or more light emitting regions, changing thecolor of the light output in one or more light emitting regions. Forexample, in one embodiment, the motion sensor triggers the lightemitting device to turn on. In another example, the motion sensortriggers the light emitting device to pulse one LED off and on for aflashing logo in a first light emitting region while maintaining thelight output of a second LED at a constant visible light output level ina second light emitting region.

In a further embodiment, the coupling lightguides extend past one ormore edges of the light emitting region of the lightguide such that theinput surface of the coupling lightguide may be disposed to receivelight from an external light source. For example, in one embodiment, asign for an automobile comprises coupling lightguides that may beextended to receive light from a headlight, turn light, reverse light,tail light, or other light on an automobile. In this embodiment, thecoupling lightguides may be disposed at or near the light output of thelight source (or lens covering the light emitting area) such that aportion of the light is coupled into the lightguide and exits thelightguide in a light emitting region. For example, in one embodiment, alight input surface of an array of coupling lightguides comprises anadhesive that can be used to optically couple the light input surface tothe lens of a tail light for an automobile. In this embodiment, the redlight from the tail light provides the light source for the lightemitting region. In another embodiment, the light input surface of thecoupling lightguides are disposed to receive light from a light sourcedisposed in a flashlight such that the case comprises a light emittingregion in the form of illuminated logo, indicia, or graphics. In anotherembodiment, the light input coupler is disposed to receive light from alight source and transmit the light through coupling lightguide into alarger light emitting area such as to provide a lower luminance levellight output spread over a larger light emitting area. For example, inone embodiment, the light input coupler is disposed to receive lightdirected upwards from a light source in a lamp and direct the lightthrough coupling lightguides to the light emitting region disposed inthe “lamp shade”. In this embodiment, the light is transmitted throughthe lightguide and exits the shade directly (in embodiments when thelight emitting region is on the outer portion of the “lamp shade”)without being absorb by propagating through the light absorbing materialof the lamp shade. In this embodiment, the lightguide may be disposedwithin, on the inner surface, or on the outer surface of a lamp shade.In another embodiment, the lightguide provides light diffusingproperties (such as a volumetric diffusion layer, surface reliefdiffusing layer, or printed diffuser layer) to reduce the glare of thelight source and comprises light emitting regions that receive lightfrom the light source through coupling lightguides.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device provides light outputin a shade or patterned region that is different that the light exitingout of a neighboring region. For example, in one embodiment, thefilm-based lightguide emits light in a green and red flower patternwhile the light transmitting through the shade (from a standard Edisontype incandescent light bulb disposed in the lamp, for example) is asecond color such as warm white. In one embodiment, a low lighttransmitting region is disposed between the light emitting region and alight emitting region of external light incident on the light emittingregion such that the saturation of the light emitted from the lightemitting region is increased. For example, in one embodiment, a tablelamp with an incandescent light source disposed within comprises aluminous lamp shade of with a lightguide film disposed to emit bluelight from white ink light extraction features in the form of a bluelogo and a black ink overprinted on the white ink light extractionfeatures increases the color saturation over the light extraction regionwithout the low light transmitting region.

In another embodiment, the color of the light emitting region forms avisible pattern with a luminance contrast ratio greater than 2 than thesurrounding area (such as the area on a lamp shade) when the light lampand light emitting source are turned off and it is illuminated with 50lux of diffuse ambient light from a Standard A illuminant. In a furtherembodiment, the color contrast of the light emitting region when thelight emitting device is not emitting light (and the lamp is notemitting light in the case of a luminous lampshade) when illuminatedwith 50 lux of diffuse ambient light from a Standard A illuminant,Δu′v′, is greater than 0.004. In embodiments disclosed herein, the“light emitting region” is the region which emits light when the lightemitting device light source is turned on, and for embodiments andreferences where the light source is turned off, is the same physicalregion bounded by the light extraction features that will emit lightwhen the light source is turned on.

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first set oflight sources comprising a first and second light source disposed tocouple light into a first and second light input coupler, respectively,and further comprising a second set of light sources comprising a thirdand fourth light source disposed to couple light into a first and secondlight input coupler, respectively, wherein the first set of lightsources are thermally coupled to each other and the second set of lightsources are thermally coupled to each other by means of one selectedfrom the group metal core printed circuit board, aluminum component,copper component, metal alloy component, thermal transfer element, orother thermally conducting element. In a further embodiment, the firstand second set of light sources are substantially thermally isolated byseparating the light sources (or substrates for the light sources suchas a PCB) in the region proximate the light sources by an air gap orsubstantially thermally insulating material such as polymersubstantially free of metallic, ceramic, or thermally conductingcomponents. In another embodiment, the first and third light sources aredisposed closer to each other than the first and second light sourcesand more heat from the first light source reaches the second lightsource than reaches the third light source when only the first lightsource is emitting light. More than two light sources disposed to couplelight into more than two coupling lightguides may be thermally coupledtogether by a thermal transfer element and may be separated from asecond set of more than two light sources by an air gap or thermallyinsulating material.

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a filmlightguide that emits light and detects light changes within thelightguide and provides touch screen functionality. In one embodiment, afilm lightguide comprises coupling lightguides disposed to receive lightfrom a light source and direct the light into a lightguide to provide abacklight or frontlight and at least one coupling lightguide disposed todetect changes in light intensity (such as lower light levels due tolight being frustrated and absorbed by coupling light into a finger intouched location). More than one light intensity detecting lightguidemay be used. Other configurations for optical lightguide based touchscreens are known in the art and may be used in conjunction withembodiments.

In another embodiment, a touchscreen comprises at least two filmlightguides. In another embodiment, a touchscreen device comprises alight input coupler used in reverse to couple light from a filmlightguide into a detector. In another embodiment, the light emittingdevice or touch screen is sensitive to pressure in that when a firstfilm or first lightguide is pressed or pressure is applied, the firstfilm is moved into sufficient optical contact with a second film orsecond lightguide wherein at least one of light from the firstlightguide or first lightguide is coupled into is coupled into thesecond film or second lightguide, light from the second film or secondlightguide is coupled into the first film or first lightguide, or lightcouples from each lightguide or film into the other.

Thermal Transfer Element Coupled to Coupling Lightguide

In another embodiment, a thermal transfer element is thermally coupledto a cladding region, lightguide region, lightguide, couplinglightguide, stack or arrangement of coupling lightguides, combination offolded regions in a coupling lightguide, input coupler, window orhousing component of the light input coupler, or housing. In anotherembodiment, the thermal transfer element is thermally coupled to thecoupling lightguides or folded regions of a coupling lightguide to drawheat away from the polymer based lightguide film in that region suchthat a high-power LED or other light source emitting heat toward thelightguides may be used with reduced thermal damage to the polymer. Inanother embodiment, a thermal transfer element is physically andthermally coupled to the cladding region of the light input couplers orfolded regions of a coupling lightguide. The thermal transfer elementmay also serve to absorb light in one more cladding regions by using athermal transfer element that is black or absorbs a significant amountof light (such as having a diffuse reflectance spectral componentincluded less than 50%). In another embodiment, the top surface of theupper coupling lightguide and the bottom surface of the bottom couplinglightguide comprise cladding regions in the regions of the couplinglightguides or folded regions of the coupling lightguide near the lightinput edges. By removing (or not applying or disposing) the claddingbetween the coupling lightguides or folded regions, more light can becoupled into the coupling lightguides or folded regions from the lightsource. Outer cladding layers or regions may be disposed on the outersurfaces to prevent light absorption from contact with other elements orthe housing, or it may be employed on the top or bottom surface, forexample, to physically and thermally couple the cladding region to athermal transfer element to couple the heat out without absorbing lightfrom the core region (and possibly absorbing light within the coreregion).

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a thermal transferelement disposed to receive heat from at least one light source whereinthe thermal transfer element has at least one selected from the group:total thickness, average total thickness, and average thickness, all inthe direction perpendicular to the light emitting device light emittingsurface less than one selected from the group: 10 millimeters, 5millimeters, 4 millimeters, 3 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter,and 0.5 millimeters. In one embodiment, the thermal transfer elementcomprises a sheet or plate of metal disposed on the opposite side of thelightguide as the light emitting surface of the light emitting device.In a further embodiment, a low thermal conductivity component isdisposed between the thermal transfer element and the lightguide. Inanother embodiment, the low thermal conductivity component has a thermalconductivity, k, less than one selected from the group: 0.6, 0.5, 0.4,0.3, 0.2, 0.1 and 0.05 W·m−1·K−1 at a temperature of 296 degrees Kelvin.In a further embodiment, the low thermal conductivity component is awhite reflective polyester based film (or PTFE based film). In a furtherembodiment, a light emitting device comprises a low thermal conductivitycomponent physically coupled to the thermal transfer element and thelight emitting device further comprises at least one selected from thegroup: a low refractive index material, a cladding region, and a regionwith an air gap disposed between the low thermal conductivity componentand the lightguide.

In a further embodiment, the thermal transfer element is an elongatedcomponent with a dimension in first direction at least twice as long asthe dimension in either mutually orthogonal direction orthogonal to thefirst direction wherein a portion of the thermal transfer element isdisposed within the bend region of at least one light input coupler. Inanother embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light inputcoupler wherein a portion of the smallest rectangular cuboid comprisingall of the coupling lightguides within the light input coupler comprisesa thermal transfer element. In another embodiment, a light emittingdevice comprises a light input coupler wherein a portion of the smallestrectangular cuboid comprising all of the coupling lightguides within thelight input coupler comprises an elongated thermal transfer elementselected from the group: pipe from a heat pipe, elongated heat sink,metal thermal transfer element with fins, rod inside the thermaltransfer element, and metal frame.

In another embodiment, the thermal transfer element comprises at leastone metal frame component or elongated metal component that provides atleast one selected from the group: increased rigidity, frame support forsuspension or mounting, protection from accidental contact, and framesupport for a flat or pre-defined non-planar surface. In a furtherembodiment, the thermal transfer element comprises at least two regionsor surfaces oriented at an angle with respect to each other or anopening through the volume that form at least a portion of a channelthrough which air may flow through. In one embodiment, the lightemitting device comprises a plurality of air channels formed by at leastone surface of the thermal element through which air flows and convectsheat away by active or passive air convection from the source generatingthe heat (such as a light source or a processor). In one embodiment, thelight emitting device comprises a plurality of air channels alongvertically oriented sides of the device through which air flows andconvects heat through (naturally or forced air). In another embodiment,the thermal transfer element has a thermal conductivity greater than oneselected from group of 0.5, 0.7, 1, 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400,800, and 1000 W·m−1·K−1 at a temperature of 296 degrees Kelvin.

Other Optical Films

In another embodiment, the light emitting device further comprises alight redirecting optical film, element, or region that redirects lightincident at a first range of angles, wavelength range, and polarizationrange into a second range of angles different than the first.

Light Redirecting Optical Element

In one embodiment, the light redirecting optical element is disposedbetween at least one region of the light emitting region and the outersurface of the light emitting device (which may be a surface of thelight redirecting optical element). In a further embodiment, the lightredirecting optical element is shaped or configured to substantiallyconform to the shape of the light emitting region of the light emittingdevice. For example, a light emitting sign may comprise a lightguidefilm that is substantially transparent surrounding the light emittingregion that is in the shape of indicia; wherein the lightguide filmcomprises light extraction features in the region of the indicia; and alight redirecting optical element (such as a film with substantiallyhemispherical light collimating surface features) cut in the shape ofthe light emitting region is disposed between the light emitting regionof the lightguide film and the light emitting surface of the lightemitting device. In another embodiment, a light emitting sign comprisesa film-based lightguide and a light redirecting optical elementcomprising a lens array formed from lenticules or microlenses (such assubstantially hemispherical lenses used in integral images or 3Dintegral displays or photographs) disposed to receive light from thelightguide wherein the lens array separates light from the lightguideinto two or more angularly separated images such that the sign displaysstereoscopic images or indicia. The shape of the lens array film orcomponent in the plane parallel to the lightguide film may besubstantially conformal to the shape of the light emitting region or oneor more sub-regions of the light emitting regions such that sign emitsangularly separated information in the entire light emitting region orone or more sub-regions of the light emitting region. For example, thesign may have a first two-dimensional text region and a second regionwith a stereoscopic image.

In one embodiment, the light redirecting optical film, element or regioncomprises at least one surface or volumetric feature selected from thegroup: refractive, prismatic, totally internally reflective, specularreflective element or coating, diffusely reflective element or coating,reflective diffractive optical element, transmissive diffractive opticalelement, reflective holographic optical element, transmissiveholographic optical element, reflective light scattering, transmissivelight scattering, light diffusing, multi-layer anti-reflection coating,moth-eye or substantially conical surface structure type anti-reflectioncoating, Giant Birefringent Optic multilayer reflection, specularlyreflective polarizer, diffusely reflective polarizer, cholestericpolarizer, guided mode resonance reflective polarizer, absorptivepolarizer, transmissive anisotropic scattering (surface or volume),reflective anisotropic scattering (surface or volume), substantiallysymmetric or isotropic scattering, birefringent, optical retardation,wavelength converting, collimating, light redirecting, spatialfiltering, angular dependent scattering, electro-optical (PDLC, liquidcrystal, etc.), electrowetting, electrophoretic, wavelength rangeabsorptive filter, wavelength range reflective filter, structurednano-feature surface, light management components, prismatic structuredsurface components, and hybrids of two or more of the aforementionedfilms or components.

Some examples of light redirecting optical films with prismaticstructured surfaces may include, but are not limited to, Vikuiti™Brightness Enhancement Film (BEF I, BEF II, BEF III, BEF III 90/50 5T,BEF III 90/50 M, BEF III 90/50 M2, BEF III 90/50 7T, BEF III 90/50 10T,BEF III 90/50 AS), Vikuiti™ Transparent Right Angle Film (TRAF),Vikuiti™ Optical Lighting Film (OLF or SOLF), IDF II, TRAF II, or 3M™Diamond Grade™ Sheeting, all of which are available from 3M Company, St.Paul, Minn. Other examples of light management component constructionsmay include the rounded peak/valley films described in U.S. Pat. Nos.5,394,255 and 5,552,907 (both to Yokota et al.), Reverse Prism Film fromMitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd or other totally internally reflection basedprismatic film such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,746,130, 6,151,169,5,126,882, and 6,545,827, lenticular lens array film, microlens arrayfilm, diffuser film, microstructure BEF, nanostructure BEF, Rowluxmicrolens film from Rowland Technologies, films with arrangements oflight concentrators such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,160,017, andhybrids of one or more of the aforementioned films.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device further comprises anangularly selected light absorbing film, element or region. Angularlyselective light absorbing films may substantially transmit light withina first incident angular range and substantially absorb light within asecond incident angular range. These films can reduce glare light,absorb undesired light at specific angles (such as desired in militaryapplications where stray or unwanted light can illuminate parts of thecockpit or the windshield causing stray reflections. Louver films, suchas those manufactured by skiving a multi-layered material at a firstangle are known in the display industry and include louver films such as3M™ Privacy Film by 3M Company and other angular absorbing orredirecting films such as those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,467,873;3,524,789; 4,788,094; and 5,254,388.

Light Reflecting Film

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a lightguidedisposed between a light reflecting film and the light emitting surfaceof the light emitting device. In one embodiment, the light reflectingfilm is a light reflecting optical element. For example, a whitereflective polyester film of at least the same size and shape of thelight emitting region may be disposed on the opposite side of thelightguide as the light emitting surface of the light emitting device orthe light reflecting region may conform to the size and shape of one orall of the light emitting regions, or the light reflecting region may beof a size or shape occupying a smaller area than the light emittingregion. A light reflecting film or component substantially the sameshape as the light emitting region or region comprising light extractingfeatures may maintain the transparency of the light emitting device inthe regions surrounding or between the light emitting regions or regionscomprising light extracting features while increasing the averageluminance in the region on the light emitting surface of the lightemitting device by at least one selected from the group: 20%, 30%, 40%,50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%, and 110% by reflecting a portion of thelight received toward the light emitting surface.

Angular Broadening Element

In a further embodiment, a light emitting device comprises: a lightredirecting element disposed to collimate or reduce the angular FWHM ofthe light from the lightguide; a spatial light modulator; and an angularbroadening element (such as a diffuser or light redirecting element)disposed on the viewing side of the spatial light modulator to increasethe angular FWHM of the light exiting the spatial light modulator. Forexample, light may be collimated to pass through or onto pixels orsub-pixels of a spatial light modulator and the light may then angularlybroadened (increase the angular FWHM) to increase the angle of view ofthe device. In a further embodiment, the angular broadening element isdisposed within or on a component of the spatial light modulator. Forexample, a diffuser may be disposed between the outer glass and thepolarizer in a liquid crystal display to broaden the collimated orpartially collimated light after it has been spatially modulated by theliquid crystal layer. In a further embodiment, the light emitting devicemay further comprise a light absorbing film, circular polarizer,microlens type projection screen, or other rear projection type screento absorb a first portion of the ambient light incident on the lightemitting surface to improve the contrast.

Extracting Light from the Cladding

In one embodiment, a cladding region is disposed on or optically coupledto a core region of a lightguide and comprises a light extracting regionoperatively coupled to the cladding region on the side of the firstcladding region opposite the lightguide that extracts light from thecladding region. Operatively coupling the light extracting region to thecladding region or a light extraction feature to a region includes,without limitation: adding, removing, or altering material on thesurface of the cladding region or within the volume of the claddingregion; disposing a material on the surface of the cladding region orwithin the volume of the cladding region; applying a material on thesurface of the cladding region or within the volume of the claddingregion; printing or painting a material on the surface of the claddingregion or within the volume of the cladding region; removing materialfrom the surface of the cladding region or from the volume of thecladding region; modifying a surface of the cladding region or regionwithin the volume of the cladding region; stamping or embossing asurface of the cladding region or region within the volume of thecladding region; scratching, sanding, ablating, or scribing a surface ofthe cladding region or region within the volume of the cladding region;forming a light extracting region on the surface of the cladding regionor within the volume of the cladding region; bonding a material on thesurface of the cladding region or within the volume of the claddingregion; adhering a material to the surface of the cladding region orwithin the volume of the cladding region; optically coupling the lightextracting region to the surface of the cladding region or volume of thecladding region; optically coupling or physically coupling the lightextracting region to the cladding region by an intermediate surface,layer or material disposed between the light extracting region and thecladding region; such that a portion of light propagating within thecladding region incident on the light extracting region will exit thecladding region or be re-directed to an angle smaller than the criticalangle such that it does not remain within the cladding region, coreregion, coupling lightguide, lightguide, or other region through whichit is propagating by total internal reflection.

In one embodiment, by extracting light from the cladding region, otherlayers or objects (such as fingers or dust) in contact with the claddingregion or a region optically coupled to the cladding region in the lightemitting area of a display do not frustrate or extract light from thecladding causing reduced luminance contrast or poor display or signvisibility. In one embodiment, the light is extracted from the claddingby absorbing light from the cladding or scattering light directly withinthe cladding or on an outer surface of the cladding (the surfaceopposite the core region) or indirectly within or on an outer surface ofa film or region optically coupled to the outer surface of the cladding.The scattered method of extracting light from the cladding scatters aportion of the incident light such that it is redirected into anglesthat do not totally internally reflect within the cladding region or aregion optically coupled to the cladding region opposite the coreregion. For example, in one embodiment, the outer surface of a claddingregion is roughened or comprises surface relief features that extractlight propagating in the cladding. In another embodiment, a layer orregion is optically coupled to the cladding region that comprises alight extracting region. For example, in one embodiment, a black PETfilm is optically coupled to the core region of a lightguide using apressure sensitive adhesive that functions as the cladding in theregion. In one embodiment, light propagating in a coupling lightguide ata first angle from the total internal reflection interface ispropagating at a larger angle after the fold in the coupling lightguideand is extracted from the first cladding region by the light extractingregion.

Light Absorbing or Scattering Region or Layer

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: cladding,adhesive, layer disposed between the lightguide or lightguide region andthe outer light emitting surface of the light emitting device, patternedregion, printed region, and extruded region on one or more surfaces orwithin the volume of the film comprises a light absorbing material whichabsorbs a first portion of light in a first predetermined wavelengthrange. In one embodiment, a light absorbing region is a black or lightabsorbing ink coated on the cladding layer or a light absorbing materialsuch as a black PET film optically coupled using an adhesive to acladding layer on a core layer of a lightguide in the light mixingregion.

In one embodiment, the light absorbing region or layer is opticallycoupled to a cladding region on one or more regions selected from thegroup: the coupling lightguide regions, the light mixing regions, andthe light emitting regions. In this embodiment, the light absorbingregion can absorb a first portion of the light within the cladding towhich it is optically coupled. In one embodiment, the first portion ofthe light absorbed is greater than one selected from the group: 5%, 10%,20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%. In one embodiment, thelight propagating in the cladding is substantially absorbed by the lightabsorbing region. In one embodiment, the light absorbing region furthercomprises a light scattering material that scatters a portion of thelight propagating within the first cladding region into angles such thatit is extracted from the first cladding region or reflects light at anangle less than the critical angle for the first cladding region, asecond cladding region at the surface opposite the lightguide, or thecore region of the lightguide. In one embodiment, the light absorbingregion comprises a white ink or material that absorbs a small portion oflight and reflectively scatters a larger portion of light than itabsorbs. In another embodiment, a light scattering region or layer iswithin the volume of, optically coupled to, or forms the outer surfaceof a region of the cladding in one or more regions selected from thegroup: a coupling lightguide region, a light mixing region, a lightguideregion, and a light emitting region. In this embodiment, the lightpropagating within the cladding can be extracted substantially beforethe light emitting region (or an area of interest in the light emittingregion) by scattering it out of the cladding region. Removing the lightpropagating within the cladding, for example, may be desired infrontlight applications where fingerprints, smudges, oil, residue, dust,and scratches in the cladding or outer surface may be illuminated orvisible due to the light propagating within the cladding when the lightsource is emitting light. The light propagating through the cladding canpropagate through the lightguide at an angle less than the criticalangle for the core region and cladding region interface. Lightpropagating at angles in the core region at or above the critical anglecan penetrate into the cladding in an evanescent region. In oneembodiment, less than 10% of the evanescent light from the lightpropagating in the lightguide that totally internally reflects at thecladding region interface extends into the light absorbing region.Placing a light absorbing region to close to the interface (such as lessthan 500 nm) between the core region and cladding region can absorb asignificant portion of light propagating within the core region atangles larger than the critical angle due to the evanescent penetrationinto the light absorbing region and reduce the light flux reaching thelight emitting region and exiting the light emitting device. In anotherembodiment, the light absorbing region is, on average, greater than oneselected from the group: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, and 3 microns away fromthe interface between the core regions and the cladding regions.

In one embodiment, the first predetermined wavelength range includeslight from 300 nm to 400 nm and the region absorbs UV light that coulddegrade or yellow the lightguide region, layer or other region or layer.In one embodiment, the cladding region is disposed between the lightabsorbing region and the lightguide such that the light propagatingthrough the lightguide and the evanescent portion of the lightpropagating within the lightguide is not absorbed due to the absorbingregion since it does not pass through the absorbing region unless it isextracted from the lightguide. In another embodiment, the lightabsorbing region or layer is an arrangement of light absorbing, lightfluorescing, or light reflecting and absorbing regions which selectivelyabsorb light in a predetermine pattern to provide a light emittingdevice with spatially varying luminance or color (such as in adye-sublimated or inject printed overlay which is laminated or printedonto a layer of the film to provide a colored image, graphic, logo orindicia). In another embodiment, the light absorbing region is disposedin close proximity to the light extracting region such that the lightemitted from the light emitting device due to the particular lightextraction feature has a predetermined color or luminous intensity. Forexample, inks comprising titanium dioxide and light absorbing dyes canbe disposed on the lightguide regions such that a portion of the lightreaching the surface of the lightguide in that region passes through thedye and is extracted due to the light extraction feature or the light isextracted by the light extraction feature and passes through the dye.

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a five layerlightguide region with a UV light absorbing material disposed in theouter layers which are both optically coupled to cladding layers whichare both optically coupled to the inner lightguide layer. In oneembodiment, a 5-layer film comprises a polycarbonate material in thecentral lightguide layer with low refractive index cladding layers of athickness between 1 micron and 150 microns optically coupled to thelightguide layer and a UV light absorbing material in the outer layersof the film.

In another embodiment, a light absorbing material is disposed on oneside of the light emitting device such that the light emitted from thedevice is contrasted spatially against a darker background. In oneembodiment, a black PET layer or region is disposed in proximity to oneside or region of the light emitting device. In another embodiment,white reflecting regions are disposed in proximity to the lightextracting region such that the light escaping the lightguide in thedirection of the white reflecting region is reflected back toward thelightguide. In one embodiment, a lightguide comprises a lightguideregion and a cladding region; and a light absorbing layer is disposed(laminated, coated, co-extruded, etc.) on the cladding region. Inanother embodiment, the light absorbing material is a dye thatsublimates or infuses into the volume of the cladding. In oneembodiment, light from a laser cuts (or ablates) regions in the lightabsorbing layer and creates light extracting regions in the claddingregion and/or lightguide region. A white reflecting film such as a whitePET film with voids is disposed next to the light absorbing region. Thewhite film may be laminated or spaced by an air gap, adhesive or othermaterial. In this example, a portion of the light extracted in the lightextracting regions formed by the laser is directed toward the white filmand reflected back through the lightguide where a portion of this lightescapes the lightguide on the opposite side and increases the luminanceof the region. This example illustrates where registration of the whitereflecting region, black reflection region, and light extracting regionsare not necessary since the laser created holes in the black film andcreated the light extracting features at the same time. This examplealso illustrates the ability for the light emitting device to display animage, logo, or indicia in the off state where light is not emitted fromthe light source since the white reflective regions reflect ambientlight. This is useful, for example, in a sign application where powercan be saved during the daytime since ambient light can be used toilluminate the sign. The light absorbing region or layer may also be acolored other than black such as red, green, blue, yellow, cyan,magenta, etc.

In another embodiment, the light absorbing region or layer is a portionof another element of the light emitting device. In one embodiment, thelight absorbing region is a portion of the black housing comprising atleast a portion of the input coupler that is optically coupled to thecladding region using an adhesive.

In another embodiment, the cladding, outer surface or portion of thelightguide of a light emitting device comprises a light absorbing regionsuch as a black stripe region or light scattering region that absorbs orscatters, respectively, more than one selected from the group: 50%, 60%,70%, 80% and 90% of the visible light propagating within the claddingregion. In one embodiment, the light absorbing region absorbs lightpropagating within the cladding region from light coupled into thecladding region at the light input surface of the coupling lightguidesin the light input coupler. In another embodiment, the lightguide isless than 200 microns in thickness and a light absorbing regionoptically coupled to the cladding absorbs more than 70% of the lightpropagating within the cladding which passes through the lightguide,wherein the width of the light absorbing region in the direction of thelight propagating within the lightguide is less than one selected fromthe group: 10 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 3 millimeters, 2 millimeters,and 1 millimeter. In another embodiment, the light absorbing region hasa width in the direction of propagation of light within the lightguidebetween one selected from the group: 0.5-3 millimeters, 0.5-6millimeters, 0.5-12 millimeters, and 0.05-10 centimeters. In anotherembodiment, the light scattering region within the volume, on thesurface of, or optically coupled to the cladding region on the sideopposite the core region has a width in the direction of propagation oflight within the lightguide between one selected from the group: 0.5-3millimeters, 0.5-6 millimeters, 0.5-12 millimeters, and 0.05-10centimeters.

In one embodiment, the light absorbing region is at least one selectedfrom the group: a material patterned into a line, a material patternedinto a shape or collection of shapes, a material patterned on one orboth sides of the film, cladding, or layer optically coupled to thecladding, a material patterned on one or more lightguide couplers, amaterial patterned in the light mixing region, a material patterned inthe lightguide, and a material patterned in the lightguide region. Inanother embodiment, the light absorbing region is patterned during thecutting step for the film, coupling lightguides, or cutting step ofother regions, layers or elements. In another embodiment, the lightabsorbing region covers at least one percentage of surface area of thecoupling lightguides selected from the group: 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 20%, and40%.

Adhesion Properties of the Lightguide, Film, Cladding or Other Layer

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: lightguide,light transmitting film, cladding, and layer disposed in contact with alayer of the film has adhesive properties. In one embodiment, thecladding is a “low tack” adhesive that allows the film to be removedfrom a window or substantially planar surface while “wetting out” theinterface. By “wetting out” the interface as used herein, the twosurfaces are optically coupled such that the Fresnel reflection from theinterfaces at the surface is less than 2%. The adhesive layer or regionmay comprise a polyacrylate adhesive, animal glue or adhesive,carbohydrate polymer as an adhesive, natural rubber based adhesive,polysulfide adhesive, tannin based adhesive, lignin based adhesive,furan based adhesive, urea formaldehyde adhesive, melamine formaldehydeadhesive, isocyanate wood binder, polyurethane adhesive, polyvinyl andethylene vinyl acetate, hot melt adhesive, reactive acrylic adhesive,anaerobic adhesive, or epoxy resin adhesive.

In one embodiment, the adhesive layer or region has an ASTM D 903version 2010 (modified for 72-hour dwell time) peel strength to standardwindow glass less than one selected from the group 77 N/100 mm, 55 N/100mm, 44 N/100 mm, 33 N/100 mm, 22 N/100 mm, and 11 N/100 mm. In anotherembodiment, the adhesive, when adhered to glass, will support the weightof the light emitting device.

Removable Protective Layer

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a removableprotective layer. In another embodiment, a light transmitting film isdisposed on the outer surface of the light emitting device and the ASTMD 903 version 2010 (modified for 72-hour dwell time) peel strength tothe lightguide is less than one selected from the group 77 N/100 mm, 55N/100 mm, 44 N/100 mm, 33 N/100 mm, 22 N/100 mm, and 11 N/100 mm. Inanother embodiment, when the outer surface of the light emitting devicebecomes scratched, damaged, or reduces the optical performance of thelight emitting device, the outer layer of the film may be removed. In afurther embodiment, a tag or extended region of the protective layerallows the individual layer to be removed while maintaining theintegrity or position of the lightguide beneath which may have one ormore additional protective layers disposed thereupon. In one embodiment,a thin film-based lightguide disposed as a frontlight for a reflectivedisplay comprises removable protective layers. The protective layers maybe thin or thick and may comprise materials such as those used asdisplay screen protectors, anti-reflection coatings, anti-glare coatingsor surfaces, hardcoatings, circular polarizers, or surface structuresthat reduce the visibility of fingerprints such as those disclosed inU.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/537,930.

Removable Component Comprising Automatic Identification or Data Capture

In one embodiment, a removable component or cartridge of the lightemitting device comprises an automatic identification and data capturemethod (such as indicia) or an information carrying method to provideinformation readable by the light emitting device. In anotherembodiment, at least one selected from the group: light input coupler,coupling lightguides, light mixing region, lightguide region,lightguide, film, cladding region, housing for the light input coupler,and separate component of the device comprises indicia or an informationcarrying method that provides information to the light emitting device.The information provided by the indicia or information carrying methodmay comprise information related to changing the light output of thelight emitting device from a first state to a second state. In oneembodiment, the indicia or information carrying method providesinformation to the light emitting device that directs the light emittingdevice to at least one selected from the group: turn on, turn off,adjust the overall intensity of the light output, adjust the relativeintensity of light output from one or more light sources (such as tochange the color from warm white to a cool white, from red to blue,change the color over time based on expected LED degradation rates, froma white based on RGB to white based on white LEDs, etc.) in one or moreregions (such as turn on blue only in one region to illuminate a blueregion of a logo corresponding to water) or lightguides (turning on onelightguide for the flashing “Sale” logo within the lightguide to beilluminated on top of a soft drink bottle advertisement), change theaverage color, change the times for on and off, change theidentification lights for time to change the lightguide film or lightsource, change the alarms or special turn on times, change the displayinformation related to authenticity of the component foranti-counterfeiting, change the location specific information, andchange the component lifetime information (the light emitting devicecould display, for example, information relating to “Time to change thefilm” or “Battery life is low” or “Call for Service (555) 555-5555”). Inanother embodiment, the removable component comprises multiplelightguide layers and information and an information carrying method toprescribe which lightguide or combination of lightguides should turn onin relation to the date or time information in a clock within the lightemitting device. For example, a stack of lightguides could compriselightguides with images corresponding to images for Christmas,Thanksgiving, St. Patrick's Day, Halloween, etc. which could come on atthe appropriate predetermined time of year for a light emitting windowdisplay.

In one embodiment, the indicia comprises information in the form of apattern, text, or arrangement of ink, light extracting surface orvolumetric features, or other optically detectible pattern or indicia ona component of the light emitting device. The component may be designedto be field removable such that the new information or configurationspecific for the new component can be read by the device and it can beconfigured appropriately. In one embodiment, the indicia is a pattern ofdots, letters, characters, or indicia on the film, lightguide,lightguide region, lightguide, housing or surface of a component of theremovable components. The pattern of dots, characters, letters orindicia may vary in size, shape, spacing, color (for example, red, greenblue, black, and white dots), or percent reflectance. In one embodiment,the indicia are an arrangement of 1D bars as in a barcode or 2D matrixor 2D barcode.

In another embodiment, the information carrying method is one selectedfrom physical protrusions or notches in a component, physical switches,indentations or grooves in a component, an active, passive, or batteryassisted Radio-Frequency Identification (RFID) tag or label,High-frequency RFID or HFID/HighFID, Ultra-HighFID or UHFID, a magneticstripe, a smart card component, an optical RFID (or OPID). In oneembodiment, an RFID tag is printed onto the surface or the surface of alayer within the film used as the coupling lightguide, lightguideregion, light mixing region, or lightguide. In another embodiment, theRFID tag is adhered to a component of the cartridge and the reader iswithin the base unit. In one embodiment, at least one light sourcewithin the light emitting device is used to illuminate a printed patternor light extraction feature pattern disposed on the lightguide,lightguide region, light mixing region or lightguide. In anotherembodiment, the lightguide, lightguide region, light mixing region, orcoupling lightguide comprises a plurality of light absorbing orscattering regions arranged to provide information when illuminated by aplurality of light sources. For example, in one embodiment, each baseunit comprising a visible light source and an IR LED which is used as adetector or transmitter. When the cartridge is inserted (or at someother event such as a reset or power on, or a change of state such aslightguide replacement), the various light sources may cycle through apattern (such as sequentially, or turning the top 3 light sourcemodules, then the side modules). Each IR LED may be used as a detectoror a transmitter and may be electrically configured to switch betweenthe two states. The location of the light absorbing or light reflectingregions will determine the relative intensities detected by the IR lightemitting diodes that are not emitting light. In this embodiment, thelight absorbing (such as an IR absorbing dye) or light reflectingregions can be coded to provide information specific to the lightguidefilm or cartridge. In another embodiment, visible LEDs are used and anat least one LED is configured to detect light within a specificwavelength range within the lightguide when the lightguide isilluminated by the other LEDs. The visible LEDs may cycle through andprovide coded information based on the intensity reaching the visiblelight LED used as a detector. The relative intensity detected when aplurality of LEDs are illuminated by the light emitting device canprovide coded information. More than one LED can be used in a detectoronly mode, detector and illuminator mode, or illumination mode only.

In a further embodiment, each module of the light emitting devicecomprises an infra-red (IR) LED designed to operate in at least one of adetector mode or illumination mode and the light emitting device canelectronically cycle through each module independently to illuminate theIR LEDs. By incorporating IR light scattering or reflecting regions orIR light absorbing regions in at least one selected from the group:coupling lightguide, light mixing region, lightguide region, andlightguide, the relative intensities of the IR light at a plurality ofmodules can be used to decode the information provided encoded by the IRlight absorbing or light reflecting or light scattering regions. Inanother embodiment, a dye which absorbs a portion of light greater than700 nm can be used in a region and white LEDs which emit a portion oflight at wavelengths greater than 700 nm can be used as illuminationsources and IR LEDs can be used as detectors and provide informationbased on the light reaching other IR LEDs configured in reverse mode. Inthis embodiment, for example, IR scattering flakes, powders or materialsor IR absorbing dyes may be used on at least one coupling lightguide toprovide relative intensity information to the IR LED when used as adetector.

In one embodiment, the pattern is an arrangement of colored indiciawhich is illuminated sequentially or simultaneously by more than onelight source in the device. In one embodiment, the pattern is an arrayof colored indicia in which the reflected intensity of light from aplurality of indicia changes depending on the color of the light source.For example, the indicia pattern could be an array comprising a red dot,a blue dot, a purple dot, and an orange dot. An optical reading devicesuch as a linear array of photovoltaic cells, photodiodes, CMOS imager,CCD imager, etc. with or without color filters will detect differentrelative reflected intensities depending on the illumination wavelengthspectrum. For example, when the blue LED is turned on, the blue dotswill have a high intensity of reflected light and the purple dot willhave a medium or high intensity of reflected light and the red dot willhave a low level of reflected intensity. The relative reflectances fordifferent illumination spectrums for different dots can provide encodedinformation.

The reading device of the light emitting device of one embodiment is anarray of detectors or a single detector. In the case of the array ofdetectors, the detecting device could be a CCD or CMOS imaging devicewith a lens, microlens array, or other optical element to project thearray of indicia onto the light detecting array elements.

In another embodiment, the detector on the light emitting device is adetecting element that provides for the information to be read seriallywhen the removable component is attached (or removed) from the lightemitting device. For example, the holding device for array of couplinglightguides could have a magnetic stripe which is read by the lightemitting device with the holding device for the array of couplinglightguides is placed into the main base light emitting device unitcomprising a light source. In another embodiment, the removablecomponent or cartridge comprises a photovoltaic element coupled to thelightguide that powers a transmitter (radio frequency for example), orlight source such that information is relayed back to the base unit.

In a further embodiment, the cartridge comprises mechanical holes,protrusions, or switches, or arrays or matrixes thereof that provideinformation to the light emitting device when the cartridge is attachedto the light emitting device base unit.

In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides comprise printed regionson the low refractive index region, the lightguide region of thecoupling lightguides, or another layer disposed on a surface or betweena coupling lightguide. In one embodiment, a portion of light input intothe coupling lightguide scatters out of the coupling lightguides and isdetected by an optical detector such as a CCD or CMOS imager orphotovoltaic cell or light emitting diode.

Lightguide Comprising Circuitry or Electrical Components

In one embodiment, at least one electrical component is physicallydisposed on the lightguide or a layer physically coupled to thelightguide. By incorporating electrical components on the lightguidefilm, a separate substrate for one or more electrical components is notneeded (thus lower volumes and component costs) and flexibleroll-to-roll processing can be employed to manufacture or dispose theelectrical component on the lightguide film. In another embodiment, thelightguide comprises at least one electrical component physicallycoupled to a cladding region, a cladding layer, or a layer or regionphysically coupled to the core material or the cladding material. Inanother embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a flexible layercomprising a plurality of electrical components and the layer isphysically coupled to a flexible lightguide film. In one embodiment, alightguide comprises at least one electrical component or component usedwith electrical component disposed thereon, wherein the at least onecomponent is selected from the group: active electrical component,passive electrical component, transistor, thin film transistor, diode,resistor, terminal, connector, socket, cord, lead, switch, keypad,relay, reed switch, thermostat, circuit breaker, limit switch, mercuryswitch, centrifugal switch, resistor, trimmer, potentiometer, heater,resistance wire, thermistor, varistor, fuse, resettable fuse, metaloxide varistor, inrush current limiter, gas discharge tube, circuitbreaker, spark gap, filament lamp, capacitor, variable capacitor,inductor, variable inductor, saturable inductor, transformer, magneticamplifier, ferrite impedance, motor, generator, solenoid, speaker,microphone, RC circuit, LC circuit, crystal, ceramic resonator, ceramicfilter, surface acoustic wave filter, transducer, ultrasonic motor,power source, battery, fuel cell, power supply, photovoltaic device,thermo electric generator, electrical generator, sensor, buzzer, linearvariable differential transformer, rotary encoder, inclinometer, motionsensor, flow meter, strain gauge, accelerometer, thermocouple,thermopile, thermistor, resistance temperature detector, bolometer,thermal cutoff, magnetometer, hygrometer, photo resistor, solid statecomponent, standard diode, rectifier, bridge rectifier, Schottky diode,hot carrier diode, zener diode, transient voltage suppression diode,varactor, tuning diode, varicap, variable capacitance diode, lightemitting diode, laser, photodiode, solar cell, photovoltaic cell,photovoltaic array, avalanche photodiode, diode for alternating current,DIAC, trigger diode, SIDAC, current source diode, Peltier cooler,transistor, bipolar transistor, bipolar junction transistor,phototransistor, Darlington transistor (NPN or PNP), Sziklai pair, fieldeffect transistor, junction field effect transistor, metal oxidesemiconductor FET, metal semiconductor FET, high electron mobilitytransistor, thyristor, unijunction transistor, programmable unijunctiontransistor, silicon controlled rectifier, static inductiontransistor/thyristor, triode for alternating current, compositetransistor, insulated gate bipolar transistor, hybrid circuits,optoelectronic circuit, opto-isolator, opto-coupler, photo-coupler,photodiode, BJT, JFET, SCR, TRIAC, open collector IC, CMOS IC, solidstate relay, opto switch, opto interrupter, optical switch, opticalinterrupter, photo switch, photo interrupter, led display, vacuumfluorescent display, cathode ray tube, liquid crystal display (preformedcharacters, dot matrix, passive matrix, active matrix TFT, flexibledisplay, organic LCD, monochrome LCD, color LCD), diode, triode,tetrode, pentode, hexode, pentagrid, octode, barretter, nuvistor,compactron, microwave, klystron, magnetron, multiple electroniccomponents assembled in a device that is in itself used as a component,oscillator, display device, filter, antennas, elemental dipole,biconical, yagi, phased array, magnetic dipole (loop), wire-wrap,breadboard, enclosure, heat sink, heat sink paste & pads, fan, printedcircuit boards, lamp, memristor, integrated circuit, processor, memory,driver, and electrical leads and interconnects.

In another embodiment, the electrical component comprises organiccomponents. In one embodiment, at least one electrical component isformed on the lightguide, on a component of the lightguide, or on alayer physically coupled to the lightguide material using roll-to-rollprocessing. In a further embodiment, a flexible lightguide film materialis physically coupled to at least one flexible electrical component or acollection of electrical components such that the resulting lightguideis flexible and has can emit light without temporary or permanentvisible demarcation, crease, luminance non-uniformity, MURA, or blemishwhen a light emitting region is bent to a radius of curvature less thanone selected from the group: 100 millimeters, 75 millimeters, 50millimeters, 25 millimeters, 10 millimeters and 5 millimeters.

Light Redirecting Element Disposed to Redirect Light from the Lightguide

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a lightguide withlight redirecting elements disposed on or within the lightguide andlight extraction features disposed in a predetermined relationshiprelative to one or more light redirecting elements. In anotherembodiment, a first portion of the light redirecting elements aredisposed above a light extraction feature in a direction substantiallyperpendicular to the light emitting surface, lightguide, or lightguideregion. In a further embodiment, light redirecting elements are disposedto redirect light which was redirected from a light extraction featuresuch that the light exiting the light redirecting elements is oneselected from the group: more collimated than a similar lightguide witha substantially planar surface; has a full angular width at half maximumintensity less than 60 degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20degrees, 10 degrees, or 5 degrees in a first light output plane; has afull angular width at half maximum intensity less than 60 degrees, 50degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees, or 5 degrees ina first light output plane and second light output plane orthogonal tothe first output plane; and has a full angular width at half maximumintensity less than 60 degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20degrees, 10 degrees, or 5 degrees in all planes parallel to the opticalaxis of the light emitting device.

In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a substantially linear arrayof lenticules disposed on at least one surface opposite a substantiallylinear array of light extraction features wherein the light redirectingelement collimates a first portion of the light extracted from thelightguide by the light extraction features. In a further embodiment, alight emitting device comprises a lenticular lens film lightguidefurther comprising coupling lightguides, wherein the couplinglightguides are disposed substantially parallel to the lenticules at thelightguide region or light mixing region and the lenticular lens filmfurther comprises linear regions of light reflecting ink lightextraction features disposed substantially opposite the lenticules onthe opposite surface of the lenticular lens film lightguide and thelight exiting the light emitting device is collimated. In a furtherembodiment, the light extraction features are light redirecting features(such as TIR grooves or linear diffraction gratings) that redirect lightincident within one plane significantly more than light incident from aplane orthogonal to the first. In one embodiment, a lenticular lens filmcomprises grooves on the opposite surface of the lenticules oriented ata first angle greater than 0 degrees to the lenticules.

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a microlensarray film lightguide with an array of microlenses on one surface andthe film further comprises regions of reflecting ink light extractionfeatures disposed substantially opposite the microlenses on the oppositesurface of the lenticular lens film lightguide and the light exiting thelight emitting device is substantially collimated or has an angular FWHMluminous intensity less than 60 degrees. A microlens array film, forexample can collimate light from the light extraction features inradially symmetric directions. In one embodiment, the microlens arrayfilm is separated from the lightguide by an air gap.

The width of the light extraction features (reflecting line of ink inthe aforementioned lenticular lens lightguide film embodiment) willcontribute to the degree of collimation of the light exiting the lightemitting device. In one embodiment, light redirecting elements aredisposed substantially opposite light extraction features and theaverage width of the light extraction features in first directiondivided by the average width in a first direction of the lightredirecting elements is less than one selected from the group: 1, 0.9,0.7, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, and 0.1. In a further embodiment, the focalpoint of collimated visible light incident on a light redirectingelement in a direction opposite from the surface comprising the lightextraction feature is within at most one selected from the group: 5%,10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50% and 60% of the width of light redirectingelement from the light extraction feature. In another embodiment, thefocal length of at least one light redirecting element or the averagefocal length of the light redirecting elements when illuminated bycollimated light from the direction opposite the lightguide is less thanone selected from the group: 1 millimeter, 500 microns, 300 microns, 200microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50 microns and 25 microns.

In one embodiment, the focal length of the light redirecting elementdivided by the width of the light redirecting element is less than oneselected from the group: 3, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.8, and 0.6. In anotherembodiment, the f/# of the light redirecting elements is less than oneselected from the group: 3, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.8, and 0.6. In anotherembodiment, the light redirecting element is a linear Fresnel lens arraywith a cross-section of refractive Fresnel structures. In anotherembodiment, the light redirecting element is a linear Fresnel-TIR hybridlens array with a cross-section of refractive Fresnel structures andtotally internally reflective structures.

In a further embodiment, light redirecting elements are disposed toredirect light which was redirected from a light extraction feature suchthat a portion of the light exiting the light redirecting elements isredirected with an optical axis at an angle greater than 0 degrees fromthe direction perpendicular to the light emitting region, lightguideregion, lightguide, or light emitting surface. In another embodiment,the light redirecting elements are disposed to redirect light which wasredirected from a light extraction feature such that the light exitingthe light redirecting elements is redirected to an optical axissubstantially parallel to the direction perpendicular to the lightemitting region, lightguide region, lightguide, or light emittingsurface. In a further embodiment, the light redirecting elementdecreases the full angular width at half maximum intensity of the lightincident on a region of the light redirecting element and redirects theoptical axis of the light incident to a region of the light redirectingelement at a first angle to a second angle different than the first.

In another embodiment, the angular spread of the light redirected by thelight extraction feature is controlled to optimize a light controlfactor. One light control factor is the percentage of light reaching aneighboring light redirecting element which could redirect light into anundesirable angle. This could cause side-lobes or light output intoundesirable areas. For example, a strongly diffusively reflectivescattering light extraction feature disposed directly beneath alenticule in a lenticular lens array may scatter light into aneighboring lenticule such that there is a side lobe of light at higherangular intensity which is undesirable in an application desiringcollimated light output. Similarly, a light extraction feature whichredirects light into a large angular rage such as a hemispherical domewith a relatively small radius of curvature may also redirect light intoneighboring lenticules and create side-lobes. In one embodiment, theBidirectional Scattering Distribution Function (BSDF) of the lightextraction feature is controlled to direct a first portion of incidentlight within a first angular range into a second angular range into thelight redirecting element to create a predetermined third angular rangeof light exiting the light emitting device.

Off-Axis Light Redirection

In a further embodiment, at least one light extraction feature iscentered in a first plane off-axis from the axis of the lightredirecting element. In this embodiment, a portion of the lightextraction feature may intersect the optical axis of the lightextraction feature or it may be disposed sufficiently far from theoptical axis that it does not intersect the optical axis of the lightextraction feature. In another embodiment, the distance between thecenters of the light extraction features and the corresponding lightredirecting elements in first plane varies across the array orarrangement of light redirecting elements.

In one embodiment, the locations of the light extraction featuresrelative to the locations of the corresponding light redirectingelements varies in at least a first plane and the optical axis of thelight emitted from different regions of the light emitting surfacevaries relative to the orientation of the light redirecting elements. Inthis embodiment, for example, light from two different regions of aplanar light emitting surface can be directed in two differentdirections. In another example of this embodiment, light from twodifferent regions (the bottom and side regions, for example) of a lightfixture with a convex curved light emitting surface directed downwardsis directed in the same direction (the optical axes of each region aredirected downwards toward the nadir wherein the optical axis of thelight redirecting elements in the bottom region are substantiallyparallel to the nadir, and the optical axis of the light redirectingelements in the side region are at an angle, such as 45 degrees, fromthe nadir). In another embodiment, the locations of the light extractionfeatures are further from the optical axes of the corresponding lightredirecting elements in the outer regions of the light emitting surfacein a direction perpendicular to lenticules than the central regionswhere the light extraction regions are substantially on-axis and thelight emitted from the light emitting device is more collimated.Similarly, if the light extraction features are located further from theoptical axes of the light redirecting elements in a direction orthogonalto the lenticules from a first edge of a light emitting surface, thelight emitted from the light emitting surface can be directedsubstantially off-axis. Other combinations of locations of lightextraction features relative to light redirecting elements can readilybe envisioned including varying the distance of the light extractionfeatures from the optical axis of the light redirecting element in anonlinear fashion, moving closer to the axis then further from the axisthen closer to the axis in a first direction, moving further from theaxis then closer to the axis then further to the axis in a firstdirection, upper and lower apexes of curved regions of a light emittingsurface with a sinusoidal-like cross-sectional (wave-like) profilehaving light extraction features substantially on-axis and the walls ofthe profile having light extraction features further from the opticalaxis of the light redirecting elements, regular or irregular variationsin separation distances of the light extraction features from theoptical axes of the light redirecting elements, etc.

Angular Width Control

In one embodiment, the widths of the light extraction features relativeto the corresponding widths of the light redirecting elements varies inat least a first plane and the full angular width at half maximumintensity of the light emitted from the light redirecting elementsvaries in at least a first plane. For example, in one embodiment, alight emitting device comprises a lenticular lens array lightguide filmwherein the central region of the light emitting surface in a directionperpendicular to the lenticules comprises light extraction features thathave an average width of approximately 20% of the average width of thelenticules and the outer region of the light emitting surface in adirection perpendicular to the lenticules comprises light extractionfeatures with an average width of approximately 5% of the average widthof the lenticules and the angular full width at half maximum intensityof the light emitted from the central region is larger than that fromthe outer regions.

OFF-Axis and Angular Width Control

In one embodiment, the locations and widths of the light extractionfeatures relative to the corresponding locations and widths,respectively, of the light redirecting elements varies in at least afirst plane and the full angular width at half maximum intensity of thelight emitted from the light redirecting elements and the optical axisof the light emitted from different regions of the light emittingsurface varies in at least a first plane. By controlling the relativewidths and locations of the light extraction features, the direction andangular width of the light emitted from the light emitting device can bevaried and controlled to achieve desired light output profiles.

Light Redirecting Element

As used herein, the light redirecting element is an optical elementwhich redirects a portion of light of a first wavelength range incidentin a first angular range into a second angular range different than thefirst. In one embodiment, the light redirecting element comprises atleast one element selected from the group: refractive features, totallyinternally reflected feature, reflective surface, prismatic surface,microlens surface, diffractive feature, holographic feature, diffractiongrating, surface feature, volumetric feature, and lens. In a furtherembodiment, the light redirecting element comprises a plurality of theaforementioned elements. The plurality of elements may be in the form ofa 2-D array (such as a grid of microlenses or close-packed array ofmicrolenses), a one-dimensional array (such as a lenticular lens array),random arrangement, predetermined non-regular spacing, semi-randomarrangement, or other predetermined arrangement. The elements maycomprise different features, with different surface or volumetricfeatures or interfaces and may be disposed at different thicknesseswithin the volume of the light redirecting element, lightguide, orlightguide region. The individual elements may vary in the x, y, or zdirection by at least one selected from the group: height, width,thickness, position, angle, radius of curvature, pitch, orientation,spacing, cross-sectional profile, and location in the x, y, or z axis.

In one embodiment, the light redirecting element is optically coupled tothe lightguide in at least one region. In another embodiment, the lightredirecting element, film, or layer comprising the light redirectingelement is separated in a direction perpendicular to the lightguide,lightguide region, or light emitting surface of the lightguide by an airgap. In a further embodiment, the lightguide, lightguide region, orlight emitting surface of the lightguide is disposed substantiallybetween two or more light redirecting elements. In another embodiment, acladding layer or region is disposed between the lightguide orlightguide region and the light redirecting element. In anotherembodiment, the lightguide or lightguide region is disposed between twolight redirecting elements wherein light is extracted from thelightguide or lightguide region from both sides and redirected by lightredirecting elements. In this embodiment, a backlight may be designed toemit light in opposite directions to illuminate two displays, or thelight emitting device could be designed to emit light from one side ofthe lightguide by adding a reflective element to reflect light emittedout of the lightguide in the opposite direction back through thelightguide and out the other side.

In another embodiment, the average or maximum dimension of an element ofa light redirecting element in at least one output plane of the lightredirecting element is equal to or less than one selected from thegroup: 100%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, and 10% the averageor maximum dimension of a pixel or sub-pixel of a spatial lightmodulator or display. In another embodiment, a backlight comprises lightredirecting elements that redirect light to within a FWHM of 30 degreestoward a display wherein each pixel or sub-pixel of the display receiveslight from two or more light redirecting elements.

In a further embodiment, the light redirecting element is disposed toreceive light from an electro-optical element wherein the opticalproperties may be changed in one or more regions, selectively or as awhole by applying a voltage or current to the device. In one embodiment,the light extraction features are regions of a polymer dispersed liquidcrystal material wherein the light scattering from the lightguide in adiffuse state is redirected by the light redirecting element. In anotherembodiment, the light extraction feature has a small passive region anda larger active region disposed to change from substantially clear tosubstantially transmissive diffuse (forward scattering) such that whenused in conjunction with the light redirecting element, the display canbe changed from a narrow viewing angle display to a larger viewing angledisplay through the application or removal of voltage or current fromthe electro-optical region or material. For example, lines of groovedlight extraction features are disposed adjacent (x, y, or z direction) afilm comprising wider lines polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC)material disposed to change from substantially clear to substantiallydiffuse upon application of a voltage across the electrodes. Otherelectro-optical materials such as electrophoretic, electro-wetting,electrochromic, liquid crystal, electroactive, MEMS devices, smartmaterials and other materials that can change their optical propertiesthrough application of a voltage, current, or electromagnetic field mayalso be used.

In another embodiment, the light redirecting element is a collection ofprisms disposed to refract and totally internally reflect light towardthe spatial light modulator. In one embodiment, the collection of prismsis a linear array of prisms with an apex angle between 50 degrees and 70degrees. In another embodiment, the collection of prisms is a lineararray of prisms with an apex angle between 50 degrees and 70 degrees towhich a light transmitting material has been applied or disposed betweenthe prisms and the lightguide or lightguide region within regions suchthat the film is effectively planarized in these regions and thecollection of prisms is now two-dimensionally varying arrangement ofprisms (thus on the surface it no longer appears to be a linear array).Other forms of light redirecting elements, reverse prisms, hybridelements, with refractive or totally internally reflective features, ora combination thereof, may be used in an embodiment. Modifications ofelements such as wave-like variations, variations in size, dimensions,shapes, spacing, pitch, curvature, orientation and structures in the x,y, or z direction, combining curved and straight sections, etc. areknown in the art. Such elements are known in the area of backlights andoptical films for displays and include those disclosed in “Optical filmto enhance cosmetic appearance and brightness in liquid crystaldisplays,” Lee et al., OPTICS EXPRESS, 9 Jul. 2007, Vol. 15, No. 14, pp.8609-8618; “Hybrid normal-reverse prism coupler for light-emitting diodebacklight systems,” Aoyama et al., APPLIED OPTICS, 1 Oct. 2006, Vol. 45,No. 28, pp. 7273-7278; Japanese Patent Application No. 2001190876,“Optical Sheet,” Kamikita Masakazu; U.S. patent application Ser. No.11/743,159; U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,085,060, 6,545,827, 5,594,830, 6,151,169,6,746,130, and 5,126,882.

Backlight or Frontlight

Displays with optically active pixels include, without limitation,liquid crystal displays, electrophoretic displays, MEMs-based displays,and electrowetting displays. Displays without optically active pixelsinclude, without limitation, printed signs, neon signs, channel lettersigns, illuminated signs. In displays without optically active pixels,the lightguide may be disposed behind (backlight) or in front(frontlight) of an element and it may be visible directly and/or provideillumination to the element such that it can be seen or provide lightthrough a light transmitting element such that the indicia or graphicscan be seen through the light transmitting element. In embodiments withmore than one element, the lightguide can function as a backlightinglightguide and a frontlight lightguide. In one embodiment, the elementsilluminated or the elements through which light is transmitted include,without limitation, printed signs, graphics, posters, packaging, labels,display materials, sign components, labels, advertising materials,cards, transparencies, or other materials known in the sign, graphics,advertising, marketing, and display industries to provide indicia,graphics, or patterns. In another embodiment, the element issubstantially uniform such that it has high luminance uniformity whenilluminated.

For example, in one embodiment, a lightguide with white ink lightscattering extraction patterns printed on one side functions as abacklight and is disposed behind (on the side opposite the viewing side)a light transmitting element such that the extraction pattern is visiblein the form of indicia or patterns when looking at the lighttransmitting element. In another embodiment, a lightguide with white inklight scattering extraction patterns printed on one side functions as abacklight and is disposed between two light transmitting elements suchthat the extraction pattern is visible in the form of indicia, patterns,images, etc. when looking at the light transmitting elements. In oneembodiment, a lightguide with white ink light scattering extractionpatterns printed on one side functions as a backlight and is disposedbetween two light transmitting elements such that the extraction patternprovides illumination of the light transmitting element which maycomprise images, indicia, or graphics on the light transmittingelements.

In another embodiment, a lightguide with white ink light scatteringextraction patterns printed on one side functions as a frontlight and isdisposed in front of (on the viewing side) an element such that theextraction pattern is visible in the form of indicia or patterns whenlooking at lightguide directly when illuminated. In this embodiment,when the lightguide is not illuminated the extraction pattern may have alow diffuse reflectance, may be barely visible or discernable, or havesmall light extraction features, for example.

In a further embodiment, a lightguide with white ink light scatteringextraction patterns printed on one side functions as a frontlight and isdisposed in front of (on the viewing side) an element such that thelight from the lightguide illuminates the element and the light reflectsfrom the element and passes back through the lightguide to be seen by aviewer looking at the lightguide. In a further embodiment, a lightguidewith white ink light scattering extraction patterns printed on one sidefunctions as a frontlight and is disposed in front of (on the viewingside) an element such that the light from the lightguide illuminates theelement and the light reflects from the element and passes back throughthe lightguide to be seen by a viewer looking at the lightguide; and thelight from the light scattering patterns on the lightguide is directlyvisible without reflecting from the element. In this example, thelightguide is a light emitting device with a visible extraction patternand illuminates an object such that it has a higher luminance (and canbe seen in dark or low-light level ambient environments through thelightguide, for example).

In a further embodiment, a lightguide with white ink light scatteringextraction patterns printed on one side functions as a frontlight and abacklight and is disposed on one side of a light transmitting elementsuch that the light from the lightguide illuminates the element and thelight reflects from the element and passes back through the lightguideto be seen by a viewer looking at the lightguide; and some of the lightfrom the lightguide passes through the light transmitting element andthe extraction patterns are visible from the opposite side of the lighttransmitting element.

In one embodiment, the element has printed indicia or graphics on one orboth sides and the lightguide functions as one or more selected from thegroup: a directly viewable display, a frontlight illuminating theelement such that light is reflected back through the lightguide, abacklight for illuminating the indicia or graphics on the opposite sidesuch that it can viewed on the side opposite the backlight, or theindicia or graphics are visible when looking through the element.

Automatic or User Controlled Color Adjustment

In one embodiment, the light emitting device can be operated in amonochrome mode (such as blue-only mode). In another embodiment, theuser of the light emitting device can selectively choose the color ofthe light emitted from the display or light emitting device. In anotherembodiment, the user can choose to change the mode and relative lightoutput intensities from one or more light sources. For example, in oneembodiment, the user can switch from a full-color 2D display using onlythe frontlight to a stereoscopic 3D display mode. In one embodiment, theuser can adjust the color temperature of the white point of the displaycomprising a film-based lightguide and a light input coupler disposed tocouple light from a red LED and a white LED into the couplinglightguides of the lightguide by adjusting the light output of the redLED relative to the white LED. In another embodiment, the user canswitch a reflective display from a fixed white point color temperaturefrontlight only mode to an automatic white color temperature adjustmentfrontlight and ambient light mode that automatically adjusts the lightoutput from a red LED relative to a white LED (or the relativeintensities of blue, green, and red LEDs, etc.) to maintain the colortemperature of the white point of the display in a variety ofenvironmental ambient light spectral conditions such as “cool”fluorescent lighting and “warm” lighting from an incandescent bulb. Inanother embodiment, the user can select to change from a full-color RGBdisplay mode to an NVIS compatible display mode with less red lightoutput. In another embodiment, the user can select to change from an RGBillumination with light from red, green, and blue LEDs to a monochromemode with light from white LEDs.

In a further embodiment, a film-based lightguide is disposed to receivelight from a substantially white light source and a red light source.For example, by coupling light from a white LED and a red LED, the colortemperature of the display can be adjusted. This can, for example, bechanged by the user (for color preference, for example) orautomatically. For example, in one embodiment, a light emitting devicecomprises a reflective display and a photosensor (such as one or morephotodiodes with color filters or LEDs operated in reverse) that detectsthe color or spectral intensity of light within one or more wavelengthbandwidths and adjusts the overall and/or relative light outputintensities of the frontlights (or LEDs disposed to couple light into asingle frontlight) to increase or decrease the luminance and/or adjustthe combined color of light emitted from the reflective display. Inanother embodiment the light detector (or photosensor) used to detectthe color or spectral intensity of light within one or more wavelengthbandwidths also determines the relative brightness of the ambient lightand the intensity of the light from the frontlight is increased ordecreased based on predetermined or user adjusted settings. In oneembodiment, the photosensor comprises one or more light sensors such asLEDs used in reverse mode. In one embodiment, the photosensor isdisposed in one or more locations selected from the group: behind thedisplay, behind the frontlight, between the light emitting region of thedisplay and the bevel, bezel or frame of the display, within the frameof the display, behind the housing or a light transmitting window of thehousing or casing of the display or light emitting device, and in aregion of the light emitting device separate from the display region. Inanother embodiment, the photosensor comprises a red, green, and blue LEDdriven in reverse to detect the relative intensities of the red, green,and blue spectral components of the ambient light. In anotherembodiment, the photosensor is disposed at the input surface of anarrangement of coupling lightguides disposed to transmit light from oneor more light sources to the light emitting region of a film-basedlightguide or at the output surface of output coupling lightguidesextending from the film-based lightguide. In this embodiment, thephotosensor can effectively collect the average intensity of the lightincident on the display and the film-based lightguide frontlight andthis can be compared to the relative output of the light from the lightsources in the device. In this embodiment, the photosensor is lesssusceptible to shadows since the area of light collection is larger dueto the larger spatial area comprising the light extraction features thatare effectively working in reverse mode as light input coupling featurescoupling a portion of ambient light into the lightguide in a waveguidecondition toward the photosensor.

One or more modes of the light emitting device may be configured to turnon automatically in response to an event. Events may be user oriented,such as turning on the high color gamut mode when the cellphone is usedin the video mode, or in response to an environmental condition such asa film-based emergency light fixture electrically coupled to a smokedetection system (internal or external to the device) to turn on whensmoke is detected, or a high brightness display mode automaticallyturning on when high ambient light levels are detected.

In another embodiment, the display mode may be changed from a lowerluminance, higher color gamut mode (such as a mode using red, green, andblue LEDs for display illumination) to a higher luminance, lower colorgamut mode (such as using white LEDs for illumination). In anotherembodiment, the display may switch (automatically or by user controls)from a higher color gamut mode (such as a light emitting device emittinglight from red, green, and blue LEDs) to a lower color gamut mode (suchas one using white phosphor based LEDs). In another embodiment, thedisplay switches automatically or by user controls from a highelectrical power mode (such as light emitting device emitting light fromred, green, and blue LEDs) to a relatively low electrical power mode(such as a mode using only substantially white LEDs) for equal displayluminances.

In a further embodiment, the display switches automatically or by usercontrols from a color sequential or field sequential color modefrontlight or backlight illumination mode to an ambient-lightillumination mode that turns off or substantially reduces the lightoutput from the frontlight or backlight and ambient light contributes tomore than 50% of the flux exiting the display.

In one embodiment, a display comprises a film-based lightguide with alight input coupler disposed to receive light from one or more lightsources emitting light with one or more colors selected from the group:a red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow. For example, in oneembodiment, a display comprises a film-based lightguide comprising oneor more light input couplers disposed to receive light from a red,green, blue, cyan and yellow LED. In this embodiment, the color gamut ofthe display can be increased significantly over a display comprisingonly red, green, and blue illumination LEDs. In one embodiment, the LEDsare disposed within one light input coupler. In another embodiment, twoor more LEDs of two different colors are disposed to input light into anarrangement of coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, a firstlight input coupler comprises one or more LEDs with a first spectraloutput profile of light entering a film-based lightguide and a secondlight input coupler with a second spectral output profile of lightentering the film-based lightguide different than the first spectraloutput profile and the coupling lightguides in the first or second lightinput coupler are disposed to receive light at the input surface from anLED with a first peak wavelength and output wavelength bandwidth lessthan 100 nm and the coupling lightguides in the other light inputcoupler are not disposed to receive light at the input surface from anLED with substantially similar peak wavelength and substantially similaroutput wavelength bandwidth. In another embodiment, a light emittingdevice comprises two or more light input couplers comprising differentconfigurations of different colored LEDs. In another embodiment, a lightemitting device comprises two or more light input couplers comprisingsubstantially the same configurations of different colored LEDs.

Stereoscopic Display

In another embodiment, a stereoscopic display comprises a backlight orfrontlight wherein at least one lightguide or light extracting region isdisposed within or on top of a film-based lightguide wherein at leasttwo sets of light emitting regions produce at least two sets of imagesin conjunction with a stereoscopic display. The 3D display may furthercomprise light redirecting elements, parallax barriers, lenticularelements, or other optical components to effectively convert thespatially separated light emitting regions into angularly separatedlight regions.

In one embodiment, a light emitting display comprises a lenticular lensdisposed to direct light into two or more viewing zones for stereoscopicdisplay of images, video, information, or indicia and the lenticularlens is a film-based lightguide or comprises a film-based lightguidesubstrate. In this embodiment, the thickness of the stereoscopic displaycan be reduced by incorporating the film-based lightguide into thelenticular lens film. In one embodiment, the light scattering extractionregions are disposed in a plane substantially located at the focal pointof the lenticules in a lenticular film.

Light Collection for Photovoltaic Charging

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a film-basedlightguide comprising light extraction features that extract a portionof incident light from one or more light sources disposed in light inputcouplers out of the film-based lightguide and the light extractionfeatures redirect a first portion of ambient light external to thedisplay into the lightguide in a lightguide condition. In oneembodiment, a portion of the ambient light directed into a film-basedlightguide by the light extraction features (functioning also as lightinput coupling features) propagates to a photovoltaic cell disposedadjacent or proximate the light sources at the input surface of couplinglightguides in a light input coupler for the film-based lightguide ordisposed adjacent or proximate the output surface of the couplinglightguides in a light output coupler for the film-based lightguide. Inone embodiment, the light emitting device may be switched to a chargingmode such that the display is turned off (immediately or after a brieftime period) and light reaching the photovoltaic cell charges a battery,capacitor, or other energy storing device. In another embodiment, thelight emitting device charges or comprises a mode that charges an energystorage device when ambient light is sufficiently bright when the lightemitting device is turned on or when the light emitting device is turnedon or off. In another embodiment, the electrical power generated fromthe photovoltaic cell is directed to power the display or device withoutpassing through the energy storage device when the power reaches athreshold voltage or current or combination thereof. In anotherembodiment, the photosensor that detects the ambient light intensity forbacklight or frontlight intensity adjustments also sends a signal toturn on the charging mechanism for charging the charge storage deviceusing the photovoltaic cell when the ambient light level is above athreshold level measured by the voltage, current or a combinationthereof from the photosensor.

Flexible Light Emitting Device, Backlight, or Frontlight

In another embodiment, a light emitting device such as a displaycomprises a film-based light emitting device comprising a light source,light input coupler, and lightguide wherein the lightguide, lightguideregion, or coupling lightguides can be bent or folded to radius ofcurvature of less than 75 times the thickness of lightguide orlightguide region and function similarly to similar lightguide orlightguide region that has not been similarly bent. In anotherembodiment, the lightguide, coupling lightguide, or lightguide regioncan be bent or folded to radius of curvature greater than 10 times thetimes the thickness lightguide or lightguide region and functionsimilarly to similar lightguide or lightguide region that has not beensimilarly bent. In another embodiment, a display comprises a film-basedlight emitting device comprising a light source, light input coupler,and lightguide wherein the display can be bent or folded to radius ofcurvature of less than 75 times the thickness of display or lightguideregion and function similarly to similar display that has not beensimilarly bent. In another embodiment, the display is capable of beingbent or folded to radius of curvature greater than 10 times the timesthe thickness lightguide or lightguide region and function similarly tosimilar display that has not been similarly bent.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device or a display incorporatinga light emitting device is bent into a substantially non-planar lightemitting device or display incorporating a light emitting device. In oneembodiment, the light emitting device or display incorporating the lightemitting device has a light emitting surface area substantially in theshape of or comprising a portion of a shape of at least one selectedfrom the group: a cylinder, sphere, pyramid, torus, cone, arcuatesurface, folded surface, and bent surface. By folding the input couplerbehind the light emitting region and inside a curved or bent region ofthe light emitting device or display, the input coupler can beeffectively “hidden” from view and a substantially seamless display canbe created. In another embodiment, two or more regions of a lightemitting region in a light emitting device overlap each other in thethickness direction such that there is a continuous light emittingregion such as in the case of a cylindrical display or a displaywrapping around two or more sides of a rectangular solid.

In another embodiment, the backlight or frontlight is incorporated intoa portable device such as a cellphone, smartphone, pda, laptop, tabletcomputer, pad computer (such as those from Apple Inc.), ebook, e-reader,or other computing device.

Point of Purchase Display

In one embodiment, a light emitting point of purchase (POP) displaycomprises a film-based lightguide, coupling lightguides, and a lightinput coupler. In another embodiment, the point of purchase display is ashelving system with tags, indicators, indicia, graphics, or othermedia. In another embodiment, the POP display comprises a light emittingdevice electrically connected to a motion sensor. In one embodiment, thelight emitting device is integrated into the POP display such that oneor more regions of the POP display have light emitting indicia (such asa logo, graphic, text, symbol, or picture). In another embodiment, thelightguide has one or more substantially transparent regions and isdisposed in front of a region of the point of purchase display. Forexample, in one embodiment, a POP display comprises a printed cardboardregion with a substantially transparent lightguide disposed above it. Inthis embodiment, the red printed cardboard region is visible through thelightguide when the light emitting device is not emitting light and isvisible in non-light emitting regions of the lightguide when the lightemitting device is emitting light. In one embodiment, the lightguide isdisposed over text regions, graphic regions, uniform colored regions(red or white background for example) or other printed or unprintedregions of the display. In one embodiment, the light emitting region isused to enhance the printed region. For example, in one embodiment, thelight emitting region emits red light in the form of indicia spelling“SALE” and is disposed above a similar size and shape printed region ofthe POP display spelling “SALE”. In another embodiment, the lightemitting region emits light that at least one selected from the group:enhances edges, outlines shapes or printed indicia, and indicates aparticular product within or region of the POP display. In anotherembodiment, the light emitting region of a lightguide in a first outputregion is disposed above a printed region of a display or sign that hasa diffuse reflectance less than one selected from the group: 60%, 50%,40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5%. For example, in one embodiment, a lightemitting device comprises a white light emitting region on a lightguideabove a black printed region such that the luminance contrast ratio ofthe light emitting region is high.

In another embodiment, a POP display comprises a light emitting devicewherein the light emitting region of the lightguide is disposed behind aregion of the display. In one embodiment, the light emitting region isdisposed behind a printed graphic, logo, uniform, patterned or othervisible region of the display and the light emitting region indicia orpattern has at least one selected from the group: high luminancecontrast ratio, high color contrast, and both a high luminance contrastratio and high color contrast. In order for a lightguide to be visiblethrough a layer of the POP display, the layer must have transmittancesufficient for the light to transmit through the layer such that thelight emitting region has a sufficiently high luminance contrast ratioor color contrast. In one embodiment, a layer or region of a POP displaycomprising a light emitting device is disposed to receive light from thelight from the light emitting region and transmit a portion of the lightthrough the layer or region and the layer or region has an ASTM D1003version 07e1 luminous transmittance greater than one selected from thegroup: 2%, 5%, 10%, 20%, and 50%. In another embodiment, theaforementioned layer or region of the POP display has an averagetransmittance for the wavelength of the light emitted from the lightemitting region greater than one selected from the group: 2%, 5%, 10%,20%, and 50%.

In one embodiment, the POP display comprises and is powered by one ormore selected from the group: batteries, fuel cell, wired AC power froman AC cord, DC power from a driver, or photovoltaic power from aphotovoltaic cell. In another embodiment of this invention, the POPdisplay comprises a digital device reader that reads a device insertedinto the POP display. In another embodiment, the POP display uses theinformation derived from a digital device by the digital device readerto determine one or more selected from the group: authenticity of theproduct, authenticity of the POP display, authenticity of the user,determine the illumination color for the display, determine the on/offcycle for one or more colors of the display, determine the time periodduration for the light source to be on/off (duration of sale items ordaytime hours that the store is open for example), and determine otheruser or manufacturer information related to the light emittingproperties and functionality of the POP display. In one embodiment, thedigital device comprises one or more selected from the group: microchip,microprocessor, microcontroller, integrated circuit, computer circuit,memory (flash memory, for example), a computer, a digital storage device(memory, flash memory, hard drive, CDROM, DVD DROM, etc.), radiofrequency tag, and an electronic information carrying device. Forexample, in one embodiment, the POP display comprises a radio frequencyreader and an RF tag is disposed near the reader such that POP displayreads the information from the RF tag and the light output appropriatelymodified. In this embodiment, the product manufacture could send theappropriate RF ID tag to illuminate a certain part of the display (theregion of the display comprising the indicia reading “20% off” forexample) rather than another region of the display (the region thatreads “10% OFF” for example). In another embodiment, the POP displaycomprises a radio frequency transceiver that allows the display tocommunicate with a remote server to determine the optical output for thedisplay. For example, in one embodiment, the POP display comprises amicrocontroller and an IEEE 802.11 wireless radio that communicates witha server to determine the correct light output for a particular productat a particular location and time.

Pop Display Provides Product Illumination

In one embodiment, a POP display comprises a light emitting devicewherein a lightguide distributes light from a light input coupler toprovide illumination to one or more regions designed to hold products.In another embodiment, the POP display comprises a light emitting devicewherein a lightguide distributes light from a light input coupler toprovide illumination to one or more products within the POP display. Forexample, in one embodiment, a POP display comprises a light emittingdevice comprising a light input coupler wherein light from an LED isdirected into the input ends of an array of coupling lightguides. Thelight propagates within the coupling lightguides and into a lightguideregion. The lightguide region comprises light emitting regions disposedproximate the products (such as the underside of a shelf above productswhere the light emitting region directs light down toward the products).In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises one or more light emittingregions for illuminating more than one product or area. In anotherembodiment, the lightguide region comprises a substantially linearregion disposed to illuminate a linear array of products. For example,the light emitting region could be in the shape of a long thinrectangular “line” of light on the underside of a shelf emitting lightdownwards toward a horizontal array of products. In this embodiment, theshelf may be substantially opaque such that the line of light is notdirectly visible under normal POP display viewing situations. In anotherembodiment, the light emitting region of a lightguide region of afilm-based lightguide of a light emitting POP display is disposedvertically along a vertical structure of a POP display such that the“line” of light from the long thin rectangular light emitting regionilluminates the outer front surfaces of a vertical array of products. Inone embodiment, the POP display comprises one, two, three, or moreseparate light emitting devices to provide light for at least oneselected from the group: light emitting indicia, illumination of theproducts or region near the products, and distributing light into theproducts. For example, in one embodiment, the POP display comprises alight emitting device for illuminating the products and an additionallight emitting device for providing light emitting indicia or graphics.In another example, a light emitting device comprises a light source andan array of coupling lightguides that transmit light to first and secondlightguide regions that provide product illumination and light emittingindicia, respectively. In another embodiment, a POP display comprises asensor that detects the presence or absence of one or more products. Byusing a sensor, such as a photocell or mechanical switch, power can bereduced and saved when there are no products. For example, in oneembodiment, a POP display comprises a mechanical switch at the back ofthe display with slightly angled shelves. Any product in the displaywould slide to the back and press against the switch, thus indicatingthat the light source for the light emitting POP display should beturned on. In another embodiment, a photodetector at the back of the POPdisplay is designed to turn on the light source for the light emittingPOP display when a shadow is detected, signifying that a product isdisposed between an ambient or internal light source and thephotodetector.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is disposed on a viewingside of an object or region of a container (such as a cooler point ofpurchase display) and provides illumination through light exiting aregion substantially longer than it is wide (similar to a strip)disposed along a top edge, bottom edge, side edge, or along the top,bottom, or side of a shelf. For example, in one embodiment, the lightemitting device has a substantially rectangular light emitting stripdisposed along the side frame area in-between doors in a transparentcooler (such as used for displaying drinks in a convenience store). Inthis embodiment, the thin lightguide that is in a narrow strip formprovides illumination of the objects in the cooler without the lightfrom the strip being visible from outside the cooler. In thisembodiment, for example, the light emitting device can be built into thedoor. In another embodiment, for example, the light emitting strip isdisposed along the underside of a shelf and provides illumination of theproducts below the shelf. In a further embodiment, the light emittingstrip is disposed on the top side of a shelf (or disposed underneath thetop surface and emitting light out of the top surface through a shelfwith a transparent region). In the aforementioned embodiment, the lightemitting strip may be disposed parallel to the shelf such that itilluminates a row of products (parallel to the shelf) or it may beoriented at an angle approximately 90 degrees from the shelf, door, orviewing region such that it illuminates a column of products. Forexample, in one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a stripemitting red light disposed in a cooler on a shelf beneath a lighttransmitting acrylic sheet that illuminates a column of red coloredcarbonated beverages in transparent plastic bottles. The red light inthis embodiment provides a glowing red illumination of the bottles.

Light Emitting Device that Distributes Light to be Emitted from Products

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a lightdistribution system that receives light from a light input coupler,transmits the light through a lightguide to light emitting regions,wherein products placed in proximity to the light emitting regionsreceive the light from the light emitting region and emit the light in apredetermined location of the packaging or product. In one embodiment,the product is located on a shelving system, rack, display, platform orpoint of purchase display. For example, in one embodiment, a POP displaycomprises a light input coupler that directs light from a light sourceinto coupling lightguides that are extensions from a lightguide. Thelightguide comprises first light emitting regions disposed along avertical wall of the display. The first light emitting regions aredisposed to emit light in regions corresponding to light receiving inputsurfaces of products vertically stacked in the POP display. In oneembodiment, the products comprise a lightguide with coupling lightguidesdisposed to receive light from the first light emitting region, transmitthe light through a lightguide and exit the lightguide in a lightemitting region of the lightguide comprising light extraction features.For example, when the light emitting device of the previous example isturned on and products stacked vertically in the POP display, lightexits the first light emitting regions and propagates into the productand is emitted from a second light emitting region illuminating the text“NEW AND IMPROVED,” for example. When the product is removed from theshelf, the light emitting region of the product stops emitting light.Thus, in this example, each product can be illuminated without requiringlight sources, electronics, batteries, etc. within each product. Inanother embodiment, the product uses a lightguide and does not comprisecoupling lightguides. For example, the light receiving region of theproduct may comprise a light scattering region disposed behind a lighttransmitting lightguide such that a portion of the light from the lightemitting region of the POP display passes through the lightguide,reaches the scattering region on the back side of the lightguide, isreflectively scattered into the lightguide in a waveguide condition,propagates to light emitting regions disposed on a second side of thepackaging such that light is emitted in the form of light emittingindicia or graphics.

In one embodiment, the light emitting region has a low luminancecontrast ratio or low color contrast when the product is removed fromthe POP display. For example, a light emitting region comprising surfacerelief light extraction features of micro-indentations into atransparent lightguide of sizes less than 100 microns in one or moredirections and spaced more than about 100 microns apart may not bereadily discernable under some illumination conditions and the print orpackaging below the light emitting region (looking through thelightguide) using ambient light is readily discernable or sufficientlyuniform. In this example, when light is input into the lightguide of theproduct, a portion of the light exits the light emitting region suchthat an image, logo, indicia, graphic or other pattern is visible andwhen the product is removed from the POP display it disappears. Inanother embodiment, the color of the light extraction feature in thelight emitting region is substantially the same as the region beneaththe feature. For example, a red ink light extraction feature disposed onthe product side of a lightguide in a light emitting region disposed infront of a red region of the packaging will maintain the red appearancewhen illuminated with ambient light when removed from the POP display.

In another embodiment, a shelf (such as a grocery store shelf) compriseslight emitting regions on the top side of the shelf such that whenproducts are disposed on top of the light emitting regions, the products“lights up” (have light emitting regions) or have light emitting indiciaor graphic regions. When the product is removed from the shelf, theproduct does not receive light from the first light emitting region andthe light emitting from the product is reduced or eliminated. In anotherembodiment, a portion of the ambient light is reflected from the packagein the light emitting region or ambient light is transmitted through thelightguide in the product to provide illumination to indicia orgraphics.

In one embodiment, the product further comprises a light output windowdisposed to permit a portion of the incident light to propagate into asecond product. For example, in the preceding example, a product stackedon another product would not directly receive light from the lightemitting regions on the shelf below. In another embodiment, the productcomprises at least one selected from the group: a lightguide, couplinglightguide, cavity, hole, or light transmitting optical element thatpermits or directs light from one light receiving region of the productto a light transmitting region of the product such that when a secondproduct is disposed and aligned upon the first product, the secondproduct emits light through second light emitting regions or indicia.

Distributed Illumination System

In one embodiment, a distributed illumination system comprises a lightemitting device comprising at least one light output coupler opticallycoupled to a distribution lightguide in light transmitting regions. Inone embodiment, the light output coupler is one or more selected fromthe group: lightguides, optical elements, light emitting regions, andcoupling lightguides. For example, in one embodiment, a distributedillumination system comprises a light source disposed to couple lightinto an array of coupling lightguides that are extensions of a long thinstrip film-based distribution lightguide. The light propagates along thelength of the lightguide film and is coupled out of the lightguide inlight transmitting regions where the film is optically coupled to lightreceiving regions of a light output coupler lightguide film. Lightpropagates through the light output coupler lightguide film and isextracted by light extraction features in a light emitting region of thelight output coupler lightguide film.

Light Output Coupler

More than one light output coupler may be used to couple light out ofthe lightguide at various locations along the lightguide. In oneembodiment, a first portion of the light incident on the light outputcoupler is specularly reflected or transmitted such that it does notexit the light output coupler at the next interface. By specularlyreflecting or transmitting a first portion of light, that light maycontinue to propagate within the light output coupler without beingextracted within or near the light receiving region. For example, in oneembodiment, the light output coupler is a film-based lightguide disposedto receive a first portion of light from the lightguide in a lightreceiving region and transmit it to light extraction feature in a secondregion further along the light output coupler from the light receivingregion. In one embodiment, a light output coupler directs light awayfrom the light transmitting region of the lightguide and the lightemitting region of the light output coupler is larger than the lighttransmitting region. Thus, in this example, the light output coupler isable to extract a portion of light from the lightguide and emit thelight in a larger light emitting area than the area that the lightoutput coupler is in contact with the lightguide. In another embodiment,the cross-sectional light flux density within the lightguide (measuredperpendicular to the optical axis of the light propagating within thelightguide in Lumens/mm′) is greater than the flux density of the lightemitting region area comprising the light extraction features. Inanother embodiment, ratio of the lightguide light flux density to lightemitting area light flux density is greater than one selected from thegroup: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 40, and 100.

Removable Cladding Region

In one embodiment, the distributed illumination system comprises acladding region optically coupled to the lightguide that may beremovable or repositionable. In another embodiment, the cladding may beseparated from the lightguide in a light transmitting region and a lightoutput coupler may be disposed in optical contact within the lighttransmitting region. For example, in one embodiment, a distributedillumination system comprises a light source disposed to couple lightinto an array of coupling lightguides that are extensions of a long thinstrip film-based lightguide. The light propagates along the length ofthe distribution lightguide film and substantially remains in thelightguide in a region beneath the cladding region. The cladding regionis removed, exposing a light transmitting region of the core region. Alight output coupler is optically coupled to the lightguide at the lighttransmitting region such that a portion of light within the lightguideis coupled out of the lightguide into the light transmitting region. Inthis embodiment, light propagates through the light output couplerlightguide film and is extracted by light extraction features in a lightemitting region of the light output coupler lightguide film. In anotherembodiment, the cladding region is a flap comprising a tab that allowsit to be easily pulled away from the lightguide while remainingphysically coupled to the distributed illumination system such that alight output coupler may be optically coupled to the lightguide. Forexample, the light output coupler could be optically coupled to thelightguide by pressing with one's finger a tacky film-based light outputcoupler onto the core region of the lightguide film). In a furtherembodiment, the flap is laid back onto the light output coupler after itis optically coupled to the light transmitting region on thedistribution lightguide. When there is a desire to replace or change thelight output coupler, the light output coupler may be removed and theold or a new cladding region may be re-applied, adhered or otherwiseoptically coupled to the lightguide.

In another embodiment, the lightguide is a tacky film, such as asilicone film, and the cladding layer is peeled away from the lightguidesuch that it is not physically coupled to the distributed illuminationsystem. The tacky film, in this embodiment, helps hold on the claddingregion and promotes adhesion of the light output coupler to thelightguide or a new or the same cladding region subsequent to removal ofthe light output coupler.

Signs and Window Displays

In another embodiment, a light emitting device is used as an overlaywith indicia that can be illuminated. In one embodiment, the lightguideregion has a low degree of visibility in the off-state, and an in theon-state can be clearly seen as illuminated indicia. For example, thelightguide region may be printed with light scattering dots toilluminate and display indicia such as “Warning,” “Exit,” “Sale,” “EnemyAircraft Detected,” “Open,” “Closed,” “Merry Christmas,” etc. Thelightguide region may be disposed on the viewing side of a display (suchas a liquid crystal display, plasma display, projection display, etc.)or it may be placed on a store or home window, on a table surface, aroad sign, on a vehicle or air/water/land craft exterior or window, overor inside a transparent, translucent, or opaque object, on a door,stairs, in a hallway, or within a doormat, etc. The indicia may also beicons, logos, images, or other representations such as a cartoon-likedrawing of Santa Claus, a brand logo such as the Nike “Swoosh”, a photoof a beach scene, a dithered photo of the face of a person, etc. Theindicia may be full-color, monochrome, comprise mixtures of colored andmonochrome regions, and may be layered or employ phosphors, dyes, inksor pigments to achieve colors.

By using a lightguide film which is substantially not visible in theoff-state, the display, sign, or light emitting device can be employedin more places without substantially interfering with appearance of theobject on which it is disposed. In another embodiment, the lightemitting device provides illumination of a space wherein the regionwhich emits light in the on-state is not readily discernable in theoff-state. This, for example, can provide thin light fixtures orillumination devices that are substantially only visible in theon-state. For example, vehicle tail lights, seasonal window filmdisplays, ceiling mounted light fixtures, lamps, closed signs, roadhazard signs, danger/warning signs, etc. may be substantially invisiblein the off-state. In some situations, this enables the signs to beposted and only turned on when needed and can reduce delays incurred dueto the installation time required. In another embodiment, the lightemitting device is a light fixture which appears to be the color of thebackground surface upon which it is place upon in the off-state. Inanother embodiment, the light emitting area of the light fixture issubstantially black or light absorbing in the off-state. Such displaysare useful in submarines or other aircraft under NVIS illuminationconditions.

In a further embodiment, the lightguide film comprises a cladding regiondisposed between the core layer and a light absorbing layer. Forexample, the light redirected by the light extraction features intoangles less than the critical angle between the core layer and thecladding layer may be at an angle that remains within a lightguidecondition of a window-air interface when the lightguide is opticallycoupled to a window. In this example, the light will remain trappedwithin the window and lightguide film until it is absorbed orre-directed out of the lightguide. Scratches, fingerprints, and otherblemishes on the window may be illuminated by this light and the lightredirected out of the window causing visible artifacts. In oneembodiment, a light absorbing coating, layer or region is disposedbetween a cladding layer and the window and substantially absorbs thelight through the multiple TIR reflections and reduces the visibility ofthis artifact. In another embodiment, the light absorbing region,coating, or layer has an average specular light transmission (includingspecular reflections) for the wavelength range of at least one lightsource for the light emitting device less than one selected from thegroup: 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, and 65%. In one embodiment, placing the lightabsorbing region on the opposite side of the cladding region than thecore region (and by not placing the light absorbing material inside thecladding region), only the light passing through the cladding layer willreach the light absorbing region. In the previous embodiment, when thelightguide is optically coupled to a window, the light that will exitthe window only passes through the light absorbing layer once while thelight trapped within the glass will pass through many times and willhave a greater chance of being significantly reduced in intensity beforereaching a light extracting artifact (scratch, fingerprint, etc.) on thewindow. In another embodiment, the lightguide has an average specularlight transmission (including specular reflections) for the wavelengthrange of at least one light source for the light emitting device lessthan one selected from the group: 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, and 65%.

Optically Coupling Light into the Window

In one embodiment, a lightguide or light output coupling element isoptically coupled to a glass or plastic window such that light iscoupled into the window and propagates within the window in a totalinternal reflection condition. By coupling light into a window, one canilluminate frosted or etched glass, films disposed on the window, orembossed plastic patterns such as logos or decoration on the window. Inone embodiment, the light coupled into the window is extracted by rain,water, or condensation on the window effectively forming lenses toprovide rain or weather indication or an aesthetic luminous effect. Inanother embodiment, light from a light source is coupled into a windowfrom a light output coupler or lightguide optically coupled to thewindow and a light extraction region or film is optically coupled to thewindow such that light escapes the window in the region of the lightextraction region. In the previous embodiment, the window is functioningas the core region of a lightguide. In one embodiment, the window haswavelength dependent absorption properties (such as absorbing red lightmore than blue light) and the output of the light from the lightguide orlight output coupler compensates for the absorption in order to achievea desired color such as white. For example, in one embodiment, the lightfrom the lightguide comprises more red light output than blue lightoutput to compensate for the green absorption in a soda-lime glasswindow.

Lightguide Adjacent to a Window

In one embodiment, the lightguide film is substantially separated fromthe window by an air gap. In another embodiment, the light extractionfeatures in the lightguide film do not redirect light into an anglewithin the window greater than the critical angle of the window(typically angles greater than about 42 degrees from the surfacenormal). In one embodiment, the lightguide film is held in place bystandoffs or physically coupling the lightguide, light input coupler,housing or other element of the light emitting device to the window,frame, or other element disposed in proximity to the window. In anotherembodiment, the lightguide is disposed proximate the window and issupported by one or more selected from the group: a stand, a hangingmechanism to a wall or ceiling, and a mount to a wall or ceiling.

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light source,coupling lightguides, a lightguide comprising a light emitting region,and a method for physically coupling the lightguide to a window orwindow frame. For example, the lightguide may comprise an adhesivematerial (such as a “static cling” PVC film or silicone rubber film)disposed on one side of a core region of a lightguide such that thelight emitting device may be laminated (by hand or with the assistanceof a roller and/or application fluids, for example) to a window suchthat the light emitting device supports its own weight. In thisembodiment, the region of the lightguide not emitting light may besubstantially transparent and the light emitting region may besubstantially transparent, translucent, or partially transparent whenthe light source is turned off. In one embodiment, the light inputcoupler is disposed at the lower end of a lightguide such that the forcedoes not substantially pull the lightguide away from the window. Inanother embodiment, the adhesion layer is a cladding layer with arefractive index lower than the core layer and the lightguide furthercomprises a cladding layer on the opposite side of the core layer. Inanother embodiment, the light emitting device may be disposed on awindow sill or other supporting structure with the lightguide physicallycoupled to or disposed near the window. In another embodiment, one ormore cladding layers of the lightguide comprises a protective coatingsuch as a hardcoating wherein the pencil hardness of the protectivecoating is greater than one selected from the group: 8H, 7H, 6H, 5H, 4H,3H, and 2H. In a further embodiment, the lightguide comprises an ammoniaresistant coating such that the coating does not show evidence ofcrazing or whitening after 5 hours of exposure to 1% ammonium hydroxideor 3% isopropyl alcohol. In a further embodiment, the lightguidecomprises a tab region or other extended region that physicallydecouples the lightguide from a window when pulled.

In one embodiment, the lightguide is physically and optically coupled toa window (glass or plastic) and the transmittance through asubstantially non-light emitting region of the lightguide is greaterthan one selected from the group: 70%, 80%, 86%, 88%, 90% and 92%.Optically coupling the lightguide to the window can reduce orsubstantially eliminate the surface reflection from the innerlightguide-air and air window interfaces. This reduces the overallvisibility of the lightguide film and its light extraction features (theclose proximity required for optical coupling also reduces extraneousmultiple reflections).

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises one or moresuction cups that physically couple the device to a substantiallynon-porous surface. For example, in one embodiment, a light inputcoupler disposed on the lower edge of a lightguide comprises suctioncups that adhere the light input coupler to a window and the lightguidefilm has a low peel-strength adhesive, material, or region disposed tophysically couple the lightguide film to a non-porous surface such as awindow. In another embodiment, the lightguide film comprises holesthrough which portions of a suction cup or a hook or extension thereofmay pass through such that the lightguide film is supported vertically.Other mechanical means such as latches, fasteners, hook and loopfasteners (using adhesive to bond the hook to the glass and the loop tothe light input coupler, for example) may be used to fasten or couplethe light emitting device or a component thereof (such as thelightguide) to a window or a substantially non-porous surface.

In another embodiment, a kit comprises a light emitting device with anadhesive film or water soluble adhesive that will physically andoptically coupled the lightguide to a glass window. In a furtherembodiment, the kit comprises a roller suitable for moving anapplication liquid in-between the lightguide and a window, thus removingair bubbles and spreading the adhesive.

Other Applications and Functionality of the Light Emitting Device

Since embodiments enable inexpensive coupling into thin-films, there aremany general illumination and backlighting applications. The firstexample is general home and office lighting using roll-out films onwalls or ceiling. Beyond that, the film can bend to shape to non-planarshapes for general illumination. Additionally, it can be used as thebacklight or frontlight in the many thin displays that have been or arebeing developed. For example, LCD and E-ink thin-film displays may beimproved using a thin back-lighting film or thin front-lighting film;Handheld devices with flexible and scrollable displays are beingdeveloped and they need an efficient, low-cost method for getting lightinto the backlighting film. In one embodiment, the light emitting devicecomprises a light input coupler, lightguide, and light source whichprovide illumination for translucent objects or film such as stainedglass windows or signs or displays such as point-of-purchase displays.In one embodiment, the thin film enables the light extraction featuresto be printed such that they overall negligibly scatter light thatpropagates normal to the face of the film. In this embodiment, when thefilm is not illuminated, objects can be seen clearly through the filmwithout significant haze. When placed behind a transparent or partiallytransparent stained glass window, the overall assembly allowslow-scattering transmission of light through the assembly if desired.Furthermore, the flexibility of the film allows for much greaterpositional tolerances and design freedom than traditional platelightguide backlights because the film can be bent and adapted to thevarious stained glass window shapes, sizes and topologies. In thisembodiment, when not illuminated, the stained glass appears as a regularnon-illuminated stained glass window. When illuminated, thestained-glass window glows.

Additional embodiments include light emitting devices wherein thestained-glass window is strictly aesthetic and does not require viewingof objects through it (e.g. cabinet stained glass windows or artdisplays), and the overall see-through clarity of the backlight does notneed to be achieved. In this embodiment, a diffuse or specular reflectorcan be placed behind the film to capture light that illuminates out ofthe film in the direction away from the stained-glass window. Diffusingfilms, light redirecting films, reverse prism films, diffuser films(volumetric, surface relief or a combination thereof) may be disposedbetween the lightguide and the object to be illuminated. Other films maybe used such as other optical films known to be suitable to be usedwithin an LCD backlight.

The light emitting device of one embodiment can be used for backlightingor frontlighting purposes in passive displays, e.g., as a backlight orfrontlight for an illuminated advertising poster, as well as for active(changing) displays such as LCD displays. Suitable displays include, butare not limited to, mobile phone displays, mobile devices, aircraftdisplay, watercraft displays, televisions, monitors, laptops, watches(including one where the band comprises a flexible lightguide which iscapable of illumination or “lighting up” in a predetermined pattern byan LED within the watch or watch band), signs, advertising displays,window signs, transparent displays, automobile displays, electronicdevice displays, and other devices where LCD displays are known to beused.

Some applications generally require compact, low-cost white-lightillumination of consistent brightness and color across the illuminatedarea. It is cost-effective and energy-efficient to mix the light fromred, blue, and green LEDs for this purpose, but color mixing is oftenproblematic. In one embodiment, light from red, blue, and green lightsources is directed into each stack of coupling lightguides/input areasand is sufficiently mixed that it appears as white light when it exitsthe lightguide region of the lightguide. The light sources can begeometrically situated, and adjusted in intensity, to better provideuniform intensities and colors across the lightguide region. A similararrangement can be attained by providing stacked sheets (morespecifically stacked sheet bodies or lightguides) wherein the colors inthe sheets combine to provide white light. Since some displays areprovided on flexible substrates—for example, “E-ink” thin-film displayson printed pages—the sheets provide a means for allowing backlightingwhile maintaining the flexibility of the display's media.

In some embodiments, the light emitting device is a novel LCDbacklighting solution, which includes mixing multiple colors of LEDsinto a single lightguide. In one embodiment, the length and geometry ofthe strips uniformly mixes light into the lightguide region of the filmlightguide without a significant are of light mixing region locatedaround the edge. The enhanced uniformity of the colors can be used for astatic display or a color-sequential LCD and BLU system. One method fora color-sequential system is based on pulsing between red, green, andblue backlight color while synced to the LCD screen pulsing. Moreover, alayered version of red-, green- and blue-lighted films that combine tomake white light is presented. A pixel-based display region can havemultiple pixels that are designated to be red, green or blue. Behind itare three separate film lightguides that each have a separate color oflight coupled to them. Each of the lightguides has light extractionfeatures that match up with the corresponding color of the pixel-baseddisplay. For example, red light is coupled into coupling lightguide andthen into the lightguide or lightguide region and is extracted from thefeature into the red pixel. The film lightguides are considerablythinner than the width of the pixels so that geometrically a highpercentage of the light from a given color goes into its correspondingset of pixels. Ideally, no color filter needs to be used within thepixels, but in case there is cross-talk between pixels, they should beused.

It is also notable that the invention has utility when operated “inreverse”—that is, the light-emitting face(s) of a sheet could be used asa light collector, with the sheet collecting light and transmitting itthrough the coupling lightguides to a photosensitive element. As anexample, sheets in accordance with the invention could collect incominglight and internally reflect it to direct it to a photovoltaic devicefor solar energy collection purposes. Such an arrangement can also beuseful for environmental monitoring sensing purposes, in that the sheetcan detect and collect light across a broad area, and the detector(s) atthe coupling lightguides will then provide a measurement representativeof the entire area. A sheet could perform light collection of thisnature in addition to light emission. For example, in lightingapplications, a sheet might monitor ambient light, and then might beactivated to emit light once twilight or darkness is detected. Usefully,since it is 15 known that LEDs can also be “run in reverse”—that is,they can provide output current/voltage when exposed to light—if LEDsare used as an illumination source when a sheet is used for lightemission, they can also be used as detectors when a sheet is used forlight collection. In one embodiment, the lightguide captures a portionof incident light and directs it to a detector wherein the detector isdesigned to detect a specific wavelength (such as by including abandpass filter, narrowband filter or a diode with a specific bandgapused in reverse). These light detection devices have the advantages ofcollecting a percentage of light over a large area and detecting lightof a specific wavelength is directed toward the film while thefilm/sheet/lightguide/device remains substantially transparent. Thesecan be useful in military operations where one is interested indetecting lasers or light sources (such as used in sighting devices,aiming devices, laser-based weapons, LIDAR or laser based rangingdevices, target designation, target ranging, laser countermeasuredetection, directed energy weapon detection, eye-targeted or dazzlerlaser detection) or infra-red illuminators (that might be used withnight vision goggles).

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light source,light input coupler, and film-based lightguide wherein the lightemitting device is one selected from the group: building mounted sign,freestanding sign, interior sign, wall sign, fascia sign, awning sign,projecting sign, sign band, roof sign, parapet sign, window sign, canopysign, pylon sign, joint tenant sign, monument sign, pole sign, high-risepole sign, directional sign, electronic message center sign, video sign,electronic sign, billboard, electronic billboard, interior directionalsign, interior directory sign, interior regulatory sign, interior mallsign, and interior point-of-purchase sign.

The sheets are also highly useful for use in illuminated signs,graphics, and other displays. For example, the film may be placed onwalls or windows without significantly changing the wall or windowappearance. However, when the sign is illuminated, the image etched intothe film lightguide would become visible. The present invention couldalso be useful for coupling light into the films that sit in front ofsome grocery store freezers as insulation. Lighting applications wherethere is limited space, such as in the ice at hockey rinks may alsorequire plastic film lighting. Since a sheet can be installed on a wallor window without significantly changing its appearance, with thelight-emitting area(s) becoming visible when the light source(s) areactivated, the invention allows displays to be located at areas wheretypical displays would be aesthetically unacceptable (e.g., on windows).The sheets may also be used in situations where space considerations areparamount, e.g., when lighting is desired within the ice of skatingrinks (as discussed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,237,396, which also describesother features and applications that could be utilized with theinvention). The flexibility of the sheets allows them to be used in lieuof the curtains sometimes used for 15 climate containment, e.g., in thefilm curtains that are sometimes used at the fronts of grocery storefreezers to better maintain their internal temperatures. The flexibilityof the sheets also allows their use in displays that move, e.g., inlight emitting flags that may move in the breeze.

Lightguide is Also Sound Emitting Device

In one embodiment, the lightguide is also a thin, flexible, diaphragmwhich may be vibrated by a transducer to emit sound such as disclosed inU.S. Pat. Nos. 6,720,708 and 7,453,186 and U.S. patent application Ser.No. 09/755,895. In one embodiment, the lightguide is a frontlight forlighting a reflective display and the lightguide is also speaker whichemits audio. In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises multiple layersof polymers (such as core lightguide and two cladding layers) whichincrease the rigidity of the lightguide film and provide improvedacoustic performance. In one embodiment, the lightguide has at least oneproperty selected from the group: high light transmittance, low haze,high clarity, and low diffuse reflectance such that the visibility ofthe lightguide or diaphragm is reduced.

Lightguide is Also a Touchscreen

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a touchscreen orthe lightguide is a touchscreen for detecting haptic feedback, contact,proximity, or location of user input by finger or stylus or otherdevice. In one embodiment, the lightguide carries at least one of theillumination or light modified by the input as well as providingfrontlight, backlight, audio, or other functionality. In one embodiment,the lightguide is an optical touchscreen. Optical based touchscreens areknown in the art and in one embodiment, the optical based touchscreen isone disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 11/826,079,12/568,931, or 12/250,108. In another embodiment, the lightguide is asurface acoustic wave based touchscreen such as disclosed in U.S. Pat.Nos. 5,784,054, 6,504,530 or U.S. patent application Ser. No.12/315,690.

Luminance Uniformity of the Backlight, Frontlight, or Light EmittingDevice

In a further embodiment, the luminance of the light emitting device isgreater than one selected from the group: 10, 20, 30, 40 50, 75, 100,200, and 300 Cd/m² at a first angle (such as normal to the film surfacein the light emitting region) when the light source is emitting lightand the light emitting device is in a dark environment. In anotherembodiment, the luminance of the light extracting features is greaterthan one selected from the group: 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 200, and300 Cd/m² at a first angle (such as normal to the film) when the lightsource is emitting light and the light emitting device is in a darkenvironment. In another embodiment, the luminance of the lightextracting features when illuminated by the light input coupler isgreater than one selected from the group: 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75,100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 750, 1000, 1500, 2000, 4000, 6000, 8000, 10000,and 15000 Cd/m² within a first angular range selected from the group:0-10, 0-20, 0-30, 0-40, 0-50, and 0-60 degrees from the normal to thesurface of the film in the light emitting region or region comprisinglight extraction features when the light source is emitting light andthe light emitting device is in a dark environment.

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light source, alight input coupler, and a film-based lightguide wherein the 9-spotspatial luminance uniformity of the light emitting surface of the lightemitting device measured according to VESA Flat Panel DisplayMeasurements Standard version 2.0, Jun. 1, 2001 is greater than oneselected from the group: 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%. In anotherembodiment, a display comprises a spatial light modulator and a lightemitting device comprising a light source, a light input coupler, and afilm-based lightguide wherein the 9-spot spatial luminance uniformity ofthe light reaching the spatial light modulator (measured by disposing awhite reflectance standard surface such as Spectralon by Labsphere Inc.in the location where the spatial light modulator would be located toreceive light from the lightguide and measuring the light reflectingfrom the standard surface in 9-spots according to VESA Flat PanelDisplay Measurements Standard version 2.0, Jun. 1, 2001) is greater thanone selected from the group: 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%. In anotherembodiment, a display comprises a spatial light modulator and a lightemitting device comprising a light source, a light input coupler, and afilm-based lightguide wherein the 9-spot spatial luminance uniformity ofthe display measured according to VESA Flat Panel Display MeasurementsStandard version 2.0, Jun. 1, 2001) is greater than one selected fromthe group: 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%.

Luminance Contrast Ratio of the Light Emitting Region

The luminance contrast ratio of the light emitting region may bemeasured under specific light conditions to ascertain the visibility ofthe light emitting indicia or region. The desired visibility of thelight emitting region (whether emitting light in the on-state or notemitting light in the off-state) may vary depending on the applicationand desired appearance of the light emitting device. The perceivedvisibility of the light emitting region under different ambient lightconditions can be measured by the luminance contrast ratio. Theluminance contrast ratio is the ratio of the luminance of the lightemitting region to the luminance of the neighboring region underspecific ambient light levels. For high ambient light levels, the peakilluminance of the light emitting region and the neighboring region isgreater than 100 lux. For low ambient light levels, the peak illuminanceof the light emitting region and the neighboring region is less than 100lux. For a spot measurement area, the measurement spot size may be from1 mm² to 10 cm², with a typical 1 cm² circular spot measurement. Forlight emitting regions comprising small text font size, for example, thelight emitting region measurement spot size may be 1 mm². For largeemitting regions with a continuous light emitting pattern, the lightemitting region measurement spot size may be, for example, 10 cm² or a 9point average of 1 cm² spot sizes. In one embodiment, the light emittingregion is visibly perceived as a continuous light emitting regionrepresenting text, graphics, logos, a uniform pattern, etc. and iscomprised of smaller light extraction features that are not readilydiscerned without close inspection. In this example, the luminancecontrast ratio may be measured in the perceivable characteristic regionthat represents the logo or perceived pattern. For example, whenstanding in front of a POP display, the text “SALE” may be perceived andupon closer inspection, the bend in the middle region of the “S”comprises a collection of light extraction features extracting lightin-between regions that do not extract light. In this embodiment, theluminance measurement for the light emitting region should have a spotsize less than size of the bend in the middle region of the “S” andlarge enough to encompass at least about 4 or more light extractionfeatures. The luminance contrast ratio in this example is the luminanceof the middle region of the “S” divided by the luminance of thesubstantially non-light emitting region near the “S”.

A high luminance contrast ratio is desired when the sign, graphic, logo,or light emitting region should be perceived over the neighboring areaor region. For example, an exit sign should be perceived when emittinglight in the light emitting indicia forming the text “EXIT” such thatthe sign is readily visible. In some applications, it is desirable thatthe light emitting region have a low luminance contrast ratio when thelight emitting region does not emit light. For example, one may desirethat a cooler door sign be very visible when illuminated, butsubstantially transparent when not illuminated. In another embodiment,the luminance of the light emitting region in ambient light depends onone or more properties selected from the group: the type of the lightextraction features, the reflectance of the light extraction features,the size of the light extraction features, the shape of the lightextraction features, the density of the light extraction features, thethickness of the light extraction features, other films or componentsdisposed in front of the light emitting region, other films orcomponents disposed in behind the light emitting region, the ambientlight illuminance from the front of the light emitting region, and theambient light illuminance from behind the light emitting region. Inanother embodiment, the light emitting region does not require a highluminance contrast ratio in high ambient light environments because itis normally used in low ambient light environments. For example, a signor display in a low ambient light level restaurant does not necessarilyneed a high contrast ratio in a high ambient light environment. Inanother embodiment, the light emitting region is designed to primarilydisplay the light emitting indicia when in low ambient light levelenvironments. For example, an exterior sign painted red may be readilyvisible during the day but needs supplemental lighting (of the redpaint) or light emitting indicia (displaying the same indicia) at nightto be readily seen.

In another embodiment, for example, a low luminance white light emittingindicia region of a substantially transparent lightguide disposed infront of a white region of a POP display may not be very visible in abright ambient light environment, but will be more visible in a very lowambient light environment. In this embodiment, the region of the POPcomprising the light emitting region has a low Luminance Contrast Ratio,On-state, High Ambient Light and a high Luminance Contrast Ratio,On-state, Low Ambient Light. In another embodiment, the light emittingregion has a low luminance contrast ratio in the off-state in low andhigh ambient light levels and has a high luminance contrast ratio in theon-state in low and high ambient light levels.

The luminance contrast ratio needed for a particular task (such asviewing a sign or display) may depend on the ambient environment, theindividual viewing the sign, and the color of the light emitting regionand the neighboring region. In one embodiment, the luminance contrastratio of the light emitting region in the on-state (emitting light inthe region) for a low ambient light level, high ambient light level, orboth is greater than one selected from the group: 1, 2, 5, 10, and 20.In another embodiment, the luminance contrast ratio of the lightemitting region in the off-state (not emitting light in the region) fora low ambient light level, high ambient light level, or both is greaterthan one selected from the group: 2, 5, 10, and 20.

In some applications, the luminance contrast ratio of the light emittingregion may not need to be high. For example, if the light emittingregion serves only to accent or supplement the outline or feature of theprinted indicia it is placed in front of or behind. In a furtherembodiment, the luminance contrast ratio of the light emitting region inthe on-state (emitting light in the region) for a low ambient lightlevel, high ambient light level, or both is less than one selected fromthe group: 2, 5, 10, and 20. In a another embodiment, the luminancecontrast ratio of the light emitting region in the off-state (notemitting light in the region) for a low ambient light level, highambient light level, or both is less than one selected from the group:2, 5, 10, and 20.

Color Contrast of the Light Emitting Region

The contrast of a sign, display or light emitting display is alsodependent on the color of the light emitting region and the neighboringregion. For example, red light emitting indicia on a transparentlightguide may have the same luminance as the green background understandard illuminant A illumination, but the color contrast issignificantly greater. The color contrast of the light emitting region,as defined herein, is the length of the line between the color of thelight emitting region and the neighboring region, Δu′v′, measured on the1976 u′, v′ CIE Uniform Chromaticity Scale when illuminated by anIlluminant A standard illuminant. The measurement spot size for thecolor contrast may be ascertained the same way as described above forthe luminance contrast ratio. The color contrast may be measured underhigh and low ambient light levels as described above for the luminancecontrast ratio. The typical color contrast, Δu′v′, needed to perceivetwo colors adjacent each other is 0.004. However, for some applications,the contrast ratio is desired to be higher to provide increasedvisibility and perception against the background. The color contrast maybe low or high in the off-state and be the opposite in the on-state. Forexample, a light emitting region may be designed to be the same color asthe background by using white ink light extraction features on atransparent lightguide when placed above a white region of a POPdisplay. In this example, when the light emitting region emits lightfrom a red LED, the color contrast of the light emitting region issignificantly higher than when the light emitting region emits whitelight.

In some applications, for example, the color contrast may be desired tobe low in the on state or off state such that the light emitting indiciamatches the background. For example, a POP display may be designed tohave a matching color contrast when on where red light emitting indiciamatch the color of the display in the on-state, and when the lightemitting indicia are turned off, the black background beneath theindicia provides a high color contrast. Similarly, as with the luminancecontrast ratio, the color contrast may be designed to high or low underlow or high ambient light levels depending on the application anddesired visibility in either state under the lighting conditions.

In one embodiment, the color contrast of the light emitting region inthe on-state (emitting light in the region) for a low ambient lightlevel, high ambient light level, or both is greater than one selectedfrom the group: 0.004, 0.01, 0.04, and 0.1. In another embodiment, thecolor contrast of the light emitting region in the off-state (notemitting light in the region) for a low ambient light level, highambient light level, or both is greater than one selected from thegroup: 0.004, 0.01, 0.04, and 0.1. In another embodiment, the colorcontrast of the light emitting region in the on-state (emitting light inthe region) for a low ambient light level, high ambient light level, orboth is less than one selected from the group: 0.004, 0.01, 0.04, and0.1. In another embodiment, the color contrast of the light emittingregion in the off-state (not emitting light in the region) for a lowambient light level, high ambient light level, or both is less than oneselected from the group: 0.004, 0.01, 0.04, and 0.1.

Color Uniformity of the of the Backlight, Frontlight, or Light EmittingDevice

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a light source, alight input coupler, and a film-based lightguide wherein the 9-spotsampled spatial color non-uniformity, Δu′v′, of the light emittingsurface of the light emitting device measured on the 1976 u′, v′ UniformChromaticity Scale as described in VESA Flat Panel Display MeasurementsStandard version 2.0, Jun. 1, 2001 (Appendix 201, page 249) is less thanone selected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 whenmeasured using a spectrometer based spot color meter. In anotherembodiment, a display comprises a spatial light modulator and a lightemitting device comprising a light source, a light input coupler, and afilm-based lightguide wherein the 9-spot sampled spatial colornon-uniformity, Δu′v′, of the of the light reaching the spatial lightmodulator (measured by disposing a white reflectance standard surfacesuch as Spectralon in the location where the spatial light modulatorwould be located to receive light from the lightguide and measuring thecolor of the standard surface on the 1976 u′, v′ Uniform ChromaticityScale as described in VESA Flat Panel Display Measurements Standardversion 2.0, Jun. 1, 2001 (Appendix 201, page 249) is less than oneselected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 when measuredusing a spectrometer based spot color meter. In another embodiment, adisplay comprises a spatial light modulator and a light emitting devicecomprising a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-basedlightguide wherein the 9-spot sampled spatial color non-uniformity,Δu′v′, of the display measured on the 1976 u′, v′ Uniform ChromaticityScale as described in VESA Flat Panel Display Measurements Standardversion 2.0, Jun. 1, 2001 (Appendix 201, page 249) is less than oneselected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 when measuredusing a spectrometer based spot color meter.

Angular Profile of Light Emitting from the Light Emitting Device

In one embodiment, the light emitting from at least one surface of thelight emitting device has an angular full-width at half-maximumintensity (FWHM) less than one selected from the group: 120 degrees, 100degrees, 80 degrees, 60 degrees, 40 degrees, 20 degrees and 10 degrees.In another embodiment, the light emitting from at least one surface ofthe light emitting device, the light emitting region, or a lightextraction feature has an angular full-width at half-maximum intensity(FWHM) greater than one selected from the group: 120 degrees, 100degrees, 80 degrees, 60 degrees, 40 degrees, 20 degrees and 10 degrees.In another embodiment, the light emitting from at least one surface ofthe light emitting device has at least one angular peak of intensitywithin at least one angular range selected from the group: 0-10 degrees,20-30 degrees, 30-40 degrees, 40-50 degrees, 60-70 degrees, 70-80degrees, 80-90 degrees, 40-60 degrees, 30-60 degrees, and 0-80 degreesfrom the normal to the light emitting surface. In another embodiment,the light emitting from at least one surface of the light emittingdevice has two peaks within one or more of the aforementioned angularranges and the light output resembles a “bat-wing” type profile known inthe lighting industry to provide uniform illuminance over apredetermined angular range. In another embodiment, the light emittingdevice emits light from two opposing surfaces within one or more of theaforementioned angular ranges and the light emitting device is oneselected from the group: a backlight illuminating two displays on eitherside of the backlight, a light fixture providing up-lighting anddown-lighting, a frontlight illuminating a display and having lightoutput on the viewing side of the frontlight that has not reflected fromthe modulating components of the reflective spatial light modulator witha peak angle of luminance greater than 40 degrees, 50 degrees, or 60degrees. In another embodiment, the optical axis of the light emittingdevice is within an angular range selected from the group: 0-20, 20-40,40-60, 60-80, 80-100, 100-120, 120-140, 140-160, 160-180, 35-145,45-135, 55-125, 65-115, 75-105, and 85-95 degrees from the normal to alight emitting surface. In a further embodiment, the shape of thelightguide is substantially a tubular and the light substantiallypropagates through the tube in a direction parallel to the longer(length) dimension of the tube and the light exits the tube wherein atleast 70% of the light output flux is contained within an angular rangeof 35 degrees to 145 degrees from the light emitting surface. In afurther embodiment, the light emitting device emits light from a firstsurface and a second surface opposite the first surface wherein thelight flux exiting the first and second surfaces, respectively, ischosen from the group: 5-15% and 85-95%, 15-25% and 75-85%, 25-35% and65-75%, 35-45% and 65-75%, 45-55% and 45-55%. In another embodiment, thefirst light emitting surface emits light in a substantially downwarddirection and the second light emitting surface emits lightsubstantially in an upward direction. In another embodiment, the firstlight emitting surface emits light in a substantially upward directionand the second light emitting surface emits light substantially in adownward direction.

Optical Redundancy

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises couplinglightguides which provide a system for optical redundancy. Opticalredundancy provides for the ability for the device to function atacceptable illuminance uniformity, luminance uniformity, or coloruniformity levels through multiple optical paths from different lightsources that overlap in at least one region. The optical redundancy maybe achieved through stacking lightguides, coupling light from more thanone light source into a light input coupler, or disposing light inputcouplers for the same lightguide film on a plurality of sides of thelightguide (such as on opposite sides of the lightguide). More than onemethod of achieving optical redundancy may be employed, for example, bystacking two or more lightguides that each comprise light input couplersthat are each disposed to receive light from a plurality of lightsources.

Optical redundancy may be used to increase the spatial or angularuniformity (luminance, illuminance, or color), provide a combination ofangular or spatial light output profiles (low angular output from onelightguide and high angular output from a second lightguide, forexample), provide increased luminance levels, provide a backup lightemitting region when component failure causes light from the firstlightguide to fall below specification (such as color uniformity,luminance uniformity, or luminance) in the overlapping region, increasethe color gamut (combining light output from white and red LEDs forexample), or provide color mixing (combining the output from red, green,and blue LEDs for example).

In one embodiment, optical redundancy is used to maintain or reduce theunwanted effects of light source failure or component failure (such asLED driver or a solder joint failure). For example, two lightguides mayeach be coupled to a separate light input coupler with separate lightsources and the lightguides may be stacked in a light output directionand each independently designed with light extraction features toprovide uniform output in a light emitting region. If the LED fails inthe first light input coupler, the second light input coupler may stilloperate and provide uniform light output. Similarly, if the color of thefirst LED within the first light input coupler changes due totemperature or degradation, the effects (color changes such asoff-white) will be less due to the optical redundancy of a stackedsystem.

In another embodiment, the light output from two or more light sourcesare coupled into the light input coupler of a light emitting devicecomprising optical redundancy and the optical redundancy reduces thecolor or luminance binning requirements of the LEDs. In this embodiment,optical redundancy provides for the mixing of light from a plurality oflight sources within a region (such as within the coupling lightguides)such that the color from each source is averaged spatially with eachcoupling lightguide receiving light from each light source and directingit into the lightguide or light mixing region.

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises at least onecoupling lightguide disposed to receive light from at least two lightsources wherein the light from the at least two light sources is mixedwithin a first region of the at least one coupling lightguide and thefirst region is contained within a distance from the light emittingregion of the light emitting device less than one selected from thegroup: 100%, 70%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5% of the largestdimension of the light emitting device output surface or light emittingregion.

In a further embodiment, a light emitting device comprises at least onecoupling lightguide disposed to receive light from at least two lightsources wherein the light from the at least two light sources is mixedover the length of the at least one coupling lightguide and the lightmixing region and the combined length of the at least one couplinglightguide and the light mixing region in the direction of propagationof light exiting the coupling lightguide is greater than one selectedfrom the group: 100%, 70%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5% of thelargest dimension of the light emitting device output surface or lightemitting region.

In a further embodiment, a light emitting device comprising a pluralityof light sources comprises optical redundancy and the device may bedimmed by adjusting the light output of one or more LEDs while leavingthe output driving pattern of one or more LEDs substantially constant.For example, a light emitting device comprising a first string of LEDsL1, L2, and L3 connected in an electrical series and optically couplinglight into light input couplers LIC1, LIC2, and LIC3, respectively, andfurther comprising a second string of LEDs L4, L5, and L6 connected inan electrical series and optically coupling light into light inputcouplers LIC1, LIC2, and LIC3, respectively, can be uniformly dimmed(dimmed while maintaining spatial luminance uniformity of the lightemitting surface, for example) from, for example 50% to 100% outputluminance, by adjusting the current to the second string of LEDs.Similarly, the color of the light output can be uniformly adjusted byincreasing or decreasing the electrical current to the second stringwhen the color of the light output of the second string is differentthan the color output of the first string. Similarly, three or morestrings may be controlled independently to provide optical redundancy oruniform adjustment of the luminance or color. Three or more groups withdifferent colors (red, green, and blue, for example) may be adjustedindependently to vary the output color while providing spatial coloruniformity.

Uniformity Maintenance

In one embodiment, the first color difference Δu′v′₁ of two lightsources disposed to couple light into a light input coupler is greaterthan the spatial color non-uniformity Δu′v′₂ of at least one selectedfrom the group: the 9-spot sampled color non-uniformity of the lightemitting region disposed to receive light from the light input coupler,the light output surface of the light emitting device, and the lightexiting the coupling lightguides.

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first groupof light sources comprising at least one light source and a second groupof light sources comprising at least one light source wherein at leastone light source from the first group and at least one light source fromthe second group couple light into the same light input coupler and the9-spot spatial color non-uniformity of the light emitting region orlight output surface when receiving light from both the first group oflight sources and the second group of light sources is less than oneselected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 when measuredusing a spectrometer based spot color meter, and the 9-spot spatialcolor non-uniformity of the light emitting region or light outputsurface when receiving light from only the first group of light sourcesis less than one selected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and0.004. In another embodiment, the 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity ofthe light emitting region or light output surface when receiving lightfrom both the first group of light sources and the second group of lightsources is less than 0.05 and the 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity ofthe light emitting region or light output surface when receiving lightfrom only the first group of light sources is less than 0.05. In afurther embodiment, the 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity of the lightemitting region or light output surface when receiving light from boththe first group of light sources and the second group of light sourcesis less than 0.05 and the 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity of thelight emitting region or light output surface when receiving light fromonly the first group of light sources is less than 0.1

In another embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a first groupof light sources comprising at least one light source and a second groupof light sources comprising at least one light source wherein at leastone light source from the first group and at least one light source fromthe second group couple light into the same light input coupler and the9-spot spatial luminance uniformity of the light emitting region orlight output surface when receiving light from both the first group oflight sources and the second group of light sources is greater than oneselected from the group: 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90% and the 9-spotspatial luminance uniformity of the light emitting region or lightoutput surface when receiving light from only the first group of lightsources is greater than one selected from the group: 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%,and 90%. In another embodiment, the 9-spot spatial luminance uniformityof the light emitting region or light output surface when receivinglight from both the first group of light sources and the second group oflight sources is greater than 70% and the 9-spot spatial luminanceuniformity of the light emitting region or light output surface whenreceiving light from only the first group of light sources is greaterthan 70%. In a further embodiment, the 9-spot spatial luminanceuniformity of the light emitting region or light output surface whenreceiving light from both the first group of light sources and thesecond group of light sources is greater than 80% and the 9-spot spatialluminance uniformity of the light emitting region or light outputsurface when receiving light from only the first group of light sourcesis greater than 70%.

Stacked Lightguides

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises at least one filmlightguide or lightguide region disposed to receive and transmit lightfrom a second film lightguide or lightguide region such that the lightfrom the second lightguide improves the luminance uniformity, improvesthe illuminance uniformity, improves the color uniformity, increases theluminance of the light emitting region, or provides a back-up lightemitting region when component failure causes light from the firstlightguide to fall below specification (such as color uniformity,luminance uniformity, or luminance) in the overlapping region.

Plurality of Light Sources Coupling into Light Input Coupler

In another embodiment, a plurality of light sources are disposed tocouple light into a light input coupler such that a portion of the lightfrom the plurality of light sources is coupled into at least onecoupling lightguide such that the light output is combined. By combiningthe light output from a plurality of light sources within the couplinglightguides, the light is “mixed” within the coupling lightguides andthe output is more uniform in color, luminance, or both. For example,two white LEDs disposed adjacent a light input surface of a collectionof coupling lightguides within a light input coupler can havesubstantially the same spatial luminance or color uniformity in thelight emitting region if one of the light sources fails. In anotherembodiment, light sources emitting light of two different colors aredisposed to couple light into the same light input coupler. The lightinput coupler may provide the mixing within the coupling lightguides,and furthermore, the coupling lightguides provide optical redundancy incase one light source fails. The optical redundancy can improve thecolor uniformity when light sources of two or more colors are coupledinto the same light input coupler. For example, three white LEDs, eachwith different color temperatures, may be coupled into the same lightinput coupler and if one of the light LEDs fails, then the light outputfrom the other two LEDs is still mixed and provides more uniformity thansingle LEDs with different color outputs coupled into two adjacent lightinput couplers. In one embodiment, a light source comprises at least oneselected from the group: 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 LED chips disposedin an array or arrangement to couple light into a single light inputcoupler. In one embodiment, a light source comprises at least oneselected from the group: 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 LED chips disposedin an array or arrangement to couple light into more than one lightinput coupler. In a further embodiment, a light source disposed tocouple light into a light input coupler comprises a plurality of LEDchips with a light emitting surface area with a light emitting dimensionless than one selected from the group: 0.25 millimeters, 0.3millimeters, 0.5 millimeters, 0.7 millimeters, 1 millimeter, 1.25millimeters, 1.5 millimeters, 2 millimeters and 3 millimeters.

Light Input Couplers on Different Sides of the Lightguide

In another embodiment, a plurality of light input couplers are disposedon two or more edge regions of a lightguide wherein the optical axes ofthe light exiting the coupling lightguides are oriented at an anglegreater than 0 degrees to each other. In a further embodiment, the lightinput couplers are disposed on opposite or adjacent edges or sides ofthe lightguide. In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises aplurality of light input couplers disposed on two or more edge regionsof a lightguide and the luminance or color uniformity of the lightemitting region is substantially the same when the light output of thefirst light input coupler is increased or decreased relative to thelight output of the second light input coupler. In one embodiment, thelight extraction features are disposed within the light emitting regionsuch that the spatial luminance uniformity is greater than 70% whenreceiving light from only the first light input coupler and receivinglight from the first and second light input couplers. In anotherembodiment, the light extraction features are disposed within the lightemitting region such that the 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity isless than 0.01 when receiving light from only the first light inputcoupler and receiving light from the first and second light inputcouplers.

Security Features of the Light Emitting Device

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a securityfeatures disposed on one or more components selected from the group:lightguide, light input coupler, cartridge, housing, replaceable orremovable component, light extraction region, housing, alignment guide,relative position maintaining element, electrical component, lightsource module, optical element, thermal transfer element, and couplinglightguides. In another embodiment, the security element providesverification information for the authenticity of one or more components.In one embodiment, the security feature is a printed pattern on anelement. For example, a lightguide may comprise very small dots disposedin a specific pattern that can be read by a detector that providesauthenticity of the lightguide and the illumination information for theoptical output (color, time on/off, pulse frequency/duration, length oftime for the lightguide to be authorized, etc.). In another embodiment,the security feature is a digital device that comprises one or moreselected from the group: microchip, microprocessor, microcontroller,integrated circuit, computer circuit, memory (flash memory, forexample), a computer, a digital storage device (memory, flash memory,hard drive, CDROM, DVD DROM, etc.), radio frequency tag, and anelectronic information carrying device.

Wavelength Conversion Material

In a further embodiment, the security feature comprises a layer orcoating comprising a wavelength conversion material disposed to receivelight from the light source in the light emitting device at a firstwavelength and emit light at a second wavelength different than thefirst. For example, in one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a regionwith an ink pattern comprising the dye indotricarbocyanine and the lightinput coupler comprises an infra-red LED configured as a photodetectorto receive IR light emitted from the dye due to the excitation from ared visible light emitting LED in the light input coupler. In oneembodiment, a portion of the red light emitted from the red LEDpropagates through a coupling lightguides, reaches the dye andfluoresces such that light propagates in the coupling lightguide back tothe input surface and reaches the IR LED configured as an infraredphotodetector. In another embodiment, the dye is disposed on a portionof the core region or cladding region of at least one couplinglightguide and an infra-red light absorbing dye, ink, or pigment isdisposed on the core or cladding region of the coupling lightguide inthe optical path between the region comprising the dye and the lightemitting region. In this embodiment, the visible light that might excitethe dye, or infrared light received by the lightguide externally wouldbe substantially absorbed before reaching the IR LED. In one embodiment,an IR absorbing dye that is substantially transparent to visible lightsuch as BASF Lumogen IR 765 is used to absorb ambient IR light. Inanother embodiment, the IR fluorescing dye is disposed on the claddingof a coupling lightguide and the coupling lightguide or lightguidecomprises a light absorbing region between the IR fluorescing dye andthe light emitting region that absorbs at least 50% of the light at thepeak excitation wavelength of the dye or at least 50% of the light atthe peak sensitivity of the IR LED configured as a photodetector. Forexample, in the previous embodiment, a light absorbing ink that absorbsgreater than 50% of visible and IR light at the peak wavelength ofsensitivity of the IR LED may be printed in a linear band on thelightguide within the housing after the coupling lightguides and beforethe light emitting region. In this example, the light absorbing ink alsoabsorbs unwanted light that is coupled into the cladding region of thecoupling lightguides which can be extracted due to fingerprints orscratches in the cladding layer in the lightguide and cause undesirablelight emitting patterns or noise.

In another embodiment, the wavelength conversion material is disposed onor within a region or component of the light emitting device selectedfrom the group: lateral edge, light input edge, light input surface,cladding region, core region, coupling lightguide, light mixing region,light emitting region, light extraction feature, coating or regionbetween two regions of the lightguide, tab region, alignment region,relative position maintaining element, housing, light source, lightinput coupler, alignment guide, cavity region, light turning opticalelement, light collimating optical element, light coupling opticalelement, guide device, removable or replaceable cartridge or component,light extraction region, low contact area cover, thermal transferelement, other optical film, adhesive, and light absorbing region orlayer.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device uses an IRphotodetector to detect the presence of the IR fluorescing dye duringone or more selected from the group: device startup, during regularintervals (every minute for example), irregular intervals (3 times a dayat random time for example), when the light source is turned on, whenthe cartridge or lightguide is inserted, and when the replaceable orremovable element is re-inserted. In a further embodiment, the lightemitting device comprises a light source with a wavelength less thanabout 420 nm or greater than about 680 nm and a photodetector disposedto detect light. For example, in one embodiment, the light input couplercomprises an IR LED and a region of a coupling lightguide comprises anIR reflecting pigment and an IR light absorbing region is disposedbetween the IR reflecting pigment and the light emitting region. In thisembodiment, the IR LED can be programmed to pulse at a specific time anda portion of the light propagating through the coupling lightguidesreaches the IR light reflecting pigment and is reflected back toward thelight input coupler and reaches the IR light photodetector. The IR lightintensity reaching the IR photodetector may be required to be above aspecific level (indicating that enough light reflected from within thelightguide from the IR reflecting pigment) such that the lightguide isauthorized. In another embodiment, the light received by the IRphotodetector is compared with the background IR light intensity (whenthe IR LED is off and one, none, or more than one visible light LEDs areturned on depending on the configuration) and if the intensity ratio isabove a specific number (such as 2, 5, 10, 20, etc.) then the film isconsidered authorized.

Method of Manufacturing Light Input/Output Coupler

In one embodiment, the lightguide and light input or output coupler areformed from a light transmitting film by creating segments of the filmcorresponding to the coupling lightguides and translating and bendingthe segments such that a plurality of segments overlap. In a furtherembodiment, the input surfaces of the coupling lightguides are arrangedto create a collective light input surface by translation of thecoupling lightguides to create at least one bend or fold.

In another embodiment, a method of manufacturing a lightguide and lightinput coupler comprising a light transmitting film with a lightguideregion continuously coupled to each coupling lightguide in an array ofcoupling lightguides, said array of coupling lightguides comprising afirst linear fold region and a second linear fold region, comprises thesteps: (a) increasing the distance between the first linear fold regionand the second linear fold region of the array of coupling lightguidesin a direction perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface atthe first linear fold region; (b) decreasing the distance between thefirst linear fold region and the second linear fold region of the arrayof coupling lightguides in a direction substantially perpendicular tothe first linear fold region and parallel to the light transmitting filmsurface at the first linear fold region; (c) increasing the distancebetween the first linear fold region and the second linear fold regionof the array of coupling lightguides in a direction substantiallyparallel to the first linear fold region and parallel to the lighttransmitting film surface at the first linear fold region; decreasingthe distance between the first linear fold region and the second linearfold region of the array of coupling lightguides in a directionperpendicular to the light transmitting film surface at the first linearfold region; (d) such that the coupling lightguides are bent, disposedsubstantially one above another, and aligned substantially parallel toeach other. These steps (a), (b), (c) and (d) do not need to occur inalphabetical order and the linear fold regions may be substantiallyparallel.

In one embodiment, the method of assembly includes translating the firstand second linear fold regions of the array of coupling lightguides(segments) in relative directions such that the coupling lightguides arearranged in an ordered, sequential arrangement and a plurality ofcoupling lightguides comprise a curved bend. The coupling lightguidescan overlap and can be aligned relative to one another to create acollection of coupling lightguides. The first linear fold region of thecollection of coupling may be further bent, curved, or folded, glued,clamped, cut, or otherwise modified to create a light input surfacewherein the surface area is suitable to receive and transmit light froma light source into the coupling lightguides. Linear fold regions areregions of the light transmitting film that comprise a fold after thecoupling lightguides are bent in at least one direction. The linear foldregions have a width that at least comprises at least one bend of acoupling lightguide and may further include the region of the filmphysically, optically, or mechanically coupled to a relative positionmaintaining element. The linear fold regions are substantially co-planarwith the surface of the film within the region and the linear foldregions have a length direction substantially larger than the widthdirection such that the linear fold regions have a direction oforientation in the length direction parallel to the plane of the film.In one embodiment, the array of coupling lightguides are oriented at anangle greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees to the firstlinear fold region.

As used herein, the first linear fold region or the second linear foldregion may be disposed near or include the input or output end of thecoupling lightguides. In embodiments where the device is used to collectlight, the input end may be near the light mixing region, lightguideregion, or lightguide and the output end may be near the light emittingedges of the coupling lightguides such as in the case where the couplinglightguides couple light received from the lightguide or lightguideregion into a light emitting surface which is disposed to direct lightonto a photovoltaic cell. In the embodiments and configurationsdisclosed herein, the first linear fold region or second linear foldregion may be transposed to create further embodiments forconfigurations where the direction of light propagation is substantiallyreversed.

In one embodiment, the array of coupling lightguides have a first linearfolding region and a second linear folding region and the method ofmanufacturing the light input coupler comprises translating steps thatcreate the overlap and bends while substantially maintaining therelative position of the coupling lightguides within the first andsecond linear folding regions. In one embodiment, maintaining therelative position of the coupling lightguides assists with the orderedbending and alignment and can allow the coupling lightguide folding andoverlap without creating a disordered or tangled arrangement of couplinglightguides. This can significantly improve the assembly and alignmentand reduce the volume required, particularly for very thin films orcoupling lightguides and/or very narrow coupling light strip widths.

In one embodiment, the aforementioned steps for a method ofmanufacturing a lightguide and light input coupler comprising a lighttransmitting film with a lightguide region are performed such that atleast at least one of steps (a) and (b) occur substantiallysimultaneously; steps (c) and (d) occur substantially simultaneously;and steps (c) and (d) occur following steps (a) and (b). In anotherembodiment, the aforementioned steps for a method of manufacturing alightguide and light input coupler comprising a light transmitting filmwith a lightguide region are performed such that steps (a), (b), and (c)occur substantially simultaneously. The relative translation firstlinear folding region and the second linear folding region of thecoupling lightguides may be achieved by holding a linear folding regionstationary and translating the other linear folding region. In a furtherembodiment, a relative position maintaining elements disposed at thefirst folding region remains substantially stationary while a secondrelative position maintaining element at the second linear foldingregion is translated. The translation may occur in an arc-like patternwithin one or more planes, or in directions parallel to or at an angleto the x, y, or z axis.

In another embodiment, the aforementioned steps are performed whilesubstantially maintaining the relative position of the of the array ofcoupling lightguides within the first linear fold region relative toeach other in a direction parallel to the first linear fold region andsubstantially maintaining the relative position of the array of couplinglightguides within the second linear fold region relative to each otherin a direction parallel to the first linear fold region.

In a further embodiment, the distance between the first linear foldregion and second linear fold region of the array of couplinglightguides is increased by at least the distance, D, that is the totalwidth, W_(t), of the array of the coupling lightguides in a directionsubstantially parallel to the first linear fold region.

In another embodiment, the array of coupling lightguides comprises anumber, N, of coupling lightguides that have substantially the samewidth, W_(s), in a direction parallel to the first linear fold regionand D=N×W_(s).

Relative Position Maintaining Element

In one embodiment, at least one relative position maintaining elementsubstantially maintains the relative position of the couplinglightguides in the region of the first linear fold region, the secondlinear fold region or both the first and second linear fold regions. Inone embodiment, the relative position maintaining element is disposedadjacent the first linear fold region of the array of couplinglightguides such that the combination of the relative positionmaintaining element with the coupling lightguide provides sufficientstability or rigidity to substantially maintain the relative position ofthe coupling lightguides within the first linear fold region duringtranslational movements of the first linear fold region relative to thesecond linear fold region to create the overlapping collection ofcoupling lightguides and the bends in the coupling lightguides. Therelative position maintaining element may be adhered, clamped, disposedin contact, disposed against a linear fold region or disposed between alinear fold region and a lightguide region. The relative positionmaintaining element may be a polymer or metal component that is adheredor held against the surface of the coupling lightguides, light mixingregion, lightguide region or film at least during one of thetranslational steps. In one embodiment, the relative positionmaintaining element is a polymeric strip with planar or saw-tooth-liketeeth adhered to either side of the film near the first linear foldregion, second linear fold region, or both first and second linear foldregions of the coupling lightguides. By using saw-tooth-like teeth, theteeth can promote or facilitate the bends by providing angled guides. Inanother embodiment, the relative position maintaining element is amechanical device with a first clamp and a second clamp that holds thecoupling lightguides in relative position in a direction parallel to theclamps parallel to the first linear fold region and translates theposition of the clamps relative to each other such that the first linearfold region and the second linear fold region are translated withrespect to each other to create overlapping coupling lightguides andbends in the coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the relativeposition maintaining element maintains the relative position of thecoupling lightguides in the first linear fold region, second linear foldregion, or both the first and second linear fold regions and provides amechanism to exert force upon the end of the coupling lightguides totranslate them in at least one direction.

In another embodiment, the relative position maintaining elementcomprises angular teeth or regions that redistribute the force at thetime of bending at least one coupling lightguide or maintains an evenredistribution of force after at least one coupling lightguide is bentor folded. In another embodiment, the relative position maintainingelement redistributes the force from bending and pulling one or morecoupling lightguides from a corner point to substantially the length ofan angled guide. In another embodiment, the edge of the angled guide isrounded.

In another embodiment, the relative position maintaining elementredistributes the force from bending during the bending operation andprovides the resistance to maintain the force required to maintain a lowprofile (short dimension in the thickness direction) of the couplinglightguides. In one embodiment, the relative position maintainingelement comprises a low contact area region, material, or surface reliefregions operating as a low contact area material, cover, or regionwherein one or more surface relief features are in physical contact withthe region of the lightguide during the folding operation and/or in useof the light emitting device. In one embodiment, the low contact areasurface relief features on the relative position maintaining elementreduce decoupling of light from the coupling lightguides, lightguide,light mixing region, lightguide region, or light emitting region.

In a further embodiment, the relative position maintaining element isalso a thermal transfer element. In one embodiment, the relativeposition maintaining element is an aluminum component with angled guidesor teeth that is thermally coupled to an LED light source.

In a further embodiment, the input ends and output ends of the array ofcoupling lightguides are each disposed in physical contact with relativeposition maintaining elements during the aforementioned steps (a), (b),(c) and (d).

In one embodiment, a relative position maintaining element disposedproximal to the first linear fold region of the array of couplinglightguides has an input cross-sectional edge in a plane parallel to thelight transmitting film that is substantially linear and parallel to thefirst linear fold region, and a relative position maintaining elementdisposed proximal to the second linear fold region of the array ofcoupling lightguides at the second linear fold region of the array ofcoupling lightguides has a cross-sectional edge in a plane parallel tothe light transmitting film at the second linear fold regionsubstantially linear and parallel to the linear fold region.

In another embodiment, the cross-sectional edge of the relative positionmaintaining element disposed proximal to the first linear fold region ofthe array of coupling lightguides remains substantially parallel to thecross-sectional edge of the relative position maintaining elementdisposed proximal to the second linear fold region of the array ofcoupling lightguides during steps (a), (b), (c), and (d).

In a further embodiment, the relative position maintaining elementdisposed proximal to the first linear fold region has a cross-sectionaledge in a plane parallel to the light transmitting film surface disposedproximal to the first linear fold region that comprises a substantiallylinear section oriented at an angle greater than 10 degrees to the firstlinear fold region for at least one coupling lightguide. In a furtherembodiment, the relative position maintaining element has saw-tooth-liketeeth oriented substantially at 45 degrees to a linear fold region ofthe coupling lightguides.

In one embodiment, the cross-sectional edge of the relative positionmaintaining element forms a guiding edge to guide the bend of at leastone coupling lightguide. In another embodiment, the relative positionmaintaining element is thicker than the coupling lightguide that isfolded around or near the relative position maintaining element suchthat the relative position maintaining element (or a region such as atooth or angular extended region) does not cut or provide a narrowregion for localized stress that could cut, crack, or induce stress onthe coupling lightguide. In another embodiment, the ratio of therelative position maintaining element or the component (such as anangled tooth) thickness to the average thickness of the couplinglightguide(s) in contact during or after the folding is greater than oneselected from the group of 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, and 25. Inone embodiment the relative position maintaining element (or componentthereof) that is in contact with the coupling lightguide(s) during orafter the folding is greater than one selected from the group: 0.05,0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, and 1 millimeter.

In another embodiment, the aforementioned method further comprises thestep of cutting through the overlapping coupling lightguides to providean array of input edges of the coupling lightguides that end insubstantially one plane orthogonal to the light transmitting filmsurface. The coupling lightguides may be formed by cutting the film inlines to form slits in the film. In another embodiment, theaforementioned method of manufacture further comprises forming an arrayof coupling lightguides in a light transmitting film by cuttingsubstantially parallel lines within a light transmitting film. In oneembodiment, the slits are substantially parallel and equally spacedapart. In another embodiment, the slits are not substantially parallelor have non-constant separations.

In another embodiment, the aforementioned method further comprises thestep of holding the overlapping array of coupling lightguides in a fixedrelative position by at least one selected from the group: clamping themtogether, restricting movement by disposing walls or a housing aroundone or more surfaces of the overlapping array of coupling lightguides,and adhering them together or to one or more surfaces.

In another embodiment, a method of manufacturing a lightguide and lightinput coupler comprising a light transmitting film with a lightguideregion continuously coupled to each coupling lightguide in an array ofcoupling lightguides, said array of coupling lightguides comprising afirst linear fold region and a second linear fold region substantiallyparallel to the first fold region, comprises the steps: (a) forming anarray of coupling lightguides physically coupled to a lightguide regionin a light transmitting film by physically separating at least tworegions of a light transmitting film in a first direction; (b)increasing the distance between the first linear fold region and thesecond linear fold region of the array of coupling lightguides in adirection perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface at thefirst linear fold region; (c) decreasing the distance between the firstlinear fold region and the second linear fold region of the array ofcoupling lightguides in a direction substantially perpendicular to thefirst linear fold region and parallel to the light transmitting filmsurface at the first linear fold region; (d) increasing the distancebetween the first linear fold region and the second linear fold regionof the array of coupling lightguides in a direction substantiallyparallel to the first linear fold region and parallel to the lighttransmitting film surface at the first linear fold region; and (e)decreasing the distance between the first linear fold region and thesecond linear fold region of the array of coupling lightguides in adirection perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface at thefirst linear fold region; such that the coupling lightguides are bent,disposed substantially one above another, and aligned substantiallyparallel to each other.

In another embodiment, a method of manufacturing a lightguide and lightinput coupler comprising a light transmitting film with a lightguideregion optically and physically coupled to each coupling lightguide inan array of coupling lightguides, said array of coupling lightguidescomprising a first fold region and a second fold region, comprises thesteps: (a) translating the first fold region and the second fold regionaway from each other in a direction substantially perpendicular to thefilm surface at the first fold region such that they move toward eachother in a plane parallel to the film surface at the first fold regionand (b) translating the first fold region and the second fold regionaway from each other in a direction parallel to the first fold regionsuch that the first fold region and second fold region move toward eachother in a direction substantially perpendicular to the film surface atthe first fold region such that the coupling lightguides are bent anddisposed substantially one above another.

Stress Induced Scattering

The bending or folding of a film-based coupling lightguide may result instress-induced scattering in a region that caused a portion of the lightwithin the coupling lightguide to be scattered into a direction suchthat it exits the lightguide near the region. The stress inducedscattering may be of the type stress cracking, stress whitening, shearbands, stress crazing, or other visible material deformation resultingin a scattering region due to stress. Stress induced deformations suchas stress cracking, stress whitening, shear bands, and stress crazingare described in “Characterization and failure analysis of plastics,”ASM International (2003) and can cause significant scattering of light.

In one embodiment, stress induced scattering in one or more couplinglightguides induced by bending or folding is reduced by bending orfolding the coupling lightguides at a higher temperature. In anotherembodiment, stress induced scattering in one or more couplinglightguides induced by bending or folding is be reduced after bending orfolding by subjecting one more coupling lightguides or regions ofcoupling lightguides to a temperature higher than one selected from thegroup: the glass transition temperature, the ASTM D1525 version 09 Vicatsoftening temperature, the temperature 10 degrees less than the glasstransition temperature, and the temperature equal to or higher than themelt temperature.

Coupling Lightguides Heated while Bending

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are bent or folded whileheated to temperature above 30 degrees Celsius. In one embodiment,coupling lightguides comprising at least one material which results instress induced scattering when bent or folded at a first temperatureless than 30 degrees Celsius are heated to a temperature greater than 30degrees Celsius and bent or folded to create bend or fold regions thatare substantially free of stress induced scattering. A couplinglightguide substantially free of stress induced scattering does notscatter more than 1% of the light propagating within the couplinglightguide out of the lightguide in the bend, fold or stressed regiondue stress induced scattering of light out of the coupling lightguidewhen illuminated with light from a light input coupler. A couplinglightguide substantially free of stress induced scattering does not havea scattering region visible by eye in the area of the bend, fold, orstressed region when the coupling lightguide is viewed in transmissionby eye at 5 degrees off-axis to the light incident to the couplinglightguide normal to the surface from a halogen light source collimatedto less than 20 degrees at a distance of 3.048 meters.

In one embodiment, the bending or folding of the coupling lightguidesoccurs at a temperature of at least one selected from the group: greaterthan room temperature, greater than 27 degrees Celsius, greater than 30degrees Celsius, greater than 40 degrees Celsius, greater than 50degrees Celsius, greater than 60 degrees Celsius, greater than the glasstransition temperature of the core material, greater than the glasstransition temperature of the cladding material, greater than the ASTMD1525 version 09 Vicat softening temperature of the core material,greater than the ASTM D1525 version 09 Vicat softening temperature ofthe cladding material, and greater than the ASTM D1525 version 09 Vicatsoftening temperature of the coupling lightguide film or film composite.

Coupling Lightguide with Fold Regions

In one embodiment, a lightguide comprises a coupling lightguidecomprising fold regions defined by fold lines and a reflective edge thatsubstantially overlap such that the collection of light input edges forma light input surface. In a further embodiment, one or more fold regionscomprise a first reflective surface edge disposed to redirect a portionof light from a light source input at a light input edge of the filminto an angle less than the critical such that it does not escape thecoupling lightguide at the reflective edge or the lightguide region atan outer edge (such as the edge distal from the light source). Inanother embodiment, one or more fold regions comprise a secondreflective surface edge disposed to redirect a portion of light inputfrom a light input edge of the film into an angle such that it does notescape the coupling lightguide at the reflective edge. In a furtherembodiment, the first and second reflected surface edges substantiallycollimate a portion of the light from the light source. In anotherembodiment, the first and second reflected surface edges have aparabolic shape.

The reflective surface edge may be an edge of the film formed through acutting, stamping or other edge forming technique and the reflectiveproperties may be due to total internal reflection or an applied coating(such as a reflective ink coating or sputter coated aluminum coating).The reflective surface edge may be linear, parabolic, angled, arcuate,faceted, or other shape designed to control the angular reflection oflight receive from the light input edge. The first and second reflectivesurface edges may have different shapes or orientations to achievedesired optical functions. The reflective surface edge may serve toredirect light to angles less than the critical angle, collimate light,or redirect light flux to a specific region to improve spatial orangular luminance, color, or light output uniformity.

In one embodiment, the reflective edge is angled, curved, or faceted todirect by total internal reflection a first portion of the light fromthe light source into the lightguide region. In a further embodiment,the reflective edge comprises a reflective coating.

In one embodiment, the fold line is angled or curved such that the foldregions are at least one selected from the group: at an angle to eachother, at an angle to one or more edges of the light input coupler,lightguide region, or light input surface, and at an angle to theoptical axis of a light source wherein the angle is greater than 0degrees and less than 180 degrees.

One or more regions or edges of the film-based lightguide, such as thereflective edges or the reflective surface edges may be stacked andcoated. For example, more than one lightguide may be stacked to coat thereflective edges using sputter coating, vapor deposition, or othertechniques. Similarly, the reflective surface edges may be folded andcoated with a reflective material. Spacers, protective films or layersor materials may be used to separate the films or edges.

A lightguide with fold regions can reduce or eliminate the need forcutting and folding the coupling lightguides. By forming reflectivesurface edges such as collimating surfaces for light incident from thelight source which are cut from the single film, light can be redirectedsuch that light does not escape out of the lightguide at the angled edge(from the light sources nearest the lightguide region, for example) andthe light from the light source is not coupled out of the lightguide atthe opposite edge (such as light from the LEDs nearest the lightguideincident on the opposite edge of the lightguide region at an angle lessthan the critical angle). In a further embodiment, the shape of thefirst and second reflective surface edges varies from the light sourcenearest the lightguide region or light emitting region toward thefarthest fold region from the lightguide region or light emittingregion. In one embodiment, the light source farthest from the lightguideregion or light emitting region has a second reflective surface edgeformed by the reflective edge and the first reflective surface edge isangled to permit light from the light source to reach the lightguideregion or light emitting region without reflecting from the reflectiveedge. In a further embodiment, the second reflective surface edgesredirect light from the light source incident in a direction away fromthe lightguide region or light emitting region (in the unfolded layout)toward the reflective edge at an angle greater than the critical angleand the first reflective surface edges redirect light from the lightsource incident in a direction toward the lightguide region or lightemitting region toward the reflective edge at an angle greater than thecritical angle or allow light from the light source to directlypropagate toward the lightguide region or light emitting region withoutreflecting from the reflective edge.

In one embodiment, the film-based lightguide with a light input couplercomprising a coupling lightguide with fold regions is formed by foldinga lightguide film along fold lines and overlapping the fold regions at afirst light input edge. In one embodiment, the film-based lightguide isfolded prior to cutting. By folding prior to cutting, the edges of theinternal layers may have improved surface qualities when mechanicallycutting, for example. In a further embodiment, the film-based lightguideis cut prior to folding. By cutting prior to folding, multiplelightguide films may be stacked together to reduce the number of cutsneeded. Additionally, by cutting prior to folding, the first and secondreflective surfaces may have different individual shapes and thereflective edge may be angled or curved.

In a further embodiment, multiple film lightguides are stacked ordisposed one above another in the light input coupler region and thefold regions (or plurality of coupling lightguides) are interwoven oralternating. For example, two film-based lightguides may be stack uponeach other and the fold regions may be simultaneously folded in bothlightguides by a mechanical film folder (such as folding machines usedin the paper industry). This can reduce the number of folding steps, andallow for multiple lightguides to be illuminated by a single light inputcoupler or light source. Interleaving the lightguides can also increasethe uniformity since the light extraction features (location, size,depth, etc.) within each lightguide may be different and independentlycontrolled. Additionally, multiple lightguides wherein the lightguideregion or light emitting regions do not overlap or only partiallyoverlap may be illuminated by a single light input coupler. For example,by folding two lightguides together, the display and backlit keypad in aphone, the display and backlit keyboard in a computer, or the frontlightand keypad in a portable device such as an electronic book may beilluminated by the same light source or light source package. In afurther embodiment, two separate light emitting regions within a singlelightguide film are illuminated by a folded light input coupler (orlight input coupler comprising a plurality of coupling lightguides).

The fold for the film, the lightguide region, or the light mixing regionmay be a similar radius of curvature to the coupling lightguides orstrips used in the light input coupler comprising a plurality ofcoupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the lightguide is held intwo or more regions and a plurality of wires are brought toward eachother wherein the wires contact the film near the fold lines in analternating format and form the bends in the film. The input edges ofthe fold regions or regions of the fold regions may then be held orbonded together such that the wires can be removed and the folds remain.In one embodiment, the folds along the fold lines are not “creases” inthat they do not form visible lines or creases when the film isunfolded. In another embodiment, teeth or plates moving in directionstoward each other press alternating fold lines in opposite directionsand create the “zig-zag”, accordion-like, or bellow-like folds in thefilm. A housing or fold maintaining element such as a holding device forholding a plurality of coupling lightguides may be used to holdtogether, house, or protect the coupling lightguide formed from aplurality of fold regions. Similarly to the housing or holding devicefor a plurality of coupling lightguides, the housing may comprise anoptically coupled window, refractive lenses or other features, elementsor properties used in the housing, folder, or holding device for aplurality of coupling lightguides. In a further embodiment, the housing,folder, or holding device comprises alternating rigid elements on twoopposing parts such that when the elements are brought together, a filmdisposed between the elements is folded in a bellow-like manner creatingfold regions within a coupling lightguide.

Packaging

In one embodiment, a kit suitable for providing illumination comprises alight source, a light input coupler, and a lightguide.

Roll-Up or Retractable Lightguide

In one embodiment, the flexible light emitting device can be rolled upinto a tube of a diameter less than one selected from the group: 152.4mm, 76.2 mm, 50.8 mm and 25.4 mm. In another embodiment, the flexiblelight emitting device comprises a spring or elastic-based take-upmechanism which can draw a portion of the lightguide, the light emittingregion, or the lightguide region inside the housing. For example, thelight emitting region of the film can be retracted into a cylindricaltube when a button on the device is pressed to provide secure, protectedstorage.

Lamination or Use with Other Films

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: lightguide,light transmitting film, light emitting device housing, thermal transferelement, and component of the light emitting device is laminated to ordisposed adjacent to at least one selected from the group: reflectionfilm, prismatic film reflective polarizer, low refractive index film,pressure sensitive adhesive, air gaps, light absorbing films, anti-glarecoatings, anti-reflection coatings, protective film, barrier film, andlow tack adhesive film.

Film Production

In one embodiment, the film or lightguide is one selected from thegroup: extruded film, co-extruded film, cast film, solvent cast film, UVcast film, pressed film, injection molded film, knife coated film, spincoated film, and coated film. In one embodiment, one or two claddinglayers are co-extruded on one or both sides of a lightguide region. Inanother embodiment, tie layers, adhesion promotion layers, materials orsurface modifications are disposed on a surface of or between thecladding layer and the lightguide layer. In one embodiment, the couplinglightguides, or core regions thereof, are continuous with the lightguideregion of the film as formed during the film formation process. Forexample, coupling lightguides formed by slicing regions of a film atspaced intervals can form coupling lightguides that are continuous withthe lightguide region of the film. In another embodiment, a film-basedlightguide with coupling lightguides continuous with the lightguideregion can be formed by injection molding or casting a material in amold comprising a lightguide region with coupling lightguide regionswith separations between the coupling lightguides. In one embodiment,the region between the coupling lightguides and the lightguide region ishomogeneous and without interfacial transitions such as withoutlimitation, air gaps, minor variations in refractive index,discontinuities in shapes or input-output areas, and minor variations inthe molecular weight or material compositions.

In another embodiment, at least one selected from the group: lightguidelayer, light transmitting film, cladding region, adhesive region,adhesion promotion region, or scratch resistant layer is coated onto oneor more surfaces of the film or lightguide. In another embodiment, thelightguide or cladding region is coated onto, extruded onto or otherwisedisposed onto a carrier film. In one embodiment, the carrier filmpermits at least one selected from the group: easy handling, fewerstatic problems, the ability to use traditional paper or packagingfolding equipment, surface protection (scratches, dust, creases, etc.),assisting in obtaining flat edges of the lightguide during the cuttingoperation, UV absorption, transportation protection, and the use ofwinding and film equipment with a wider range of tension and flatness oralignment adjustments. In one embodiment, the carrier film is removedbefore coating the film, before bending the coupling lightguide, afterfolding the coupling lightguides, before adding light extractionfeatures, after adding light extraction features, before printing, afterprinting, before or after converting processes (further lamination,bonding, die cutting, hole punching, packaging, etc.), just beforeinstallation, after installation (when the carrier film is the outersurface), and during the removal process of the lightguide frominstallation. In one embodiment, one or more additional layers arelaminated in segments or regions to the core region (or layers coupledto the core region) such that there are regions of the film without theone or more additional layers. For example, in one embodiment, anoptical adhesive functioning as a cladding layer is optically coupled toa touchscreen substrate; and an optical adhesive is used to opticallycouple the touchscreen substrate to the light emitting region offilm-based lightguide, thus leaving the coupling lightguides without acladding layer for increased input coupling efficiency.

In another embodiment, the carrier film is slit or removed across aregion of the coupling lightguides. In this embodiment, the couplinglightguides can be bent or folded to a smaller radius of curvature afterthe carrier film is removed from the linear fold region.

Separate Coupling Lightguides

In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides are discontinuous withthe lightguide and are subsequently optically coupled to the lightguide.In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are one selected from thegroup: extruded onto the lightguide, optically coupled to the lightguideusing an adhesive, optically coupled to the lightguide by injectionmolding a light transmitting material that bonds or remains in contactwith the coupling lightguides and lightguide, thermally bonded to thelightguide, solvent bonded to the lightguide, laser welded to thelightguide, sonic welded to the lightguide, chemically bonded to thelightguide, and otherwise bonded, adhered or disposed in optical contactwith the lightguide. In one embodiment, the thickness of the couplinglightguides is one selected from the group: less than 80%, less than70%, less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 20%, less than 10% of thethickness of the lightguide. In one embodiment, the coupling lightguidesand lightguide region of the light emitting device are molded. Thismolding method may include, for example without limitation, solventcasting, injection molding, knife coating, spin coating. Examples ofmaterials suitable for molding include, without limitation, solvent castacrylic and silicone. This molding method may also comprise invertedextraction features in the mold that form extraction features in themolded material. In one embodiment, the mold has a thickness variationin one or more directions, such as in the direction of propagation forexample, to form a wedge or tapered lightguide to increase theextraction of light out of the film-based lightguide at the end awayfrom the entrance side. In another embodiment, the light emitting regionof a lightguide is illuminated from opposite sides and the taper is fromboth sides toward the middle. In a further embodiment, a film basedlightguide is tapered in first number of directions from a lightguidewith light incident into the light emitting region from a second numberof sides, wherein the first number is equal to the second number, thefirst number is four, or the first number is larger than four. Inanother embodiment, one or more surfaces of the film based lightguidecomprises one or more cross-sectional shapes selected from the group:non-linear, arcuate, step-wise, random, optically designed,quasi-random, and other shape to achieve a particular spatial or angularlight output profile of the lightguide and/or device.

Glass Laminate

In another embodiment, the lightguide is disposed within or on one sideof a glass laminate. In another embodiment, the lightguide is disposedwithin a safety glass laminate. In a further embodiment, at least oneselected from the group: lightguide, cladding, or adhesive layercomprises polyvinyl butyrate.

Patterned Lightguides

In another embodiment, at least one of the lightguide or couplinglightguides is a coated region disposed on a cladding, carrier film,substrate, or other material. By using a coated pattern for thelightguide, different pathways for the light can be achieved for lightdirected into the coupling lightguides or lightguide. In one embodiment,the lightguide region comprises lightguide regions which direct light toseparate light emitting regions wherein the neighboring lightguideregions with light extracting features emit light of a different color.In another embodiment, a lightguide pattern is disposed on a claddinglayer, carrier film, or other layer which comprises regions disposed toemit light of two or more colors from two or more light sources coupledinto input couplers with coupling lightguides disposed to direct lightfrom the light source to the corresponding patterned (or trace)lightguide. For example, a red LED may be disposed to couple light intoa light input coupler with coupling lightguides (which may be film-basedor coating based or the same material used for the pattern lightguidecoating) to a lightguide pattern wherein the light extraction featuresemit light in a pattern to provide color in a pixilated color display.In one embodiment, the lightguide pattern or the light extracting regionpatterns within the lightguide pattern comprises one or more selectedfrom the group: curved sections, bend straight sections, shapes, andother regular and irregular patterns. The coupling lightguides may becomprised of the same material as the patterned lightguides or they maybe a different material.

Light Extraction Features

In one embodiment, the light extraction features are disposed on orwithin a film, lightguide region or cladding region by embossing oremploying a “knurl roll” to imprint surface features on a surface. Inanother embodiment, the light extraction features are created byradiation (such as UV exposure) curing a polymer while it is in contactwith a drum, roll, mold or other surface with surface features disposedthereon. In another embodiment, light extraction features are formed inregions where the cladding or low refractive index material or othermaterial on or within the lightguide is removed or formed as a gap. Inanother embodiment, the lightguide region comprises a light reflectingregion wherein light extraction features are formed where the lightreflecting region is removed. Light extraction may comprise or bemodified (such as the percent of light reaching the region that isextracted or direction profile of the extracted light) by addingscattering, diffusion, or other surface or volumetric prismatic,refracting, diffracting, reflecting, or scattering elements within oradjacent the light extraction features or regions where the cladding orother layer has been removed.

In one embodiment, the light extraction features are volumetric lightredirecting features that refract, diffract, scatter, reflect, totallyinternally reflect, diffuse, or otherwise redirect light. The volumetricfeatures may be disposed within the lightguide, lightguide region, core,cladding, or other layer or region during the production of the layer orregion or the features may be disposed on a surface whereupon anothersurface or layer is subsequently disposed.

In one embodiment, the light extraction features comprise an ink ormaterial within a binder comprising least one selected from the group:titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, metal oxides, microspheres or othernon-spherical particles comprising polymers (such as PMMA, polystyrene),rubber, or other inorganic materials. In one embodiment, the ink ormaterial is deposited by one selected from the group: thermal inkjetprinting, piezoelectric inkjet printing, continuous inkjet printing,screen printing (solvent or UV), laser printing, sublimation printing,dye-sublimation printing, UV printing, toner-based printing, LED tonerprinting, solid ink printing, thermal transfer printing, impactprinting, offset printing, rotogravure printing, photogravure printing,offset printing, flexographic printing, hot wax dye transfer printing,pad printing, relief printing, letterpress printing, xerography, solidink printing, foil imaging, foil stamping, hot metal typesetting,in-mold decoration, and in-mold labeling.

In another embodiment, the light extraction features are formed byremoving or altering the surface by one selected from the group:mechanical scribing, laser scribing, laser ablation, surface scratching,stamping, hot stamping, sandblasting, radiation exposure, ionbombardment, solvent exposure, material deposition, etching, solventetching, plasma etching, and chemical etching.

In a further embodiment, the light extraction features are formed byadding material to a surface or region by one selected from the group:UV casting, solvent casting with a mold, injection molding,thermoforming, vacuum forming, vacuum thermoforming, and laminating orotherwise bonding, and coupling a film or region comprising surfacerelief or volumetric features.

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: mask, tool,screen, patterned film or component, photo resist, capillary film,stencil, and other patterned material or element is used to facilitatethe transfer of the light extraction feature to the lightguide, film,lightguide region, cladding region or a layer or region disposed on orwithin the lightguide.

In another embodiment, more than one light extraction layer or regioncomprising light extraction features is used and the light extractionlayer or region may be located on one surface, two surfaces, within thevolume, within multiple regions of the volume, or a combination of theaforementioned locations within the film, lightguide, lightguide region,cladding, or a layer or region disposed on or within the lightguide.

In another embodiment, surface or volumetric light extraction featuresare disposed on or within the lightguide or cladding or a region orsurface thereon or between that direct at least one selected from thegroup: 20%, 40%, 60%, and 80% of light incident from within thelightguide to angles within 30 degrees from the normal to the lightemitting surface of the light emitting device or within 30 degrees fromthe normal of a reflecting surface such as a reflective spatial lightmodulator.

Folding and Assembly

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are heated to soften thelightguides during the folding or bending step. In another embodiment,the coupling lightguides are folded while they are at a temperatureabove one selected from the group: 50 degrees Celsius, 70 degreesCelsius, 100 degrees Celsius, 150 degrees Celsius, 200 degrees Celsius,and 250 degrees Celsius.

Folder

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are folded or bent usingopposing folding mechanisms. In another embodiment, grooves, guides,pins, or other counterparts facilitate the bringing together opposingfolding mechanisms such that the folds or bends in the couplinglightguides are correctly folded. In another embodiment, registrationguides, grooves, pins or other counterparts are disposed on the folderto hold in place or guide one or more coupling lightguides or thelightguide during the folding step. In one embodiment, at least one ofthe lightguide or coupling lightguides comprises a hole and the holdercomprises a registration pin and when the pin is positioned through thehole before and during the folding step, the lightguide or couplinglightguide position relative to the holder is fixed in at least onedirection. Examples of folding coupling lightguides or strips forlightguides are disclosed in International Patent Application numberPCT/US08/79041 titled “LIGHT COUPLING INTO ILLUMINATED FILMS”, thecontents of which are incorporated by reference herein.

In one embodiment, the folding mechanism has an opening disposed toreceive a strip that is not to be folded in the folding step. In oneembodiment, this strip is used to pull the coupling lightguides into afolded position, pull two components of the folding mechanism together,align the folding mechanism components together, or tighten the foldingsuch that the radius of curvature of the coupling lightguides isreduced.

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: foldingmechanism, relative position maintaining element, holder, or housing isformed from one selected from the group: sheet metal, foil, film, rigidrubber, polymer material, metal material, composite material, and acombination of the aforementioned materials.

Holder

In one embodiment, a light emitting device comprises a folding mechanismwhich substantially maintains the relative position of the couplinglightguides subsequent to the folding operation. In another embodiment,the folder or housing comprises a cover that is disposed over (such asslides over, folds over, hinges over, clips over, snaps over, etc.) thecoupling lightguides and provides substantial containment of thecoupling lightguides. In a further embodiment, the folding mechanism isremoved after the coupling lightguides have been folded and the holdingmechanism is disposed to hold the relative position of the couplinglightguides. In one embodiment, the holding mechanism is a tube with acircular, rectangular, or other geometric shape cross-sectional profilewhich slides over the coupling lightguides and further comprises a slitwhere the coupling lightguides, light mixing region, or lightguide exitsthe tube. In one embodiment, the tube is one selected from the group:transparent, black, has inner walls with a diffuse luminous reflectancegreater than 70%, and has a gloss less than 50 in a region disposedproximate a coupling lightguide such that the surface area of the innertube in contact with the coupling lightguide remains small.

In a further embodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input couplerand lightguide comprises at least one step selected from the group:holding the coupling lightguide, holding the lightguide, cutting theregions in the film corresponding to the coupling lightguides, andfolding or bending the coupling lightguides wherein the relativeposition maintaining element holds the lightguide or coupling lightguideduring the cutting and the folding or bending step. In anotherembodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input coupler andlightguide comprises cutting the coupling lightguides in a film followedby folding or bending the coupling lightguides wherein the samecomponent holding the coupling lightguides or lightguide in place duringthe cutting also holds the coupling lightguide or lightguide in placeduring the folding or bending.

In another embodiment, the relative position of at least one region ofthe coupling lightguides are substantially maintained by one or moreselected from the group: wrapping a band, wire, string, fiber, line,strap, wrap or similar tie material around the coupling lightguides or aportion of the coupling lightguides, disposing a housing tube, case,wall or plurality of walls or components around a portion of thecoupling lightguides, wrapping a heat-shrinking material around thecoupling lightguides and applying heat, bonding the coupling lightguidesusing adhesives, thermal bonding or other adhesive or bonding techniquesin one or more regions of the coupling lightguides (such as near theinput end, for example), clamping the lightguides, disposing a lowrefractive index epoxy, adhesive, or material around, or between one ormore regions of the coupling lightguides, pressing together couplinglightguides comprising a pressure sensitive adhesive (or UV cured orthermal adhesive) on one or both sides. In one embodiment, the couplinglightguide region of a film comprises a pressure sensitive adhesivewherein after the coupling lightguides are cut into the film with theadhesive, the coupling lightguides are folded on top of one another andpressed together such that the pressure sensitive adhesive holds them inplace. In this embodiment, the pressure sensitive adhesive can have alower refractive index than the film, and operate as cladding layer.

In another embodiment, the folder and/or holder has a plurality ofsurfaces disposed to direct, align, bring the coupling lightguidestogether, direct the coupling lightguides to become parallel, or directthe input surfaces of the coupling lightguides toward a light inputsurface disposed to receive light from an LED when the couplinglightguides are translated in the folder or holder. In one embodiment,the coupling lightguides are guided into a cavity that aligns thecoupling lightguides parallel to each other and disposes the input edgesof the coupling lightguides near an input window. In one embodiment, thewindow is open, comprises a flat outer surface, or comprises an opticalouter surface suitable for receiving light from a light source. Inanother embodiment, the folder and/or holder comprises a low contactarea surface comprising surface relief features disposed between thefolder and/or holder and the lightguide.

Hold-Down Mechanism

In one embodiment, at least one coupling lightguide comprises at leastone hook region disposed near the input surface end of the couplinglightguide. The hook region allows a guide, alignment mechanism, orpull-down mechanism to maintain at least one selected from the group:the relative position of the ends or regions near the ends of thecoupling lightguides, the relative separations of the couplinglightguides to each other in the thickness direction of the couplinglightguide, the positions of the coupling lightguides relative to thelightguide in the thickness direction of the lightguide, and thepositions of the end regions or the ends of the coupling lightguides inone or more directions in a plane substantially parallel to thelightguide. In one embodiment, the hook region comprises at leastselected from the group: a flange, a barb, a protrusion, a hole, or anaperture region in the coupling lightguide. In one embodiment, thelightguide or a means for manufacturing a film-based lightguidecomprises a hold down mechanism comprising two hook regions comprisingflanges on either side of at least one coupling lightguide wherein theflanges permit a strap, wire or other film or object to be positionedagainst the hook region such that the strap, strip, wire or other filmor object substantially maintains the relative position of the ends ofthe coupling lightguide in at least one direction. In anotherembodiment, the hold down mechanism comprises a physical restrainingmechanism for holding or maintaining the hold down mechanism or the hookregion in at least one direction relative to a temporary or permanentbase or other component such as holder, relative position maintainingelement, housing, thermal transfer element, guide, or tension formingelement. In another embodiment, the lightguide or a means formanufacturing a film-based lightguide comprises a hold down mechanismcomprising a hook region comprising two holes on either side of thecoupling lightguides or near the input end of the coupling lightguides,and the coupling lightguides may be stacked on top of each other and ontop of a base element comprising two pins that align with the holes. Thepins and holes register the ends of the coupling lightguides andsubstantially maintain their relative positions near the input end ofthe coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, one or more couplinglightguides comprise a hook region that can be removed after thehold-down mechanism forces the coupling lightguides together. In anotherembodiment, the hook region may be removed along with a portion of theend of the coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, the hook regions andthe ends of the coupling lightguides are cut, peeled or town off afterthe coupling lightguides have been strapped or physically coupled to abase or other element. After the hook regions and the couplinglightguides are cut from the remainder of the coupling lightguides, thenew ends of the coupling lightguides may form an input surface or asurface suitable to optically couple to one or more optical elementssuch as windows or secondary optics.

In another embodiment, one or more coupling lightguide comprise aremovable hook region comprising an aperture cut from the lightguidethat forms the light input surface for the coupling lightguide afterremoving the hook region. For example, in one embodiment, an array ofcoupling lightguides are cut into a film wherein the end region of thecoupling lightguide near the input edge comprises shoulder-like flangesthat extend past the average width of the coupling lightguides andfurther comprises an aperture cut that extends more than 20% of thewidth of the coupling lightguides. In this embodiment, the lateral edgesof the coupling lightguides and aperture cut can be cut during the sameprocess step and they can both comprises high quality surface edges.When the edge region is removed from the ends of the couplinglightguides using the aperture cut as a separation guide after stackingand aligning using the shoulder-like flanges, the stack of couplinglightguides have a light input surface formed from the collection ofedges formed by the aperture cut. Similarly, pin and hole type hookregions may be used and in one embodiment, the hook region does notextend past the width of the coupling lightguides. For example, holesnear the width ends of the coupling lightguides may be used as hookregions.

In another embodiment, one or more coupling lightguides is physicallycoupled to a hold down mechanism and the hold down mechanism istranslated in a first direction substantially parallel to the axis ofthe coupling lightguides such that the coupling lightguides move closertogether, closer to the lightguide, or closer to the base. For example,in one embodiment, the end region of the coupling lightguides comprisesholes that are aligned onto a pin under low tension. After the couplinglightguides are aligned onto the pins, the pins and the base supportingthe pins is translated in a direction away from the coupling lightguidessuch that the coupling lightguide pull closer toward each other and thebase.

Converting or Secondary Operations on the Film or Light Input Coupler

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: couplinglightguides, lightguide, light transmitting film, lightguide region,light emitting region, housing, folder, and holder component is stamped,cut, thermoformed, or painted. In one embodiment, the cutting of thecomponent is performed by one selected from the group: knife, scalpel,heated scalpel, die cutter, water jet cutter, saw, hot wire saw, lasercutter, or other blade or sharp edge. One or more components may bestacked before the cutting operation.

In one embodiment, the component is thermoformed (under a vacuum,ambient pressure, or at another pressure) to create a curved or bentregion. In one embodiment, the film is thermoformed into a curve and thecoupling lightguide strips are subsequently cut from the curved film andfolded in a light input coupler.

In one embodiment, at least one edge selected from the group: couplinglightguide, lightguide, light transmitting film, collection of couplinglightguides, or edge of other layer or material within the lightemitting device is modified to become more planar (closer to opticallyflat), roughened, or formed with a predetermined structure to redirectlight at the surface (such as forming Fresnel refracting features onedges of the input coupling lightguides in a region of the collection ofcoupling lightguides to direct light into the coupling lightguides in adirection closer to a direction parallel to the plane of the couplinglightguides at the input surface (for example, forming a Fresnelcollimating lens on the surface of the collection of couplinglightguides disposed near an LED). In one embodiment, the edgemodification substantially polishes the edge by laser cutting the edge,mechanically polishing the edge, thermally polishing (surface melting,flame polishing, embossing with a flat surface), chemically polishing(caustics, solvents, methylene chloride vapor polishing, etc.).

Reflective Coating or Element

In one embodiment, at least one region of at least one edge selectedfrom the group: a coupling lightguide, film, and lightguide comprises asubstantially specularly reflecting coating or element optically coupledto the region or disposed proximal to the edge. In one embodiment, thesubstantially specularly reflecting element or coating can redirectlight a portion of the light exiting the coupling lightguide,lightguide, or film edge back into the coupling lightguide, lightguideor film at an angle that will propagate by TIR within the lightguide. Inone embodiment, the specularly reflective coating is a dispersion oflight reflecting material disposed in an ink or other binder selectedfrom the group: dispersions of aluminum, silver, coated flakes,core-shell particles, glass particles, and silica particles. In anotherembodiment, the dispersion comprises particle sizes selected from one ofthe group of less than 100 microns in average size, less than 50 micronsin average size, less than 10 microns in average size, less than 5microns in average size, less than 1 micron in average size, less than500 nm in average size. In another embodiment, the dispersion comprisessubstantially planar flakes with an average dimension in a directionparallel to the flake surface selected from one of the group of lessthan 100 microns in average size, less than 50 microns in average size,less than 10 microns in average size, less than 5 microns in averagesize, less than 1 micron in average size, less than 500 nm in averagesize. In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides are folded andstacked and a light reflecting coating is applied in regions on theedges of the lightguide. In another embodiment, the light reflectingcoating is applied to the tapered region of the collection of couplinglightguides. In a further embodiment, the blade that cuts through thefilm, coupling lightguide, or lightguide passes through the film duringthe cutting operation and makes contact with a well comprisingreflective ink; and the ink is applied to the edge when the blade passesback by the edge of the film. In another embodiment, a multilayerreflection film, such as a specularly reflecting multilayer polymer filmis disposed adjacent to or in optical contact with the couplinglightguides in a region covering at least the region near the edges ofthe coupling lightguides, and the specularly reflecting multilayerpolymer film is formed into substantially a 90 degree bend forming areflected side to the coupling lightguide. The bending or folding of thereflective film may be achieved during the cutting of the lightguide,coupling lightguides, or tapered region of the coupling lightguides. Inthis embodiment, the reflective film may be adhered or otherwisephysically coupled to the film, coupling lightguide, collection ofcoupling lightguides, or lightguide and the fold creates a flatreflective surface near the edge to reflect light back into thelightguide, film, coupling lightguide or collection of couplinglightguides. The folding of the reflective film may be accomplished bybending, pressure applied to the film, pressing the lightguide such thata wall or edge bends the reflective film. The reflective film may bedisposed such that it extends past the edge prior to the fold. Thefolding of the reflective film may be performed on multiple stackededges substantially simultaneously.

The following are more detailed descriptions of various embodimentsillustrated in the Figures.

FIG. 1 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 100comprising a light input coupler 101 disposed on one side of afilm-based lightguide. The light input coupler 101 comprises couplinglightguides 104 and a light source 102 disposed to direct light into thecoupling lightguides 104 through a light input surface 103 comprisingone or more input edges of the coupling lightguides 104. In oneembodiment, each coupling lightguide 104 includes a coupling lightguideterminating at a bounding edge. Each coupling lightguide is folded suchthat the bounding edges of the coupling lightguides are stacked to formthe light input surface 103. The light emitting device 100 furthercomprises a lightguide region 106 comprising a light mixing region 105,a lightguide 107, and a light emitting region 108. Light from the lightsource 102 exits the light input coupler 101 and enters the lightguideregion 106 of the film. This light spatially mixes with light fromdifferent coupling lightguides 104 within the light mixing region 105 asit propagates through the lightguide 107. In one embodiment, light isemitted from the lightguide 107 in the light emitting region 108 due tolight extraction features (not shown).

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light input coupler200 with coupling lightguides 104 folded in the −y direction. Light fromthe light source 102 is directed into the light input surface 103comprising input edges 204 of the coupling lightguides 104. A portion ofthe light from the light source 102 propagating within the couplinglightguides 104 with a directional component in the +y direction willreflect in the +x and −x directions from the lateral edges 203 of thecoupling lightguides 104 and will reflect in the +z and −z directionsfrom the top and bottom surfaces of the coupling lightguides 104. Thelight propagating within the coupling lightguides is redirected by thefolds 201 in the coupling lightguides 104 toward the −x direction.

FIG. 3 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 300with three light input couplers 101 on one side of the lightguide region106 comprising the light mixing region 105, a lightguide 107, and thelight emitting region 108.

FIG. 4 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 400with two light input couplers 101 disposed on opposite sides of thelightguide 107. In certain embodiments, one or more input couplers 101may be positioned along one or more corresponding sides of thelightguide 107.

FIG. 5 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 500with two light input couplers 101 disposed on the same side of thelightguide region 106. The light sources 102 are oriented substantiallywith the light directed toward each other in the +y and −y directions.

FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 600 defining a region 604 near a substantially planarlight input surface 603 comprised of planar edges of couplinglightguides 104 disposed to receive light from a light source 102. Thecoupling lightguides comprise core regions 601 and cladding regions 602.A portion of the light from the light source 102 input into the coreregion 601 of the coupling lightguides 104 will totally internallyreflect from the interface between the core region 601 and the claddingregion 602 of the coupling lightguides 104. In the embodiment shown inFIG. 6, a single cladding region 602 is positioned between adjacent coreregions 601. In another embodiment, two or more cladding regions 602 arepositioned between adjacent core regions 601.

FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 700 defining a region 704 near a light input surface ofthe light input coupler 101 having one or more planar surface features701 substantially parallel to stack direction (z direction as shown inFIG. 7) of the coupling lightguides 104, one or more refractive surfacefeatures 702, and one or more planar input surfaces 703 and a bevelformed on an opposite surface of the coupling lightguide 104 thattotally internally reflects a portion of incident light into thecoupling lightguide 104 similar to a hybrid refractive-TIR Fresnel lens.

FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 800 defining a region 802 near a light input surface ofthe light emitting device 800. The coupling lightguides 104 areoptically coupled to the light source 102 by an optical adhesive 801 orother suitable coupler or coupling material. In this embodiment, lesslight from the light source 102 is lost due to reflection (andabsorption at the light source or in another region) and the positionalalignment of the light source 102 relative to the coupling lightguides104 is easily maintained.

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 900 defining a region 903 near a light input surface ofthe light emitting device 900. In this embodiment, the couplinglightguides 104 are held in place by a sleeve 901 with an outer couplingsurface 902 and the edge surfaces of the coupling lightguides 104 areeffectively planarized by an optical adhesive 801 between the ends ofthe coupling lightguides and the sleeve 901 with the outer surface 902adjacent the light source 102. In this embodiment, the surface finish ofthe cutting of the coupling lightguides is less critical because theouter surface 902 of the sleeve 901 is optically coupled to the edgesusing an optical adhesive 801 which reduces the refraction (andscattering loss) that could otherwise occur at the air-input edgeinterface of the input edge due to imperfect cutting of the edges. Inanother embodiment, an optical gel, a fluid or a non-adhesive opticalmaterial may be used instead of the optical adhesive to effectivelyplanarize the interface at the edges of the coupling lightguides. Incertain embodiments, the difference in the refractive index between theoptical adhesive, the optical gel, the fluid, or the non-adhesiveoptical material and the core region of the coupling lightguides is lessthan one selected from group of 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, and0.01. In one embodiment, the outer surface 902 of the sleeve 901 issubstantially flat and planar. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of oneembodiment of a light emitting display 1000 disposed adjacent a window1002 comprising a light input coupler 101 disposed to receive electricalpower through a power cable 1003 attached to a power plug 1004. Light1005 from the light source 102 (not shown in FIG. 10) in the light inputcoupler 101 propagates through the lightguide region 106 and exits thelight emitting display 1000 due to light extraction features in a regionof the light emitting region 108 forming light emitting indicia 1001. Inone embodiment, the lightguide region 106 is optically coupled to thewindow 1002 and the adhesion and/or strength of the lightguide region106 supports the weight of the light emitting display 1000. In anotherembodiment, the adhesion and/or the strength of the lightguide region106 supports the weight of the lightguide region 106 and the light inputcoupler 101. In this embodiment, the power cable 1003 may be ofsufficient length that the light emitting display 1000 does not need tosupport the weight of the power plug 1004 when it is unplugged becausethe power plug 1004 would normally reach the ground (as typically is thecase with a 6-foot power cable). By not needing to support the weight ofthe power plug 1004 (when the power plug 1004 is plugged into anelectrical outlet or the power cable 1003 is sufficiently long), moreelectronics such as the transformer, LED driver, or switch mode powersupply which are typically heavy can be integrated into the power plug1004 and a peel strength of the lightguide region 106 and/or an elasticmodulus of the lightguide region 106 can be reduced.

FIG. 11 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 1100 having a light source 102 that is removable from the lightinput coupler 101 and replaceable. In this embodiment, the lightguide107 comprises a core region 601 disposed between two cladding regions602. As shown in FIG. 11, a first cladding region 602 is disposedadjacent a window 1002 such that the light emitting device 1100 emitslight in the form of indicia 1001 and through the window 1002. The lightsource 102 is inserted into the light input coupler 101 by moving thelight source 102 in a first direction 1101 (the +y direction). The lightsource 102 may also be removed from the light input coupler 101 bytranslating it in the −y direction with respect to the light inputcoupler 101. Similarly, in a different perspective, the light inputcoupler 101 and the lightguide 107 may be removed from the light source102 (when they are not physically coupled to a stationary window 1002).In one embodiment, the electronics (including, for example, a driver, acontrolling mechanism, etc.) and related components (a heat sink,optical elements, etc.) for the light source 102 may also be removedfrom the light input coupler 101 with the light source 102.

FIG. 12 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 1200 including the light input coupler 101 defining a cavity 1201for receiving a light source 102 and a light collimating optical element1202. In this embodiment, the lightguide 107 comprises a core region 601disposed between two cladding regions 602. In this embodiment, a firstcladding region 602 is disposed adjacent a window 1002 such that thelight emitting device 1200 emits light from individual light extractionfeatures (not shown) that collectively form light emitting indicia 1001and through the window 1002. The light source 102 and the lightcollimating optical element 1202 are removable from within the cavity1201 of the light input coupler 101 and replaceable. In this embodiment,a portion of the light from the light source 102 is collimated by thelight collimating optical element 1202 and is directed into the inputedges 204 of the coupling lightguides 104 where the light propagatesthrough the core region 601 and is emitted from the light emittingdevice 1200 in the form of light emitting indicia 1001. Also shown inthis embodiment, a portion of the light may propagate through anon-folding coupling lightguide 9703. The light source 102 and the lightcollimating optical element 1202 are inserted into the cavity 1201 bymoving the light source 102 with the attached light collimating opticalelement 1202 in a first direction 1101 (the +y direction). The lightsource 102 and the light collimating optical element 1202 may also beremoved from the cavity 1201 by translating the light source 102 and thelight collimating optical element 1202 in the −y direction with respectto the light input coupler 101.

FIG. 13 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 1300 wherein the lightguide 107 and a cartridge 1301 areremovable from the light input coupler 101 and replaceable. The lightinput coupler 101 is moved toward the input edges 204 of the couplinglightguides 104 substantially housed in the cartridge 1301 such thatlight propagates through the core region 601 and is emitted from thelight emitting device 1300 from individual light extraction features(not shown) that collectively form light emitting indicia 1001. Alsoshown in this embodiment, a portion of the light may propagate through anon-folding coupling lightguide 9703. The light source 102 is disposedto couple light into the input edges 204 of the coupling lightguides 104in the cartridge 1301 by translating the light input coupler 101 in afirst direction 1101 (the +y direction). The light input coupler 101 mayalso be removed from the cartridge 1301 by translating the light inputcoupler 101 in the −y direction with respect to the light input edges204 of the coupling lightguides 104. From a different perspective, thecartridge 1301 is removable and replaceable with respect to the lightinput coupler 101. For example, in one embodiment, a user may change thelight emitting indicia 1001 by detaching the cartridge 1301 and thelightguide 107 from the light input coupler 101. In this embodiment, thelightguide 107 and the cartridge 1301 may be kept for future use ordisposed. In another embodiment, the light input coupler 101 istranslated in a first direction (such as the +z direction) such thatlight from the light source 102 is coupled into the coupling lightguides104.

FIG. 14A is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 1400 comprising a lightguide region 106 with a light receivingregion 1401 and a light input coupler 101 with a light transmittingregion 1402 on a light output optical element 1403. In this embodiment,the lightguide region 106 is a film that can be rolled and/or pressedonto a surface of the window 1002. When the light input coupler 101 withthe light output optical element 1402 is moved in the direction 1101toward and placed against the lightguide region 106 such that the lighttransmitting region 1402 aligns with the light receiving region 1401, aportion of the light from the light input coupler 101 is coupled intothe lightguide region 106 and exits the lightguide region 106 fromindividual light extraction features (not shown) that collectively formlight emitting indicia 1001.

FIG. 14B is an exploded perspective view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 1400 in the form of a sign displaying the word “OPEN.”The light emitting device 1408 comprises an input coupler 101 with alightguide 107 having a plurality of light extraction regions 1404 inthe form of indicia disposed on a surface 1430 of the lightguide 107.The light extraction regions 1404 may be removed or added 1406, as shownin FIG. 14B, to the surface 1430 of the lightguide 107 to change theimage, indicia, pattern, or logo of the region of light emitted from thelight emitting device 1408. Other forms of indicia or light emittingpatterns may be added or removed to change the appearance and/or lightoutput pattern of the light emitting device 1408. In this embodiment, acladding region 602 is disposed between the lightguide 107 and thewindow 1002 to prevent or limit light transmission into the window 1002where light is absorbed due to the intrinsic absorption of the glass(thus reducing the light intensity of the indicia) or extracted throughfingerprints, scratches and/or other light extracting properties withinand/or on the surface 1431 of the window 1002.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a distributedillumination system 1500 comprising the light input coupler 101 disposedto couple light into a distribution lightguide 1501. The light in thedistribution lightguide 1501 exits through the light transmitting region1402 when optically coupled to a light receiving region 1401 of anoutput coupling lightguide 1502. As shown in FIG. 15, two outputcoupling lightguides 1502 are optically coupled to the lighttransmitting region 1402 of the distribution lightguide 1501 in tworegions. First and second portions of the light propagating in awaveguide condition within the distribution lightguide 1501 exit thedistribution lightguide 1501 by coupling into the output couplinglightguides 1502 as the first and second portions of light propagate ina waveguide condition within the output coupling lightguides 1502 andexit the output coupling lightguides 1502 by emitting light fromindividual light extraction features (not shown) that collectively formlight emitting indicia 1001. As shown in FIG. 15, in one embodiment theoutput coupling lightguides 1502 are optically coupled at differentlocations to the distribution lightguide 1501 to provide light emittingindicia 1001 at desired locations corresponding to product placementlocations (on a shelf or display, for example).

FIG. 16A is a perspective view of one embodiment of a distributedillumination system 1600 comprising the illumination system 1500 shownin FIG. 15 and repositionable cladding layers 1601. The repositionablecladding layers 1601 may be disposed in exposed regions of thedistribution lightguide 1501 such that light is not absorbed or coupledout of the distribution lightguide 1501 due to scratches, dirt, and/orother components in direct contact with the surface of the distributionlightguide 1501. In one embodiment, the repositionable cladding layers1601 may be moved from one region of the light transmitting region 1402on the distribution lightguide 1501 to another region of the lighttransmitting region 1402 on the distribution lightguide 1501 and have arepositionable low peel strength adhesive bond with the distributionlightguide 1501. Other suitable coupling mechanisms may be used tocouple the repositionable cladding layers 1601 to the distributionlightguide 1501. In another embodiment, the repositionable claddinglayers 1601 substantially cover regions of the distribution lightguide1501 that are not optically coupled to output coupling lightguides 1502.In another embodiment, the repositionable cladding layers 1601 includeflaps that may be peeled back from the distribution lightguide 1501while remaining physically coupled to the distribution lightguide 1501such that light receiving regions on an output coupling lightguide 1502may be optically coupled to the light transmitting region of thedistribution lightguide 1501 to illuminate indicia on the outputcoupling lightguide 1502. In another embodiment, the repositionablecladding layer 1601 has an ASTM D1003 version 07e1 luminoustransmittance less than one selected from the group of 80%, 70%, 60%,50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, 2%, and 1%. In one embodiment, therepositionable cladding layer 1601 comprises a light absorbing region(such as a black PET film or other light absorbing materials disclosedherein, for example without limitation) on the outer surface (surfaceopposite the distribution lightguide 1501) and wraps around one or moresurfaces of the distribution lightguide 1501 such that stray light isnot transmitted from the light emitting device 1600 in the regions wherethe repositionable cladding layer 1601 is optically coupled to thedistribution lightguide 1501.

FIG. 16B is a perspective view of one embodiment of a distributed frontillumination system 1602 comprising the light input coupler 101, thedistribution lightguide 1501, the repositionable cladding layers 1601,and the output coupling lightguides 1502 disposed to receive light fromthe distribution lightguide 1501 and direct the light toward areflective display 1604. In one embodiment, the reflective display 1604includes one or more of the following: a sign, a graphic, a printedlabel, a bistable display, an electrophoretic display, a MEMS display, apassive display, and an active display. In the embodiment shown in FIG.16B, the reflective display 1604 is a bistable reflective display withdark characters on a light background. In this embodiment, the lightemitted from the light emitting region 1605 of the output couplinglightguide 1502 is directed toward the reflective display 1604 andsignificantly reflects back in the lighter regions such that theluminance contrast ratio of the light to dark regions is high and thereflective display 1604 can be readily discerned or read.

FIG. 16C is a perspective view of one embodiment of a distributed backillumination system 1607 comprising the light input coupler 101, thedistribution lightguide 1501, the repositionable cladding layers 1601,and the output coupling lightguides 1502 disposed to receive light fromthe distribution lightguide 1501 and direct the light toward atransmissive display 1606 (such as a bistable liquid crystal display).In one embodiment, the transmissive display includes one or more of thefollowing: a sign, graphic, a printed label, a bistable display, apassive display, and an active display. In the embodiment shown in FIG.16C, the transmissive display 1606 is a passive printed label with darkcharacters on a light background. The light emitted from the lightemitting region 1605 of the output coupling lightguide 1502 is directedtoward the transmissive display 1606 and the transmissive display 1606transmits light in the low absorption regions (lighter regions) andabsorbs light in the high absorption regions (darker regions) such thatthe luminance contrast ratio of the light to dark regions is high andthe label can be readily discerned. For example, the distributed backillumination system 1607 may be used on a shelf or display in a store toprovide product and/or price information by illuminating the label.

FIG. 17A is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingpoint of purchase (POP) display 1700 comprising printed indicia 1702 ona surface layer 1730 of the POP display 1700. In this embodiment, thelight emitting indicia 1001 emits light from the lightguide 106 thatvisible through the surface layer 1730 of the POP display 1700. Forexample, in one embodiment, the POP display 1700 comprises a suitablematerial, such as cardboard, with printed indicia and the lightguideregion 106 comprises printed light extraction features (as shown in FIG.104) on a surface of the lightguide region 106 such that the lightemitted from the lightguide region 106 passes through the cardboard andis visible. In another embodiment, the lightguide region 106 is disposedon an outer surface of the POP display 1700 and the light emittingindicia 1001 is visible directly when illuminated.

FIG. 17B is a perspective view of one embodiment of a point of purchase(POP) display 1703 comprising the printed indicia 1702 on the surfacelayer 1730 and the luminous light emitting indicia 1001 emitting lightfrom the first lightguide region 106 and visible through the surfacelayer 1730. In this embodiment, a second input coupler 1704 comprising alight source (not shown in FIG. 17B) and a second lightguide 1705comprising a first light emitting region 1706 and a second lightemitting region 1708 disposed to emit light through apertures 1707 inthe POP display 1703 toward an interior region 1760 of the POP display1703. The interior region 1760 is configured to contain one or moreproducts for display). For example, in one embodiment, the light emittedfrom the first light emitting region 1706 and the light emitted from thesecond light emitting region 1708 illuminate the products such that theproducts are more clearly visible, the packaging distinct or morelegible, and/or enhanced through supplemental illumination. In anotherembodiment, the POP display 1703 provides distribution of light throughthe first light emitting region 1706 and the second light emittingregion 1708 to be coupled into and emitted from a product.

FIG. 17C is a perspective view of the POP display 1703 shown in FIG. 17Bfurther comprising one or more products 1710 with packaging (twoproducts 1710 are shown in FIG. 17C). The POP display 1703 includes alightguide 1705 having a first light emitting region 1706 and a secondlight emitting region 1708 on a first side of the POP display 1703. Inthe embodiment shown, the light emitted from the first light emittingregions 1706 and the light emitted from the second light emitting region1708 passes into the products 1710 and is emitted from the products 1710in the form of light emitting indicia 1715. For example, as shown inFIG. 17C, the products 1715 are boxes of candy that comprise couplinglightguides (shown in FIG. 17D) that receive light from the first lightemitting region 1706 or second light emitting region 1708 and transmitthe light out of the product 1710 in the form of light emitting indicia1715. In this manner, the product can appear luminous without requiringany light sources or power supplies within the product. Other products,for example, include without limitation, food or grocery items incardboard, paper, metal, or plastic packages, toothpaste products,cereal products, potato chip bags, goods, cereals, soft drinks in cans,water in bottles. The coupling lightguides (shown in FIG. 17D) for theproducts/packages may be placed in a range of packaging materials andmay be disposed on the inner region of the package, the outer region ofthe packaging, or within the packaging material.

FIG. 17D is a perspective view of the POP display 1703 comprisingproducts 1710 shown in FIG. 17C and illustrating a path of light throughthe POP display 1703 and products 1710. The products 1710 comprisecoupling lightguides 1709 and a lightguide 1711. Light 1712 from thelight input coupler 1704 propagates through the lightguide 1705 in the+y direction and then in the +z direction and exits the lightguide 1705at the second light emitting region 1708 propagating in the −y directionand is coupled into coupling lightguides 1709 in the product 1710. Thelight 1712 then propagates through the coupling lightguides 1709 in theproduct 1710 in the −x direction and is directed into the lightguide1711 propagating in the −y direction within the product 1710 until thelight is extracted from the lightguide 1711 by light extraction features(not shown) and exits the product 1710 with a component in the −xdirection in the form of light emitting indicia 1714. Light 1713 fromthe light input coupler 1704 propagates through the lightguide 1705 andexits the lightguide 1705 at the first light emitting region 1706 and iscoupled into coupling lightguides 1709 in the product 1710. The light1713 then propagates through the coupling lightguides 1709 in theproduct 1710 and within the lightguide 1711 within the product 1710until the light is emitted from individual light extraction features(not shown) on the lightguide 1711 that collectively form light emittingindicia 1715.

FIG. 17E is a perspective view of the product 1710 shown in FIG. 17Ccomprising printed indicia 1716 on one or more outer surfaces of thepackaging 1719 and a stacked array of coupling lightguides 1709 with thelight input surface 103 comprising the light input edges 204 of thecoupling lightguides 1709 disposed to receive light and transmit thelight into the lightguide 1711 positioned within an interior region ofthe packaging 1719 of the product 1710. The light is then extracted fromthe lightguide 1711 to exit the product 1710 by light extractionfeatures (not shown) on, within, or optically coupled to the lightguide1711 where the light emitted from the packaging 1719 and product 1710due to the light extraction features collectively form light emittingindicia 1717.

FIG. 17F is a perspective view of one embodiment of a product 1720disposed to receive light 1712 from a light emitting device 1703 (shownin FIG. 17C) with a component in the −y direction, transmit the lightthrough a lightguide 1722 in the −x direction, and then the −y directionto a second region 1780 of the product 1720 where the light is emittedwith a component in the −x direction in the form of light emittingindicia 1716. The product 1720 can be used in the POP display 1703illustrated in FIGS. 17C and 17D. As shown in FIG. 17F, light 1712 (alsoshown in FIG. 17D) from the light emitting region 1708 (shown in FIG.17D) of the lightguide 1705 in the POP display 1703 propagating in the−y direction is transmitted through an input window 1721 in thepackaging 1719, transmitted through the lightguide 1722 and isreflectively scattered in the +y direction and −x direction from one ofthe light scattering features 1724 back into the lightguide 1722 in awaveguide condition. The light 1712 propagates through the lightguide1722 in the −x direction and then the +y direction and exits a differentside 1780 of the product 1720 than the light entered with a directionalcomponent in the −x direction when the light reaches a light extractionfeature (not shown), forming part of the light emitting indicia 1716.

FIG. 17G is a perspective view of one embodiment of a first product 1728and a second product 1729 stacked upon each other and disposed toreceive light 1712 from the POP display 1703 (shown in FIG. 17D)propagating in the −y direction. The first product 1728 and the secondproduct 1729 comprise lightguides 1722 disposed to receive light passingthrough a light input window 1721 in the packaging 1719, and the lightoutput windows 1726 in the packaging 1719. Light 1727 propagating in the−y direction incident on the first product 1728 passes through the inputwindow 1721, through the lightguide 1722 in a region 1723 without lightextraction features, passes through the first product 1728 and exits thefirst product 1728 through the light output window 1726 in the packaging1719. This light 1727 propagating in the −y direction is transmittedthrough an input window 1721 in the packaging 1719 of the second product1729, transmitted through the lightguide 1722 and is reflectivelyscattered in the +y direction and −x direction from one of the lightscattering features 1724 back into the lightguide 1722 in a waveguidecondition. The light 1727 propagates through the lightguide 1722 in the−x direction and then the +y direction and exits a different side of thefirst product 1728 than the light 1727 entered with a directionalcomponent in the −x direction when the light 1727 reaches a lightextraction feature (not shown), it is extracted from the second product1729 where the light collectively combines from other light scatteringfeatures to form part of the light emitting indicia 1716. The light 1727propagating in the −y direction received from the POP display 1703(shown in FIG. 17D) propagating in the −y direction is transmittedthrough an input window 1721 in the packaging 1719 of the first product1729, transmitted through the lightguide 1722 and is reflectivelyscattered in the +y direction and −x direction from one of the lightscattering features 1724 back into the lightguide 1722 in a waveguidecondition. The light 1712 then propagates through the lightguide in the−x direction and then the +y direction and exits a different side of thefirst product 1729 than the light 1712 entered with a directionalcomponent in the −x direction when the light 1712 reaches a lightextraction feature (not shown), it is extracted from the second product1729 where the light collectively combines from other light scatteringfeatures to form part of the light emitting indicia 1716 of the firstproduct 1728. In another embodiment, the lightguide 1722 is disposed onan outer surface 1760 of the packaging 1719 in the region of the lightemitting indicia 1716.

FIG. 18 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 1800comprising two light input couplers with two arrays of couplinglightguides 104 and two light sources 102 on the same edge in the middleregion oriented in opposite directions. As shown in FIG. 18, the +y and−y edges of the light emitting device 1800 may be very close to theborder of the light emitting region 108 because the light sources 102,including LEDs, do not extend past the bottom edge of the light emittingregion 108 as the light source 102 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1does. Thus, a TV for example, illuminated by the light emitting device1800 of shown in FIG. 18 could have a light emitting display areaextending less than 2 millimeters from the edge of the light emittingdevice 1800 in the +y and −y directions. In the embodiment shown in FIG.18, the light source 102 is disposed substantially in a middle region ofthe light emitting region 108 between the +y and −y edges of the lightemitting device 1800.

FIG. 19 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 1900comprising one light input coupler with coupling lightguides 104 foldedin the +y and −y directions and then folded in the +z direction (out ofthe page in the drawing) toward a single light source 102.

FIG. 20A is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting backlight2000 emitting red, green, and blue light comprising a red light inputcoupler 2001, a green light input coupler 2002, and a blue light inputcoupler 2003 disposed to receive light from a red light source 2004, agreen light source 2005, and a blue light source 2006, respectively.Light from each of the light input couplers 2001, 2002, and 2003 isextracted from the lightguide region 106 in a light emitting region 108by light extraction features 2007 and exits the light emitting device2000. The pattern of the light extraction features 2007 may vary in oneor more of the following: size, space, spacing, pitch, shape, andlocation within the x-y plane or throughout a thickness of the lightemitting region 108 in the z direction.

FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 2020 comprising the light input coupler 101 (shown inphantom lines) and the lightguide region 106 with a reflective opticalelement 2021 disposed adjacent a surface 2050 of the cladding region 602and a light source 2022 emitting light with a directional component inthe +y direction disposed to direct light into the coupling lightguides104. Light from the light source 2022 propagates through the couplinglightguides 104 within the light input coupler 101 and through the lightmixing region 105 and the light emitting region 108 within thelightguide region 106. A first portion of light 2024 reaching the lightextraction features 1007 is redirected toward the reflecting opticalelement 2021 at an angle such that the light escapes the lightguideregion 106, reflects from the reflective optical element 1101, passesback through the lightguide region 106, and exits the lightguide region106 through the light emitting surface 2023 within the light emittingregion 108. A second portion of light 2025 reaching the light extractionfeatures 1007 is redirected toward the light emitting surface 2023 at anangle less than a critical angle, escapes the lightguide region 106, andexits the lightguide region 106 through the light emitting surface 2023within the light emitting region 108.

FIG. 20C is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 2030 comprising a light output optical element 2031 opticallycoupled to the film-based lightguide 107 using an adhesive 2032. Light2033 from the light source 102 totally internally reflects within thelight output optical element 2031 and transmits through the adhesive2002 and into the film-based lightguide 107 where the light totallyinternally reflects and exits the film-based lightguide 107 through thelight emitting surface region 108. In another embodiment, the lightoutput optical element 2031 and the film-based lightguide 107 directlyadhere and optically couple to each other due to inherent adhesionproperties of the light output optical element 2031 and/or inherentadhesion properties of the film-based lightguide 107.

FIG. 20D is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 2040 comprising a light output optical element 2041 opticallycoupled to the film-based lightguide 107 using an adhesive 2042 with areflective optical element 2045 disposed on an end 2060 of the lightoutput optical element 2041 opposite the light source 102 and a secondreflective optical element 2044 on the input edge 2061 with the lightsource 102. Light 2043 from the light source 102 totally internallyreflects within the light output optical element 2041 and transmitsthrough the adhesive 2042 and into the film-based lightguide 107 wherethe light totally internally reflects and exits the film-basedlightguide 107 through the light emitting region 108. Light 2046 fromthe light source 102 totally internally reflects within the light outputoptical element 2041, reflects from the reflective optical element 2045toward the second reflective optical element 2044 at the input edge2061, total internally reflects off of edges and surfaces, as shown inFIG. 20D, and transmits through the adhesive 2042 and into thefilm-based lightguide 107 where the light totally internally reflectsand exits the film-based lightguide 107 through the light emittingregion 108.

FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device 11200 comprising a stacked array of couplinglightguides 104 comprising core regions 601 and cladding regions 602.The core regions 601 comprise vertical light turning optical edges11201. The cladding regions 602 in the inner regions of the stack ofcoupling lightguides 104 do not extend to the vertical light turningoptical edges 11201 and the core regions 601 are not separated by acladding layer in the region near the light source 102. The light source102 and the light collimating optical element 11203 are disposed at alight input surface 11206 on the larger (non-lateral edge) surface ofthe stack coupling lightguides 104. Light 11207 from the light source102 is collimated by the reflecting surface 11102 of the lightcollimating optical element 11203, enters the stack of couplinglightguides 104 and the optical axis is rotated toward the +x directionby the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 of the core regions601 of the coupling lightguides. Light 11207 propagates in the coreregions 601 near the light source and totally internally reflects in acore region when encountering an air gap 11208 or cladding layer 602. Inone embodiment, the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 areformed by cutting the stack of core regions 601 at the angle 11205 fromthe normal 11204 to the surface of the stack of coupling lightguides104. In another embodiment, the outer cladding region 602 near the lightsource 102 does not extend to the region between the light collimatingoptical element 11203 and the stack of core regions 601 near the lightcollimating optical element 11203. In another embodiment, the claddinglayer 602 near the light collimation element 11203 is a low refractiveindex optical adhesive that bonds the light collimating optical element11203 to the stack of coupling lightguides 104.

FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device 11300 comprising a stacked array of couplinglightguides 104 comprising core regions 601 and cladding regions 602.The core regions 601 comprise vertical light turning optical edges 11201and vertical light collimating optical edges 11301. The cladding regions602 in the inner regions of the stack of coupling lightguides 104 do notextend to the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 or the verticallight collimating optical edges 11301 and the core regions 601 are notseparated by a cladding layer in the region near the light source 102.The light source 102 is disposed at light input surface 11206 on thelarger (non-lateral edge) surface of the stack coupling lightguides 104.Light 11302 from the light source 102 enters the stack of couplinglightguides 104 and is collimated by the vertical light collimatingoptical edges 11301 of the core regions 601 of the coupling lightguides104. The optical axis of the light 11302 is rotated toward the +xdirection by the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 of the coreregions 601 of the coupling lightguides 104. Light 11302 propagates inthe core regions 601 near the light source and totally internallyreflects in a core region when encountering an air gap 11208 or claddinglayer 602.

FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device 11400 comprising a stacked array of couplinglightguides 104 comprising core regions 601 and cladding regions 602.The core regions 601 comprise vertical light turning optical edges 11201and vertical light collimating optical edges 11301. The cladding regions602 in the inner regions of the stack of coupling lightguides 104 do notextend to the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 or the verticallight collimating optical edges 11301 and the core regions 601 are notseparated by a cladding layer in the region near the light source 102. Acoupling lightguide 104 near the vertical light collimating opticaledges 11301 comprises a cavity 11401. A light source 102 is disposedwithin the cavity 11401 and light 11402 from the light source 102 entersthe stack of coupling lightguides 104 and is collimated by the verticallight collimating optical edges 11301 of the core regions 601 of thecoupling lightguides 104. The optical axis of the light 11402 is rotatedtoward the x direction by the vertical light turning optical edges 11201of the core regions 601 of the coupling lightguides. Light 11402propagates in the core regions 601 near the light source and totallyinternally reflects in a core region when encountering an air gap 11208or cladding layer 602. In this embodiment, the cavity 11401 can assistin registration and increase optical efficiency of the light emittingdevice 11400. The cavity 11401 can serve as an alignment cavity toposition the light source 102 at a predetermined location (x, y, and +zregistration) relative to the vertical light collimating optical edges11301 and/or light turning optical edges 11201. By placing the lightsource 102 within the cavity of a coupling lightguide 104, the lightflux from the light source 102 directed into the coupling lightguides104 and remaining in the coupling lightguides 104 in a total internalreflection condition in areas with the cladding regions 602, or near thelightguide region (not shown) further in the +x direction, is increasedrelative to a light source disposed at the larger outer surface. Inanother embodiment, the cavity 11401 extends through two or more orcoupling lightguides 104 or core regions 601 of coupling lightguides104.

FIG. 24 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 11800 comprising coupling lightguides 104 that are opticallycoupled to a surface of a lightguide 107. In one embodiment, thecoupling lightguides optically coupled to the lightguide have athickness less than one selected from the group: 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and5% of the thickness of the lightguide.

FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device 2500 comprising a stack of coupling lightguides104 disposed adjacent a light source 102 with a substrate 2502 and acollimating optical element 2501. In one embodiment, the collimatingoptical element 2501 is a lens which refracts and totally internallyreflects light to collimate light from a light emitting diode.

FIG. 26 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 2600 comprising a light source 102 and coupling lightguides 104oriented at an angle to the x, y, and z axes. The coupling lightguides104 are oriented at a first redirection angle 2601 from the +z axis(light emitting device optical axis), a second redirection angle 2602from the +x direction, and a third redirection angle 2603 from the +ydirection. In another embodiment, the light source optical axis and thecoupling lightguides 104 are oriented at a first redirection angle 2601from the +z axis (light emitting device optical axis), a secondredirection angle 2602 from the +x direction, and a third redirectionangle 2603 from the +y direction.

FIG. 27 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 11000 comprisinga film-based lightguide 107 comprising an array of coupling lightguides104 wherein each coupling lightguide 104 further comprises a sub-arrayof coupling lightguides 11001 with a smaller width in the y direction.

FIG. 28 is a perspective top view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 11100 comprising the lightguide 11000 of FIG. 27 wherein thecoupling lightguides 104 are folded such that they overlap and arealigned substantially parallel to the y direction, and the sub-array ofcoupling lightguides 11001 are subsequently folded such that theyoverlap and are aligned substantially parallel to the x direction anddisposed to receive light from the light source 102, and couple thelight into the coupling lightguides 104 that couple the light into thefilm-based lightguide 107.

FIGS. 29A, 29B, 29C, 29D, and 29E illustrate one embodiment of a methodof manufacturing a lightguide 107 with continuously coupled lightguides104 using a light transmitting film. FIG. 29A is a perspective view ofone embodiment of a lightguide 107 continuously coupled to each couplinglightguide 104 in an array of coupling lightguides 104. The array ofcoupling lightguides 104 comprise linear fold regions 2902 substantiallyparallel to each other which further comprise relative positionmaintaining elements 2901 disposed within the linear fold regions 2902.In the configuration shown in FIG. 29A, the array of couplinglightguides are substantially within the same plane (x-y plane) as thelightguide 107 and the coupling lightguides 104 are regions of a lighttransmitting film. The total width, W_(t), of the array of the couplinglightguides in a direction substantially parallel to the linear foldregions 2902 is shown in FIG. 29A. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 29A,the coupling lightguides have substantially the same width, W_(s), in adirection 2906 parallel to the linear fold region. The direction 2903normal to a film surface 2980 at the linear fold region 2902 is shown inFIG. 29A.

As shown in FIG. 29B, the linear fold regions 2902 are translated withrespect to each other from their locations shown in FIG. 29A. Thedistance between the two linear fold regions 2902 of the array ofcoupling lightguides 104 in a direction 2903 (parallel to the zdirection) perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface 2980 atthe linear fold region 2902 is increased. In addition, as shown in FIG.29B, the distance between the linear fold regions 2902 of the array ofcoupling lightguides 104 in a direction (y direction) substantiallyperpendicular to the direction 2906 of the linear fold region 2902 andparallel to the light transmitting film surface 2980 (x-y plane) at thelinear fold region 2902 is decreased.

As shown in FIG. 29C, the linear fold regions 2902 are translated withrespect to each other from their locations shown in FIG. 29B. In FIG.29C, the distance between the linear fold regions 2902 of the array ofcoupling lightguides 104 in a direction (x direction) substantiallyparallel to the direction 2906 of the linear fold regions 2902 andparallel to the light transmitting film surface 2980 at the linear foldregions 2902 is increased.

FIG. 29D illustrates further translation of the linear fold regions 2902where the distance between the linear fold regions 2902 of the array ofcoupling lightguides 104 in a direction (x direction) substantiallyparallel to the direction 2906 of the linear fold regions 2902 andparallel to the light transmitting film surface 2980 at the linear foldregions 2902 is increased and the distance between the linear foldregions 2902 of the array of coupling lightguides 104 in a direction2903 perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface 2980 at thelinear fold region 2902 is decreased.

As shown in FIG. 29E, the linear fold regions 2902 are translated withrespect to each other from their locations shown in FIG. 29D. In FIG.29E, the distance between the linear fold regions 2902 of the array ofcoupling lightguides 104 in a direction (x direction) substantiallyparallel to the direction 2906 of the linear fold regions 2902 andparallel to the light transmitting film surface 2980 at the linear foldregions 2902 is further increased from that of FIG. 29D and the distancebetween the linear fold regions 2902 of the array of couplinglightguides 104 in a direction 2903 perpendicular to the lighttransmitting film surface 2980 at the linear fold region 2902 is furtherdecreased over that of FIG. 29D.

As a result of the translations of the linear fold regions 2902 as shownFIGS. 29A-e, corresponding edges 2981 of the linear fold regions 2902are separated by a distance, D. In one embodiment, the distance, D, isat least equal to the total width, W_(t), of the array of the couplinglightguides 104 in a direction substantially parallel to the linear foldregion 2902 In another embodiment, D=N×W_(s), where the array ofcoupling lightguides 104 comprise a number, N, of coupling lightguidesthat have substantially the same width, W_(s), in a direction parallelto the linear fold region 2902. The array of coupling lightguides 104disposed substantially one above another may be cut along a firstdirection 2904 to provide an array of input edges of the couplinglightguides 104 that end in substantially one plane perpendicular to thelinear fold regions 2902. The cut may be at other angles and may includeangled or arcuate cuts that can provide collimation or light redirectionof light from a light source disposed to couple light into the inputsurface of the coupling lightguides.

In a further embodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input couplerand lightguide comprises cutting the coupling lightguides such that twoinput couplers and two lightguides are formed from the same film. Forexample, by cutting the coupling lightguides along the direction 2904,the light transmitting film can be divided into two parts, eachcomprising a light input coupler and a lightguide.

FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa reflective display 3000 comprising a backlight 3028 with lightextraction features within the film-based lightguide disposed betweentwo cladding layers. The backlight 3028 is disposed between the lightmodulating pixels 3002 and the reflective element 3001 within thereflective display 3000. The light modulating pixels 3002 are disposedbetween the red, green, and blue color filters 2822 and the backlight3028. Ambient light 3003 exterior to the display 3000 propagates throughthe substrate 2823, through the color filters 2904, through the lightmodulating pixels 3002, through the backlight 3028, and reflects fromthe reflective element 3001 back through the backlight 3028, lightmodulating pixels 3002, color filter 2822, substrate 2823, and exits thereflective display 3000. Light 3004 propagating within film-basedlightguide region of the backlight 3028 is redirected by lightextraction features toward the reflective element 3001. This lightreflects back through the backlight 3028, the light modulating pixels3002, the color filters 2822 and the substrate 2823 for the colorfilters before exiting the reflective display 3000. In this embodiment,the backlight is within a reflective spatial light modulator. In oneembodiment, for example without limitation, the light modulating pixelscomprise liquid crystal material materials, the reflective displayfurther comprises polarizers, and the reflective layer is an aluminumcoating on outer surface of the cladding layer.

FIG. 31 is a top view of a further embodiment of an input coupler andlightguide 3100 with coupling lightguides 104 wherein the array ofcoupling lightguides 104 has non-parallel regions. In the embodimentillustrated in FIG. 31, the coupling lightguides 104 have tapered region3101 comprising light collimating edges 3181 and linear fold regions2902 substantially parallel to each other. In another embodiment, thecoupling lightguides 104 have non-constant separations. In anotherembodiment, a method for manufacturing a lightguide 3100 with couplinglightguides 104 having a tapered regions 3101 of the couplinglightguides 104 includes cutting the coupling lightguides in regions3103 disposed at or near the tapered region 3101 such that when thearray of coupling lightguides 104 are folded, the coupling lightguides104 overlap to form a profiled, non-planar input surface that is capableof redirecting light input through the light input surface so that thelight is more collimated. In another embodiment, the couplinglightguides 104 are not substantially parallel such that the couplinglightguides 104 have regions with angles between the edges that vary bymore than about 2 degrees.

FIG. 32 is a perspective view of a portion of the lightguide 3100 withcoupling lightguides 104 shown in FIG. 31. The coupling lightguides 104have been cut in regions 3103 (shown in FIG. 31) disposed near thetapered region 3101 and folded such that the tapered regions 3101overlap to form a profiled light collimating edges 3181 that are capableof redirecting light input through the light input surface 103 so thatthe light is more collimated in the x-y plane within the film-basedlightguide 107.

FIG. 33 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light input couplerand lightguide 3300 comprising a relative position maintaining element3301 disposed proximal to a linear fold region 2902. In this embodiment,the relative position maintaining element 3301 has a cross-sectionaledge 2971 in a plane (x-y plane as shown) parallel to the lighttransmitting film surface 2970 disposed proximal to the linear foldregion 2902 that comprises a substantially linear section 3303 orientedat an angle 3302 greater than 10 degrees to the direction 2906 parallelto the linear fold region 2902 for at least one coupling lightguide 104.In one embodiment, a substantially linear section 3303 is disposed at anangle of about 45 degrees to a direction parallel to the linear foldregion 2902.

FIGS. 34 and 35A are top views of certain embodiments of light inputcouplers and lightguides 3400 and 3500, respectively, configured suchthat a volume and/or a size of the overall device is reduced whileretaining total internal reflection (TIR) light transfer from the lightsource (not shown) into the lightguide. In FIG. 35A, the light inputcoupler and lightguide 3400 comprises bundles of coupling lightguides(3401 a, 3401 b) that are folded twice 3402 and recombined 3403 in aplane substantially parallel to the film-based lightguide 107.

FIG. 35B illustrates one embodiment of a light emitting device with alight input coupler and lightguide 3500 that comprises bundles (3401 a,3401 b) that are folded upwards 3501 (+z direction) and combined in astack 3502 that is substantially perpendicular to the plane of thefilm-based lightguide 107.

FIG. 36 is a perspective view of a region of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 11500 comprising a stacked array of coupling lightguides104 disposed within an alignment cavity 11501 of a thermal transferelement 7002 comprising extended fins 7003 that is physically coupled toa light source base 9902. The heat from a light source disposed withinthe thermal transfer element 7002 is transferred away from the lightsource by the thermal transfer element 7002. The light source isdisposed to couple light into the stack of coupling lightguides 104. Thealignment cavity 11501 can register the stack of coupling lightguides104 in they and z directions and the light source can provideregistration in the +x direction (the coupling lightguides are preventedfrom translating past the light source in the +x direction). Friction orother mechanical or adhesive means can facilitate registration andmaintaining the position of the stacks relative to the light source 102in the −x direction (prevent the stack from pulling out of the cavity).In another embodiment, an internal ridge or end of the cavity 11501stops the lateral movement of the coupling lightguides 104 in the +xdirection and provides a predetermined minimum distance between thelight source 102 and the stack of coupling lightguides 104 (which canreduce the maximum operating temperature of the ends of the couplinglightguides 104 due to heat from the light source).

FIG. 37 is a side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 11600 comprising a stacked array of coupling lightguides 104disposed within an alignment cavity 11501 of an alignment guide 11601comprising an extended alignment arm 11602. The stack of couplinglightguides 104 can be inserted into the alignment cavity that registersthe light input surface of the coupling lightguides 104 in the x and zdirections. The inner end 11603 of the alignment cavity 11501 canprovide a stop for the coupling lightguides 104 that sets a minimumseparation distance for the stack of coupling lightguides 104 and thelight source 102. Light 3701 from the light source 102 is directed intothe coupling lightguide 104.

FIG. 38 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 3800 comprising coupling lightguides 104 that are opticallycoupled to the edge of a lightguide 107. In one embodiment, the couplinglightguides optically coupled to the edge of the lightguide have athickness less than one selected from the group: 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%,50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, and 10% of the thickness of the lightguide.

FIG. 39 illustrates one embodiment of an un-folded top view of a lightemitting device 3900 comprising a light input coupler 3908 comprising alightguide 3903 and a single coupling lightguide comprising fold regions3909 defined by fold lines 3902, a reflective edge 3904 and a lightinput edge 204 disposed between a first reflective surface edge 3906 anda second reflective surface edge 3907 within a single film. The film ofthe light input coupler 3908 is folded along fold lines 3902 such thatthe fold regions 3909 substantially overlay each other and the lightsource 102 couples light into each light input edge 204. The opticalsystem is shown “un-folded” in FIG. 39 and the light sources 3901correspond to the location of the light source 102 relative to the foldregions 3909 when the film is folded. As shown in FIG. 39, light 3905from the light source 102 (and the light sources 3901 when folded)totally internally reflects from the reflective edge 3904 which isangled toward the light emitting region 108 of the lightguide 3903. Thefirst reflective surface 3906 and the second reflective surface 3907 areformed by shaped edges (angled or curved for example) in the film andserve to redirect a portion of light from the light sources (102 and3901) into the lightguide at angles which totally internally reflectfrom the angled edge 3904.

FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the lightguide 3903 and the light inputcoupler 3908 comprising a light source 102 and coupling lightguide ofFIG. 39 as the film is being folded along the fold lines 3902 in thedirection 4001 represented in the figure. The fold regions 3909substantially layer upon each other such that the light input edges 204stack and align to receive light from the light source 102.

FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the lightguide 3903 and the light inputcoupler 3908 of FIG. 39 folded and comprising a coupling lightguideformed from overlapping fold regions 3909 of a film lightguide 3903. Thefold regions 3909 substantially layer upon each other such that thelight input edges 204 stack and align to receive light from the lightsource 102.

FIG. 42 is an elevated view of an embodiment of a film-based lightguide4205 comprising a first light emitting region 4201 disposed to receivelight from a first set of coupling lightguides 4203 and a second lightemitting region 4202 disposed to receive light from a second set ofcoupling lightguides 4204. The light emitting regions are separated fromeach other in the y direction by a distance “SD” 4206. The free ends ofthe sets of coupling lightguides 4203 and 4204 can be folded toward the−y direction such that both sets substantially overlap as shown in FIG.43.

FIG. 43 is an elevated view of the film-based lightguide 4205 of FIG. 42wherein the coupling lightguides 4203 are folded such that theysubstantially overlap and form a light input surface 103. In thisembodiment, a single light source (not shown) may illuminate twoseparate light emitting regions within the same film. In anotherembodiment, two separated film-based lightguides have separate lightinput couplers which are folded and the light input edges are broughttogether to form a stack of coupling lightguides disposed to receivelight from a light source. This type of configuration may be useful, forexample, where the first light emitting region backlights a LCD and thesecond light emitting region illuminates a keypad on a mobile phonedevice.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 4400 with optical redundancy comprising two lightguides107 stacked in the z direction. Light sources and coupling lightguideswithin the holders 4402 arranged substantially adjacent in the ydirection direct light into core regions 601 such that light 4401 isoutput from the light emitting region 108 from each lightguide 107.

FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 4500 with a first light source 4501 and a second lightsource 4502 thermally coupled to a first thermal transfer element 4505(such as a metal core printed circuit board (PCB)) and thermallyinsulated (physically separated by an air gap in the embodiment shown)from a second thermal transfer element 4506 that is thermally coupled toa third light source 4503 and a fourth light source 4504. The firstlight source 4501 and the third light source 4503 are disposed to couplelight into a first light input coupler 4507 and the second light source4502 and the fourth light source 4504 are disposed to couple light intoa second light input coupler 4508. In this embodiment, the heatdissipated from the first light source 4501 is dissipated along thefirst thermal transfer element 4505 in the x direction toward the secondlight source 4502 such that heat from the first light source 4501 doesnot substantially increase the temperature at the third light source4503 by conduction.

FIG. 46 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 4600comprising a plurality of coupling lightguides 104 with a plurality offirst reflective surface edges 3906 and a plurality of second reflectivesurface edges 3907 within each coupling lightguide 104. In theembodiment shown in FIG. 46, three light sources 102 are disposed tocouple light into respective light input edges 204 at least partiallydefined by respective first reflective surface edges 3906 and secondreflective surface edges 3907.

FIG. 47 is an enlarged perspective view of the coupling lightguides 104of FIG. 46 with the light input edges 204 disposed between the firstreflective surface edges 3906 and the second reflective surface edges3907. The light sources 102 are omitted in FIG. 47 for clarity.

FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional side view of the coupling lightguides 104and the light source 102 of one embodiment of a light emitting device4800 comprising index matching regions 4801 disposed between the coreregions 601 of the coupling lightguides 104 in the index-matched region4803 of the coupling lightguides 104 disposed proximate the light source102. The light source 102 is positioned adjacent the couplinglightguides 104 and the high angle light 4802 from the light source 102propagates through the coupling lightguides 104 and the index matchingregion 4801 and is coupled into the coupling lightguides 104 at alocation distant from the light input edge 204 of the couplinglightguides 104. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 48, the light from thelight source 102 is coupled into more coupling lightguides because thelight, for example at 60 degrees from the optical axis 4830 of the lightsource 102 propagates into a core region 601 near the light source,propagates through the index matching region 4801, and totallyinternally reflects in a core region 601 further away from the lightsource 102. In this embodiment, a portion of the light is coupled intothe outer coupling lightguides 104 that would not normally receive thelight if there were cladding present at or near the light input edge204.

FIG. 49 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguide 4900comprising an array of tapered coupling lightguides 4902 formed bycutting regions in a lightguide 107. The array of tapered couplinglightguides 4902 extend in a first direction (y direction as shown) adimension, d1, which is less than a parallel dimension, d2, of the lightemitting region 108 of the lightguide 107. A compensation region 4901 isdefined within the film-based lightguide 4900 which does not includetapered coupling lightguides 4902 (when the tapered coupling lightguides4902 are not folded or bent). In this embodiment, the compensationregion provides a volume having sufficient length in the y direction toplace a light source (not shown) such that the light source does notextend past the lower edge 4903 of the lightguide 107. The compensationregion 4901 of the light emitting region 108 may have a higher densityof light extraction features (not shown) to compensate for the lowerinput flux directly received from the tapered coupling lightguides 4902into the light emitting region 108. In one embodiment, a substantiallyuniform luminance or light flux output per area in the light emittingregion 108 is achieved despite the lower level of light flux received bythe light extraction features within the compensation region 4901 of thelight emitting region by, for example, increasing the light extractionefficiency or area ratio of the light extraction features to the areawithout light extraction features within one or more regions of thecompensation region, increasing the width of the light mixing regionbetween the coupling lightguides and the light emitting region,decreasing the light extraction efficiency or the average area ratio ofthe light extraction features to the areas without light extractionfeatures in one or more regions of the light emitting region outside thecompensation region, and any suitable combination thereof.

FIG. 50 is a perspective top view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 5000 comprising the film-based lightguide 4900 shown in FIG. 49and a light source 102. In this embodiment, tapered coupling lightguides4902 are folded in the −y direction toward the light source 102 suchthat the light input edges 204 of the coupling lightguides 4902 aredisposed to receive light from the light source 102. Light from thelight source 102 propagating through the tapered coupling lightguides4902 exits the tapered coupling lightguides 4902 and enters into thelight emitting region 108 generally propagating in the +x directionwhile expanding in the +y and −y directions. In the embodiment shown inFIG. 50, the light source 102 is disposed within the region that did notcomprise a tapered coupling lightguide 4902 and the light source 102does not extend in the y direction past a lower edge 4903 of the lightemitting device 5000. By not extending past the lower edge 4903, thelight emitting device 5000 has a shorter overall width in the ydirection. Furthermore, the light emitting device 5000 can maintain theshorter dimension, d1, in they direction (shown in FIG. 49) when thetapered coupling lightguides 4902 and the light source 102 are foldedunder (−z direction and then +x direction) the light emitting region 108along the fold (or bend) line 5001.

FIG. 51 is a perspective view of a light emitting device 5100 comprisingthe light emitting device 5000 shown in FIG. 50 with the taperedcoupling lightguides 4902 and light source 102 shown in FIG. 50 folded(−z direction and then +x direction) behind the light emitting region108 along the fold (or bend) line 5001. As can be seen from FIG. 51, adistance between the lower edge of the light emitting region 108 and thecorresponding edge of the light emitting device 4903 in the −y directionis relatively small. When this distance is small, the light emittingregion 108 can appear borderless, and for example, a display comprisinga backlight where the light emitting region 108 extends very close tothe edge of the backlight can appear frameless or borderless.

FIG. 52 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguide 5200comprising an array of angled, tapered coupling lightguides 5201 formedby cutting regions in a lightguide 107 at a first coupling lightguideorientation angle, y, defined as the angle between the couplinglightguide axis 5202 and the direction 5203 parallel to the majorcomponent of the direction of the coupling lightguides 5201 to the lightemitting region 108 of the lightguide 107. By cutting the taperedcoupling lightguides 5201 within the lightguide 107 at a first couplinglightguide orientation angle, the angled, tapered lightguides 5201, whenfolded, provide volume with a dimension of sufficient length to place alight source such that the light source does not extend past the loweredge 4903 of the film-based lightguide 5200.

FIG. 53 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 5300 comprising the film-based lightguide 5200 shown in FIG. 52and a light source 102. As shown in FIG. 53, the angled, taperedcoupling lightguides 5201 are folded in the −y direction toward thelight source 102 such that the light input surfaces 204 of the stackedcoupling lightguides 5201 are disposed to receive light from the lightsource 102.

FIG. 54 is a top view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguide 5400comprising a first array of angled, tapered coupling lightguides 5201formed by cutting regions in the lightguide 107 at a first couplinglightguide orientation angle 5406 and a second array of angled, taperedcoupling lightguides 5402 formed by cutting regions in the lightguide107 at a second coupling lightguide orientation angle 5407. By cuttingthe first array of coupling lightguides 5201 and the second array ofcoupling lightguides 5402 within the lightguide 107 at the firstcoupling lightguide orientation angle 5406 and the second couplinglightguide orientation angle 5407, respectively, the angled, taperedlightguides 5201 and 5402, when folded, provide volume with a dimensionof sufficient length to place one or more light sources 102 such thatthe one or more light sources 102 do not extend past the lower edge 4903of the lightguide 107.

FIG. 55 is a perspective top view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 5500 comprising the film-based lightguide 5400 shown in FIG. 54and a light source 102 emitting light in the +y direction and −ydirection (such as two LEDs disposed back to back). The first array ofcoupling lightguides 5201 are folded in the −y direction toward thelight source 102 such that each light input surface 204 is disposed toreceive light from the light source 102 and the second array of couplinglightguides 5402 are folded in the +y direction toward the light source102 such that each light input surface 204 is disposed to receive lightfrom the light source 102. The first and second array of couplinglightguides 5201 and 5402 are angled away from the center of the lightemitting region 108 to allow the light source 102 to be disposed in thecentral region of the lightguide 107 (in the y direction) such that thelight source 102 does not extend past the lower edge 4903 or upper edge5401 of the lightguide 107. The light source 102, the first array ofcoupling lightguides 5201, and the second array of coupling lightguides5402 may be folded under the light emitting region 108 along the fold(or bend) axis 5001 such that the light emitting device 5500 issubstantially edgeless or has light emitting regions extending veryclose to the edges of the light emitting device in the x-y plane.

FIG. 56 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 5600comprising the lightguide 107, the coupling lightguides 104 and a mirror5601 functioning as a light redirecting optical element including acurved or arcuate reflective surface or region disposed to redirectlight from the light source 102 into the coupling lightguides 104.Within the coupling lightguides 104, the light propagates through thecoupling lightguides 104 into the lightguide 107 and exits thelightguide 107 in the light emitting region 108.

FIG. 57 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 5700comprising the lightguide 107, the coupling lightguides 104 and a mirror5701. In this embodiment, mirror 5701 includes two or more curved orarcuate surfaces or regions disposed to redirect light from one or morelight sources, such as the two light sources 102 shown in FIG. 57, intothe coupling lightguides 104 where the mirror is functioning as abidirectional light turning optical element. Within the couplinglightguides 104, the light propagates through the coupling lightguides104 into the lightguide 107 and exits the lightguide 107 in the lightemitting region 108. As shown in FIG. 57, the light sources 102 aredisposed to emit light with a corresponding light source optical axis5702 substantially oriented parallel to the +x direction. The curvedmirror redirects the light into axis 5703 oriented in the +y and 5704oriented in the −y direction. In another embodiment, the optical axes ofthe light sources 102 are oriented substantially in the −z direction(into the page) and the curved mirror redirects the light into axes 5703and 5704 oriented in the +y and −y directions, respectively.

FIG. 58 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 5800comprising the lightguide 107 and coupling lightguides 104 on oppositesides of the lightguide 107 that have been folded behind the lightemitting region 108 of the light emitting device 5800 along the lateralsides 5001 (shown by phantom lines in FIG. 58) such that the frames orborder regions (5830, 5831) between the light emitting region 108 andthe corresponding edge (5001, 5832) of the light emitting device 5800 inthe +x direction, −x direction, and +y direction are minimized and thelight emitting device 5800 can be substantially edgeless (or have asmall frame) along any desirable number of sides or edges, such as threesides or edges as shown in FIG. 58.

FIG. 59 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 5900comprising the lightguide 107, with the coupling lightguides 104 on twoorthogonal sides. In this embodiment, a light coupling optical element5901 is disposed to increase the light flux that couples from the lightsource 102 into the two sets of coupling lightguides 104. A firstportion of the light 5902 from the light source 102 will refract uponentering the light coupling optical element 5901 and be directed into awaveguide condition within the coupling lightguides 104 orientedsubstantially parallel to the x axis and a second portion of the light5903 will refract upon entering the light coupling optical element 5901and be directed into a waveguide condition within the couplinglightguides 104 oriented substantially parallel to the y axis.

FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of one embodiment ofa light emitting device 6000 comprising the lightguide 107 and the lightinput coupler 101. In this embodiment, a low contact area cover 6001 isoperatively coupled, such as physically coupled as shown in FIG. 60, tothe light input coupler 101 (or one or more elements within the lightinput coupler 101) and wraps around the light input coupler 101 and isphysically coupled or maintained in a region near the lightguide 107 bya suitable fastening mechanism, such as one or more fibers 6002 thatstitches the low contact area cover 6001 in contact or in proximity tothe lightguide 107. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 60, the stitchespass through the low contact area cover 6001 and the lightguide 107 andprovide a very small surface area in the primary direction (−xdirection) of propagation of the light within the light emitting portionof the lightguide 107. A physical coupling mechanism with a smallsurface within the lightguide reduces the scattering or reflection oflight propagating within the lightguide which can reduce opticalefficiency or cause stray light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 60, thefiber (or wire, thread, etc.) 6002 provides a low contact area physicalcoupling mechanism that has a small percentage of cross sectional areain the y-z plane (orthogonal to the optical axis direction (−xdirection) of the light within the lightguide region).

FIG. 61 shows an enlarged view of a region of the lightguide 107 shownin FIG. 60 in which the lightguide 107 is in contact with the lowcontact area cover 6001. In this embodiment, the low contact area cover6001 has convex surface features 6101 that reduce the contact area 6102in contact with the surface 6103 of the lightguide 107 disposed near thelow contact area cover 6101. In other embodiments, the low contact areacover 6001 includes any suitable feature that reduces the contact area6102.

FIG. 62 is a side view of a portion of one embodiment of a lightemitting device 6200 comprising the lightguide 107 and couplinglightguides 104 protected by a low contact area cover 6001. The lowcontact area cover 6001 is operatively coupled, such as physicallycoupled as shown in FIG. 62, by a suitable fastening mechanism, such asone or more sewn fibers 6002, to the lightguide 1007 at two or moreregions of the low contact area cover 6001 such that the low contactarea cover wraps around the coupling lightguides 104. A non-adjustablecylindrical tension rod 6205 and an adjustable cylindrical tension rod6201 are disposed substantially parallel to each other in the ydirection and are operatively coupled, such as physically coupled by twobraces 6202 that are substantially parallel to each other in the xdirection. The inner surface 6101 of the low contact area cover 6001comprises convex surface features. When the cylindrical tension rod 6201is translated in the +x direction, the inner surface 6101 of the lowcontact area cover 6001 is pulled inward in the +z and −z directionsonto the lightguide 107 and coupling lightguide 104. The surface relieffeatures on the low contact area cover 6001 reduce the amount of lightlost from within the coupling lightguide 104 and/or the lightguide 107when the cylindrical tension rod 6201 is translated in the +x direction.Translating the tension rod in the +x direction also reduces a height ofthe light emitting device 6200 parallel to the z direction by moving thecoupling lightguides 104 closer together and closer to the lightguide107. The low contact area cover 6001 also provides protection from dustcontamination and physical contact by other components coupling lightout of the coupling lightguides 104 and/or the lightguide film 107.

FIG. 63A is a perspective view of a portion of one embodiment of afilm-based lightguide 6300 comprising coupling lightguides 6301including one or more flanges. In this embodiment, each couplinglightguide 6301 includes a flange 6306 on each opposing side of an endregion 6307 of the coupling lightguides 6301 as shown in FIG. 63A. Astrap 6302 is guided through two slits 6303 formed in a base 6304 andpulled by both ends in the y directions (or in the +y direction, forexample, if the region of the strap in the −y direction is held fixedrelative to the base 6304). By tightening the strap 6302, the couplinglightguides 6301 are urged closer together and toward the base 6304 inthe z direction to facilitate securing the coupling lightguides 6301with respect to the base 6304. Also, the strap 6303 and the hook regionsformed by the flanges 6306 prevent or limit the coupling lightguides6301 from translating in the −x direction. In one embodiment, after thecoupling lightguides 6301 are urged together, the end region 6307 of thecoupling lightguides 6301 and/or the flanges 6306 are cut or otherwiseremoved along a cut axis 6305. The resulting new edge at the end of thecoupling lightguides 6301 along the cut axis 6305 can be an inputsurface or otherwise coupled to an optical element or polished to form anew input surface for the coupling lightguides 6301. The ends may bephysically or optically coupled to a window or an adhesive or epoxy suchas an Ultraviolet (UV) curable epoxy disposed between the ends of thecoupling lightguide 6301 and a high gloss fluorinated ethylene propylene(FEP) film or polished glass such that the film or glass can be removed,leaving a glossy, polished input surface made of the epoxy which alsohelps holds the ends of the coupling lightguides 6301 together. Inanother embodiment, the holding mechanism is removed after one or moreof the coupling lightguides 6301 are adhered together or to anothercomponent of the light emitting device 6300. In another embodiment, theend region 6307 is not removed from the coupling lightguides 6301 andthe ends of the coupling lightguides 6301 form the light input surface204 as shown in FIG. 63A.

FIG. 63B is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 11700 comprising a film-based lightguide 11702 and a lightreflecting optical element 11701 (shown in the FIG. 63B as transparentto illustrate the reflecting light ray) that is also a light collimatingoptical element and a light blocking element. The light reflectingoptical element 11701 has a region 11705 that extends beyond thelightguide region 106 and wraps around the stack of coupling lightguides104 and has tab regions 11703 that fold toward the light source 102 toform a light collimating element 11706. Light 11704 from the lightsource 102 is reflected off of the tab region 11703 of the lightcollimating element 11706 and becomes more collimated (smaller angularFWHM intensity) in the y-z and y-x planes and enters the input edges 204of the coupling lightguides 104. Stray light that escapes a couplinglightguide 104 is blocked (reflected or absorbed in this embodiment)from exiting directly from the stack of coupling lightguides 104 by thelight reflecting optical element 11701 that is also a light blockingoptical element. In another embodiment, the light reflecting opticalelement 11701 may be optically coupled to the film-based lightguide11702 by a pressure sensitive adhesive and the light reflecting opticalelement 11701 may diffusely reflect, specularly reflect, or acombination thereof, a portion of the incident light. In a furtherembodiment, the light reflecting optical element 11701 is a low contactarea cover or comprises surface relief features in contact with thefilm-based lightguide 11702.

FIG. 64 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a film-basedlightguide 6400 comprising a light input coupler and lightguide 107comprising a relative position maintaining element 3301 disposedproximal to a linear fold line or region. In this embodiment, therelative position maintaining element 3301 has a cross-sectional guideedge in a plane (x-y plane as shown) parallel to the lightguide 107 thatcomprises a substantially linear angled guide edge 3303 oriented at anangle 3302 about 45 degrees to the direction 6404 (+y direction)parallel to the linear fold direction (the −y direction). If thecoupling lightguide 6401 is folded without the relative positionmaintaining element 3301, the stress point for the force of the fold orbend pulling the coupling lightguide in the −y direction is at theregion 6402 near where the coupling lightguide 6401 separates from thelightguide 107. By using the relative position maintaining element 3301,when the coupling lightguide 6401 is pulled in the −y direction, theforce is distributed across a length region 6403 of the angled guideedge 3303 of the relative position maintaining element 3301. In oneembodiment, the angled guide edges 3303 on the relative positionmaintaining element 3301 reduce the likelihood of tearing the couplinglightguide 6401 and enable a lower profile (reduced height in the zdirection) because the coupling lightguide 6401 can be pulled withrelatively more force. In another embodiment, the thickness and edgeprofile of the relative position maintaining element 3301 dictates aminimum bend radius for the fold in the coupling lightguide 6401 nearthe length region 6403.

FIG. 65 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a relative positionmaintaining element 6501 comprising rounded angled edge surfaces 6502.By rounding the edge surfaces 6502, the surface area of contact with afolded film is increased to the rounded angled edge surface 6502. Byspreading the force of pull in the −y direction over a larger area ofthe coupling lightguide 6401, for example, the coupling lightguide 6401is less likely to fracture or tear.

FIG. 66 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a relative positionmaintaining element 6600 comprising rounded angled edge surfaces 6502and rounded tips 6601. By rounding the edge surfaces 6502, the surfacearea of contact with a folded film is increased to the rounded anglededge surface 6502. By spreading the force of pull in the −y directionover a larger area of the coupling lightguide 6401, for example, thecoupling lightguide 6401 is less likely to fracture or tear. By roundingthe tips 6601 of the relative position maintaining element 6600, theedge is less sharp and less likely to induce a localized stress regionin the coupling lightguide 6401 as the coupling lightguide 6401 isfolded (or bent) or while maintaining the fold or bend.

FIG. 67 is a perspective view of a portion of one embodiment of afilm-based lightguide 6700 comprising coupling lightguides 6301including one or more flanges 6306. In this embodiment, each couplinglightguide 6301 includes a flange 6306 on each opposing side of an endregion 6307 of the coupling lightguides 6301 as shown in FIG. 63. Astrap 6302 is guided through two slits 6303 in a base 6304 and pulled byboth ends in the y directions (or in the +y direction, for example, ifthe region of the strap in the −y direction is held fixed relative tothe base 6304). By tightening the strap 6303, the coupling lightguides6301 are urged closer together and toward the base 6304 in the zdirection to facilitate securing the coupling lightguides 6301 withrespect to the base 6304. Also, the strap 6303 and the hook regionsformed by the flanges 6306 prevent or limit the coupling lightguides6301 from translating in the −x direction. In one embodiment, after thecoupling lightguides 6301 are urged together, the end region 6307 of thecoupling lightguides 6301 and/or the flanges 6306 are cut or otherwiseremoved along an aperture cut 6701 by tearing or cutting the regionsbetween the aperture cut 6701 and the flanges 6306 along a cut axis6305. An edge 6702 of the aperture cut 6701 then becomes the light inputsurface of the coupling lightguides 6301. For example, in oneembodiment, the cutting device used to cut the coupling lightguides 6301from a film can also cut the light input surface on the couplinglightguides and the flanges 6306 and strap 6302 assist with assembly.

FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a portion of one embodiment of thelight emitting device 6200 illustrated in FIG. 62 comprising thelightguide 107 and light input coupler protected by a low contact areacover 6001. In this embodiment, the low contact area cover 6001 isphysically coupled by a fiber 6002 to the lightguide 1007 in two regionsof the low contact area cover 6001 by passing a fiber 6002 through thetwo layers of the low contact area cover 6001 and the lightguide 107 ina sewing or threading type action.

FIG. 69 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 6900with two light input couplers comprising coupling lightguides 104 and afirst light source 6902 and a second light source 6903 disposed onopposite sides of the lightguide 107. An aluminum bar type thermaltransfer element 6901 is disposed to thermally couple heat from thefirst light source 6902 and the second light source 6903 and dissipateheat along the length of light emitting device 6900 in the x direction.In other embodiments, one or more suitable thermal transfer elements maybe incorporated into the light emitting device 6900 to facilitatedissipating heat from the light emitting device 6900.

FIG. 70 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7000 comprising the lightguide 107, the light input coupler 101,and a light reflecting film 7004 disposed between the light inputcoupler 101 and the light emitting region 108. A circuit board 7001 forthe light source in the light input coupler 101 couples heat from thelight source to a thermal transfer element heat sink 7002 thermallycoupled to the circuit board 7001. In this embodiment, the thermaltransfer element 7002 comprises fins 7003 and is extended in the x-yplane behind the light reflecting film 7004 and the light emittingregion 108 to provide an increased surface area and occupy a volume thatdoes not extend past the edges 7030 of the lightguide 107 to conductheat away from the circuit board 7001 and the light source in the lightinput coupler 101.

FIG. 71 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7100 comprising a stack 7101 of coupling lightguides disposed toreceive light from a light collimating optical element 7102 and thelight source 102. The output surface 7103 of the light collimatingoptical element 7102 corresponds in shape to the light input surface7105 of the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides. Light 7104 from thelight source 102 is collimated by the light collimating optical element7102 and enters the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides. For example, asshown in FIG. 71, the output surface 7103 has a rectangular shapesubstantially matching the rectangular shape of the light input surface7105 of the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional side view of the light emitting device 7100shown in FIG. 71. The light 7104 collimated by the light collimatingoptical element 7102 enters the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides 7201.

FIG. 73 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 7300comprising the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides physically coupled tothe light collimating optical element 7102. The physical coupling regionof the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides defines a cavity 7331 withinwhich the light collimating optical element physical coupling region7302 is disposed. In the embodiment shown, the light collimating opticalelement physical coupling region 7302 is a ridge 7330 on the lightcollimating optical element 7102 and the physical coupling region of thestack 7101 of coupling lightguides is the region 7301 partiallysurrounding an opening or aperture cut within each coupling lightguidewhich, when stacked, forms a cavity 7331 that substantially constrainsand aligns the light collimating optical element 7102 in the x and ydirections.

FIG. 74 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7400 comprising a light turning optical element 7401 opticallycoupled using an index matching adhesive 7402 to a stack 7101 ofcoupling lightguides. Light 7403 from the light source 102 totallyinternally reflects off of the light turning surface 7405 of the lightturning optical element 7401, passes through the index matching adhesive7402 and into the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides and the opticalaxis of the light 7403 from the light source 102 is rotated. Light 7404from the light source 102 passes directly into the stack 7101 ofcoupling lightguides without reflecting off of the light turning surface7405 of the light turning optical element 7401.

FIG. 75A is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7500 comprising the light source 102 disposed adjacent a lateraledge 7503 of a stack 7501 of coupling lightguides with light turningoptical edges 7502. The light turning optical edges 7502 reflect aportion of the incident light from the light source 102 with an opticalaxis 7504 in a first direction (−y direction, for example) such that theoptical axis 7504 is rotated from the first direction by an angle 7506to an optical axis 7505 in a second direction (−x direction, forexample).

FIG. 75B is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7530 comprising the light source 102 disposed adjacent the lightinput surface edge 7507 of the extended region 7508 of the stack 7501 ofcoupling lightguides with light turning optical edges 7502. In thisembodiment, the extended region 7508 allows the light input surface edge7507 to be cut, trimmed, and/or polished (separately or as a collectionof coupling lightguides in a stack) or bonded to a light collimatingoptical element without damaging (scratching or tearing, for example) orunnecessarily coupling light out of the lateral edges 7503 of the stack7501 of coupling lightguides (with overflow adhesive, for example).

FIG. 76 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7600 comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple lightinto two light turning optical elements 7401 optically coupled using anindex matching adhesive 7402 (such as an optical adhesive for example)to two stacks 7101 of coupling lightguides.

FIG. 77 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7700 comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple lightinto a bi-directional light turning optical element 7701 opticallycoupled using index matching adhesive 7402 to two stacks 7101 ofcoupling lightguides. In this embodiment, a single bi-directional lightturning optical element 7701 divides and rotates the optical axis oflight from a single light source in a first direction (−y direction)into two different directions (−x and +x directions), replaces twounidirectional light turning optical elements, and reduces part countand associated costs.

FIG. 78 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7800 comprising two light sources 102 disposed to couple lightinto a bi-directional light turning optical element 7801 opticallycoupled using index matching adhesive 7402 to two stacks 7101 ofcoupling lightguides. In this embodiment, a single bi-directional lightturning optical element 7701 is designed to divide and rotate theoptical axes of light from two light sources from a first direction (−ydirection) to two different directions (+x and −x directions).

FIG. 79 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 7900 comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple lightinto two stacks 7501 of coupling lightguides with light turning opticaledges 7502. In this embodiment, the two stacks 7501 of couplinglightguides divide and rotate the optical axis of light from the lightsource from a first direction (−y direction) to two different directions(+x and −x directions).

FIG. 80 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 8000 comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple lightinto two overlapping stacks 7501 of coupling lightguides with lightturning optical edges 7502. In this embodiment, the two stacks 7501 ofcoupling lightguides divide and rotate the optical axis of light fromthe light source from a first direction (−y direction) to two differentdirections (+x and −x directions).

FIG. 81 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 8100 comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple lightinto the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides with light turning opticaledges 7502. In this embodiment, the stack 7501 of coupling lightguideshas tabs 8102 with tab alignment openings or apertures 8101. The tabalignment openings or apertures 8101 may be used, for example, toregister the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides (and their light inputsurface) with a pin extending from a circuit board comprising a lightsource to enable efficient light coupling into the stack 7501 ofcoupling lightguides.

FIG. 82 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 8200 comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple lightinto the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides with light turning opticaledges 7502. In this embodiment, the stack 7501 of coupling lightguidehas alignment openings or apertures 8201 in low light flux densityregions 8202. The alignment openings or apertures 8201 may be used, forexample, to register the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides to the lightsource 102 and they are located in a low light flux density region 8202such that a tab is not needed and any light loss due to the location ofthe alignment openings or apertures 8201 within the stack 7501 ofcoupling lightguides is minimized.

FIG. 83 is a top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 8300 comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple lightinto the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides with a light source overlaytab region 8301 comprising an alignment cavity 8302 for registration ofthe light input surface 8303 of the stack 7501 of coupling lightguideswith the light source 102. In this embodiment, for example, thealignment cavity 8302 within the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides maybe placed over the light source 102 such that a light input surface 8303of the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides is substantially registeredand aligned in the x and y directions with the light source 102.

FIG. 84 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 8400 comprisingthe film-based lightguide 107 having coupling lightguides 8401 withlight turning optical edges 7502. The coupling lightguides 8401 can befolded in the +z direction and translated laterally in the +x direction8402 (shown folded in FIG. 85) such that the coupling lightguides 8401stack and align above one another.

FIG. 85 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 8500comprising the lightguide 8400 shown in FIG. 84 with the couplinglightguides 8401 folded and translated to form the stack 7501 ofcoupling lightguides 8401 such that the stack 7501 extends past alateral edge 8501 of the lightguide region 106 of the film-basedlightguide 107. Light 8502 from the light source 102 has an optical axisin the −y direction that is rotated by the light turning optical edges7502 of the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides to the −x direction andthe fold in the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides 8401 redirects thecoupling lightguide orientation to the −y direction such that the lighthas an optical axis exiting the coupling lightguides in the −ydirection. The light 8502 then propagates into the lightguide region 106of the film-based lightguide 107 and exits the film-based lightguide 107in the light emitting region 108.

FIG. 86 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 8600 comprisingthe film-based lightguide 107 having coupling lightguides 8401 withlight turning optical edges 7502 and a non-folded coupling lightguide8603. The non-folded coupling lightguide 8603 has a width 8601 along theedge of the lightguide region 106 from which the coupling lightguides8401 extend and a length 8602 in the direction perpendicular to the edgewhere the coupling lightguides 8401 connect with the lightguide region106.

FIG. 87 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 8700comprising the lightguide 8600 shown in FIG. 86 with the couplinglightguides 8401 folded and translated to form the stack 7501 ofcoupling lightguides 8401 that do not extend past the lateral edge 8501(or a plane comprising the lateral edge 8501) of the lightguide region106 of the film-based lightguide 107. Light 8502 from the light source102 has an optical axis in the −y direction that is rotated by the lightturning optical edges 7502 of the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides8401 to the −x direction, and the fold in the stack 7501 of couplinglightguides 8401 redirects the coupling lightguide orientation to the −ydirection such that the light has an optical axis exiting the couplinglightguides 8401 in the −y direction. The light 8502 then propagatesinto the lightguide region 106 and exits the film-based lightguide 107in the light emitting region 108. Light 8702 from the light source 102has an optical axis in the −y direction and passes through thenon-folded coupling lightguide 8603 and into the lightguide region 106directly. In this embodiment, the non-folded coupling lightguide 8603permits the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides 8401 to not extend pastthe lateral edge 8501 of the lightguide region 106 of the film-basedlightguide 107 because the non-folded coupling lightguide 8603 does notneed to be folded and translated in the +x direction to receive lightfrom the light source 102.

FIG. 88 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 8800 comprisingthe film-based lightguide 107 having coupling lightguides 8801 withlight turning optical edges 8803 and light collimating optical edges8802. The coupling lightguides 8801 can be folded in the +z directionand translated laterally in the +x direction 8402 (shown folded in FIG.89) such that the coupling lightguides 8801 stack and align above oneanother.

FIG. 89 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 8900comprising the lightguide 8800 shown in FIG. 88 with the couplinglightguides 8801 folded and translated to form a stack 8902 of couplinglightguides 8801 such that the stack 8902 of coupling lightguides 8801extends past a lateral edge 8501 of the lightguide region 106 of thefilm-based lightguide 107. Light 8901 from the light source 102 iscollimated by the light collimating optical edges 8802 and has anoptical axis in the −y direction that is rotated by the light turningoptical edges 8803 of the stack 8902 of coupling lightguides 8801 to the−x direction and the fold in the stack 8902 of coupling lightguides 8801redirects the coupling lightguide orientation to the −y direction suchthat the light has an optical axis exiting the coupling lightguides 8801in the −y direction. The light 8901 then propagates into the lightguideregion 106 of the film-based lightguide 107 and exits the film-basedlightguide 107 in the light emitting region 108.

FIG. 90 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 9000 comprisingthe film-based lightguide 107 with coupling lightguides 9001 with lightturning optical edges 8803, light collimating optical edges 8802, andextended regions 7508. The coupling lightguides 9001 can be folded inthe +z direction and translated laterally in the +x direction 8402(shown folded in FIG. 91) such that the coupling lightguides 9001 stackand align above one another.

FIG. 91 is a top view of one embodiment of the lightguide 9000 shown inFIG. 90 with the coupling lightguides 9001 folded and translated to forma stack 9101 of coupling lightguides 9001 such that the stack 9101 ofcoupling lightguides 9001 extends past a lateral edge 8501 of thelightguide region 106 of the film-based lightguide 107. The extendedregions 7508 of the stack 9101 of the coupling lightguides 9001 extendpast the lateral edges 7503 of the coupling lightguides 9001 and thestack 9101 can be cut and/or polished along a cut line 9102 (or adheredto an optical element or light source) without damaging the lateral edge7503.

FIG. 92 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 9200 comprisingthe film-based lightguide 107 with a first set of coupling lightguides8401 and a second set of coupling lightguides 9203 with light turningoptical edges 9230 oriented to turn light in a plurality of directions,and a non-folded coupling lightguide 9201. The coupling lightguides 8401can be folded in the +z direction and translated laterally in the +xdirection 8402 (shown folded in FIG. 93) such that they stack and alignabove one another. The coupling lightguides 9203 can be folded in the +zdirection and translated laterally in the −x direction 9202 (shownfolded in FIG. 93) such that they stack and align above one another.

FIG. 93 is a perspective top view of one embodiment of a light emittingdevice 9300 comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple lightinto the lightguide 9200 shown in FIG. 92 with the first set of couplinglightguides 8401 folded and translated in the +x direction and thesecond set of coupling lightguides 9203 folded and translated in the −xdirection. In this embodiment, the first set of coupling lightguides8401 are folded and translated above the second set of couplinglightguides 9203 which are folded and translated above the non-foldedcoupling lightguide 9201 disposed to receive light from the light source102 and transmit light to the lightguide region 106.

FIG. 94A is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 9400comprising the light source 102 disposed to couple light into thelightguide 9200 shown in FIG. 92 with the first set of couplinglightguides 8401 folded and translated in the +x direction and thesecond set of coupling lightguides 9203 folded and translated in the −xdirection. In this embodiment, the first set of coupling lightguides8401 are folded and translated such that the first set of couplinglightguides 8401 are interleaved with the folded and translated secondset of coupling lightguides 9203 above the non-folded couplinglightguide 9201. In one embodiment, interleaving the couplinglightguides 8401 and 9203 near the light source 102 improves theuniformity of the light within the lightguide region 106 to facilitatepreventing or limiting undesirable variations in light source alignmentand/or light output profile.

FIG. 94B is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment ofa light emitting device 10100 comprising a stack 7501 of couplinglightguides with interior light directing edges 10101 disposed near theinput edge of the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides and interior lightdirecting edges 10104 disposed near the lightguide region of thefilm-based lightguide 107. Light 10102 from the light source 102 entersthe stack 7501 of coupling lightguides and is reflected and redirectedby the interior light directing edges 10101 disposed near the input edgesurface of the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides. Light 10103 from thelight source 102 is reflected and redirected by the interior lightdirecting edge 10101 disposed near the input edge of the stack 7501 ofcoupling lightguides and further reflected and redirected by theinterior light directing edge 10104 disposed near the lightguide regionof the film-based lightguide 107.

FIG. 95 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 9500 comprisingthe film-based lightguide 107 comprising coupling lightguides 8401having light turning optical edges 7502 with the coupling lightguidesextended in shapes inverted along a first direction 9501.

FIG. 96 is a perspective view of one embodiment of folded lightguides9600 comprising the lightguide 9500 shown in FIG. 95. The couplinglightguides 8401 are folded 9602 by translating one end (the top endshown in FIG. 95) in the +z direction, +x, and −y, then the −z directionusing two relative position maintaining elements 2901 to form a stack7501 of coupling lightguides 8401. In a further embodiment, the stack7501 of coupling lightguides 8401 may be cut along cut lines 9601 toform two stacks 7501 of coupling lightguides 8401.

FIG. 97 is a top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 9700 comprisingthe film-based lightguide 107 having coupling lightguides 9702 withlight turning optical edges 8803, light collimating optical edges 8802,and light source overlay tab regions 8301 comprising alignment cavities8302 for registration of the light input surface of the stack ofcoupling lightguides with a light source. The lightguide 9700 alsocomprises a non-folding coupling lightguide 9703 with a lightcollimating optical edge 8802, and a light source overlay tab region8301 comprising an alignment cavity 8302 for registration of the lightinput surface of the non-folded coupling lightguide 9703 with a lightsource. The coupling lightguides 9702 further comprise curved regions9701 on the edge of the coupling lightguides 9702 to reduce thelikelihood of stress (such as resulting from torsional or lateralbending, for example) focusing at a sharp corner, thus reducing thelikelihood of film fracture. The coupling lightguides 9702 can be foldedin the +z direction and translated laterally in the +x direction 8402(shown folded in FIG. 98) such that they stack and align above oneanother.

FIG. 98 is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 9800comprising the light source 102 (shown in FIG. 99) and the lightguide9700 shown in FIG. 97 with the coupling lightguides 9702 folded andtranslated to form a stack 9803 of coupling lightguides 9702 alignedalong one edge of the lightguide region 106. Light 9802 from the lightsource 102 is collimated by the light collimating optical edges 8802 andhas an optical axis in the −y direction that is rotated by the lightturning optical edges 8803 of the stack 9803 of coupling lightguides9702 to the −x direction and the fold in the stack 9803 of couplinglightguides 9702 redirects the coupling lightguide orientation to the −ydirection such that the light has an optical axis exiting the couplinglightguides 9702 in the −y direction. The light 9802 then propagatesinto the lightguide region 106 of the film-based lightguide 107. Light8702 from the light source 102 has an optical axis in the −y directionand passes through the non-folded coupling lightguide 9703 and into thefilm-based lightguide 107 directly.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged side view near the light source 102 in the y-zplane of the light emitting device 9800 illustrated in FIG. 98. Analignment guide 9903 comprises an alignment arm 9801 that is acantilever spring with a curved front edge disposed above the lightsource 102. The alignment arm 9801 applies a force against the stack9803 of coupling lightguides 9702 to maintain the position of the lightinput surfaces 103 of the coupling lightguides 9702 near the lightoutput surface 9901 of the light source 102. In this embodiment, thealignment arm 9801 is inserted through the alignment cavities 8302 andthe coupling lightguides 9702 can be pulled in the +y direction anddownward (−z direction) such that the alignment cavities 8302 arepositioned over the opposite end of the alignment guide 9903 and thelight source 102 (the free end of the alignment arm 9801 can be liftedslightly during this movement if necessary). In this embodiment, thealignment cavities 8302 register and substantially maintain the positionof the light input surfaces 103 of the coupling lightguides 9702relative to the light output surface 9901 of the light source 102 in thex and y directions and the alignment arm 9801 on the alignment guide9903 maintains the relative position in the z direction by applyingforce in the −z direction to position the stack 9803 of couplinglightguides 9702 against each other and the light source base 9902(which could be a circuit board, for example). Light 9904 from the lightsource 102 exits the light output surface 9901 of the light source 102and propagates into the coupling lightguides 9702 through the lightinput surface 103.

FIG. 100 is an enlarged side view of a region near the light source 102in the y-z plane of one embodiment of a light emitting device 10000comprising an alignment guide 9903 with an alignment arm 9801 that is acantilever spring with a curved edge disposed above a light source 102and light collimating optical element 7102. The alignment arm 9801applies a force against a stack of coupling lightguides 9702 to maintainthe position of the light input surfaces 103 of the coupling lightguides9702 near the light output surface 10002 of the light collimatingoptical element 7102. In this embodiment, the alignment arm 9801 isinserted through the alignment cavities 8302 and the couplinglightguides 9702 can be pulled in the +y direction. In this embodiment,the alignment cavities are not sufficient in length to cover thealignment guide 9903, and the coupling lightguides 9702 remain held inplace in the z direction by the alignment arm 9801. In this embodiment,the alignment cavities 8302 register and substantially maintain theposition of the light input surfaces 103 of the coupling lightguides9702 relative to the light output surface 10002 of the light collimatingoptical element 7102 in the x and +y directions and the alignment arm9801 on the alignment guide 9903 maintains the relative position in thez direction by applying force in the −z direction to position the stack9803 of coupling lightguides 9702 against each other and the lightsource base 9902 (which could be a circuit board, for example). Frictionwith the stack of coupling lightguides 9702 and the light source base9902 and the alignment arm 9801 due to the force from the alignment arm9801 in the −z direction and the friction from the fit of the innerwalls of the alignment cavities 8302 and the light collimating opticalelement 7102 and/or the light source 102 help prevent the couplinglightguides 9702 from translating in the −y direction. In anotherembodiment, the light input surface 103 of the coupling lightguides 9702are optically bonded to the light output surface 10002 of the lightcollimating optical element 7102 (or they are optically bonded to thelight output surface of the light source 102 or a light turning opticalelement). Light 10003 from the light source 102 exits the light outputsurface 9901 of the light source 102 and propagates into the lightcollimating optical element 7102 where the light is collimated in thex-y plane and exits the light output surface 10002 of the lightcollimating optical element 7102 and enters the light input surface 103of the coupling lightguides 9702 where it propagates to the lightguideregion 106 (not shown).

FIG. 101 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingtransparent sign comprising a lightguide 107 disposed adjacent a window2201 of an automobile 10102 wherein light from an input coupler 101travels through an array of coupling lightguides 104 and into thelightguide 107 where it is extracted out of the lightguide in regionsforming light emitting indicia 1001. In this embodiment, the lightguideis disposed adjacent the inner side of the window 10101 and issubstantially transparent in the regions of the lightguide around thelight emitting indicia 1001 and is partially translucent or mostlytransparent in the regions corresponding to the light emitting indicia1001 when the light input coupler 101 is not emitting light. In oneembodiment, the flexibility of the film-based lightguide 107 facilitatesthe physical and optical coupling and conformity of the lightguide 107to the window 10101 to alleviate optical defects such as additionalreflections from additional air interfaces between the lightguide 107and the window 10101 and visible air bubbles.

FIG. 102 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingtransparent sign comprising a lightguide 107 disposed adjacent a trunkdoor 10201 of an automobile 10102 wherein light from an input coupler101 inside the trunk travels through an array of coupling lightguides104 and into the lightguide 107 where it travels from inside the trunkto the outside of the automobile 10102. The lightguide 107 is disposedadjacent to the trunk door 10201 and the light within the lightguide 107is extracted out of the lightguide 107 in regions forming light emittingindicia 1001. In this embodiment, the light input coupler 101 isdisposed within the trunk and the lightguide 107 passes through anopening between the trunk and the trunk door 10201. In this embodiment,the trunk door 10201 is visible through the lightguide 107 and theluminance contrast ratio between the light emitting indicia 1001 regionsand the trunk looking through the lightguide 107 is low such that theindicia are substantially not visible when the light input coupler 101is not emitting light. When the light input coupler 101 is emittinglight the luminance contrast ration is high such that the light emittingindicia 1001 are readily legible. In another embodiment, the lightemitting transparent size is disposed on one selected from the group ofa side door, side panel, front panel, hood, side of a trailer, top sign,and other region of an automobile, truck, airplane, or other craft orvehicle.

FIG. 103 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emittingsign 1000 comprising a light input coupler 101 and a lightguide region106. Light 1005 from the light source in the light input coupler 101propagates through the lightguide region 106 and exits the lightemitting sign 1000 due to light extraction features in a region formingthe light emitting indicia 1001.

FIG. 104 is an enlarged section of a light emitting region of the lightemitting sign of FIG. 103 comprising the light emitting indicia 1001comprising light extraction features 10401. The light traveling in thelightguide region 106 is extracted by the individual light extractionfeatures 10401 such that a collective perceived indicia 1001 isperceived (in this example, the letter “0” appears to be luminous andvisible). The light measurement region 10402 is the measurement regionused to determine the diffuse reflectance, haze, transmission, surfacearea percentage, average dimensional size, etc. for a region of thelight emitting region representing the indicia. For example, the diffusereflectance for a region of the indicia is measured at the region 10402or similar region within the boundary representing the indicia whereinthe measurement spot size is smaller than the bounded regionrepresenting the indicia and includes multiple light extraction featuresand the space between them in the region.

FIG. 105 is a block diagram of a method 10500 of producing a devicecomprising: optically coupling an array of coupling lightguides to alightguide region of a film, each coupling lightguide of the array ofcoupling lightguides having a bounding edge 10501; folding the array ofcoupling lightguides such that the bounding edges of the array ofcoupling lightguides form a stack defining a light input surface 10502;and forming a plurality of light extraction features on or within thefilm in a first region of the film representing a region of one or moreof an indicia, a graphic, and an image that is visible by lightextraction when illuminated by light propagating within the film in awaveguide condition, wherein the first region has a luminance less than50 cd/m2 when illuminated with 1000 lux of diffuse light when disposedon an opening of a light trap box comprising a plurality of walls and ablack, light absorbing material lining the plurality of walls 10503.

Looking initially to FIG. 106, exemplary first and second frame members10702 and 10704 are shown along with an exemplary film sheet 10600 to beilluminated. The film sheet 10600 has a major sheet area 10602 (shownoriented along a plane), and an adjacent minor sheet area 10604 fromwhich an array of elongated adjacent film strips 10606 extend (alsoshown oriented along a plane), with the film strips 10606 extendingalong a (first) direction at least substantially parallel to each otherto terminate in strip ends 10608. The first frame member 10702 includesa first member inner face 10706 with a protruding array of first memberteeth 10708, and the second frame member 10704 having a second memberinner face 10710 which also preferably bears a protruding array ofsecond member teeth 10712. The first member teeth 10708 are arrayed suchthat when the first and second frame members 10702 and 10704 are movedclosely adjacent each other (a process shown in FIGS. 107-109) to form aframe 10700 (with the completed frame 10700 being shown in FIGS. 110 and115), with the array of film strips 10606 situated between the first andsecond member inner faces 10706 and 10710 (and more particularly betweenthe first member teeth 10708 and the second member teeth 10712, if any),each film strip 10606 is each urged by a first member tooth 10708 and bythe second frame member 10704 (more particularly, by a second membertooth 10712, if any) into a second direction different from the firstdirection, with the urged film strips 10606 being adjacently situated inat least substantially parallel planes (as best seen in FIG. 115. Thus,by simply sandwiching the strips 1006 between the frame members 10702and 10704, the strips 10606 are aligned (see FIGS. 108-109) such thatthey can thereafter be urged in a direction aligned generally parallelto the first member inner face 10706 to stack the strips 10606 (or atleast the strip ends 10608) in abutting relationship. This step is shownin FIGS. 109 and 115 wherein the strips 10606 are urged by a covermember 10714 (to be discussed in greater detail below) into a directionoriented at least substantially perpendicular to the first direction.The strips 10606 then have their strip ends 10608 aligned to define anat least substantially continuous surface 10610, or the strip ends 10608can be cut (and possibly polished) to generate an at least substantiallycontinuous surface 10610, which can then be illuminated to transmitlight into the major sheet area 10602 (or conversely light collectedalong the major sheet area 10602 can be transmitted along the strips10606 to the collected strip ends 10610).

The first and second frame members 10702 and 10704 are preferablydesigned to complementarily interfit with each other when moved intoabutment about the film strips 10606 with the first and second memberinner faces 10706 and 10710 facing each other (as best seen in FIGS. 109and 115). The first and second frame members 10702 and 10704 may then bejoined together by use of adhesives or the like, or they might bemechanically joined by inserting a fastener through aligned fastenerapertures defined in the first and second frame members 10702 and 10704,and/or by providing complementary mating structures on the first andsecond frame members 10702 and 10704 (e.g., a barbed prong on the firstframe member 10702 which engages an aperture in the second frame member10704). When the frame members 10702 and 10704 are moved into abutmentabout the film strips 10606, they are also preferably configured to havean open top slot 10716 defined therebetween (see FIG. 109), wherein theredirected strips 10606 extend through this top slot 10716). A covermember 10714 can then usefully be provided to slidably fit between thefirst and second frame members 10702 and 10704 along the top slot 10716,such that sliding the cover member 10714 between the first and secondframe members 10702 and 10704 at least partially closes the top slot10716, and at the same time urges the film strips 10606 into an abuttingparallel stacked relationship below the cover member 10714 (as seen inFIGS. 109 and 115).

Similarly, the frame members 10702 and 10704 can bear structure which atleast partially closes about the bottom of the interfit frame members10702 and 10704, where the film strips 10606 enter the spacetherebetween. As best seen in FIG. 106, the first frame member 10702includes a first member floor 10718 extending outwardly from the firstmember inner face 10706. The second frame member 10704 has a secondmember lower edge 10720 below the array of second member teeth 10712,with the second member lower edge 10720 being situated above the firstmember floor 10718 when the frame members 10702 and 10704 are interfitso as to define a gap 10722 (see FIG. 115) into which the film strips10606 may extend. The second member lower edge 10720 is curved, havingdecreasing thickness as it extends downwardly, whereby film strips 10606bearing against this lower edge 10720 more easily bend about it as theyextend upwardly between the inner faces 10706 and 10710 of the framemembers 10702 and 10704, and thus between the first member teeth 10708and the second member teeth 10712 (if any).

Referring to FIG. 106, each of the first member teeth 10708 bear a firstmember tooth face 10724 which is aligned obliquely in relation to thefirst member inner face 10706. Similarly, each of the second memberteeth 10712 bear a second member tooth face 10726 aligned obliquely inrelation to the second member inner face 10710. As then shown in FIG.114, which shows the teeth 10708 and 10712 of the frame members 10702and 10704 when the frame members 10702 and 10704 are situated as in FIG.115, when the first and second frame members 10702 and 10704 positionedclosely adjacent each other with the first and second member inner faces10706 and 10710 facing each other in parallel relation, the first membertooth faces 10724 and second member tooth faces 10726 are aligned atleast substantially parallel to each other (with the tooth faces 10724and 10726 here being angled at approximately 15 degrees to each other,though other angles can be acceptable). Additionally, the array of firstmember teeth 10708 is vertically spaced from the array of second memberteeth 10712, with the array of first member teeth 10708 and the array ofsecond member teeth 10712 being situated at different heights above thesecond member floor (preferably with the array of second member teeth10712 being situated between the second member floor and the array offirst member teeth 10708). These arrangements cause the second memberteeth 10712 to promote the bending/redirection of the film strips 10606caused by the first member teeth 10708.

FIG. 110 schematically illustrates a display panel 11000—e.g., a liquidcrystal display, organic light-emitting diode display, or simply a signformed of paper, plastic, and/or other materials—situated in such amanner that it might be backlit by the major sheet area 10602 of thefilm sheet 10600. The frame members 10702 and 10704 and film sheet 10600are shown in a particularly preferred arrangement wherein the film sheet10600 is bent approximately 180 degrees, with the frame members 10702and 10704 and film strips 10606 being situated alongside and spaced fromthe plane of the major sheet area 10602. An arrangement of this natureis particularly useful because it effectively allows generation of an“edgeless” display: the display 11000, and the illuminating major sheetarea 10602, need not be bounded by a light source or other matter whichdefines a frame about the area of the display and sheet (save forperhaps at the bent side of the major sheet, which is also the side atwhich any leads to the display would likely extend). This in turn allowsa variety of space-saving and aesthetically attractive arrangements formatter such as televisions, computer screens, displays of portabledevices such as mobile telephones and personal digital assistants,signage, and the like.

It is also possible that once an illumination device such as that inFIG. 115 is formed, the strips 10606 could be edge-adhered or otherwiseheld in a bundle, and the frame members 10702 and 10704 may then beremoved. The invention therefore extends to “frameless” illuminationdevices which include a film sheet 10600 exemplified by that of FIG.115, and formed by processes similar to those depicted in FIGS. 106-109and 114-115, but wherein the frame members 10702 and 10704 are absent.In these situations, the frame members 10702 and 10704 essentiallyprovide a temporary fixture used during assembly of the illuminationdevice, but which are removed from the final illumination device.

In similar respects, the invention also extends to illumination devicesconsisting of frame members 10702 and 10704 alone, prior to addition ofthe film sheet 10600 and completed assembly of the devices.

Further advantages, features, and objects of the invention will beapparent from the remainder of this document in conjunction with theassociated drawings.

Expanding on the Summary above, film sheets used in the invention arepreferably clear, low-light-absorption films which exhibit minimallight-scattering. Polycarbonate film of 0.05 mm to 1 mm thickness is aninexpensive and commonly available film which is suitable for use in theinvention, but any film (e.g., polystyrene, polyester, acrylic orothers) might be usable as well depending on the application to whichthe invention is to be applied. To deter light loss (promote internalreflection/transmission), the film can be coated/cladded with materialhaving a lower refractive index than the film, preferably as low of arefractive index as economically possible while still yielding goodadhesion between the coating and the film. Any applied coating ispreferably as thin as possible to conserve size and costs, and tomaximize light intake at the strip stack (shown at 10610 in FIGS. 110and 115), if the strip ends 10608 are coated in addition to theremainder of the film sheet 10600. In this respect, a polycarbonate filmwith 0.5 mm thickness and a TC106 coating (Sun Process Corporation, Mt.Prospect, Ill., USA) of 0.01 mm thickness works well for mostapplications, with only 2% of the cross-section of the strip stack beingoccupied by the clad.

Strips 10606 (e.g., FIG. 106) can be cut in a film sheet 10600 in anysuitable manner. An exemplary manufacturing process involves feedingfilm from a roll through tension rollers; using a knurl roll to imprinta light extraction pattern; applying an array of blades that raise andlower into the film to cut the strips; and a cutoff mechanism which cutsthe film and its strips to a desired final length to generate a filmsheet as exemplified at 10600 in FIG. 1. Heating stations can assist insoftening the film to apply the light extraction pattern and to cut thefilm. Cutting is preferably performed using blades which aresufficiently sharp and smooth that they result in optically smooth cutedges (i.e., edges with minimal irregularities from which light lossmight occur). Blade coatings, e.g., ceramic or fluoropolymer coatings,can enhance blade smoothness.

Once the strips are aligned in a stack (e.g., as at 10610 in FIGS. 110and 115), the stack end 10610 is preferably cut and polished, orotherwise processed, to provide an optically smooth coupling surface towhich light can be supplied from a light source (or from which a sensoror the like can receive light) with minimal loss. As examples of suchprocessing, cutting and sanding/polishing can achieve such a surface, orflame or chemical polishing might be used with appropriate filmmaterials.

Frame members such as 10702 and 10704 in FIGS. 106-110 and 114-115 canbe made of any suitable materials, with plastic and metal materialsbeing readily molded or machined to construct the frame members. If thefilm used in an illumination device is electrochromic, or otherwise hastransmission, absorption, and/or reflection properties which aredesigned to vary with an applied voltage, current, frequency, or otherinput signal, it can be useful to form one or more of the frame membersof a conductive material through which the input signal can be applied.The interior surfaces of the frame members can usefully be coated with areflective material so that any light lost from the film strips to theinterior of the frame might be reflected therein, and possiblyredirected back into the strips.

The frame members and film sheets discussed above may have vastlydifferent configurations than those shown in the drawings. The shapes,sizes, and proportions of the frame members, in particular the numbers,shapes, sizes, and proportions of their teeth, are design parameterswhich depend on the desired size of the illumination device, thenumbers, sizes, and desired curvatures of the film strips, and similarfactors. For example, a film sheet 20 cm wide with a thickness of 0.01cm can be cut into fingers having 0.5 cm width to result in a stripstack (as at 10610 in FIGS. 110 and 115) having a light input (orreceiving) surface of roughly 0.4 cm by 0.5 cm in size. Films suitablefor use in the invention, and which are inexpensive and commonlyavailable (at least at the time this document was prepared), tend tohave superior light transmission where any strips are bent with radii ofcurvature which are at least approximately eight times the filmthickness. (Lesser radii are possible—for example, strips can be bentwith nearly negligible radii of curvature—but these tend to requiresurface coatings or similar measures at the bends to decrease lightloss, which can increase costs.) Thus, in general, the frame memberswill have a height of at least eight times the film thickness, plus theoverall strip stack thickness (assuming the stack is to extendwithin/between the frame members, as within the top slot 10716 in FIGS.109 and 115). Similarly, the depth of the combined frame members willgenerally be approximately the width of the top slot (which ispreferably the same as the maximum strip width), plus approximately 1.4times the bending radius.

Frame members and illumination devices can also vary from thosediscussed above and shown in the figures in details other than theirshapes, sizes, and proportions. To illustrate, FIGS. 111-113 illustratefirst and second frame members 10802 and 10804 wherein the first framemember 10802 urges the film strips 10906 into two arrays ofadjacently-situated strips situated in parallel planes, and a pair ofcover members 10814 then urge these arrays into a stack extending fromthe center of the lengths of the stack members. When the film sheet10900 is then bent similarly to that in FIG. 110, but at an angle ofapproximately 90 degrees rather than 180 degrees, the stacked strips10910 extend behind the major area 10902 of the film sheet 10900, ratherthan outwardly from one of its sides (as in FIGS. 110 and 115). This mayallow for a more compact and/or convenient arrangement, depending on howthe illumination device is to be used. Additionally, a film sheet maybear strips extending from more than one of its edges—e.g., fromopposing edges—and frames may be mounted about each of these edges sothat the major area of the sheet can be illuminated from more than oneedge. Such an arrangement is particularly preferred where the majorsheet area is large, since illumination from multiple edges can providegreater illumination of the major sheet area. In similar respects, twoor more frames can be mounted on a single edge of a film sheet toprovide two or more strip stacks for input of light to, or output oflight from, the major sheet area.

The teeth used on the frame members need not take the forms of thoseillustrated in the drawings (e.g., FIGS. 106 and 114), which have aroughly sawtooth profile, with a thickness that increases slightly aseach tooth extends from its tip to its base in the vertical direction.Examples of other teeth configurations include tetrahedra, rod-likeforms (similar to an array of comb teeth, but wherein the teeth might beare angled with respect to their frame members), and flanges having aC-shaped or J-shaped curve. Further, the teeth might be situated atdifferent locations along the heights of the frame members, as by beinglocated at the first member top edge 10728 in FIG. 106 (though in thiscase any stack of parallel abutting film strips would rest atop thefirst frame member 10702, rather than in a slot 10716 defined betweenthe first and second slot members 10702 and 10704, as in FIGS. 109 and115). In such situations, the first member teeth 10708 might be definedby forming notches/depressions in the first member top edge 10728 and/orthe first member inner face 10706, such that the first member teeth10708 are left to protrude both upwardly and outwardly from the firstmember inner face 10706. Similar adaptations could be made whenproviding the second member teeth on the second frame member. Dependingon the configuration and location of the teeth, the width of the filmstrips, and on the degree of bending desired for the strips, the facesof the teeth need not be near parallel (as in FIG. 114, which shows thetooth faces 10724 and 10726 angled at approximately 15 degrees to eachother), and in fact could be more perpendicular than parallel. However,for frame members and strips configured and proportioned as in theaccompanying drawings, tooth faces which are parallel (or nearly so) arepreferred.

As noted previously, the second member teeth help promote thebending/redirection of the film strips caused by the first teeth. Thisis not necessary, and the second member teeth may be omitted, or mightsimply be replaced by a single continuous ridge or other member ratherthan being provided as a series of independent teeth.

Further, while the frame members are depicted in the Figures as havinglinear arrays of teeth which redirect a planar array of film strips intoa stacked array of strips, the arrayed teeth need not necessarily belinear, nor need the film strips input to the teeth be necessarilyarrayed in a plane. In some applications (e.g., architectural lighting),curved film sheets and/or strip stacks, or sheets/stacks having othercomplex shapes, are sometimes desired. Thus, the frames can beconstructed in such a manner that they might receive a curved/nonplanararray of strips. In this respect, the frame members illustrated in theaccompanying drawings might be formed of a flexible material such assilicone whereby a final illumination device (as shown in FIGS. 110 and113) might be bent to at least partially conform to a curved surface.

The construction of illumination devices such as those shown in FIGS.110 and 113 also need not be done solely by hand, and may be done in anautomated or semi-automated manner. To illustrate, the frame members10702 and 10704 of FIGS. 106-110 and 114-115 could be defined asportions of a machine wherein a sheet is fed below the second framemember 10704 (with an edge then being cut into film strips, if it is notalready so cut), and the frame members 10702 and 10704 are then moved bya suitable mechanism in the manner shown in FIGS. 106-110 and 114-115 toconstruct the illumination device of FIG. 110. Stated differently, theinvention also encompasses frame members which are provided as part of afurther device which assists in the assembly of a final illuminationdevice.

Frame members can also include other features. As one example, a framemember may include ports through which gels having a low refractiveindex, or other materials, may be injected to at least partiallysurround the film strips within the frame and better deter light lossfrom the strips. As another example, the frame members can be adaptedsuch that the stacked strips do not extend therefrom, and ratherterminate within the frame members at a location at which an LED orother light source (or light sensing/receiving device) is provided. Inother words, the light source (or light receiver) can be provided withinthe frame, as well as any power supplies or other components needed forits operation. The frame members may include features allowing them tobe quickly and easily attached and detached to each other, and/or tosurrounding structure, and about a film sheet, whereby film sheets maybe more easily removed from the frame members and replaced with otherdesired film sheets (e.g., where a film sheet defining a sign bearingone message is to be replaced by a sign bearing another message).Alternatively, the frame members may bear structure for quick and easyattachment to surrounding structure, whereby an illumination device suchas that in FIG. 110 may be readily removed and replaced in its entiretyby another illumination device.

One issue that can be encountered with the frame members discussed aboveis that if the film sheet is not held with respect to the first framemember (and/or the second frame member) as the aforementioned assemblysteps are followed, the film sheet and its strips can displace, makingit more difficult to complete the assembly of the illumination device.Features can be added to one or more of the frame members to help detersuch displacement. One example is illustrated in FIG. 111, wherein thesecond frame member 10804 bears a central strip aperture 10830 along itslength, and situated below the second member teeth (not shown). As shownin FIGS. 111-113, a central film strip 10912 extending from the filmsheet 10900 may be bent to extend through this central strip aperture10830, thereby at least partially restraining the film strips 10906 andfilm sheet 10900 with respect to the second frame member 10804 as it ismoved toward the first frame member 10804 to bend the strips 10906 intoarrays of parallel spaced strips (as in FIG. 112). After theillumination device has been fully assembled (FIG. 113), the end of thecentral film strip 10912 protruding from the second frame member 10804may be cut off or otherwise removed.

As another example, one or more of the frame members—most preferably thefirst frame member—might include pegs or other protruding structure(e.g., on the first member floor), and the film sheet may then bearapertures, or its edges may bear notches, which receive the protrudingstructure(s). As a result, the film sheet can be placed in the firstframe member with the protruding structure(s) deterring slipping of thefilm sheet as the second frame member is urged toward the first framemember.

Protruding structure(s), and complementary receiving structures such asaperture(s)/slot(s), are not the only structures that can be used toaccomplish such a restraining arrangement, and a variety of otherarrangements could alternatively or additionally be used. Referring toFIG. 106 to illustrate, tacky/adhesive surfaces, or elastomeric or otherhigh-friction surfaces, can be situated on the frame members 10702 and10704 (e.g., along the first member floor 10718 and/or the second memberlower edge 10720) to deter slippage of the film sheet as the framemembers 10702 and 10704 are sandwiched about the strips. As anotherexample, tongues/clips could extend outwardly from the first membersidewalls 10730 to extend closely adjacent the first member floor 10718,so that the outermost film strips can be slid between the tongues/clipsand the first member floor 10718 to restrain the sheet with respect tothe first frame member 10702.

Sheet restraining arrangements can also or alternatively be used whereinthe arrangements do not require additional structure on the framemembers, and/or modification of the film sheet. To illustrate, the framemember(s) might bear apertures along the first member floor and/or alongthe second member lower edge, with these apertures being temporarilyconnected to a vacuum supply while the film strips are being urged bythe frame members into a stacked array. The vacuum supply may thereafterbe removed after the illumination device is sufficiently complete.

It should be understood that various terms used throughout this documentto refer to orientation and position—e.g., “top” (as in “top slot”),“lower” (as in “second member lower edge”), “vertically,” and thelike—are relative terms rather than absolute ones. In other words, itshould be understood (for example) that the top slot being referred tomay in fact be located at the bottom of the device depending on theoverall orientation of the device. Thus, such terms should be regardedas words of convenience, rather than limiting terms.

To provide a more specific illustration of the invention, following is adescription of an exemplary illumination device resembling that of FIG.110, used to illuminate an LCD television display having a 20-inch (50cm) diagonal dimension. Clear polycarbonate film having 0.01 inch (0.025cm) thickness, provided on a roll 48 inches (122 cm) wide, was cut to 16by 40 inch (41 by 102 cm) subsections. An array of blades cut strips inthe film 0.733 inches (1.86 cm) wide by 20 inches (50 cm) long. Framemembers (and a cap member) having a configuration resembling that inFIGS. 106-109 and 114-115 were used to define a completed illuminationdevice as depicted in FIG. 115, and glue was used to bond the framemembers together (and to the stacked strip ends), and to seal theinterior of the frame from dust. The stacked strip ends were cut so thattheir tips extended along a common plane, and were then sanded with 100and 320 grit sandpaper, followed by using a micro-mesh sanding kit. Thisresulted in an optically smooth input surface measuring approximately0.733 inches (1.86 cm) by 0.2 inches (0.51 cm). Light was coupled intothe input surface using a PT-120 PhlatLight (Luminus Devices, Billerica,Mass., USA). The major area of the film sheet was placed behind the LCDdisplay, and the film sheet was bent from the state shown in FIG. 115 tothat shown in FIG. 110 to situate the light source, heatsinks, fans,optics and electronics behind major area of the film sheet. The radiusof curvature in the bend was 0.25 inches (0.64 cm), which isapproximately 25 times the thickness of the film, resulting innegligible light leakage at the bend. The overall thickness/depth of theLCD display and the illumination device was approximately 1.25 inches(3.2 cm), primarily owing to the size of the heatsinks. The illuminationdevice provided illumination to the display which appeared to be atleast equivalent in quality to that provided by common prior methods,e.g., backlighting or frontlighting by Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamps(CCFL) and/or Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).

The invention is not intended to be limited to the preferred versions ofthe invention described above, but rather is intended to be limited onlyby the claims set out below. Thus, the invention encompasses alldifferent versions that fall literally or equivalently within the scopeof these claims.

Examples

Certain embodiments are illustrated in the following example(s). Thefollowing examples are given for the purpose of illustration, but notfor limiting the scope or spirit of the invention.

In one embodiment, coupling lightguides are formed by cutting strips atone or more ends of a film which forms coupling lightguides (strips) anda lightguide region (remainder of the film). On the free end of thestrips, the strips are bundled together into an arrangement much thickerthan the thickness of the film itself. On the other end, they remainphysically and optically attached and aligned to the larger filmlightguide. The film cutting is achieved by stamping, laser-cutting,mechanical cutting, water-jet cutting, local melting or other filmprocessing methods. Preferably the cut results in an optically smoothsurface to promote total internal reflection of the light to improvelight guiding through the length of the strips. A light source iscoupled to the bundled strips. The strips are arranged so that lightpropagates through them via total internal reflection and is transferredinto the film lightguide portion. The bundled strips form a light inputedge having a thickness much greater than the film lightguide region.The light input edge of the bundled strips defines a light input surfaceto facilitate more efficient transfer of light from the light sourceinto the lightguide, as compared to conventional methods that couple tothe edge or top of the film. The strips can be melted or mechanicallyforced together at the input to improve coupling efficiency. If thebundle is square shaped, the length of one of its sides I, is given byI˜√(w×t) where w is the total width of the lightguide input edge and tis the thickness of the film. For example, a 0.1 mm thick film with 1 medge would give a square input bundle with dimensions of 1 cm×1 cm.Considering these dimensions, the bundle is much easier to couple lightinto compared to coupling along the length of the film when usingtypical light sources (e.g. incandescent, fluorescent; metal halide,xenon and LED sources). The improvement in coupling efficiency and costis particularly pronounced at film thicknesses below 0.25 mm, becausethat thickness is approximately the size of many LED and laser diodechips. Therefore, it would be difficult and/or expensive to manufacturemicro-optics to efficiently couple light into the film edge from an LEDchip because of the étendue and manufacturing tolerance limitations.Also, it should be noted that the folds in the slots are not creases butrather have some radius of curvature to allow effective light transfer.Typically the fold radius of curvature will be at least ten times thethickness of the film.

An example of one embodiment that can be brought to practice is givenhere. The assembly starts with 0.25 mm thick polycarbonate film that is40 cm wide and 100 cm long. A cladding layer of a lower refractive indexmaterial of approximately 0.01 mm thickness is disposed on the top andbottom surface of the film. The cladding layer can be added by coatingor co-extruding a material with lower refractive index onto the filmcore. One edge of the film is mechanically cut into 40 strips of 1 cmwidth using a sharp cutting tool such as a razor blade. The edges of theslots are then exposed to a flame to improve the smoothness for opticaltransfer. The slots are combined into a bundle of approximately 1 cm×1cm cross-section. To the end of the bundle a number of different typesof light sources can be coupled (e.g. xenon, metal halide, incandescent,LED or Laser). Light propagates through the bundle into the film and outof the image area. Light may be extracted from the film lightguide bylaser etching into the film, which adds a surface roughness that resultsin frustrated total internal reflectance. Multiple layers of film can becombined to make multi-color or dynamic signs.

An example of one embodiment that has been brought to practice isdescribed here. The apparatus began with a 381 micron thickpolycarbonate film which was 457 mm wide and 762 mm long. The 457 mmedge of the film is cut into 6.35 mm wide strips using an array of razorblades. These strips are grouped into three 152.4 mm wide sets ofstrips, which are further split into two equal sets that were foldedtowards each other and stacked separately into 4.19 mm by 6.35 mmstacks. Each of the three pairs of stacks was then combined together inthe center in the method to create a combined and singular input stackof 8.38 mm by 6.35 mm size. An LED module, MCE LED module from CreeInc., is coupled into each of the three input stacks. Light emitted fromthe LED enters the film stack with an even input, and a portion of thislight remains within each of the 15 mil strips via total internalreflections while propagating through the strip. The light continues topropagate down each strip as they break apart in their separateconfigurations, before entering the larger lightguide. Furthermore, afinned aluminum heat sink was placed down the length of each of thethree coupling apparatuses to dissipate heat from the LED. This assemblyshows a compact design that can be aligned in a linear array, to createuniform light. Light traveling within the film exits in a light emittingregion representing indicia due to light extraction from individuallight extraction features that collectively arrange to form a lightemitting indicia, graphic, icon, or image.

A method to manufacture one embodiment of a backlight comprising threefilm-based lightguides is as follows. Three layers of thin filmlightguides (<250 microns) are laminated to each other with a layer oflower refractive index material between them (e.g. methyl-based siliconePSA). Then, an angled beam of light, ions or mechanical substance (i.e.particles and/or fluid) patterns lines or spots into the film. Ifnecessary, a photosensitive material should be layered on each materialbeforehand. The angle of the beam is such that the extraction featureson the layers have the proper offset. The angle of the beam is dictatedby the lightguide thickness and the width of the pixels and is given byθ=tan⁻¹(t/w), where θ is the relative angle of light to the plane of thelightguide, t is the lightguide and cladding thickness and w is thewidth of the pixels. Ideally the extraction features direct the lightprimarily in a direction toward the intended pixel to minimizecross-talk.

In one embodiment a device comprises a light transmitting film having alightguide region with opposing faces with a thickness of less thanabout 0.5 millimeters therebetween; a first region within the lightguideregion of the film representing a region of an indicia, graphic, orimage that is visible by light extraction when illuminated by lightpropagating within the film in a waveguide condition; wherein: the firstregion comprises light extraction features with average dimensions lessthan 500 microns that redirect a portion of light traveling within thefilm in a waveguide condition out of a face of the film in the firstregion; and the first region has a luminance less than 50 cd/m² whenilluminated with 1000 lux of diffuse light when disposed on the openingof a light trap box comprising a black, light absorbing material liningthe walls. In another embodiment, the device is a film-based lightguide.In embodiment, the device is a component of a light emitting sign. Inone embodiment, the percentage of the surface area of the film occupiedby the light extraction features in the first region is less than 20% orless than 10%. In another embodiment, the device further comprises anarray of coupling lightguides extending from the lightguide region ofthe film; wherein: the coupling lightguides comprise bounding edges atthe ends of the coupling lightguides; and the coupling lightguides arefolded such that the bounding edges are stacked. In one embodiment, thedevice further comprises a light source disposed to emit light thatpropagates into the stacked bounding edges and propagates within thecoupling lightguides to the lightguide region of the film with lightfrom each coupling lightguide combining and totally internallyreflecting within the lightguide region of the film. In anotherembodiment, the first region has a luminance less than: 10 cd/m² whenilluminated with 300 lux of diffuse light; 10 cd/m² when illuminatedwith 500 lux of diffuse light; or 50 cd/m² when illuminated with 1000lux of diffuse light when disposed on the opening of a light trap boxcomprising a black, light absorbing material lining the walls. Inanother embodiment, the light extraction features have averagedimensions less than 300 microns. In another embodiment, the lightextraction features comprise a light scattering material. In a furtherembodiment, the average largest dimensional size or average minimumdimensional size of the light extraction features in the first region inthe plane parallel to the surface of the film at the light extractionfeatures or the light emitting region of the film is less than 0.5millimeters. In another embodiment, the light extraction features have afull angular width at half maximum intensity of transmitted lightgreater than 40 degrees when measured with laser light incident normalto the face of the film. In another embodiment, the first region hasluminous transmittance greater than 70% or a haze less than 20% measuredaccording to ASTM D1003 version 07e1.

In one embodiment, a device comprises a film-based lightguide comprisinga first region representing a region of an indicia, graphic, image orpattern that is visible by light extraction when illuminated by lightpropagating within the film in a waveguide condition; couplinglightguides extending from the lightguide region and continuous with thelightguide region of the film; the coupling lightguides folded andarranged with their ends stacked; and light extraction features disposedwithin the first region; wherein the average largest dimensional size ofthe light extraction features in the first region in the plane parallelto surface or light emitting region of the film is less than 0.5millimeters.

In one embodiment, a method of producing a device comprises: opticallycoupling an array of coupling lightguides to a lightguide region of afilm, each coupling lightguide of the array of coupling lightguideshaving a bounding edge; folding the array of coupling lightguides suchthat the bounding edges of the array of coupling lightguides form astack defining a light input surface; and forming a plurality of lightextraction features on or within the film in a first region of the filmrepresenting a region of one or more of an indicia, a graphic, and animage that is visible by light extraction when illuminated by lightpropagating within the film in a waveguide condition, wherein the firstregion has a luminance less than 50 cd/m2 when illuminated with 1000 luxof diffuse light when disposed on an opening of a light trap boxcomprising a plurality of walls and a black, light absorbing materiallining the plurality of walls. In one embodiment, forming a plurality oflight extraction features comprises disposing the plurality of lightextraction features within the first region having an average lateraldimension less than 500 microns in a direction parallel to an opticalaxis of the light within the film at the plurality of light extractionfeatures when illuminated by light traveling within the array ofcoupling lightguides. In another embodiment, forming a plurality oflight extraction features comprises occupying less than 10% of a surfacearea of the lightguide in the first region by the plurality of lightextraction features. In one embodiment, optically coupling an array ofcoupling lightguides to a lightguide region of a film comprises formingthe array of coupling lightguides extending from the lightguide regionsuch that the array of coupling lightguides remains continuous with thelightguide region.

Exemplary embodiments of light emitting devices and methods for makingor producing the same are described above in detail. The devices,components, and methods are not limited to the specific embodimentsdescribed herein, but rather, the devices, components of the devicesand/or steps of the methods may be utilized independently and separatelyfrom other devices, components and/or steps described herein. Further,the described devices, components and/or the described methods steps canalso be defined in, or used in combination with, other devices and/ormethods, and are not limited to practice with only the devices andmethods as described herein.

While the disclosure includes various specific embodiments, thoseskilled in the art will recognize that the embodiments can be practicedwith modification within the spirit and scope of the disclosure and theclaims.

EQUIVALENTS

Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain usingno more than routine experimentation, numerous equivalents to thespecific procedures described herein. Such equivalents are considered tobe within the scope of the invention. Various substitutions,alterations, and modifications may be made to the invention withoutdeparting from the spirit and scope of the invention. Other aspects,advantages, and modifications are within the scope of the invention.This application is intended to cover any adaptations or variations ofthe specific embodiments discussed herein. Therefore, it is intendedthat this disclosure be limited only by the claims and the equivalentsthereof.

Unless otherwise indicated, all numbers expressing feature sizes,amounts, and physical properties used in the specification and claimsare to be understood as being modified by the term “about”. Accordingly,unless indicated to the contrary, the numerical parameters set forth inthe foregoing specification and attached claims are approximations thatcan vary depending upon the desired properties sought to be obtained bythose skilled in the art utilizing the teachings disclosed herein.Unless indicated to the contrary, all tests and properties are measuredat an ambient temperature of 25 degrees Celsius or the environmentaltemperature within or near the device when powered on (when indicated)under constant ambient room temperature of 25 degrees Celsius.

What is claimed is:
 1. A light emitting device comprising: a componenthaving a frame; a light source thermally coupled to the component; and alightguide formed from a film, the lightguide comprising an array ofstrips extending from an area of the film, the array of strips arepositioned along an edge of the component, each strip of the array ofstrips is folded in a fold region such that ends of the strips arestacked and positioned to receive light from the light source, whereinthe film is at least partially restrained relative to the component andthe component is a thermal transfer element that conducts heats from thelight source.
 2. The light emitting device of claim 1 wherein thecomponent is a relative position maintaining element that maintains arelative position of each strip of the array of strips in the foldregion.
 3. The light emitting device of claim 2 wherein the componentcomprises a first thickness at an edge, each strip has a secondthickness, and a ratio of the first thickness to the second thickness isgreater than
 2. 4. The light emitting device of claim 2 wherein thecomponent is a composite comprising a polymer material and has a thermalconductivity greater than 5 watts per meter-kelvin.
 5. The lightemitting device of claim 1 wherein the component comprises aluminum. 6.The light emitting device of claim 1 wherein the component has a thermalconductivity greater than 5 watts per meter-kelvin.
 7. The lightemitting device of claim 1 wherein the light from the light sourcepropagates by total internal reflection through the array of strips,propagates into the area of the film, and is emitted from a lightemitting surface in the area of the film; and the component has anaverage thickness less than 5 millimeters in a direction perpendicularto the light emitting surface.
 8. The light emitting device of claim 1wherein the light source is at least one light emitting diode.
 9. Thelight emitting device of claim 1 wherein the component is adhered to thefilm using an adhesive.
 10. The light emitting device of claim 1 whereinthe light source comprises at least two light emitting diodes thermallycoupled to the component.
 11. The light emitting device of claim 1wherein the component is an elongated component with a dimension in afirst direction at least twice as long as a dimension in either mutuallyorthogonal directions orthogonal to the first direction.
 12. A lightemitting device comprising: a component elongated with a dimension in afirst direction at least twice as long as a dimension in either mutuallyorthogonal directions orthogonal to the first direction; a lightguideformed from a film, the lightguide comprising an array of stripsextending from an area of the film, the array of strips is positionedalong an edge of the component, each strip of the array of strips isfolded in a fold region, and a portion of the lightguide is attached tothe component or restrained by the component; and a light sourcethermally coupled to the component and positioned to emit light thatpropagates into ends of the array of strips, wherein the component is athermal transfer element that conducts heat from the light source. 13.The light emitting device of claim 12 wherein the component comprisesaluminum.
 14. The light emitting device of claim 12 wherein thecomponent is a relative position maintaining element that maintains arelative position of each strip of the array of strips in the foldregion.
 15. The light emitting device of claim 14 wherein the componenthas a thermal conductivity greater than 5 watts per meter-kelvin. 16.The light emitting device of claim 15 wherein the light source comprisesat least two light emitting diodes thermally coupled to the component.17. A light emitting device comprising: a lightguide comprising a lineararray of strips extending from an area of a film; a component positionedadjacent the linear array of strips, a portion of the lightguide isattached to the component or restrained by the component, and the lineararray of strips are folded in a fold region and aligned over each otherto form a folded array of strips; and a light emitting diode coupled tothe component and positioned to emit light into ends of the folded arrayof strips, wherein the component is a thermal transfer element thatconducts heats from the light emitting diode.
 18. The light emittingdevice of claim 17 wherein the component has a thermal conductivitygreater than 5 watts per meter-kelvin.
 19. The light emitting device ofclaim 17 wherein the component is a relative position maintainingelement that maintains the relative position of the linear array ofstrips in the fold region.
 20. The light emitting device of claim 19wherein the relative position maintaining element is a compositecomprising a polymer material and has a thermal conductivity greaterthan 5 watts per meter-kelvin.